<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"
	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"
	>

<channel>
	<title>Carrier &#8211; UseManuals</title>
	<atom:link href="http://usemanuals.com/carrier/feed/" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" />
	<link>https://usemanuals.com</link>
	<description>Owner&#039;s manuals for all sorts of products</description>
	<lastBuildDate>Tue, 11 Jul 2023 09:19:40 +0000</lastBuildDate>
	<language>en-US</language>
	<sy:updatePeriod>
	hourly	</sy:updatePeriod>
	<sy:updateFrequency>
	1	</sy:updateFrequency>
	<generator>https://wordpress.org/?v=6.7.2</generator>

<image>
	<url>https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/02/favicon-32x32-2.png</url>
	<title>Carrier &#8211; UseManuals</title>
	<link>https://usemanuals.com</link>
	<width>32</width>
	<height>32</height>
</image> 
	<item>
		<title>Carrier Infinity Control Thermostat SYSTXCCUID01-V Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/carrier/systxccuid01-v-infinity-control-thermostat/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Tue, 22 Nov 2022 16:25:01 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Carrier]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=2518</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[Carrier SYSTXCCUID01-V Infinity Control Thermostat Manual Carrier SYSTXCCUID01-V Infinity Control Thermostat Manual  Installation Instructions NOTE: Read the entire instruction manual before starting the installation. US Patents: Carrierr U.S. Pat No. 7,243,004, Carrierr U.S. Pat No. 7,775,452 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, maintenance, or use can cause explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause death, personal injury or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory–authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product. Refer to the individual instructions packaged with the kits or accessories when installing. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses, protective clothing, and work gloves. Have a fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings and cautions included in literature and attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and the current edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70. In Canada, refer to the current editions of the Canadian Electrical Code CSA C22.1. Recognize safety information. When you see this symbol on the unit and in instructions or manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, andCAUTION. These words are used with the safety–alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards, which will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies hazards, which could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices, which may result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions that will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation. INTRODUCTION The Infinity System consists of several intelligent communicating components which include the Infinity Control (or User Interface), variable speed furnace or FE fan coil, 2–stage AC or HP and Infinity Packaged Products, which continually communicate with each other via a four-wire connection called the ABCD bus. Commands, operating conditions, and other data are passed continually between components over the ABCD bus. The result is a new level of comfort, versatility, and simplicity. All Infinity furnaces or fan coils are variable–speed and multi-stage for maximum flexibility, efficiency, and comfort. They support controlled ventilation, humidification, dehumidification, and air quality control. Either an Infinity (communicating), or a standard 24VAC controlled outdoor unit may be used. When using conventional outdoor units, the Infinity furnace or fan coil provides the 24-volt signals needed to control them. Also, the Infinity Network Interface Module (P/N SYSTXCCNIM01) allows the connection of a Carrier HRV or ERV without the need for a separate wall control. All system components are controlled through the wall-mounted Infinity Control, which replaces the conventional thermostat and provides the homeowner with a single wall control for all features of the system. INSTALLATION, START-UP OVERVIEW This instruction covers the installation of the Infinity Control only. Physical installation instructions for the indoor and outdoor equipment and accessories are provided with each unit. Setup, commissioning, operation, and troubleshooting of the Infinity System are covered only in this installation instruction. It is the guide to connecting the system components and commissioning the system once all physical components are installed. The special screen prompts and start-up capabilities are provided in the Infinity System to simplify and automate the initial commissioning of the system. Install Infinity Control according to this instruction. Install indoor unit, outdoor unit, and accessories according to their instructions. Wire complete system according to this instruction. Setup, commission, and operating system according to this instruction to assure a smooth and trouble-free startup. INSTALLATION Check Equipment and Job Site Inspect equipment. File claim with shipping company prior to installation if shipment is damaged or incomplete. Infinity Control Location and Wiring Considerations WARNING ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. Disconnect power before routing control wiring. All wiring must comply with national, local, and state codes. Infinity Control Location The Infinity Control User Interface is the command center for the Infinity System. It should be located where it is easily accessible and visible to the adult homeowner or end-user. For accurate temperature measurement, the following guidelines should be followed: The Infinity Control and Room Sensors should be mounted: Approximately 5–ft (1.5 m) from the floor. Close to or in a frequently used room, preferably on an inside partitioning wall. On a section of wall without pipes or ductwork. The Infinity Control and Room Sensors should NOT be mounted: Close to a window, on an outside wall, or next to a door leading to the outside. Exposed to direct light or heat from a lamp, sun, fireplace, or other temperature–radiating objects which could cause a false reading. Close to or in direct airflow from supply registers. In areas with poor air circulation, such as behind a door or in an alcove. Remote Room Sensor Option A Remote Room Sensor can be used with the Infinity Control to take the place of the User Interface internal temperature sensor. This allows the Infinity Control to be mounted in areas with less than optimal airflow (such as near an exterior door, window, or in a closet). The remote sensor can be wired to the terminal block connectors labeled S1 and S2 at the User Interface backplate, or the ZS1 and ZS1C connection at the Damper Control Module. In either case, the Infinity Control will automatically detect the Remote Room Sensor and ignore its internal temperature sensor. Typically, one remote sensor is used but, multiple sensors may be used and averaged in some applications. Averaging requires a special series-parallel wiring method with a specific number of sensors. See Fig. 2. It is also important to note the humidity sensor cannot be remotely located, so do not locate the Infinity Control in an area where humidity sensing may not be accurate. Wiring Considerations Ordinary thermostat wire is recommended. Use 22 AWG or larger for normal wiring applications. Continuous wire lengths over 100 ft. should use 20 AWG or larger. NOTE: ABCD bus wiring only requires a four-wire connection; however, it is good practice to run a thermostat cable having more than four wires in the event of a damaged or broken wire during installation. Each communicating device in the Infinity System has a four-pin connector labeled ABCD. It is recommended that the following color code be used when wiring each device: A — Green = Data A B — Yellow = Data B C — White = 24VAC (Com) D — Red = 24VAC (Hot) It is not mandatory that the above color code be used, but each ABCD connector in the system MUST be wired consistently. Shielded Wire If the thermostat wiring will be located near or in parallel with high voltage wiring, cable TV or Ethernet wiring, then shielded thermostat wire can be used to reduce or eliminate potential interference. The shield wire should be connected to the C terminal, or ground, at the indoor unit. The shield wire should NOT be connected to any terminal at the user interface. Connecting the shield to ground at both ends can cause current loops in the shield, reducing shield effectiveness. Mounting Infinity Control First become familiar with all plastic assembly pieces shown in Figures 3 through 10. The User Interface will snap together with the backplate. A backplate is supplied (see Fig. 4 and 5). Attach backplate using only a small hole in the wall allowing a four wire connection to pass through. Mount the assembly to the backplate. NOTE: Once Infinity Control is secured to wall with the backplate assembly (snapped together), care must be taken not to bend or break the interlocking tabs when removing. Decorative Backplate Sold separately, a thin decorative backplate (see Fig. 6 and 9) is available to hide any marks/screw holes left from the previous thermostat. This decorative backplate (or beauty ring) is used by snapping it onto the back of the mounting plate before securing the plate to the wall. WARNING ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury, death or equipment damage. Before installing, modifying, or servicing system, the main electrical disconnect switch must be in the OFF position. There may be more than 1 disconnect switch. Lockout and tag switch with a suitable warning label. Turn off all power to equipment. If an existing User Interface or control is being replaced: a. Remove existing control from wall. b. Disconnect wires from existing control. c. Discard or recycle old control. NOTE: Mercury is a hazardous waste, if existing control contains any mercury, it MUST be disposed of properly. The User Interface does not contain mercury. Select Infinity Control mounting plastic (recess mount or surface mount and decorative backplate if desired). Route wires through large hole in mounting plastic. Level rear plastic against wall (for aesthetic value only — Infinity Control need not be level to operate properly) and mark wall through two mounting holes. Drill two 3/16–in (4.8 mm) mounting holes in wall where marked. Secure mounting plastic to wall using two screws and anchors provided. Adjust length and routing of each wire to reach each wire entry on the connector backplate. Strip 1/4–in (6.4 mm) of insulation from each wire. Match and connect thermostat wires to proper terminals on User Interface backplate. See wiring diagram Fig. 11, 12, and 13. A — Green = Data A B — Yellow = Data B C — White = 24VAC (Com) D — Red = 24VAC (Hot) NOTE: It is not mandatory that the above color code be used, but each ABCD connection in the system MUST be wired consistently. A separate ABCD Connector comes inside packaging and should be used when connecting to furnace (or fan coil). Ensure connector is inserted properly into circuit board. (See Fig. 14.) CAUTION ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation. Improper wiring of the ABCD connector will cause the Infinity System to operate improperly. Check to make sure all wiring is correct before proceeding with installation or turning on power. 9. Push any excess wire into the wall. Seal hole in wall to prevent any air leaks. Leaks can affect operation. 10. Attach Infinity Control to the mounting plastic by lining up the plastic guides on the back of the control with the opening on the mounting plastic and push on. 11. Perform installation of all other system equipment (i.e. dampers, humidifier, ventilator, UV lights, etc.). 12. Turn on power to equipment. See wiring diagram, Fig. 11, which includes an indoor communicating furnace or FE fan coil, with a communicating outdoor unit. No additional OAT (outdoor air temperature) sensor is required because the Infinity Control will use the temperature sensor inside the outdoor unit. See wiring diagram, Fig. 12, for connecting an indoor communicating furnace or FE fan coil with a 1–stage air conditioning unit (non–communicating outdoor). An Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT) sensor may be installed (but is not required) at the indoor furnace or fan coil OAT terminals. When OAT sensor is applied, the Infinity System will provide enhanced system features and benefits. See wiring diagram, Fig. 13, for connecting an FE fan coil with a 1–stage heat pump (non–communicating outdoor unit). When OAT is applied, the Infinity System will provide enhanced system features and benefits. In a hybrid heat installation with a non–communicating heat pump, an OAT sensor must be installed, or the heat pump with not run. NOTE: For other applications not listed, refer to the Network Interface Module (NIM) Installation Instructions. Humidifier Connection A 24VAC bypass or fan powered humidifier may be installed. NOTE: Do Not Use a traditional humidistat to control humidifier operation. If a humidifier is installed, let the Infinity Control operate humidifier. Bypass Humidifiers A bypass humidifier should be wired directly to the furnace or fan coil HUM and 24VAC COM terminals. The Infinity Control will automatically energize the HUM output during a call for humidification. Fan Powered Humidifiers Most fan-powered humidifiers produce internal 24VAC in order to energize upon a switch or contact closure. For this application, a 24VAC N.O. Isolation Relay (DPST) MUST be used to prevent mixing the internal humidifier power with the indoor equipment transformer. Applying 24VAC isolation relay coil to furnace or fan coil HUM and COM terminals will allow the Infinity Control to automatically energize the HUM output during a call for humidification. The N.O. relay contacts will be used to energize the humidifier. See fan-powered humidifier installation instructions for more details. CAUTION EQUIPMENT HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage. Do not apply 24VAC fan-powered humidifier (with internal power supply) direct to indoor unit HUM and COM terminals. INITIAL POWER-UP NOTE: Refer to Functional Overview (see Fig. 15) to become familiar with key function buttons such as “System On/Off,” “Fan,” “Left–Side” and “Right– Side” buttons, etc. These function buttons will be used frequently during setup. Power-Up Sequence This section addresses initial power-up (or commissioning) of a new Infinity Control. The User Interface will communicate and identify all Infinity components in the system. The following is a typical example for a communicating Variable–Speed Furnace /Fan Coil with a 2–stage Air Conditioner / Heat Pump (including Hybrid Heat). The User Interface display will light up and indicate that it is now “ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATIONS WITH EQUIPMENT PLEASE WAIT”. The User Interface will automatically continue by “SEARCHING FOR EQUIPMENT”, followed by “SEARCHING FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT” (see Fig. 16). Once the indoor and outdoor equipment has been found, the Installer will be asked to select Accessories. Packaged Products will be automatically identified and the Installer will be asked to select Accessories. Proceed to Selecting Accessories. NOTE: If the variable–speed indoor equipment (furnace or fan coil) cannot be found, the User Interface will display “CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH INDOOR UNIT”. This MUST be corrected before the initial power-up sequence can continue. If indoor unit is found, but outdoor unit is not found, “OUTDOOR UNIT NOT IDENTIFIED” will appear. Proceed to the next section for Outdoor Unit Identification. Selecting Outdoor Unit If there is no communicating outdoor unit, the screen, shown in Fig. 17, will appear. Press either Left or Right Up/Down button to select AC (air conditioner), HP (heat pump), or None (no unit installed). Press right–side button to continue to next screen. If either AC or HP has been selected as the outdoor unit type, the middle screen will appear (see Fig. 17). Press either Left or Right Up/Down button to select appropriate BTU size of outdoor unit, then press right side button to continue. If a NIM (Network Interface Module) is applied for non–communicating two-stage outdoor equipment, select 1 or 2–stage compressor operation, and press right–side button to continue. NOTE: Range of outdoor unit BTU selection is limited by model number of indoor unit installed. The Infinity Control will not allow an outdoor unit size that is not supported by the installed indoor unit. NOTE: On new system installations, the model and serial number will be recognized and displayed. On any indoor/outdoor board replacements, the equipment will be recognized but the exact model/serial number will not be displayed. Selecting Indoor Evaporator Coil If a furnace is installed with a variable-capacity heat pump, a screen will appear to select the installed indoor evaporator coil. This selection is used to adequately calculate refrigerant charge required while in the Heat Pump Charging screens under the Heat Pump Checkout menu. Select “other” for non–Carrier evaporators. Selecting Electric Heater If the equipment is a fan coil, packaged heat pump, or packaged AC and the electric heater is not self–identifying, “ELECTRIC HEATER NOT IDENTIFIED” will appear (see Fig. 18). Press either Left or Right Up/Down button to select appropriate size of electric heater installed, then press right–side button to continue. An asterisks (*) will appear next to electric heater sizes that may cause excessive airflow. NOTE: Range of electric heaters available is limited by model number of the equipment installed. The Infinity Control will not allow an electric heater size that is not supported by the installed equipment. Hydronic Heat Applications The Infinity Control supports 2 types of Hydronic Heat applications: 1. Hot water coil in combination with an FE fan coil and heat pump, or hot water coil as sole heat source with an FE fan coil. 2. Non–zoned FE fan coil combined with radiant hot water heat. In either application, a Hydronic Heat kit should be installed in place of an electric heater. See FE fan coil Product Data for accessory part number. The system will identify that Hydonic Heat has been installed during the initial commissioning process. The system will treat the hot water coil as either auxiliary heat in a heat pump application, or the sole heat source. Setup options for Hydronic Heat applications are described in the Setup section of this instruction. Selecting Accessories Once the indoor and outdoor equipment have been found or entered, the following screens will appear allowing the Installer to select the “AIR FILTER TYPE; HUMIDIFIER INSTALLED”; and “UV LIGHTS INSTALLED” (See Fig. 19). Use either Left or Right Up/Down button to make appropriate selections in the highlighted area on the display screen. Press right–side button to continue (or advance) to the next screen. Air Filter Type This accessory screen will appear first. The installer will need to enter the type of filter (AIR FILTER, ELEC. AIR CLEANER, or PURIFIER). See Table 1 and make a selection using Left or Right Up/Down button, then press right–side button to continue. Humidifier Installed This will appear after the Air Filter Type screen. Select whether a humidifier is installed on the system, YES or NO, then press right–side button to continue. UV Lights Installed This screen will appear to select whether UV lights are installed on the system, select YES or NO, then press right–side button to continue. Equipment Summary The “EQUIPMENT SUMMARY” screen will appear after Accessories have been selected. This screen will give a summary of all equipment automatically found or manually selected. If a wrong selection was made, press left–side button (BACK selection) to go back to that particular screen and make changes. When everything is OK, press right–side button again to continue. (See Fig. 20.) The “SETUP COMPLETE! SAVE ALL SELECTIONS?” screen will appear after Equipment Summary. To Save All Selections press (YES) right–side button. Pressing the left–side button (NO selection) will return to the Equipment Summary screen where changes can be performed to any of the equipment selection screens. After selecting YES, the initial power-up sequence of the new Infinity Control is complete. Static Pressure Check This screen will appear after Setup is exited. The system will perform a static pressure check. This process will take about 1 1/2 minutes to complete. When completed, a screen will appear displaying the static pressure (in inches) across the equipment at the expected highest delivered airflow. If the blower RPM is greater than 1200, then a warning will appear, but equipment operation and the TrueSenset dirty filter detection operation will not be affected. NOTE: The static pressure check occurs only at initial installation, or when INSTALL is run in the INSTALL/SERVICE menu. QUICKSTART For first time installers, Quick Start will allow a quick start up of the Infinity System before learning all the details of system operation. However, for the best possible comfort and operation refer to the Infinity Control Owner’s Manual. Set Day, Time &#38; Desired Humidity Open the door of the Infinity Control and press the BASIC button. Adjust the highlighted HOUR setting using the LEFT Up/Down button. Press SCROLL button (down) to highlight MINUTE. Adjust the MINUTE setting using the LEFT Up/Down button. Press SCROLL button (down) to highlight DAY. Adjust the current DAY setting using the LEFT Up/Down button. Press SCROLL button (down) to highlight HUMIDITY. Press the red HEAT button to select heating humidity. Adjust desired heating humidity level using either (+/–) button. Press the blue COOL button to select cooling humidity. Adjust the desired cooling humidity level using either(+/–)button. To exit press BASIC button or close door. If changes are made, you will be asked to “SAVE CHANGES? YES/NO.” Override Heating Schedule Press the red HEAT button. Heating mode is confirmed when the red LED next to the red HEAT button is lit. Use the RIGHT Up/Down button to select your desired heating temperature. The default time for temporarily overriding the temperature schedule is 2:00 HRS as indicated by the text on the lower left. NOTE: Override time will not appear if programming has been turned off. You can change the temporary override time in 15–minute increments by pressing the LEFT Up/Down button until the desired override time is selected, or press the HOLD button anytime to override the schedule indefinitely. Quick Program Schedule For All Days This section will give you a quick program schedule for ALL DAYS of the week. For more information on how to create customized schedules for every day, the entire week, or weekend, refer to the Owner’s Manual. Open the door of the control. Press the SCHEDULE button, which allows you to create one schedule for the entire home. Press either the LEFT or RIGHT side button repeatedly (if necessary) until “ALLDAYS” is displayed. The WA K E time period will be highlighted. Using the LEFT Up/Down button, set the start time for this time period. Press the red HEAT button. Heating temperature will begin flashing. Set the heating temperature using the RIGHT Up/Down button. Press the blue COOL button. Cooling temperature will begin flashing. Set the cooling temperature using the RIGHT Up/Down button. Set the remaining periods by using the SCROLL button to select “DAY”, “EVENING”, and “SLEEP”. Exit the scheduling mode by either closing the door or pressing the SCHEDULE button. If changes are made, you will be asked to “SAVE CHANGES YES/NO.” INSTALL / SERVICE MENUS The “INSTALL / SERVICE” menus contain a set of vital information. This information enables the Installer or Service person to view a summary of what has been installed, etc. This information is not covered in the Owner’s Manual. To enter INSTALL / SERVICE menus, press and hold the ADVANCED button for at least ten seconds. The following menu will appear (See Fig. 22): NOTE: The INSTALL / SERVICE menu will automatically exit after 60 minutes of no push-button activity. EQUIPMENT SUMMARY: Shows all equipment recognized by and attached to the system. INSTALL: Used when adding, changing out, or uninstalling equipment. SETUP: Used to view or modify equipment settings. CHECKOUT: Allows testing of equipment operation SERVICE: Used to view operation and fault history of equipment and enter dealer name/phone number for display EQUIPMENT SUMMARY MENU This screen shows indoor unit type and model number, outdoor unit type (and model number if a 2–stage unit), filter type and any accessories that are installed are recognized. See Fig. 23. INSTALL MENU This menu item will perform a start-up process in order to learn all equipment in system. Press right side button to initiate the process. See Fig. 24. SETUP MENU This menu has several layers, allowing modification of equipment settings. No settings will need to be made at equipment (i.e. DIP switches on a furnace). All configuration settings made effective from this menu will override equipment configuration made by dip switches. Fig. 25 shows all the information that can be found in the SETUP menu. Setup — Thermostat Auto Mode Setup: Enable/Disable Auto Changeover mode (default = Enable). Auto Changeover Time may be adjusted 5 to 120 minutes, (default = 30 minutes). When Auto mode is enabled (factory default) a change from heat to cool (or vice versa) will not occur until the current cycle is satisfied and an opposite mode demand has existed for 30 minutes. If the setpoint is changed, the 30-minute timer is deleted. Heat/Cool Deadband: 0to6_F(0to3_C), (default = 2_F) The minimum difference enforced between heating and cooling desired temperatures. This can allow one setting to “push” the other to maintain this difference. Offsets: This option allows calibration (or deliberate miscalibration) of the temperature and humidity sensors. These offsets are added to the actual temperature/humidity values (default = 0). Temperature Offset: –5_Fto+5_F(–3_Cto+3_C) Outside Temp Offset: –5_Fto+5_F(–3_Cto+3_C) Humidity Offset: –10 to +10% Elevation: 0 to 10,000 feet. This value is used to correct the static pressure readings the system performs. Cycles Per Hour: Maximum cycles per hour = 4 (default) or 6. Programming: ON (default)– allows program schedule to be set by user. OFF — system becomes non–programmable Periods Per Day = 2 or 4 (default = 4) Programmable Fan On/Off (default = Off). If ON is selected, fan can be set to Auto, Low, Med, or High. Smart Recovery: On or Off (default = On) Applies to programmable operation only. Will start recovery 90 minutes prior to schedule change in both heating and cooling mode. Refer to operational information for more detail. English/Metric Display: For_C, (default = _F) Reset Factory Defaults: Program Schedule: Yes/No to reset back to Energy Star default Time and Temp schedules. User Settings: Yes/No to reset the user settings in the Advanced Setup to factory default settings. Install Settings: Yes/No to reset install settings in Install/Service menus to factory default settings. Last 10 System Events: Yes/No to reset last 10 events under Service Info menu. Setup — Furnace Upon a first time start–up of the Infinity Control, the furnace DIP switch settings will be copied to the furnace setup menu. Any changes can then be made from the Infinity Control. Furnace Airflow: COMFORT (default) EFFICIENCY Selects the airflow of the furnace when heating. EFFICIENCY is the airflow used to meet specified ratings, COMFORT is a decreased airflow used to increase the output air temperature and provide increased comfort. Cooling Airflow: COMFORT (default) — cooling airflow is varied depending on humidity and temperature demands settings. This selection enables the full dehumidify and comfort capabilities of the system. When COMFORT is not selected, the unit will not run reduced airflows for dehumidification. EFF 325 — fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings — no dehumidification airflow reduction. This is nominally 325 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. EFF 350 — fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings — no dehumidification airflow reduction. This is nominally 350 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. MAXIMUM — 400 CFM/ton. No dehumidification airflow reduction. QUIET– minimum cooling airflow that the system can safely run (typically 300 CFM/ton). Use this setting if duct noise is a severe problem. Note that duct sweating in high humidity environments could be an issue. Heat Pump Heating: COMFORT (default) Heat Pump airflow is varied depending on outdoor temperature to maximize comfort. EFF 325 — Fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings . This is nominally 325 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. EFF 350 — Fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings . This is nominally 350 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. MAXIMUM — 400 CFM/ton. Heat Pump Cooling: COMFORT (default) — cooling airflow is varied depending on humidity and temperature demands settings. This selection enables the full dehumidify and comfort capabilities of the system. When COMFORT is not selected, the unit will not run reduced airflows for dehumidification. EFF 325 — fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings — no dehumidification airflow reduction. This is nominally 325 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. EFF 350 — fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings — no dehumidification airflow reduction. This is nominally 350 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. MAXIMUM — 400 CFM/ton. No dehumidification airflow reduction. QUIET– minimum cooling airflow that the system can safely run (typically 300 CFM/ton). Use this setting if duct noise is a severe problem. Note that duct sweating in high humidity environments could be an issue. Dehum Airflow: NORMAL (factory default) — When equipment is running to dehumidify, the airflow is allowed to adjust to a minimum to satisfy the dehumidification call. HIGH — Minimum airflow during the dehumidify mode is increased to reduce duct and register sweating. Low Heat Rise ON OFF (default) Set to ON if the system contains a bypass humidifier. The ON setting will increase the furnace low heat airflow. Staging SYSTEM (default) LOW LOW–MED LOW–HIGH MEDIUM MED–HIGH HIGH FURNACE NOTE: Controls the staging of the furnace. More staging options will be available if furnace is capable of more stages. SYSTEM setting will allow the Infinity Control to determine furnace staging. LOW will only run the low stage of furnace heat. LOW–MED will run the low and medium stages (2 stages of heat). MED will only run the medium stage of heat. MED–HIGH will run the medium and high stages (2 stages of heat). HIGH will only run the high stage of furnace heat. G Terminal This setup option selects desired operation when the R–G circuit changes state on the furnace control board depending on setup. DISABLED (Default) FAN — turns on fan to selected fan speed when G terminal is energized. See Fig. 26. This setting is used in conjunction with fresh air supply products (e.g. fresh air/make–up air dampers). FAN SPEED — select Low, Med, High for all zones when G terminal is energized SHUTDOWN — shuts off fan and equipment when initiated. This function is not intended for emergency fire shutdown. It may be activated by a dry contact from an external device such as a float switch or a relay. User Interface displays SYSTEM MALFUNCTION on screen and registers G terminal shutdown event in Last 10 System Events. See Fig. 27. High Stage Timer Minimum amount of time low stage must operate before high stage is activated. Ten to 60 minutes. 10 = default A demand of 5_F(3_C) or more will override the staging timer. Furnace Airflow (Capacity) Limiting The following settings allow the installer to restrict the furnace within certain minimum and maximum airflows. These airflows are converted to capacities. The Min and Max limits are determined by the equipment size. These settings are not the same as the zoning airflow limits. Min CFM (only appears with modulating furnaces) Minimum CFM to run a modulating furnace. This will increase the minimum operating capacity of the furnace. Default value is the furnace air flow for the lowest heat capacity. Maximum CFM (only appears with modulating furnaces) Maximum CFM to run a modulating furnace. This will reduce the operating capacity of the furnace. Default value is the furnace air flow for the highest heat capacity. Off Delay 90 seconds 120 seconds (default) 150 seconds 180 seconds Amount of time the blower will continue to run after heating has shut off. Dehum Drain Turns off the continuous fan at the end of cooling for five minutes in order to drain the indoor coil of water. The fan will only be turned off if a dehumidify demand existed at the start of or during the cooling cycle. Default is enabled. Altitude US 0 — 2000 (default) US 2001 — 3000 CA 2001 — 4500 (for Canada only) US 3001 — 4000 US 4001 — 5000 US 5001 — 6000 US 6001 — 7000 US 7001 — 8000 US 8001 — 9000 US 9001 — 10000 This setting will adjust the furnace’s airflow to compensate for altitude. Altitude adjustment is not available with older furnaces. Please see furnace instructions for further details. Setup -Fan Coil Heat Pump Heating: COMFORT (default) Heat Pump airflow is varied depending on outdoor temperature to maximize comfort. EFF 325 — Fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings. This is nominally 325 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. EFF 350 — Fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings. This is nominally 350 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. MAXIMUM — 400 CFM/ton. Heat Pump Cooling Airflow: COMFORT (default) Cooling airflow is varied depending on humidity and temperature demand settings. This selection enables the full dehumidify and comfort capabilities of the system. When COMFORT is not selected, the unit will not run reduced airflows for dehumidification. Heat Pump airflow is varied depending on outdoor temperature to maximize comfort. EFF 325 — fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings – no dehumidification airflow reduction. This is nominally 325 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. EFF 350 — fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings — no dehumidification airflow reduction. This is nominally 350 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. MAXIMUM — 400 CFM/ton. No dehumidification airflow reduction. QUIET– minimum cooling airflow that the system can safely run (typically 300 CFM/ton). Use this setting if duct noise is a severe problem. Note that duct sweating in high humidity environments could be an issue. Dehum Airflow: NORMAL (factory default) — When equipment is running to dehumidify, the airflow is allowed to adjust to a minimum to satisfy the dehumidification call. HIGH — Minimum airflow during the dehumidify mode is increased to reduce duct and register sweating. Also increases minimum airflow during normal cooling operation to reduce duct sweating. Heater Size: (choices dependent upon fan coil model) This will show the heater size entered during the start–up process. This value can be changed to another value (limited by the model number of the fan coil). If the electric heater is self–identifying, this value is not shown. Elect Heat Lockout NONE (default) +5 to 55_F (–15 to 13_C) Outside temperature above which the electric heat will not operate except for defrost. G Terminal This setup option selects desired operation when the R–G circuit changes state on the fan coil control board depending on setup. DISABLED (Default) FAN — turns on fan to selected fan speed when G terminal is energized. See Fig. 26. This setting is used in conjunction with fresh air supply products (e.g. fresh air make–up air dampers). FAN SPEED — select Low, Med, High for all zones when G terminal is energized SHUTDOWN — shuts off fan and equipment when initiated. This function is not intended for emergency fire shutdown. It may be activated by a dry contact from an external device such as a float switch or a relay. User selects whether the contact is NC — normally closed (default) or NO — normally open. User Interface displays SYSTEM MALFUNCTION on screen and registers G terminal shutdown event in Last 10 System Events.  See Fig. 27. Dehum Drain Turns off the continuous fan at the end of cooling for five minutes in order to drain the indoor coil of water. The fan will only be turned off if a dehumidify demand existed at the start of or during the cooling cycle. Default is enabled. Reheat Dehum Enables electric heat to be used while Cool to Dehumidify is running. This will allow the Cool to Dehumidify function to run much longer, greatly improving humidity control in cooling mode. Accumulated electrical energy used while reheating (in kilowatt–hours) is shown on the Fan Coil Run Hours screen and can be reset there. This is only available with fan coil systems. Setup — Heat Pump / AC Cooling Lockout: NONE (default) 45_F(7_C) 50_F(10_C) 55_F(13_C) Outside temperature below which cooling will not be provided. Low Ambient Cooling: NO (default) YES Selecting YES will enable the low ambient cooling operation in the outdoor unit. This setting is only available with communicating outdoor units and with Cooling Lockout set to NONE. Low ambient kits are not needed with communicating outdoor units. For detailed sequence of operation, see outdoor unit installation instructions. Entered Size: (dependent on indoor unit model) Size of the outdoor unit entered during the start–up process. If the outdoor unit is a communicating model, this value will not be shown. This size can be changed here but is limited to sizes that the indoor unit can handle. Defrost Interval: 30 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes 120 minutes (default) Auto–Defrost interval optimized by outdoor control (default for communicating HP) Time interval at which defrost cycles can occur on a heat pump. Lockout Temp: Off (default) +5 to 55_F (–15 to 18_C) Locks out the heat pump from operating below the selected outside temperature. Appears with a fan coil only. Must be below any electric lockout temperature in Fan Coil Setup. Quiet Shift Off (default) Turns on Quiet Shift function in 1–stage or 2–stage communicating heat pumps. High Cool Latch: NONE (default) On 80 to 110_F (27 to 43_C) DISABLE (disable use of high cool stage) Outside temperature above which only the high stage (of a 2–stage outdoor unit) will run when cooling. High Heat Latch OFF (default) On 20 to 50_F(–7to10_C) 2 –stage heat pump runs only high stage heating below a selectable outdoor temperature. Selections from20to50_F(–7to10_C) are available in 5_F(3_C) increments. DISABLE (disable use of high heat stage) Max Heat RPM (Appears with variable capacity heat pump) Clamps the operating speed of the heat pump to this maximum. Used to reduce operating noise while in high heating capacity. Reducing this value will reduce the heating capacity of the heat pump. Heat Pump Airflow (Capacity) Limiting The following settings allow the installer to restrict the heat pump within certain minimum and maximum airflows. These airflows are converted to capacities. The Min and Max limits are determined by the equipment size. Min CFM (only appears with variable capacity heat pump) Minimum CFM to run a variable capacity heat pump. This will increase the minimum operating capacity of the heat pump. Default value is the heat pump air flow for the lowest heat capacity. Maximum CFM (only appears with variable capacity heat pump) Maximum CFM to run a variable capacity heat pump This will reduce the operating capacity of the heat pump. Default value is the heat pump air flow for the highest heat capacity. Lo Air Multiplier Adjusts the low airflow speed on non–communicating two–stage units. Choose 0.65 for units with a Bristol compressor, choose 0.80 (default) for units with a Copeland scroll compressor. Setup — Hybrid Heat FURNACE LOCKOUT — Temperature above which only the heat pump will operate, except for defrost. Default = NONE Available settings = NONE thru &#62;55_F(13_C) HEAT PUMP LOCKOUT — Temperature below which only the furnace will operate. Default = NONE Available settings = NONE thru &#60;55_F(13_C) DEFROST W/FURNACE — Choose whether furnace operates during defrost cycle. Default = YES Available settings = YES / NO HP TO FURNACE STAGING TIME — Adjust the minimum amount of time the heat pump will run before furnace will be allowedtorun. Default = 15 MIN Available settings = 15–60 minutes. If a demand of 5_F(3_C) or greater exists, the timer will be overridden. Setup — Hydronic Heat HOT WATER LOCKOUT — Outside temperature above which the hot water will not operate except for defrost (if needed). Available settings — NO, 5 to 55_F (–15 to 13_C) in 1_ increments HEAT PUMP LOCKOUT — Outside temperature below which only the hot water will run, 1_F(.6_C) resolution. Appears only with a heat pump outdoor unit. Available settings — NO, 5 to 55_F (–15 to 13_C) in 1_increments DEFROST W/WATER: Available settings: YES / NO (Default =YES) Appears only if heat pump is available If no, hot water will not run during a defrost. AIRFLOW — Selects desired airflow during Hydronic Heating Available range from OFF, 500 CFM(minimum) to 400 CFM/ton cooling maximum in 50 CFM increments.  Default is the cooling airflow. (350 CFM/ton)  OFF selection does not turn off airflow if heat pump is defrosting. BLOWER ON DELAY — Time after hot water is requested that the blower will turn on. Available settings — 0 to 240 seconds in 30 second increments Default is 30 BLOWER OFF DELAY– Time after hot water request terminates before the blower will turn off. Available settings — 0 to 240 seconds in 30 second increments Default is 0. Setup — Accessories Filter Type: AIR FILTER (i.e. TrueSenset) ELEC. AIR CLEANER AIR PURIFIER (i.e. TrueSenset) CLEAN INTERVAL: Never, 1 to 18 months. (Default = 90) Enables a timer for the filter notification. Interval at which the Clean Filter notification will turn on. PRESSURE MONITOR: ENABLE/DISABLE — enables the static pressure calculation for media–type filters. Humidifier Installed: NO YES If YES, indicates to the system whether a humidifier is installed and enables humidification functions. CHANGE PAD INTERVAL: 1 to 24 months (default = 12 months) Interval at which the Change Humidify Pad notification will be displayed. HUMIDIFY WITH FAN: (Heating Mode Only) NO (default) YES If YES, the humidifier will turn on if there is a humidify demand present. The fan will turn on to Low speed if the fan setting is Auto. Ventilator: NOTE: Only appears if ventilator is installed. CLEAN INTERVAL: 60 to 180 days of actual operation (default = 90) Interval at which the Clean Ventilator Pre–filter notification will turn on. UV Lights Installed NO YES If YES, indicates to the system whether UV lights are installed. CHANGE INTERVAL: 6 to 48 months operation time (default = 12 months) Interval at which the Change UV Lights notification will be displayed. Setup — System Maintenance Remind Owner of Routine Maintenance Every: This setup is used to adjust the timer interval in which the normal System Maintenance notification is turned on for the homeowner. (See Fig. 30.) Range = OFF 6 to 24 months, (default = 12 months) Pressing the right side button will reset the timer. Pop–up confirmation will be shown. Setup — Utility Saver Cooling/Heat Pump Heating: (Hybrid Heat &#38; Hydronic Heat Only) Turn off, Low Stage Utility Saver is used to force the equipment to a lower stage (low or off) when activated by the utility company, typically during peak load times. This setup is available only if the equipment has a utility saver input (refer to outdoor equipment Installation Instructions). This setup controls the response of the equipment when the utility saver input is active. The choices include: Turn Off , (equipment turns off) Low Stage (available if the AC/heat pump is a 2–stage model, runs low speed only) CHECKOUT MENUS The Checkout menu will show the equipment installed in the system. A sample checkout menu is shown in Fig. 31. Checkout — Furnace or Gas PAC Make sure the furnace is properly installed before continuing. LOW HEAT RUNTIME: 5 min. HIGH HEAT RUNTIME: 5 min. This menu item allows the furnace to be exercised. First, a low heat runtime and high heat runtime are selected. Range = 5 — 120 min. If only the low heat is to be exercised: The furnace will execute its ignition start–up sequence. This sequence will be displayed on the Infinity Control screen. After the gas valve and blower motor turn on, the screen will automatically change to “FURNACE CHECK” and show the current operating status of the furnace. Checkout — Electric Heat ELECTRIC HEAT RUNTIME: 5 min., Default time = 5 min., Range = 0 — 120 min. If you have a fan coil with electric heaters, this menu item will allow the heaters to be exercised. With self–identifying electric heaters, three stages of electric heat are available to be exercised in any combination. Non–identifying heaters will only provide one stage of heat. Enter the run time (in minutes) of each stage of heat to be exercised then press START (right–side button). The display will change to show the fan coil’s operating status. Checkout — Heat Pump Heating HIGH HEAT RUNTIME: 5 min. LOW HEAT RUNTIME: 5 min. DEFROST: NO The heat pump heating mode can be exercised with this menu option. With a 2–stage heat pump, a low heat runtime and a high heat runtime are independently selectable to exercise. A defrost cycle is also selectable. Default time = Fixed 5 min. minimum, range = 5 — 120 min. NOTE: Airflows during Checkout modes are fixed to the Efficiency setting and are independent of other airflow settings. To view airflows for normal heat pump heating mode, exit the Checkout screen and apply a heating demand to the system. Checkout — Heat Pump Cooling or AC Cooling HIGH COOL RUNTIME: 5 min. LOW COOL RUNTIME: 5 min. The heat pump cooling mode (or AC cooling mode) can be exercised with this menu option. With a 2–stage heat pump or AC unit, a low cool runtime and a high cool runtime are independently selectable to exercise. The display will change to show the heat pump or AC operating status. Default time = Fixed 5 min. minimum, range = 5 — 120 min. NOTE: Airflows during Checkout modes are fixed to the Efficiency setting and are independent of other airflow settings. To view airflows for normal heat pump (or AC) cooling mode, exit the Checkout screen and apply a cooling demand to the system. Checkout — Humidifier OFF ON The humidifier can be exercised On and Off with this menu option. Charging (Appears with Variable Capacity Heat Pump) Enables charging mode of the variable capacity heat pump. Evacuation (Appears with Variable Capacity Heat Pump) Allows the heat pump to be evacuated of refrigerant. EXV Position (Appears with Variable Capacity Heat Pump) Positions the Electronic Expansion Valve (open or closed) Charge Calculation (Appears with Variable Capacity Heat Pump) Calculates the amount of charge needed in the system. Takes into account lineset length, liquid line diameter, and indoor coil model. Checkout — Ventilator Speed: OFF LOW HIGH The ventilator can be exercised through all of its operating speeds with this menu option. Checkout — System Access Module (SAM) See System Access Module Installation Instructions for full details. SERVICE MENUS The Service Info menu will only show the equipment installed in the system. Below is a sample using a furnace and a heat pump (Hybrid Heat). A sample service menu is shown in Fig. 32. Service — Furnace Status or Gas PAC Status The Status screens will show all of the current operating parameters of each installed piece of equipment. NOTE: To view a less detailed Equipment Status screen, press the right side button. This will display equipment stage, fan status, actual and target humidify settings. Heat Stage: OFF, LOW, HIGH Displays stage of heat that the furnace is currently delivering. Airflow CFM: (furnace model dependent) Cubic Feet per Minute of air the blower is currently delivering. Inducer RPM (90% furnaces only): Inducer motor RPM value. Blower RPM: Actual RPM feedback from indoor blower motor. Static Press: Inches of water. Displays the calculated static pressure that the fan coil is currently experiencing. If static pressure cannot be accurately calculated, the display will read UNKNOWN. When this is seen, the system is adjusting to high static pressure by cutting back blower RPM. Lockout Timer: Seconds If a lockout timer is active, this will show the current time value. See furnace manual for details on lockout timers. Service — Fan Coil Status Electric Heat: OFF, LOW, MED, HIGH Displays stages of electric heat that the fan coil is currently delivering. Airflow CFM: (fan coil model number dependent) Cubic Feet per Minute of air the User Interface is currently requesting. Blower RPM: Actual blower motor RPM value Static Press: Inches of water. Displays the calculated static pressure that the fan coil is currently experiencing. If static pressure cannot be accurately calculated, the display will read UNKNOWN. When this is seen, the system is adjusting to high static pressure by cutting back blower RPM. Service — Heat Pump / AC Status Stage: (Heat / Cool) OFF, LOW, HIGH Displays stage of heating or cooling that the Heat Pump/AC is delivering. Defrost: NO, YES Displays status of defrost mode if heat pump. Airflow CFM: Airflow User Interface is requesting from blower. Outdoor Coil Temp: F or_C (default = _F) The temperature of the outdoor unit coil (only available on 2–stage communicating outdoor units). Blower RPM: Actual RPM feedback from indoor blower motor. Static Press: Inches of water. Displays the calculated static pressure that the fan coil is currently experiencing. If static pressure cannot be accurately calculated, the display will read UNKNOWN. When this is seen, the system is adjusting to high static pressure by cutting back blower RPM. Service — Last 10 System Events This screen will show last 10 events that occurred throughout the system. Each entry has the time and date incident recorded. Service technician should enter current date in the “TODAY’S DATE” menu section BEFORE checking and logging the last 10 system events. Each entry has a two-letter acronym preceding the event name to identify which piece of equipment generated the event. This event history can be cleared under Thermostat Setup, Reset Factory Defaults. HP = Heat Pump AC = Air Conditioner FN = Furnace FC = Fan Coil SPP = Packaged product SAM = System Access Module Service — Run / Fault History The indoor unit and outdoor unit (if communicating) have the following histories: NOTE: For Critical Fault Screens, see the Troubleshooting section in this document. Resettable Faults: Fault counters for each piece of equipment that can be reset. Cycle Counters: Number of heat/cool/power cycles the unit has performed. Run Times: Lifetime hours of operation in heating, cooling, and how long the unit has been powered. Kilowatt-hours used of electric reheat for dehumidification. Service — Today’s Date This menu item allows the installer to enter the current date. It is used for time/date stamping of system faults. This should be verified every time prior to viewing “LAST 10 SYSTEM EVENTS” section. Service — Model / Serial Numbers This menu item allows the installer to view the model number and serial number (if available) of all communicating pieces of equipment in the system. This is only available in original factory supplied circuit board. If a circuit board is replaced, the model and serial number information is no longer available. Service — Service Phone Number This menu item allows the installer to enter a name and phone number that the homeowner can call for future service of the system. This name and phone number will appear to the homeowner whenever a service reminder pop–up message is displayed (i.e. Change Filter, etc.). To edit: Use Right Up/Down button to move cursor left and right. Use Left Up/Down button to select numbers and letters. Use Scroll button to move up and down between NAME and NUMBER. OPERATIONAL INFORMATION Continuous Fan Operation Pressing FAN button will scroll through the following: AUTO = No fan operation except during equipment operation. LOW = Approximately 50% of High Speed operation. MED = Half way between High and Low speed operation. HIGH = Highest of either High Heating or High Cooling CFM. Continuous fan operation is programmable. The programming option must be enabled in the Thermostat Setup. See the Homeowner’s Manual for detailed instructions on programming the fan. Five–Minute Compressor Timeguard This timer prevents compressor from starting unless it has been off for at least 5 minutes. It can be defeated by simultaneously pressing the Fan and Right Up buttons. Emergency Heat (for heat pump applications) To activate Emergency Heat, you must press and hold the HEAT button for 3 seconds to activate. Repeat to deactivate. Heat Source Selection (Hybrid or Hydronic Heat) If user wishes to override normal operation in Hybrid Heat or Hydronic Heat applications, press and hold the heat button for 3 seconds to select desired heat source. Keypad Lockout Keypad can be locked by pressing “Fan” and “Humidity/Oat” buttons at the same time for 3 seconds. When keys are locked, a lock symbol will appear in the upper left corner of screen. Follow same procedure to unlock keypad. Heat and Cool LED The Heat and Cool LEDs will pulsate during actual equipment operation. This can be defeated in the Advanced Setup Screens. Equipment Cycle Timer (adjustable 4–6 cycles per hour) This timer prevents the start of a heating or cooling cycle until 15 (or 10) minutes after the last start of the same cycle. Its function is to assure that the equipment is not cycled more than the selected times per hour. This timer is adjustable from 4 to 6 cycles per hour. This timer is defeated for one cycle when the desired temperature is manually changed. It can also be defeated for one cycle by simultaneously pressing the Fan and Right Up buttons. Staging Timer In multistage heating or cooling, this timer prevents any higher stage from turning on until the preceding stage has been on for 10 minutes. For furnace heating, the high stage timer is adjustable to force longer minimum low stage run time. See Furnace Setup for details. A demand of 5_ or more will override the staging timer and allow higher stages to energize. In Hybrid Heat, the staging timer is 15 minutes between heat pump and gas furnace operation. This timer is adjustable in the Hybrid Heat Setup menu to force longer minimum heat pump run time and longer low-stage furnace run time. A demand of 5_F or more will override the staging timer and allow higher stages to energize. Three–Minute Minimum On-Time In normal operation, when a stage turns on, it will remain on for a minimum of three minutes. If the setpoint is changed, this timer is automatically cancelled, allowing the equipment to turn off immediately when the demand is removed. Heat/Cool setpoints (Desired Temperatures) A minimum difference of 2_ (default) is enforced between heating and cooling desired temperatures. This is done by allowing one setting to “push” the other to maintain this difference. This difference is adjustable via the Install/Service menu under Thermostat Setup. Temperature Display The actual temperature displayed is always rounded toward the setpoint. This is because the system is operating and measuring the temperature in sixteenths of a degree, but displaying in whole numbers. The system may be turned off and on within .5_ of setpoint, but the display may not change. This is by design and does not indicate a problem with the control. Auto Changeover When Auto mode is enabled (factory default) a change from heat to cool (or vice versa) will not occur until an opposite mode demand has existed for 30 minutes. If the setpoint is changed, the 30–minute requirement is defeated. This Auto Changeover time is adjustable via the Install/Service menu under Thermostat Setup. Range = 5 — 120 min. Smart Recovery With Smart Recovery selected (factory default), transition out of setback begins 1.5 hours before selected recovery time and gradually adjusts room temperature so desired temperature will be achieved at selected recovery time. It operates in both heating and cooling. This only applies to programmable operations. For example: Set back temperature in heating is 64_F. Smart Recovery setpoint is 70_F at 7:00 a.m. At 5:30 a.m., the control calculates the required temperature recovery rate (recovery temp — set back temp or current temp if greater) / 90 minutes. If the current temp at 5:30 = 66_F, the recovery rate = (70 — 66)_F/90 minutes = 0.04_ per minute. In order to achieve setpoint, the control ramps up the setpoint 0.04_F / minute from 5:30 a.m. until 7:00 a.m. This changing setpoint is displayed while it is occurring. NOTE: Temperatures should not be set back so far that the equipment cannot recover in 90 minutes. Air Filter If AIR FILTER or AIR PURIFIER is installed in the indoor unit, the system will perform a static pressure check of the system every 24 hours at 1:00 p.m. to monitor filter accumulation (TrueSenset Dirty Filter Detection) or whenever power is applied to the system or the system is transitioned from Off to Cool or Heat modes. The blower will run at a medium airflow for one minute. This system operates by setting a base line static pressure based on the highest airflow the system could run (this could be heat or cool airflow). The measurement is taken at a low airflow and then calculated up to the highest airflow the system could see. Frozen Coil Detection During cooling operation, the User Interface will monitor the static pressure of the system. If the static pressure is increasing dramatically, the User Interface will turn off cooling for up to one hour, record fault in the “Last 10 Events” screen, and run the fan at a reduced airflow. The User Interface will continue to monitor the static pressure. If it is reduced before one hour has elapsed, it will resume cooling operation. After one hour, cooling will be resumed. Dehumidify Operation Once a target cooling humidity setpoint is selected in the Advanced Setup COOLING HUMIDITY screen, two other setup options affect Dehumidify operation: COOLING AIRFLOW and DEHUMIDIFY. COOLING AIRFLOW: Setting this to COMFORT or QUIET will enable the system to use low airflow to help dehumidify the space. If duct sweating becomes an issue, setting DEHUM AIRFLOW to HIGH may resolve the problem. DEHUMIDIFY: Located in the Cooling Humidity screen of the Advanced Setup, this option has 2 settings: ON and OFF. If DEHUMIDIFY is set to ON (factory default), then the cooling unit will be allowed to overcome the space up to 3_F (2_C) if the humidity level is above the cooling humidity target setpoint. The amount of overcooling allowed varies with the dehumidification demand, the cooling demand, and the actual space temperature. More overcooling is allowed with greater dehumidification demand. When the space temperature is at or above 75_F (24_C) and the dehumidify demand is high, overcooling up to 3_F (2_C) is allowed. As the space temperature approaches 70_F (21_C), less overcooling is allowed. At 70_F (21_C) space temperature, no more overcooling is allowed no matter how great the dehumidify demand. This is done to protect the equipment. If DEHUMIDIFY is set to OFF and Cooling Airflow is set to COMFORT, normal dehumidification mode is enabled. For normal dehumidification, no overcooling is allowed when the cooling humidity is above the target setpoint, but airflow will be reduced during a normal cooling mode to reduce humidity. The airflow depends on the amount of dehumidifying demand. If Cooling Airflow is set to EFFICIENCY or MAXIMUM, only Dehumidify (overcooling to dehumidify) will be performed. Hybrid Heat Setup / Operation Furnace Lockout — (in HYBRID HEAT SETUP menu) is the outside temperature above which the furnace will not run except for defrost (otherwise known as the aux heat lockout). Heat Pump Lockout — (in HYBRID HEAT SETUP) is the outside temperature below which the heat pump will not run (otherwise known as the balance point). These values can be set identical to each other. If they are not identical, the system will stage up and down normally from heat pump to furnace when the outside temperature is between these settings. The User Interface will not allow the heat pump lockout setting to be above the furnace lockout setting. The factory default settings for both of these is NONE (no lockouts). Even though a heat pump lockout temperature may be set, the system will still use the furnace in defrost operation, and may stage back down to heat pump when defrost is completed after a2minutedelay. Hybrid Heat Defrost — (in HYBRID HEAT SETUP) When the outdoor unit needs a defrost cycle, the furnace will run during defrost regardless of lockout temperature, unless told not to in the Hybrid Heat Setup screen. After defrost, the system may stage down to heat pump after a 2-minute delay. If the room temperature falls below 40_F (4_C) and a furnace lockout is in enabled, the furnace lockout will be overridden to bring on the furnace. TROUBLESHOOTING Please refer to the Troubleshooting Guide available on HVAC Partners for more detail. Infinity Control does not power up. Recheck wiring to ABCD on all devices. Make sure all colors match for every terminal. Make sure power is applied to the indoor unit, and the amber LED is lit on indoor control circuit board. Check for 24VAC between the C and D terminals at Infinity Control terminal connector and Damper Control Module. Check fuse on indoor unit’s circuit board. Display says “Indoor Unit Not Found” Recheck wiring to ABCD on all devices. Make sure all colors match for every terminal. Press left–side button to try again. If display still reads “Indoor Unit Not Found”, disconnect accessories and [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/carrier/systxccuid01-v-infinity-control-thermostat/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Logo.jpg" /></p>
<h4>Carrier SYSTXCCUID01-V Infinity Control Thermostat Manual</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-SYSTXCCUID01-V-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Manual.png" /></p>
<p><strong>Carrier SYSTXCCUID01-V Infinity Control Thermostat Manual </strong></p>
<h4>Installation Instructions</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat.jpg" /></p>
<p>NOTE: Read the entire instruction manual before starting the installation.<br />
US Patents: Carrierr U.S. Pat No. 7,243,004, Carrierr U.S. Pat No. 7,775,452</p>
<h4><strong>SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS</strong></h4>
<p>Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, maintenance, or use can cause explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause death, personal injury or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory–authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product. Refer to the individual instructions packaged with the kits or accessories when installing.</p>
<p>Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses, protective clothing, and work gloves. Have a fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings and cautions included in literature and attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and the current edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70.<br />
In Canada, refer to the current editions of the Canadian Electrical Code CSA C22.1.</p>
<p>Recognize safety information. When you see this symbol <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Warning-Cleaning.png" />on the unit and in instructions or manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, andCAUTION. These words are used with the safety–alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards, which will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies hazards, which could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices, which may result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions that will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation.</p>
<h4>INTRODUCTION</h4>
<p>The Infinity System consists of several intelligent communicating components which include the Infinity Control (or User Interface), variable speed furnace or FE fan coil, 2–stage AC or HP and Infinity Packaged Products, which continually communicate with each other via a four-wire connection called the ABCD bus. Commands, operating conditions, and other data are passed continually between components over the ABCD bus. The result is a new level of comfort, versatility, and simplicity.</p>
<p>All Infinity furnaces or fan coils are variable–speed and multi-stage for maximum flexibility, efficiency, and comfort. They support controlled ventilation, humidification, dehumidification, and air quality control. Either an Infinity (communicating), or a standard 24VAC controlled outdoor unit may be used.</p>
<p>When using conventional outdoor units, the Infinity furnace or fan coil provides the 24-volt signals needed to control them. Also, the Infinity Network Interface Module (P/N SYSTXCCNIM01) allows the connection of a Carrier HRV or ERV without the need for a separate wall control.</p>
<p>All system components are controlled through the wall-mounted Infinity Control, which replaces the conventional thermostat and provides the homeowner with a single wall control for all features of the system.</p>
<h4>INSTALLATION, START-UP OVERVIEW</h4>
<p>This instruction covers the installation of the Infinity Control only. Physical installation instructions for the indoor and outdoor equipment and accessories are provided with each unit.<br />
Setup, commissioning, operation, and troubleshooting of the Infinity System are covered only in this installation instruction. It is the guide to connecting the system components and<br />
commissioning the system once all physical components are installed. The special screen prompts and start-up capabilities are provided in the Infinity System to simplify and automate the initial commissioning of the system.</p>
<ul>
<li>Install Infinity Control according to this instruction.</li>
<li>Install indoor unit, outdoor unit, and accessories according to their instructions.</li>
<li>Wire complete system according to this instruction.</li>
<li>Setup, commission, and operating system according to this instruction to assure a smooth and trouble-free startup.</li>
</ul>
<h4>INSTALLATION</h4>
<p><strong>Check Equipment and Job Site</strong><br />
Inspect equipment. File claim with shipping company prior to installation if shipment is damaged or incomplete.<br />
<strong>Infinity Control Location and Wiring Considerations</strong></p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Warning-Cleaning.png" /> WARNING</strong></p>
<p><strong>ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.<br />
Disconnect power before routing control wiring.</p>
<p>All wiring must comply with national, local, and state codes.<br />
<strong>Infinity Control Location</strong><br />
The Infinity Control User Interface is the command center for the Infinity System. It should be located where it is easily accessible and visible to the adult homeowner or end-user.<br />
For accurate temperature measurement, the following guidelines should be followed:<br />
The Infinity Control and Room Sensors should be mounted:</p>
<ul>
<li>Approximately 5–ft (1.5 m) from the floor.</li>
<li>Close to or in a frequently used room, preferably on an inside partitioning wall.</li>
<li>On a section of wall without pipes or ductwork.<br />
The Infinity Control and Room Sensors should NOT be mounted:</li>
<li>Close to a window, on an outside wall, or next to a door leading to the outside.</li>
<li>Exposed to direct light or heat from a lamp, sun, fireplace, or other temperature–radiating objects which could cause a false reading.</li>
<li>Close to or in direct airflow from supply registers.</li>
<li>In areas with poor air circulation, such as behind a door or in an alcove.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Remote Room Sensor Option</strong><br />
A Remote Room Sensor can be used with the Infinity Control to take the place of the User Interface internal temperature sensor. This allows the Infinity Control to be mounted in areas with less than optimal airflow (such as near an exterior door, window, or in a closet). The remote sensor can be wired to the terminal block connectors labeled S1 and S2 at the User Interface backplate, or the ZS1 and ZS1C connection at the Damper Control Module. In either case, the Infinity Control will automatically detect the</p>
<p>Remote Room Sensor and ignore its internal temperature sensor. Typically, one remote sensor is used but, multiple sensors may be used and averaged in some applications. Averaging requires a special series-parallel wiring method with a specific number of sensors. See Fig. 2. It is also important to note the humidity sensor cannot be remotely located, so do not locate the Infinity Control in an area where humidity sensing may not be accurate.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Remote-Room-Sensor-and-ignore.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>Wiring Considerations</strong><br />
Ordinary thermostat wire is recommended. Use 22 AWG or larger for normal wiring applications. Continuous wire lengths over 100 ft. should use 20 AWG or larger.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: ABCD bus wiring only requires a four-wire connection; however, it is good practice to run a thermostat cable having more than four wires in the event of a damaged or broken wire during installation.<br />
Each communicating device in the Infinity System has a four-pin connector labeled ABCD. It is recommended that the following color code be used when wiring each device:</p>
<p>A — Green = Data A<br />
B — Yellow = Data B<br />
C — White = 24VAC (Com)<br />
D — Red = 24VAC (Hot)</p>
<p>It is not mandatory that the above color code be used, but each ABCD connector in the system MUST be wired consistently.<br />
<strong>Shielded Wire</strong><br />
If the thermostat wiring will be located near or in parallel with high voltage wiring, cable TV or Ethernet wiring, then shielded thermostat wire can be used to reduce or eliminate potential interference. The shield wire should be connected to the C terminal, or ground, at the indoor unit. The shield wire should NOT be connected to any terminal at the user interface. Connecting the shield to ground at both ends can cause current loops in the shield, reducing shield effectiveness.</p>
<h4>Mounting Infinity Control</h4>
<p>First become familiar with all plastic assembly pieces shown in Figures 3 through 10. The User Interface will snap together with the backplate.<br />
A backplate is supplied (see Fig. 4 and 5). Attach backplate using only a small hole in the wall allowing a four wire connection to pass through. Mount the assembly to the backplate.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: Once Infinity Control is secured to wall with the backplate assembly (snapped together), care must be taken not to bend or break the interlocking tabs when removing.</p>
<p><strong>Decorative Backplate</strong><br />
Sold separately, a thin decorative backplate (see Fig. 6 and 9) is available to hide any marks/screw holes left from the previous thermostat. This decorative backplate (or beauty ring) is used by snapping it onto the back of the mounting plate before securing the plate to the wall.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Decorative-Backplate-1.jpg" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Decorative-Backplate-2.jpg" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Warning-Cleaning.png" /><strong>WARNING</strong></p>
<p><strong>ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury, death or equipment damage.<br />
Before installing, modifying, or servicing system, the main electrical disconnect switch must be in the OFF position. There may be more than 1 disconnect switch. Lockout and tag switch with a suitable warning label.</p>
<ol>
<li>Turn off all power to equipment.</li>
<li>If an existing User Interface or control is being replaced:<br />
a. Remove existing control from wall.<br />
b. Disconnect wires from existing control.<br />
c. Discard or recycle old control.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: Mercury is a hazardous waste, if existing control contains any mercury, it MUST be disposed of properly. The User Interface does not contain mercury.</li>
<li>Select Infinity Control mounting plastic (recess mount or surface mount and decorative backplate if desired).</li>
<li>Route wires through large hole in mounting plastic. Level rear plastic against wall (for aesthetic value only — Infinity Control need not be level to operate properly) and mark wall through two mounting holes.</li>
<li>Drill two 3/16–in (4.8 mm) mounting holes in wall where marked.</li>
<li>Secure mounting plastic to wall using two screws and anchors provided.</li>
<li>Adjust length and routing of each wire to reach each wire entry on the connector backplate. Strip 1/4–in (6.4 mm) of insulation from each wire.</li>
<li>Match and connect thermostat wires to proper terminals on User Interface backplate. See wiring diagram Fig. 11, 12, and 13.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-11-Universal-Four-Wire.jpg" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-12-Connection-Diagram.jpg" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-13-Connection-Diagram.jpg" /></p>
<p>A — Green = Data A<br />
B — Yellow = Data B<br />
C — White = 24VAC (Com)<br />
D — Red = 24VAC (Hot)</p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: It is not mandatory that the above color code be used, but each ABCD connection in the system MUST be wired consistently. A separate ABCD Connector comes inside packaging and should be used when connecting to furnace (or fan coil). Ensure connector is inserted properly into circuit board. (See Fig. 14.)</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-14-Wire-ABCD.jpg" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Warning-Cleaning.png" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation.<br />
Improper wiring of the ABCD connector will cause the Infinity System to operate improperly. Check to make sure all wiring is correct before proceeding with installation or turning on power.</p>
<p>9. Push any excess wire into the wall. Seal hole in wall to prevent any air leaks. Leaks can affect operation.<br />
10. Attach Infinity Control to the mounting plastic by lining up the plastic guides on the back of the control with the opening on the mounting plastic and push on.<br />
11. Perform installation of all other system equipment (i.e. dampers, humidifier, ventilator, UV lights, etc.).<br />
12. Turn on power to equipment.</p>
<p>See wiring diagram, Fig. 11, which includes an indoor communicating furnace or FE fan coil, with a communicating outdoor unit. No additional OAT (outdoor air temperature) sensor is required because the Infinity Control will use the temperature sensor inside the outdoor unit.</p>
<p>See wiring diagram, Fig. 12, for connecting an indoor communicating furnace or FE fan coil with a 1–stage air conditioning unit (non–communicating outdoor). An Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT) sensor may be installed (but is not required) at the indoor furnace or fan coil OAT terminals. When OAT sensor is applied, the Infinity System will provide enhanced system features and benefits.</p>
<p>See wiring diagram, Fig. 13, for connecting an FE fan coil with a 1–stage heat pump (non–communicating outdoor unit). When OAT is applied, the Infinity System will provide enhanced system features and benefits.</p>
<p>In a hybrid heat installation with a non–communicating heat pump, an OAT sensor must be installed, or the heat pump with not run. NOTE: For other applications not listed, refer to the Network Interface Module (NIM) Installation Instructions.</p>
<p><strong>Humidifier Connection</strong></p>
<p>A 24VAC bypass or fan powered humidifier may be installed. NOTE: Do Not Use a traditional humidistat to control humidifier operation. If a humidifier is installed, let the Infinity Control operate humidifier.<br />
<strong>Bypass Humidifiers</strong><br />
A bypass humidifier should be wired directly to the furnace or fan coil HUM and 24VAC COM terminals. The Infinity Control will automatically energize the HUM output during a call for humidification.</p>
<p><strong>Fan Powered Humidifiers</strong><br />
Most fan-powered humidifiers produce internal 24VAC in order to energize upon a switch or contact closure. For this application, a 24VAC N.O. Isolation Relay (DPST) MUST be used to prevent mixing the internal humidifier power with the indoor equipment transformer. Applying 24VAC isolation relay coil to furnace or fan coil HUM and COM terminals will allow the Infinity Control to automatically energize the HUM output during a call for humidification. The N.O. relay contacts will be used to energize the humidifier. See fan-powered humidifier installation instructions for more details.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Warning-Cleaning.png" /><strong> CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>EQUIPMENT HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage. Do not apply 24VAC fan-powered humidifier (with internal power supply) direct to indoor unit HUM and COM terminals.</p>
<h4>INITIAL POWER-UP</h4>
<p>NOTE: Refer to Functional Overview (see Fig. 15) to become familiar with key function buttons such as “System On/Off,” “Fan,” “Left–Side” and “Right– Side” buttons, etc. These function buttons will be used frequently during setup.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-15-Functional-Overview.jpg" /></p>
<h4>Power-Up Sequence</h4>
<p>This section addresses initial power-up (or commissioning) of a new Infinity Control. The User Interface will communicate and identify all Infinity components in the system. The following is a typical example for a communicating Variable–Speed Furnace /Fan Coil with a 2–stage Air Conditioner / Heat Pump (including Hybrid Heat).<br />
The User Interface display will light up and indicate that it is now “ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATIONS WITH EQUIPMENT PLEASE WAIT”. The User Interface will automatically continue by “SEARCHING FOR EQUIPMENT”, followed by “SEARCHING FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT” (see Fig. 16). Once the indoor and outdoor equipment has been found, the Installer will be asked to select Accessories. Packaged Products will be automatically identified and the Installer will be asked to select Accessories. Proceed to Selecting Accessories.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-16-Power-Up-Sequence.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: If the variable–speed indoor equipment (furnace or fan coil) cannot be found, the User Interface will display “CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH INDOOR UNIT”. This MUST be corrected before the initial power-up sequence can continue. If indoor unit is found, but outdoor unit is not found, “OUTDOOR UNIT NOT IDENTIFIED” will appear. Proceed to the next section for Outdoor Unit Identification.<br />
<strong>Selecting Outdoor Unit</strong><br />
If there is no communicating outdoor unit, the screen, shown in Fig. 17, will appear. Press either Left or Right Up/Down button to select AC (air conditioner), HP (heat pump), or None (no unit installed). Press right–side button to continue to next screen. If either AC or HP has been selected as the outdoor unit type, the middle screen will appear (see Fig. 17). Press either Left or Right Up/Down button to select appropriate BTU size of outdoor unit, then press right side button to continue. If a NIM (Network Interface Module) is applied for non–communicating two-stage outdoor equipment, select 1 or 2–stage compressor operation, and press right–side button to continue.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-17-Selecting-Outdoor-Unit.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: Range of outdoor unit BTU selection is limited by model number of indoor unit installed. The Infinity Control will not allow an outdoor unit size that is not supported by the installed indoor unit.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: On new system installations, the model and serial number will be recognized and displayed. On any indoor/outdoor board replacements, the equipment will be recognized but the exact model/serial number will not be displayed.<br />
<strong>Selecting Indoor Evaporator Coil</strong><br />
If a furnace is installed with a variable-capacity heat pump, a screen will appear to select the installed indoor evaporator coil. This selection is used to adequately calculate refrigerant charge required while in the Heat Pump Charging screens under the Heat Pump Checkout menu. Select “other” for non–Carrier evaporators.<br />
<strong>Selecting Electric Heater</strong><br />
If the equipment is a fan coil, packaged heat pump, or packaged AC and the electric heater is not self–identifying, “ELECTRIC HEATER NOT IDENTIFIED” will appear (see Fig. 18). Press either Left or Right Up/Down button to select appropriate size of electric heater installed, then press right–side button to continue. An asterisks (*) will appear next to electric heater sizes that may cause excessive airflow.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-18-Selecting-Electric-Heater.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: Range of electric heaters available is limited by model number of the equipment installed. The Infinity Control will not allow an electric heater size that is not supported by the installed equipment.<br />
<strong>Hydronic Heat Applications</strong><br />
The Infinity Control supports 2 types of Hydronic Heat applications:<br />
1. Hot water coil in combination with an FE fan coil and heat pump, or hot water coil as sole heat source with an FE fan coil.<br />
2. Non–zoned FE fan coil combined with radiant hot water heat.</p>
<p>In either application, a Hydronic Heat kit should be installed in place of an electric heater. See FE fan coil Product Data for accessory part number. The system will identify that Hydonic Heat has been installed during the initial commissioning process. The system will treat the hot water coil as either auxiliary heat in a heat pump application, or the sole heat source. Setup options for Hydronic Heat applications are described in the Setup section of this instruction.</p>
<h4>Selecting Accessories</h4>
<p>Once the indoor and outdoor equipment have been found or entered, the following screens will appear allowing the Installer to select the “AIR FILTER TYPE; HUMIDIFIER INSTALLED”; and “UV LIGHTS INSTALLED” (See Fig. 19). Use either Left or Right Up/Down button to make appropriate selections in the highlighted area on the display screen. Press right–side button to continue (or advance) to the next screen.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-19-Accessories-E28094UV-Lights.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>Air Filter Type</strong><br />
This accessory screen will appear first. The installer will need to enter the type of filter (AIR FILTER, ELEC. AIR CLEANER, or PURIFIER). See Table 1 and make a selection using Left or Right Up/Down button, then press right–side button to continue.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Table-1-E28093-Filter-Selection.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>Humidifier Installed</strong><br />
This will appear after the Air Filter Type screen. Select whether a humidifier is installed on the system, YES or NO, then press right–side button to continue.<br />
<strong>UV Lights Installed</strong><br />
This screen will appear to select whether UV lights are installed on the system, select YES or NO, then press right–side button to continue.</p>
<h4>Equipment Summary</h4>
<p>The “EQUIPMENT SUMMARY” screen will appear after Accessories have been selected. This screen will give a summary of all equipment automatically found or manually selected. If a wrong selection was made, press left–side button (BACK selection) to go back to that particular screen and make changes. When everything is OK, press right–side button again to continue. (See Fig. 20.)</p>
<p>The “SETUP COMPLETE! SAVE ALL SELECTIONS?” screen will appear after Equipment Summary. To Save All Selections press (YES) right–side button. Pressing the left–side button (NO selection) will return to the Equipment Summary screen where changes can be performed to any of the equipment selection screens. After selecting YES, the initial power-up sequence of the new Infinity Control is complete.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-20-Equipment-Summary.jpg" /></p>
<h4>Static Pressure Check</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-21-Static-Pressure-Check.jpg" /></p>
<p>This screen will appear after Setup is exited. The system will perform a static pressure check. This process will take about 1 1/2 minutes to complete. When completed, a screen will appear displaying the static pressure (in inches) across the equipment at the expected highest delivered airflow. If the blower RPM is greater than 1200, then a warning will appear, but equipment operation and the TrueSenset dirty filter detection operation will not be affected.<br />
NOTE: The static pressure check occurs only at initial installation, or when INSTALL is run in the INSTALL/SERVICE menu.</p>
<h4>QUICKSTART</h4>
<p>For first time installers, Quick Start will allow a quick start up of the Infinity System before learning all the details of system operation. However, for the best possible comfort and operation refer to the Infinity Control Owner’s Manual.<br />
<strong>Set Day, Time &amp; Desired Humidity</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Open the door of the Infinity Control and press the BASIC button.</li>
<li>Adjust the highlighted HOUR setting using the LEFT Up/Down button.</li>
<li>Press SCROLL button (down) to highlight MINUTE.</li>
<li>Adjust the MINUTE setting using the LEFT Up/Down button.</li>
<li>Press SCROLL button (down) to highlight DAY.</li>
<li>Adjust the current DAY setting using the LEFT Up/Down button.</li>
<li>Press SCROLL button (down) to highlight HUMIDITY.</li>
<li>Press the red HEAT button to select heating humidity.</li>
<li>Adjust desired heating humidity level using either (+/–) button.</li>
<li>Press the blue COOL button to select cooling humidity.</li>
<li>Adjust the desired cooling humidity level using either(+/–)button.</li>
<li>To exit press BASIC button or close door.</li>
<li>If changes are made, you will be asked to “SAVE CHANGES? YES/NO.”</li>
</ol>
<h4>Override Heating Schedule</h4>
<ol>
<li>Press the red HEAT button. Heating mode is confirmed when the red LED next to the red HEAT button is lit.</li>
<li>Use the RIGHT Up/Down button to select your desired heating temperature.</li>
<li>The default time for temporarily overriding the temperature schedule is 2:00 HRS as indicated by the text on the lower left.<br />
NOTE: Override time will not appear if programming has been turned off.</li>
<li>You can change the temporary override time in 15–minute increments by pressing the LEFT Up/Down button until the desired override time is selected, or press the HOLD button anytime to override the schedule indefinitely.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Quick Program Schedule For All Days</strong><br />
This section will give you a quick program schedule for ALL DAYS of the week. For more information on how to create customized schedules for every day, the entire week, or weekend, refer to the Owner’s Manual.</p>
<ol>
<li>Open the door of the control.</li>
<li>Press the SCHEDULE button, which allows you to create one schedule for the entire home.</li>
<li>Press either the LEFT or RIGHT side button repeatedly (if necessary) until “ALLDAYS” is displayed. The WA K E time period will be highlighted.</li>
<li>Using the LEFT Up/Down button, set the start time for this time period.</li>
<li>Press the red HEAT button. Heating temperature will begin flashing.</li>
<li>Set the heating temperature using the RIGHT Up/Down button.</li>
<li>Press the blue COOL button. Cooling temperature will begin flashing.</li>
<li>Set the cooling temperature using the RIGHT Up/Down button.</li>
<li>Set the remaining periods by using the SCROLL button to select “DAY”, “EVENING”, and “SLEEP”.</li>
<li>Exit the scheduling mode by either closing the door or pressing the SCHEDULE button.</li>
<li>If changes are made, you will be asked to “SAVE CHANGES YES/NO.”</li>
</ol>
<h4>INSTALL / SERVICE MENUS</h4>
<p>The “INSTALL / SERVICE” menus contain a set of vital information. This information enables the Installer or Service person to view a summary of what has been installed, etc. This information is not covered in the Owner’s Manual.<br />
To enter INSTALL / SERVICE menus, press and hold the ADVANCED button for at least ten seconds. The following menu will appear (See Fig. 22):</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-22-Install.jpg" /></p>
<p>NOTE: The INSTALL / SERVICE menu will automatically exit after 60 minutes of no push-button activity.<br />
EQUIPMENT SUMMARY: Shows all equipment recognized by and attached to the system.<br />
INSTALL: Used when adding, changing out, or uninstalling equipment.<br />
SETUP: Used to view or modify equipment settings.<br />
CHECKOUT: Allows testing of equipment operation<br />
SERVICE: Used to view operation and fault history of equipment and enter dealer name/phone number for display</p>
<h4>EQUIPMENT SUMMARY MENU</h4>
<p>This screen shows indoor unit type and model number, outdoor unit type (and model number if a 2–stage unit), filter type and any accessories that are installed are recognized. See Fig. 23.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-23-Equipment-Summary.jpg" /></p>
<h4>INSTALL MENU</h4>
<p>This menu item will perform a start-up process in order to learn all equipment in system. Press right side button to initiate the process. See Fig. 24.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-24-Install-Menu.jpg" /></p>
<h4>SETUP MENU</h4>
<p>This menu has several layers, allowing modification of equipment settings. No settings will need to be made at equipment (i.e. DIP switches on a furnace). All configuration settings made effective from this menu will override equipment configuration made by dip switches. Fig. 25 shows all the information that can be found in the SETUP menu.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-25-Setup-Menu.jpg" /></p>
<h4><strong>Setup — Thermostat</strong></h4>
<p><strong>Auto Mode Setup:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Enable/Disable Auto Changeover mode (default = Enable).</li>
<li>Auto Changeover Time may be adjusted 5 to 120 minutes, (default = 30 minutes).</li>
</ul>
<p>When Auto mode is enabled (factory default) a change from heat to cool (or vice versa) will not occur until the current cycle is satisfied and an opposite mode demand has existed for 30 minutes.<br />
If the setpoint is changed, the 30-minute timer is deleted.<br />
<strong>Heat/Cool Deadband:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>0to6_F(0to3_C), (default = 2_F)</li>
</ul>
<p>The minimum difference enforced between heating and cooling desired temperatures. This can allow one setting to “push” the other to maintain this difference.<br />
<strong>Offsets:</strong><br />
This option allows calibration (or deliberate miscalibration) of the temperature and humidity sensors. These offsets are added to the actual temperature/humidity values (default = 0).</p>
<ul>
<li>Temperature Offset: –5_Fto+5_F(–3_Cto+3_C)</li>
<li>Outside Temp Offset: –5_Fto+5_F(–3_Cto+3_C)</li>
<li>Humidity Offset: –10 to +10%</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Elevation:</strong><br />
0 to 10,000 feet. This value is used to correct the static pressure readings the system performs.<br />
<strong>Cycles Per Hour:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Maximum cycles per hour = 4 (default) or 6.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Programming:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>ON (default)– allows program schedule to be set by user.</li>
<li>OFF — system becomes non–programmable</li>
<li>Periods Per Day = 2 or 4 (default = 4)</li>
<li>Programmable Fan On/Off (default = Off). If ON is selected, fan can be set to Auto, Low, Med, or High.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Smart Recovery:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>On or Off (default = On)</li>
</ul>
<p>Applies to programmable operation only. Will start recovery 90 minutes prior to schedule change in both heating and cooling mode. Refer to operational information for more detail.<br />
<strong>English/Metric Display:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>For_C, (default = _F)</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Reset Factory Defaults:</strong><br />
<strong>Program Schedule:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Yes/No to reset back to Energy Star default Time and Temp schedules.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>User Settings:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Yes/No to reset the user settings in the Advanced Setup to factory default settings.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Install Settings:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Yes/No to reset install settings in Install/Service menus to factory default settings.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Last 10 System Events:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Yes/No to reset last 10 events under Service Info menu.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Setup — Furnace</strong><br />
Upon a first time start–up of the Infinity Control, the furnace DIP switch settings will be copied to the furnace setup menu. Any changes can then be made from the Infinity Control.<br />
<strong>Furnace Airflow:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>COMFORT (default)</li>
<li>EFFICIENCY</li>
</ul>
<p>Selects the airflow of the furnace when heating. EFFICIENCY is the airflow used to meet specified ratings, COMFORT is a decreased airflow used to increase the output air temperature and provide increased comfort.<br />
<strong>Cooling Airflow:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>COMFORT (default) — cooling airflow is varied depending on humidity and temperature demands settings. This selection enables the full dehumidify and comfort capabilities of the system. When COMFORT is not selected, the unit will not run reduced airflows for dehumidification.</li>
<li>EFF 325 — fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings — no dehumidification airflow reduction. This is nominally 325 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used.</li>
<li>EFF 350 — fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings — no dehumidification airflow reduction. This is nominally 350 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used.</li>
<li>MAXIMUM — 400 CFM/ton. No dehumidification airflow reduction.</li>
<li>QUIET– minimum cooling airflow that the system can safely run (typically 300 CFM/ton). Use this setting if duct noise is a severe problem. Note that duct sweating in high humidity environments could be an issue.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Heat Pump Heating:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>COMFORT (default) Heat Pump airflow is varied depending on outdoor temperature to maximize comfort.</li>
<li>EFF 325 — Fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings . This is nominally 325 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used.</li>
<li>EFF 350 — Fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings . This is nominally 350 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used.</li>
<li>MAXIMUM — 400 CFM/ton.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Heat Pump Cooling:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>COMFORT (default) — cooling airflow is varied depending on humidity and temperature demands settings. This selection enables the full dehumidify and comfort capabilities of the system. When COMFORT is not selected, the unit will not run reduced airflows for dehumidification.</li>
<li>EFF 325 — fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings — no dehumidification airflow reduction. This is nominally 325 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used.</li>
<li>EFF 350 — fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings — no dehumidification airflow reduction. This is nominally 350 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used.</li>
<li>MAXIMUM — 400 CFM/ton. No dehumidification airflow reduction.</li>
<li>QUIET– minimum cooling airflow that the system can safely run (typically 300 CFM/ton). Use this setting if duct noise is a severe problem. Note that duct sweating in high humidity environments could be an issue.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Dehum Airflow:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>NORMAL (factory default) — When equipment is running to dehumidify, the airflow is allowed to adjust to a minimum to satisfy the dehumidification call.</li>
<li>HIGH — Minimum airflow during the dehumidify mode is increased to reduce duct and register sweating.</li>
</ul>
<p>Low Heat Rise</p>
<ul>
<li>ON</li>
<li>OFF (default)</li>
</ul>
<p>Set to ON if the system contains a bypass humidifier. The ON setting will increase the furnace low heat airflow.<br />
<strong>Staging</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>SYSTEM (default)</li>
<li>LOW</li>
<li>LOW–MED</li>
<li>LOW–HIGH</li>
<li>MEDIUM</li>
<li>MED–HIGH</li>
<li>HIGH</li>
<li>FURNACE</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: Controls the staging of the furnace. More staging options will be available if furnace is capable of more stages. SYSTEM setting will allow the Infinity Control to determine furnace staging.<br />
<strong>LOW</strong> will only run the low stage of furnace heat. LOW–MED will run the low and medium stages (2 stages of heat). MED will only run the medium stage of heat. MED–HIGH will run the medium and high stages (2 stages of heat). HIGH will only run the high stage of furnace heat.<br />
<strong>G Terminal</strong><br />
This setup option selects desired operation when the R–G circuit changes state on the furnace control board depending on setup.</p>
<ul>
<li>DISABLED (Default)</li>
<li>FAN — turns on fan to selected fan speed when G terminal is energized. See Fig. 26. This setting is used in conjunction with fresh air supply products (e.g. fresh air/make–up air dampers).</li>
<li>FAN SPEED — select Low, Med, High for all zones when G terminal is energized</li>
<li>SHUTDOWN — shuts off fan and equipment when initiated. This function is not intended for emergency fire shutdown. It may be activated by a dry contact from an external device such as a float switch or a relay. User Interface displays SYSTEM MALFUNCTION on screen and registers G terminal shutdown event in Last 10 System Events. See Fig. 27.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Fig.-26-G-Input-Wiring-for-Blower-Operation.jpg" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Fig.-27-G-Input-Wiring-for-System-Shutdown.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>High Stage Timer</strong><br />
Minimum amount of time low stage must operate before high stage is activated. Ten to 60 minutes. 10 = default<br />
A demand of 5_F(3_C) or more will override the staging timer.<br />
<strong>Furnace Airflow (Capacity) Limiting</strong><br />
The following settings allow the installer to restrict the furnace within certain minimum and maximum airflows. These airflows are converted to capacities. The Min and Max limits are determined by the equipment size. These settings are not the same as the zoning airflow limits.<br />
Min CFM (only appears with modulating furnaces)<br />
Minimum CFM to run a modulating furnace. This will increase the minimum operating capacity of the furnace. Default value is the furnace air flow for the lowest heat capacity.<br />
Maximum CFM (only appears with modulating furnaces)<br />
Maximum CFM to run a modulating furnace. This will reduce the operating capacity of the furnace. Default value is the furnace air flow for the highest heat capacity.<br />
<strong>Off Delay</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>90 seconds</li>
<li>120 seconds (default)</li>
<li>150 seconds</li>
<li>180 seconds</li>
</ul>
<p>Amount of time the blower will continue to run after heating has shut off.<br />
<strong>Dehum Drain</strong><br />
Turns off the continuous fan at the end of cooling for five minutes in order to drain the indoor coil of water. The fan will only be turned off if a dehumidify demand existed at the start of or during the cooling cycle. Default is enabled.</p>
<p><strong>Altitude</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>US 0 — 2000 (default)</li>
<li>US 2001 — 3000</li>
<li>CA 2001 — 4500 (for Canada only)</li>
<li>US 3001 — 4000</li>
<li>US 4001 — 5000</li>
<li>US 5001 — 6000</li>
<li>US 6001 — 7000</li>
<li>US 7001 — 8000</li>
<li>US 8001 — 9000</li>
<li>US 9001 — 10000</li>
</ul>
<p>This setting will adjust the furnace’s airflow to compensate for altitude. Altitude adjustment is not available with older furnaces. Please see furnace instructions for further details.</p>
<h4>Setup -Fan Coil</h4>
<p><strong>Heat Pump Heating:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>COMFORT (default) Heat Pump airflow is varied depending on outdoor temperature to maximize comfort.</li>
<li>EFF 325 — Fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings. This is nominally 325 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used.</li>
<li>EFF 350 — Fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings. This is nominally 350 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used.</li>
<li>MAXIMUM — 400 CFM/ton.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Heat Pump Cooling Airflow:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>COMFORT (default) Cooling airflow is varied depending on humidity and temperature demand settings. This selection enables the full dehumidify and comfort capabilities of the system. When COMFORT is not selected, the unit will not run reduced airflows for dehumidification. Heat Pump airflow is varied depending on outdoor temperature to maximize comfort.</li>
<li>EFF 325 — fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings – no dehumidification airflow reduction. This is nominally 325 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used.</li>
<li>EFF 350 — fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings — no dehumidification airflow reduction. This is nominally 350 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used.</li>
<li>MAXIMUM — 400 CFM/ton. No dehumidification airflow reduction.</li>
<li>QUIET– minimum cooling airflow that the system can safely run (typically 300 CFM/ton). Use this setting if duct noise is a severe problem. Note that duct sweating in high humidity environments could be an issue.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Dehum Airflow:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>NORMAL (factory default) — When equipment is running to dehumidify, the airflow is allowed to adjust to a minimum to satisfy the dehumidification call.</li>
<li>HIGH — Minimum airflow during the dehumidify mode is increased to reduce duct and register sweating. Also increases minimum airflow during normal cooling operation to reduce duct sweating.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Heater Size:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>(choices dependent upon fan coil model)</li>
</ul>
<p>This will show the heater size entered during the start–up process. This value can be changed to another value (limited by the model number of the fan coil). If the electric heater is self–identifying, this value is not shown.<br />
<strong>Elect Heat Lockout</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>NONE (default)</li>
<li>+5 to 55_F (–15 to 13_C)</li>
</ul>
<p>Outside temperature above which the electric heat will not operate except for defrost.<br />
<strong>G Terminal</strong><br />
This setup option selects desired operation when the R–G circuit changes state on the fan coil control board depending on setup.</p>
<ul>
<li>DISABLED (Default)</li>
<li>FAN — turns on fan to selected fan speed when G terminal is energized. See Fig. 26. This setting is used in conjunction with fresh air supply products (e.g. fresh air make–up air dampers).</li>
<li>FAN SPEED — select Low, Med, High for all zones when G terminal is energized</li>
<li>SHUTDOWN — shuts off fan and equipment when initiated. This function is not intended for emergency fire shutdown. It may be activated by a dry contact from an external device such as a float switch or a relay. User selects whether the contact is NC — normally closed (default) or NO — normally open. User Interface displays SYSTEM MALFUNCTION on screen and registers G terminal shutdown event in Last 10 System Events.  See Fig. 27.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Dehum Drain</strong><br />
Turns off the continuous fan at the end of cooling for five minutes in order to drain the indoor coil of water. The fan will only be turned off if a dehumidify demand existed at the start of or during the cooling cycle. Default is enabled.<br />
<strong>Reheat Dehum</strong><br />
Enables electric heat to be used while Cool to Dehumidify is running. This will allow the Cool to Dehumidify function to run much longer, greatly improving humidity control in cooling mode. Accumulated electrical energy used while reheating (in kilowatt–hours) is shown on the Fan Coil Run Hours screen and can be reset there. This is only available with fan coil systems.</p>
<p><strong>Setup — Heat Pump / AC</strong><br />
<strong>Cooling Lockout:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>NONE (default)</li>
<li>45_F(7_C)</li>
<li>50_F(10_C)</li>
<li>55_F(13_C)</li>
</ul>
<p>Outside temperature below which cooling will not be provided.<br />
<strong>Low Ambient Cooling:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>NO (default)</li>
<li>YES</li>
</ul>
<p>Selecting YES will enable the low ambient cooling operation in the outdoor unit. This setting is only available with communicating outdoor units and with Cooling Lockout set to NONE. Low ambient kits are not needed with communicating outdoor units. For detailed sequence of operation, see outdoor unit installation instructions.</p>
<p><strong>Entered Size:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>(dependent on indoor unit model)</li>
</ul>
<p>Size of the outdoor unit entered during the start–up process. If the outdoor unit is a communicating model, this value will not be shown. This size can be changed here but is limited to sizes that the indoor unit can handle.<br />
<strong>Defrost Interval:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>30 minutes</li>
<li>60 minutes</li>
<li>90 minutes</li>
<li>120 minutes (default)</li>
<li>Auto–Defrost interval optimized by outdoor control (default for communicating HP)</li>
</ul>
<p>Time interval at which defrost cycles can occur on a heat pump.<br />
<strong>Lockout Temp:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Off (default)</li>
<li>+5 to 55_F (–15 to 18_C)</li>
</ul>
<p>Locks out the heat pump from operating below the selected outside temperature. Appears with a fan coil only. Must be below any electric lockout temperature in Fan Coil Setup.</p>
<p><strong>Quiet Shift</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Off (default)</li>
</ul>
<p>Turns on Quiet Shift function in 1–stage or 2–stage communicating heat pumps.<br />
<strong>High Cool Latch:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>NONE (default)</li>
<li>On</li>
<li>80 to 110_F (27 to 43_C)</li>
<li>DISABLE (disable use of high cool stage)</li>
</ul>
<p>Outside temperature above which only the high stage (of a 2–stage outdoor unit) will run when cooling.</p>
<h4>High Heat Latch</h4>
<ul>
<li>OFF (default)</li>
<li>On</li>
<li>20 to 50_F(–7to10_C) 2 –stage heat pump runs only high stage heating below a selectable outdoor temperature. Selections from20to50_F(–7to10_C) are available in 5_F(3_C) increments.</li>
<li>DISABLE (disable use of high heat stage)</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Max Heat RPM (Appears with variable capacity heat pump)</strong><br />
Clamps the operating speed of the heat pump to this maximum. Used to reduce operating noise while in high heating capacity. Reducing this value will reduce the heating capacity of the heat pump.</p>
<p><strong>Heat Pump Airflow (Capacity) Limiting</strong><br />
The following settings allow the installer to restrict the heat pump within certain minimum and maximum airflows. These airflows are converted to capacities. The Min and Max limits are determined by the equipment size.</p>
<p>Min CFM (only appears with variable capacity heat pump) Minimum CFM to run a variable capacity heat pump. This will increase the minimum operating capacity of the heat pump. Default value is the heat pump air flow for the lowest heat capacity. Maximum CFM (only appears with variable capacity heat pump) Maximum CFM to run a variable capacity heat pump This will reduce the operating capacity of the heat pump. Default value is the heat pump air flow for the highest heat capacity.</p>
<p><strong>Lo Air Multiplier</strong><br />
Adjusts the low airflow speed on non–communicating two–stage<br />
units. Choose 0.65 for units with a Bristol compressor, choose 0.80<br />
(default) for units with a Copeland scroll compressor.</p>
<h4>Setup — Hybrid Heat</h4>
<p>FURNACE LOCKOUT — Temperature above which only the heat pump will operate, except for defrost.</p>
<ul>
<li>Default = NONE</li>
<li>Available settings = NONE thru &gt;55_F(13_C)</li>
</ul>
<p>HEAT PUMP LOCKOUT — Temperature below which only the furnace will operate.</p>
<ul>
<li>Default = NONE</li>
<li>Available settings = NONE thru &lt;55_F(13_C)</li>
</ul>
<p>DEFROST W/FURNACE — Choose whether furnace operates during defrost cycle.</p>
<ul>
<li>Default = YES</li>
<li>Available settings = YES / NO</li>
</ul>
<p>HP TO FURNACE STAGING TIME — Adjust the minimum amount of time the heat pump will run before furnace will be allowedtorun.</p>
<ul>
<li>Default = 15 MIN</li>
<li>Available settings = 15–60 minutes. If a demand of 5_F(3_C) or greater exists, the timer will be overridden.</li>
</ul>
<h4>Setup — Hydronic Heat</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-29-Hydronic-Heat-Setup.jpg" /></p>
<p>HOT WATER LOCKOUT — Outside temperature above which the hot water will not operate except for defrost (if needed).</p>
<ul>
<li>Available settings — NO, 5 to 55_F (–15 to 13_C) in 1_ increments</li>
</ul>
<p>HEAT PUMP LOCKOUT — Outside temperature below which only the hot water will run, 1_F(.6_C) resolution.</p>
<ul>
<li>Appears only with a heat pump outdoor unit.</li>
<li>Available settings — NO, 5 to 55_F (–15 to 13_C) in 1_increments</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>DEFROST W/WATER:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Available settings: YES / NO (Default =YES)</li>
<li>Appears only if heat pump is available If no, hot water will not run during a defrost.</li>
</ul>
<p>AIRFLOW — Selects desired airflow during Hydronic Heating</p>
<ul>
<li>Available range from OFF, 500 CFM(minimum) to 400 CFM/ton cooling maximum in 50 CFM increments.</li>
<li> Default is the cooling airflow. (350 CFM/ton)</li>
<li> OFF selection does not turn off airflow if heat pump is defrosting.</li>
</ul>
<p>BLOWER ON DELAY — Time after hot water is requested that the blower will turn on.</p>
<ul>
<li>Available settings — 0 to 240 seconds in 30 second increments</li>
<li>Default is 30</li>
</ul>
<p>BLOWER OFF DELAY– Time after hot water request terminates before the blower will turn off.</p>
<ul>
<li>Available settings — 0 to 240 seconds in 30 second increments</li>
<li>Default is 0.</li>
</ul>
<p>Setup — Accessories<br />
Filter Type:</p>
<ul>
<li>AIR FILTER (i.e. TrueSenset)</li>
<li>ELEC. AIR CLEANER</li>
<li>AIR PURIFIER (i.e. TrueSenset)</li>
</ul>
<p>CLEAN INTERVAL: Never, 1 to 18 months. (Default = 90) Enables a timer for the filter notification.<br />
Interval at which the Clean Filter notification will turn on.<br />
PRESSURE MONITOR: ENABLE/DISABLE — enables the static pressure calculation for media–type filters.<br />
<strong>Humidifier Installed:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>NO</li>
<li>YES</li>
</ul>
<p>If YES, indicates to the system whether a humidifier is installed and enables humidification functions.<br />
CHANGE PAD INTERVAL: 1 to 24 months (default = 12 months)<br />
Interval at which the Change Humidify Pad notification will be displayed.<br />
HUMIDIFY WITH FAN: (Heating Mode Only)</p>
<ul>
<li>NO (default)</li>
<li>YES</li>
</ul>
<p>If YES, the humidifier will turn on if there is a humidify demand present. The fan will turn on to Low speed if the fan setting is Auto.<br />
<strong>Ventilator:</strong><br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: Only appears if ventilator is installed.<br />
CLEAN INTERVAL:</p>
<ul>
<li>60 to 180 days of actual operation (default = 90)</li>
</ul>
<p>Interval at which the Clean Ventilator Pre–filter notification will turn on.<br />
<strong>UV Lights Installed</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>NO</li>
<li>YES</li>
</ul>
<p>If YES, indicates to the system whether UV lights are installed.<br />
CHANGE INTERVAL:</p>
<ul>
<li>6 to 48 months operation time (default = 12 months)</li>
</ul>
<p>Interval at which the Change UV Lights notification will be displayed.<br />
<strong>Setup — System Maintenance</strong><br />
<strong>Remind Owner of Routine Maintenance Every:</strong><br />
This setup is used to adjust the timer interval in which the normal System Maintenance notification is turned on for the homeowner. (See Fig. 30.)<br />
Range =</p>
<ul>
<li>OFF</li>
<li>6 to 24 months, (default = 12 months)</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-30-System-Maintenance.jpg" /></p>
<p>Pressing the right side button will reset the timer. Pop–up confirmation will be shown.<br />
<strong>Setup — Utility Saver</strong><br />
<strong>Cooling/Heat Pump Heating: (Hybrid Heat &amp; Hydronic Heat Only)</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Turn off, Low Stage</li>
</ul>
<p>Utility Saver is used to force the equipment to a lower stage (low or off) when activated by the utility company, typically during peak load times.<br />
This setup is available only if the equipment has a utility saver input (refer to outdoor equipment Installation Instructions). This setup controls the response of the equipment when the utility saver input is active.<br />
The choices include:</p>
<ul>
<li>Turn Off , (equipment turns off)</li>
<li>Low Stage (available if the AC/heat pump is a 2–stage model, runs low speed only)</li>
</ul>
<h4>CHECKOUT MENUS</h4>
<p>The Checkout menu will show the equipment installed in the system. A sample checkout menu is shown in Fig. 31.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-31-Checkout-Menu.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>Checkout — Furnace or Gas PAC</strong><br />
Make sure the furnace is properly installed before continuing.</p>
<ul>
<li>LOW HEAT RUNTIME: 5 min.</li>
<li>HIGH HEAT RUNTIME: 5 min.</li>
</ul>
<p>This menu item allows the furnace to be exercised. First, a low heat runtime and high heat runtime are selected. Range = 5 — 120 min.<br />
If only the low heat is to be exercised:<br />
The furnace will execute its ignition start–up sequence. This sequence will be displayed on the Infinity Control screen. After the gas valve and blower motor turn on, the screen will automatically change to “FURNACE CHECK” and show the current operating status of the furnace.<br />
<strong>Checkout — Electric Heat</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>ELECTRIC HEAT RUNTIME: 5 min., Default time = 5 min., Range = 0 — 120 min.</li>
</ul>
<p>If you have a fan coil with electric heaters, this menu item will allow the heaters to be exercised.</p>
<p>With self–identifying electric heaters, three stages of electric heat are available to be exercised in any combination. Non–identifying heaters will only provide one stage of heat.<br />
Enter the run time (in minutes) of each stage of heat to be exercised then press START (right–side button). The display will change to show the fan coil’s operating status.</p>
<p><strong>Checkout — Heat Pump Heating</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>HIGH HEAT RUNTIME: 5 min.</li>
<li>LOW HEAT RUNTIME: 5 min.</li>
<li>DEFROST: NO</li>
</ul>
<p>The heat pump heating mode can be exercised with this menu option. With a 2–stage heat pump, a low heat runtime and a high heat runtime are independently selectable to exercise. A defrost cycle is also selectable. Default time = Fixed 5 min. minimum, range = 5 — 120 min.</p>
<p>NOTE: Airflows during Checkout modes are fixed to the Efficiency setting and are independent of other airflow settings. To view airflows for normal heat pump heating mode, exit the Checkout screen and apply a heating demand to the system.<br />
<strong>Checkout — Heat Pump Cooling or AC Cooling</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>HIGH COOL RUNTIME: 5 min.</li>
<li>LOW COOL RUNTIME: 5 min.</li>
</ul>
<p>The heat pump cooling mode (or AC cooling mode) can be exercised with this menu option. With a 2–stage heat pump or AC unit, a low cool runtime and a high cool runtime are independently selectable to exercise. The display will change to show the heat pump or AC operating status.</p>
<p>Default time = Fixed 5 min. minimum, range = 5 — 120 min.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: Airflows during Checkout modes are fixed to the Efficiency setting and are independent of other airflow settings. To view airflows for normal heat pump (or AC) cooling mode, exit the Checkout screen and apply a cooling demand to the system.</p>
<p><strong>Checkout — Humidifier</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>OFF</li>
<li>ON</li>
</ul>
<p>The humidifier can be exercised On and Off with this menu option.<br />
<strong>Charging (Appears with Variable Capacity Heat Pump)</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Enables charging mode of the variable capacity heat pump.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Evacuation (Appears with Variable Capacity Heat Pump)</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Allows the heat pump to be evacuated of refrigerant.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>EXV Position (Appears with Variable Capacity Heat Pump)</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Positions the Electronic Expansion Valve (open or closed)</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Charge Calculation (Appears with Variable Capacity Heat Pump)</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Calculates the amount of charge needed in the system. Takes into account lineset length, liquid line diameter, and indoor coil model.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Checkout — Ventilator<br />
</strong><strong>Speed:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>OFF</li>
<li>LOW</li>
<li>HIGH</li>
</ul>
<p>The ventilator can be exercised through all of its operating speeds with this menu option.</p>
<p><strong>Checkout — System Access Module (SAM)</strong><br />
See System Access Module Installation Instructions for full details.<br />
<strong>SERVICE MENUS</strong><br />
The Service Info menu will only show the equipment installed in the system. Below is a sample using a furnace and a heat pump (Hybrid Heat). A sample service menu is shown in Fig. 32.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Fig.-32-Service-Info-Menu.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>Service — Furnace Status or Gas PAC Status</strong><br />
The Status screens will show all of the current operating parameters of each installed piece of equipment.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: To view a less detailed Equipment Status screen, press the right side button. This will display equipment stage, fan status, actual and target humidify settings.<br />
<strong>Heat Stage:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>OFF, LOW, HIGH</li>
</ul>
<p>Displays stage of heat that the furnace is currently delivering.<br />
<strong>Airflow CFM:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>(furnace model dependent)</li>
</ul>
<p>Cubic Feet per Minute of air the blower is currently delivering.<br />
<strong>Inducer RPM (90% furnaces only):</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Inducer motor RPM value.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Blower RPM:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Actual RPM feedback from indoor blower motor.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Static Press:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Inches of water. Displays the calculated static pressure that the fan coil is currently experiencing.</li>
<li>If static pressure cannot be accurately calculated, the display will read UNKNOWN. When this is seen, the system is adjusting to high static pressure by cutting back blower RPM.</li>
</ul>
<p>Lockout Timer:</p>
<ul>
<li>Seconds</li>
</ul>
<p>If a lockout timer is active, this will show the current time value.<br />
See furnace manual for details on lockout timers.<br />
<strong>Service — Fan Coil Status</strong><br />
<strong>Electric Heat:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>OFF, LOW, MED, HIGH</li>
</ul>
<p>Displays stages of electric heat that the fan coil is currently delivering.<br />
<strong>Airflow CFM:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>(fan coil model number dependent)</li>
</ul>
<p>Cubic Feet per Minute of air the User Interface is currently requesting.<br />
<strong>Blower RPM:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Actual blower motor RPM value</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Static Press:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Inches of water. Displays the calculated static pressure that the fan coil is currently experiencing.</li>
<li>If static pressure cannot be accurately calculated, the display will read UNKNOWN. When this is seen, the system is adjusting to high static pressure by cutting back blower RPM.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Service — Heat Pump / AC Status</strong><br />
<strong>Stage: (Heat / Cool)</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>OFF, LOW, HIGH</li>
</ul>
<p>Displays stage of heating or cooling that the Heat Pump/AC is delivering.<br />
<strong>Defrost:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>NO, YES</li>
</ul>
<p>Displays status of defrost mode if heat pump.<br />
<strong>Airflow CFM:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Airflow User Interface is requesting from blower.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Outdoor Coil Temp:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>F or_C (default = _F)</li>
</ul>
<p>The temperature of the outdoor unit coil (only available on 2–stage communicating outdoor units).<br />
<strong>Blower RPM:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Actual RPM feedback from indoor blower motor.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Static Press:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Inches of water. Displays the calculated static pressure that the fan coil is currently experiencing.</li>
<li>If static pressure cannot be accurately calculated, the display will read UNKNOWN. When this is seen, the system is adjusting to high static pressure by cutting back blower RPM.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Service — Last 10 System Events</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Carrier-Infinity-Control-Thermostat-Fig.-33-Last-10-System-Events.jpg" /></p>
<p>This screen will show last 10 events that occurred throughout the system. Each entry has the time and date incident recorded. Service technician should enter current date in the “TODAY’S DATE” menu section BEFORE checking and logging the last 10 system events. Each entry has a two-letter acronym preceding the event name to identify which piece of equipment generated the event. This event history can be cleared under Thermostat Setup, Reset Factory Defaults.</p>
<p>HP = Heat Pump<br />
AC = Air Conditioner<br />
FN = Furnace<br />
FC = Fan Coil<br />
SPP = Packaged product<br />
SAM = System Access Module<br />
<strong>Service — Run / Fault History</strong><br />
The indoor unit and outdoor unit (if communicating) have the following histories:<br />
NOTE: For Critical Fault Screens, see the Troubleshooting section in this document.<br />
<strong>Resettable Faults:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Fault counters for each piece of equipment that can be reset.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Cycle Counters:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Number of heat/cool/power cycles the unit has performed.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Run Times:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Lifetime hours of operation in heating, cooling, and how long the unit has been powered.</li>
<li>Kilowatt-hours used of electric reheat for dehumidification.</li>
</ul>
<p>Service — Today’s Date<br />
This menu item allows the installer to enter the current date. It is used for time/date stamping of system faults. This should be verified every time prior to viewing “LAST 10 SYSTEM EVENTS” section.<br />
<strong>Service — Model / Serial Numbers</strong><br />
This menu item allows the installer to view the model number and serial number (if available) of all communicating pieces of equipment in the system. This is only available in original factory supplied circuit board. If a circuit board is replaced, the model and serial number information is no longer available.<br />
<strong>Service — Service Phone Number</strong><br />
This menu item allows the installer to enter a name and phone number that the homeowner can call for future service of the system. This name and phone number will appear to the homeowner whenever a service reminder pop–up message is displayed (i.e. Change Filter, etc.).<br />
<strong>To edit:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Use Right Up/Down button to move cursor left and right.</li>
<li>Use Left Up/Down button to select numbers and letters.</li>
<li>Use Scroll button to move up and down between NAME and NUMBER.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>OPERATIONAL INFORMATION</strong><br />
<strong>Continuous Fan Operation</strong><br />
Pressing FAN button will scroll through the following:</p>
<ul>
<li>AUTO = No fan operation except during equipment operation.</li>
<li>LOW = Approximately 50% of High Speed operation.</li>
<li>MED = Half way between High and Low speed operation.</li>
<li>HIGH = Highest of either High Heating or High Cooling CFM.</li>
</ul>
<p>Continuous fan operation is programmable. The programming option must be enabled in the Thermostat Setup. See the Homeowner’s Manual for detailed instructions on programming the fan.<br />
<strong>Five–Minute Compressor Timeguard</strong><br />
This timer prevents compressor from starting unless it has been off for at least 5 minutes. It can be defeated by simultaneously pressing the Fan and Right Up buttons. Emergency Heat (for heat pump applications)<br />
To activate Emergency Heat, you must press and hold the HEAT button for 3 seconds to activate. Repeat to deactivate.<br />
<strong>Heat Source Selection (Hybrid or Hydronic Heat)</strong><br />
If user wishes to override normal operation in Hybrid Heat or Hydronic Heat applications, press and hold the heat button for 3 seconds to select desired heat source.<br />
<strong>Keypad Lockout</strong><br />
Keypad can be locked by pressing “Fan” and “Humidity/Oat” buttons at the same time for 3 seconds. When keys are locked, a lock symbol will appear in the upper left corner of screen. Follow same procedure to unlock keypad.<br />
<strong>Heat and Cool LED</strong><br />
The Heat and Cool LEDs will pulsate during actual equipment operation. This can be defeated in the Advanced Setup Screens.</p>
<p>Equipment Cycle Timer (adjustable 4–6 cycles per hour)<br />
This timer prevents the start of a heating or cooling cycle until 15 (or 10) minutes after the last start of the same cycle. Its function is to assure that the equipment is not cycled more than the selected times per hour. This timer is adjustable from 4 to 6 cycles per hour. This timer is defeated for one cycle when the desired temperature is manually changed. It can also be defeated for one cycle by simultaneously pressing the Fan and Right Up buttons.<br />
<strong>Staging Timer</strong><br />
In multistage heating or cooling, this timer prevents any higher stage from turning on until the preceding stage has been on for 10 minutes.<br />
For furnace heating, the high stage timer is adjustable to force longer minimum low stage run time. See Furnace Setup for details.<br />
A demand of 5_ or more will override the staging timer and allow higher stages to energize.<br />
In Hybrid Heat, the staging timer is 15 minutes between heat pump and gas furnace operation. This timer is adjustable in the Hybrid Heat Setup menu to force longer minimum heat pump run time and longer low-stage furnace run time. A demand of 5_F or more will override the staging timer and allow higher stages to energize.<br />
<strong>Three–Minute Minimum On-Time</strong><br />
In normal operation, when a stage turns on, it will remain on for a minimum of three minutes. If the setpoint is changed, this timer is automatically cancelled, allowing the equipment to turn off immediately when the demand is removed.<br />
<strong>Heat/Cool setpoints (Desired Temperatures)</strong><br />
A minimum difference of 2_ (default) is enforced between heating and cooling desired temperatures. This is done by allowing one setting to “push” the other to maintain this difference. This difference is adjustable via the Install/Service menu under Thermostat Setup.<br />
<strong>Temperature Display</strong><br />
The actual temperature displayed is always rounded toward the setpoint. This is because the system is operating and measuring the temperature in sixteenths of a degree, but displaying in whole numbers. The system may be turned off and on within .5_ of setpoint, but the display may not change. This is by design and does not indicate a problem with the control.<br />
<strong>Auto Changeover</strong><br />
When Auto mode is enabled (factory default) a change from heat to cool (or vice versa) will not occur until an opposite mode demand has existed for 30 minutes. If the setpoint is changed, the 30–minute requirement is defeated. This Auto Changeover time is adjustable via the Install/Service menu under Thermostat Setup.<br />
Range = 5 — 120 min.<br />
<strong>Smart Recovery</strong><br />
With Smart Recovery selected (factory default), transition out of setback begins 1.5 hours before selected recovery time and gradually adjusts room temperature so desired temperature will be achieved at selected recovery time. It operates in both heating and cooling. This only applies to programmable operations.<br />
For example: Set back temperature in heating is 64_F. Smart Recovery setpoint is 70_F at 7:00 a.m. At 5:30 a.m., the control calculates the required temperature recovery rate (recovery temp — set back temp or current temp if greater) / 90 minutes. If the current temp at 5:30 = 66_F, the recovery rate = (70 — 66)_F/90 minutes = 0.04_ per minute. In order to achieve setpoint, the control ramps up the setpoint 0.04_F / minute from 5:30 a.m. until 7:00 a.m. This changing setpoint is displayed while it is occurring.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: Temperatures should not be set back so far that the equipment cannot recover in 90 minutes.</p>
<p><strong>Air Filter</strong><br />
If AIR FILTER or AIR PURIFIER is installed in the indoor unit, the system will perform a static pressure check of the system every 24 hours at 1:00 p.m. to monitor filter accumulation (TrueSenset Dirty Filter Detection) or whenever power is applied to the system or the system is transitioned from Off to Cool or Heat modes. The blower will run at a medium airflow for one minute. This system operates by setting a base line static pressure based on the highest airflow the system could run (this could be heat or cool airflow). The measurement is taken at a low airflow and then calculated up to the highest airflow the system could see.</p>
<p><strong>Frozen Coil Detection</strong><br />
During cooling operation, the User Interface will monitor the static pressure of the system. If the static pressure is increasing dramatically, the User Interface will turn off cooling for up to one hour, record fault in the “Last 10 Events” screen, and run the fan at a reduced airflow. The User Interface will continue to monitor the static pressure. If it is reduced before one hour has elapsed, it will resume cooling operation. After one hour, cooling will be resumed.</p>
<p><strong>Dehumidify Operation</strong><br />
Once a target cooling humidity setpoint is selected in the Advanced Setup COOLING HUMIDITY screen, two other setup options affect Dehumidify operation: COOLING AIRFLOW and DEHUMIDIFY.</p>
<p>COOLING AIRFLOW: Setting this to COMFORT or QUIET will enable the system to use low airflow to help dehumidify the space. If duct sweating becomes an issue, setting DEHUM AIRFLOW to HIGH may resolve the problem. DEHUMIDIFY: Located in the Cooling Humidity screen of the Advanced Setup, this option has 2 settings: ON and OFF. If DEHUMIDIFY is set to ON (factory default), then the cooling unit will be allowed to overcome the space up to 3_F (2_C) if the humidity level is above the cooling humidity target setpoint. The amount of overcooling allowed varies with the dehumidification demand, the cooling demand, and the actual space temperature. More overcooling is allowed with greater dehumidification demand.</p>
<p>When the space temperature is at or above 75_F (24_C) and the dehumidify demand is high, overcooling up to 3_F (2_C) is allowed. As the space temperature approaches 70_F (21_C), less overcooling is allowed. At 70_F (21_C) space temperature, no more overcooling is allowed no matter how great the dehumidify demand. This is done to protect the equipment. If DEHUMIDIFY is set to OFF and Cooling Airflow is set to COMFORT, normal dehumidification mode is enabled. For normal dehumidification, no overcooling is allowed when the cooling humidity is above the target setpoint, but airflow will be reduced during a normal cooling mode to reduce humidity. The airflow depends on the amount of dehumidifying demand. If Cooling Airflow is set to EFFICIENCY or MAXIMUM, only Dehumidify (overcooling to dehumidify) will be performed.</p>
<p><strong>Hybrid Heat Setup / Operation</strong><br />
Furnace Lockout — (in HYBRID HEAT SETUP menu) is the outside temperature above which the furnace will not run except for defrost (otherwise known as the aux heat lockout).<br />
<strong>Heat Pump Lockout</strong> — (in HYBRID HEAT SETUP) is the outside temperature below which the heat pump will not run (otherwise known as the balance point).</p>
<p>These values can be set identical to each other. If they are not identical, the system will stage up and down normally from heat pump to furnace when the outside temperature is between these settings. The User Interface will not allow the heat pump lockout setting to be above the furnace lockout setting.</p>
<p>The factory default settings for both of these is NONE (no lockouts). Even though a heat pump lockout temperature may be set, the system will still use the furnace in defrost operation, and may stage back down to heat pump when defrost is completed after a2minutedelay.</p>
<p><strong>Hybrid Heat Defrost</strong> — (in HYBRID HEAT SETUP) When the outdoor unit needs a defrost cycle, the furnace will run during defrost regardless of lockout temperature, unless told not to in the Hybrid Heat Setup screen. After defrost, the system may stage down to heat pump after a 2-minute delay.</p>
<p>If the room temperature falls below 40_F (4_C) and a furnace lockout is in enabled, the furnace lockout will be overridden to bring on the furnace.</p>
<h4>TROUBLESHOOTING</h4>
<p>Please refer to the Troubleshooting Guide available on HVAC Partners for more detail.<br />
<strong>Infinity Control does not power up.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Recheck wiring to ABCD on all devices.</li>
<li>Make sure all colors match for every terminal.</li>
<li>Make sure power is applied to the indoor unit, and the amber LED is lit on indoor control circuit board.</li>
<li>Check for 24VAC between the C and D terminals at Infinity Control terminal connector and Damper Control Module.</li>
<li>Check fuse on indoor unit’s circuit board.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Display says “Indoor Unit Not Found”</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Recheck wiring to ABCD on all devices.</li>
<li>Make sure all colors match for every terminal.</li>
<li>Press left–side button to try again.</li>
<li>If display still reads “Indoor Unit Not Found”, disconnect accessories and all devices from ABCD and connect User Interface directly to indoor unit with a short piece of thermostat wire. Add other devices one at a time to determine where the communication issue exists.</li>
</ol>
<p>Display says “Outdoor Unit Not Found” and I have a two-stage communicating outdoor unit:</p>
<ol>
<li>Recheck wiring to ABCD connector on outdoor unit.</li>
<li>Make sure all colors match for every terminal.</li>
<li>Check for 24VAC between the C and D terminal connector of outdoor unit.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>I made a mistake on the start-up screens and pressed the right–side button to get to the run mode. How do I get back to startup?</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press the ADVANCED button for at least 10 seconds.</li>
<li>Install/Service menu will appear.</li>
<li>Scroll down to the INSTALL selection.</li>
<li>Press the right–side button; the screen will prompt you to press the right side again to re–install the system.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>To check current system status.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press the right-side button. This will display the current active system faults.</li>
<li>If no faults are active, the Status screen will show status of each component in the system.</li>
</ol>
<h4>SYSTEM MALFUNCTION SCREEN</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/11/Fig.-34-System-Malfunction-Screen.jpg" /></p>
<p><strong>Fan Coil</strong></p>
<p>The code number represents flash code on circuit board of fan coil. Certain faults will generate a system malfunction message on the main screen. When this occurs, a technician should proceed to the Last 10 System Events screen in the Service Menu to determine which fault has caused the message.<br />
Below is a list of which faults will result in a System Malfunction event:<br />
Code 37 — Heater output sensed On when not energized<br />
Code 41 — Blower Motor Fault (ventilator, humidifier, dehumidifier, outdoor unit will be turned off)<br />
Code 44 — Motor Communication Fault (ventilator, humidifier, dehumidifier, outdoor unit will be turned off)<br />
Code 45 — Control failure</p>
<p><strong>Furnace</strong><br />
The code number represents flash code on circuit board of furnace.<br />
Code 13 — Limit Circuit Lockout<br />
Code 14 — Ignition Lockout<br />
Code 15 — Blower Motor Lockout (ventilator, humidifier, dehumidifier, outdoor unit will be turned off)<br />
Code 21 — Gas Heating Lockout<br />
Code 22 — Abnormal Flame Proving Signal<br />
Code 23 — Pressure Switch Did Not Open<br />
Code 24 — Secondary Voltage Fuse Open<br />
Code 33 — Limit Circuit Fault AND high heat only is active<br />
Code 41 — Blower Motor Fault (cooling mode only) (ventilator, humidifier, dehumidifier, outdoor unit will be turned off)<br />
Code 45 — Control Circuitry Lockout</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> For codes 13, 14 and 21, the system will use heat pump heating exclusively if available. When the error code is cleared or disappears, furnace heating will resume if still requested.</p>
<p><strong>Service Tool Mode</strong><br />
The –V model of user interface software version 21 can be used as a service tool on any Infinity system. Attach the –V model user interface anywhere on the ABCD wiring (e.g. at the indoor or outdoor unit). When the user interface powers up, it will ask the user if they wish to enter service mode. Selecting “Yes” will allow the –V model user interface to take over as the system controller, putting the regular system user interface to sleep. The screen on the regular user interface will display “IN SERVICE MODE”. The –V model user interface will then learn all equipment and function as the system controller. While in service mode, the –V model user interface will not transfer any settings or information to or from the regular user interface—-it only takes over control of the system. After removing the –V model user interface from the ABCD wiring, the regular user interface will take over the system after two minutes.<br />
<strong>Outdoor Unit</strong><br />
The code number represents flash code on circuit board of outdoor unit.</p>
<p>Code 25 — Invalid model plug<br />
Code 45 — Control Failure<br />
Code 47 — No 230V at unit<br />
Code 48 — Loss of inverter communications<br />
Code 69 — Inverter internal fault<br />
Code 73 — Contactor shorted<br />
Code 74 — No high voltage at compressor<br />
Code 76 — Low stage didn’t start three times<br />
Code 78 — High stage didn’t start three times<br />
Code 81 — Thermal lockout in low stage — 4 hrs.<br />
Code 82 — Thermal lockout in high stage — 4 hrs.<br />
Code 83 — Low Pressure Lockout — 4 hrs.<br />
Code 84 — High Pressure Lockout — 4 hrs.<br />
Code 85 — Low contactor open<br />
Code 86 — Low contactor shorted<br />
Code 87 — High contactor open<br />
Code 88 — Inverter Temp Lockout or High Contactor Shorted<br />
Code 96 — VDC under voltage lockout<br />
Code 97– VDC over voltage lockout<br />
Code 99 — High torque lockout<br />
<strong>User Interface</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Temp sensor failed, loss of communication with smart sensor, smart sensor fault. “NO SENSOR DATA” shown</li>
<li>Indoor unit communication fault</li>
<li>Outdoor unit communication fault</li>
<li>Packaged product communication fault</li>
<li>NIM communication fault</li>
<li>SAM communication fault</li>
<li>Possible Frozen Coil</li>
<li>High Room Temp Alert, when 100_F exists for at least 10 minutes, and removed when less than or equal to 98_Fexists</li>
<li>Low Room Temp Alert, when 38_F exists for at least 10 minutes, and removed when greater than or equal to 40_Fexists</li>
<li>High Humidity Alert, when 80% Rh exists for 30 minutes, and removed when less than or equal to 78% Rh exists</li>
</ul>
<p>The user can press the right side button to dismiss the notice. The regular run mode screen will then appear except “SYSTEM MALFUNCTION” will appear in place of the day/time. If the error has not disappeared within 24 hours, the above display will return. If the error code disappears, “SYSTEM MALFUNCTION” will disappear and the day/time will reappear.</p>
<p>Copyright 2011 Carrier Corp. S 7310 W. Morris St. S Indianapolis, IN 46231</p>
<p>Printed in China<br />
Edition Date: 11/11</p>
<p>Manufacturer reserves the right to change, at any time, specifications and designs without notice and without obligations.</p>
<h4>FAQS</h4>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>What thermostat is compatible with Carrier Infinity?</strong></p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-answer rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter the answer to the question">Designed exclusively for our Infinity system products for advanced comfort control and energy management. The <strong>ecobee3 lite</strong>, Powered by Carrier, tailors itself to your schedule, your personal comfort preferences and the weather outside</p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>What is hold on Carrier thermostat?</strong></p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-answer rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter the answer to the question">This is where the “Hold” button on your thermostat comes into play. By pressing “Hold”, <strong>your thermostat will lock in the temperature it’s currently at until you change it again</strong>. When you are ready for your normal schedule to resume, simply press the “Run” button and return to your typical programming.</p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>Does Carrier have a smart thermostat?</strong></p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-answer rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter the answer to the question"><strong>Carrier and ecobee now offer the latest in smart thermostat technology</strong>. An ecobee Smart Thermostat powered by Carrier puts you in control of your home comfort and energy savings.</p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>Does Carrier Infinity have wireless sensors?</strong></p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-answer rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter the answer to the question">In addition, <strong>the new smart sensors</strong> highlight the innovation behind the Infinity System by providing an easy-to-read temperature display and intuitive controls. Homeowners also can adjust the fan and hold settings for each zone, as well as monitor the humidity levels and outdoor temperature.</p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>Is there a battery in a Carrier thermostat?</strong></p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-answer rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter the answer to the question">When using batteries for power, we recommend that you replace the batteries at the one bar level with two AA alkaline batteries. <strong>They’re in the back of the thermostat</strong>, so you’ll have to remove it from the wall.</p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>Will low batteries affect thermostat?</strong></p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-answer rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter the answer to the question">When low batteries eventually die, you’ll see a black display screen, <strong>the thermostat will stop working and your heating or cooling units won’t function</strong>. The heating and cooling system cannot respond to nonexistent temperature commands.</p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>What is the most common thermostat setting?</strong></p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-answer rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter the answer to the question">A universal guideline for a normal summer thermostat setting is <strong>78° F</strong>. However, this condition should be set for when you’re at home during the daytime. For optimal comfort to cost ratio, your home thermostat temperature range will vary throughout the day.</p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>Do you have to reset thermostat after changing batteries?</strong></p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-answer rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter the answer to the question">Power off the thermostat and remove the batteries. Put the batteries in the wrong way, with negative to positive and positive to negative. Wait ten seconds and put them back in the correct way. Your thermostat will be reset to factory settings.</p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>Why does my thermostat setting not match my home’s temperature?</strong></p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-answer rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter the answer to the question"><strong>Poor air flow, bad sensors, or other broken components</strong> can also cause room temperatures to be different than your thermostat setting. The biggest clue that your furnace is the culprit is your heating bill.</p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>Do thermostats need to be calibrated?</strong></p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-answer rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter the answer to the question"><strong>Usually, you don’t need to calibrate a digital thermostat too often</strong>, but occasionally, your system might be a little off. Calibrating the thermostat can make it more accurate again. Most digital thermostats are calibrated at the manufacturer, and you don’t need to calibrate them again.</p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>How long do batteries last in a thermostat?</strong></p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-answer rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter the answer to the question">Thermostat batteries can last for <strong>8-12 months but some can last up to five years</strong>. Low batteries in thermostats are common problems that may lead to the inefficiency of your home’s heating and cooling system. Most programmable thermostats show a low battery symbol when the batteries start running low.</p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>What is a good winter thermostat setting?</strong></p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-answer rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter the answer to the question">The ideal thermostat temperature in the winter is <strong>68 degrees Fahrenheit</strong> when you’re at home. Energy.gov suggests that 68 degrees is a good room temperature while you’re awake at home but recommends lowering it while you’re asleep or away.</p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>Is 72 too high for thermostat in winter?</strong></p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-answer rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter the answer to the question"><strong>It’s best to not set your thermostat lower than 70 to 72 degrees</strong>. Most units are not designed to cool a house below that point, and you risk the system freezing up.</p>
<p class="block-editor-rich-text__editable schema-faq-question rich-text" role="textbox" contenteditable="true" aria-multiline="true" aria-label="Enter a question"><strong>Why is my thermostat reading lower than setting?</strong></p>
<p>As with any piece of technology, the thermostat may become faulty from time to time. This affects its ability to assess the temperature accurately. Due to these technical glitches, the thermostat could indicate a lower (or higher) number than the actual temperature.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Carrier Split-System Air Conditioners Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/carrier/split-system-air-conditioners/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 27 Mar 2023 09:58:29 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Carrier]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=34363</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[&#160; CA13NA 018–060 CA14NA 018–060 CA15NA 018–060 CA16N* 018–061 SPLIT–SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS WITH R–410A REFRIGERANT Installation Instructions SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, maintenance, or use can cause an explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause death, personal injury,  or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency, or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory-authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product. Refer to the individual instructions packaged with the kits or accessories when installing. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses, protective clothing, and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for brazing operations. Have fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions included in the literature and attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and current editions of the National  Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70. In Canada, refer to current editions of the Canadian electrical code CSA 22.1. Recognize safety information. This is the safety–alert symbolWhen you see this symbol on the unit and in instructions or manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury.  Understand these signal words; DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION. These words are used with the safety–alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies hazards that could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices which would result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions that will result in enhanced installation,  reliability, or operation. WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. Before installing, modifying, or servicing the system, the main electrical disconnect switch must be in the OFF position. There may be more than 1 disconnect switch. Lockout and tag switch with a suitable warning label. WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in death, serious personal injury, and/or property damage. Never use air or gases containing oxygen for leak testing or operating refrigerant compressors. Pressurized mixtures of air or gases containing oxygen can lead to an explosion. GENERAL NOTE: In some cases, noise in the living area has been traced to gas pulsations from improper installation of equipment. Locate unit away from windows, patios, decks, etc. where unit operation sound may disturb customer. Ensure that vapor and liquid tube diameters are appropriate for unit capacity. Run refrigerant tubes as directly as possible by avoiding unnecessary turns and bends. Leave some slack between structure and unit to absorb vibration. When passing refrigerant tubes through the wall, seal the opening with RTV or other pliable silicon-based caulk (see Fig. 1). Avoid direct tubing contact with water pipes, ductwork, floor joists, wall studs, floors, and walls. Do not suspend refrigerant tubing from joists and studs with a rigid wire or strap which comes in direct contact with tubing (see Fig. 1). Ensure that tubing insulation is pliable and completely surrounds the vapor tube. When necessary, use hanger straps that are 1 in. (25.4 mm) wide and conform to the shape of tubing insulation (see Fig. 1). Isolate hanger straps from insulation by using metal sleeves bent to conform to the shape of insulation. NOTE: Avoid contact between tubing and structure Fig. 1 — Piping Installation For proper unit operation, check refrigerant charge using the charging information located on the control box cover and/or in the Check Charge section of this instruction. IMPORTANT: Maximum liquid–line size is 3/8–in. OD for all residential applications including long line. Refer to Residential Piping and Longline Guideline for further information. IMPORTANT: Always install the factory–supplied liquid–line filter drier. If replacing the filter drier, refer to Product Data Digest for an appropriate part number. Obtain replacement filter driers from your distributor or branch. INSTALLATION IMPORTANT: Effective January 1, 2015, all split systems and packaged air conditioners must be installed pursuant to applicable regional efficiency standards issued by the  Department of Energy. CAUTION CUT HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury. Sheet metal parts may have sharp edges or burrs. Use care and wear appropriate protective clothing and gloves when handling parts. Check Equipment and Job Site UNPACK UNIT Move to the final location. Remove carton taking care not to damage the unit. Inspect Equipment File claim with shipping company prior to installation if the shipment is damaged or incomplete. Locate unit rating plate on unit corner panel. It contains information needed to properly install the unit. Check rating plate to be sure unit matches job specifications. Install on a Solid, Level Mounting Pad If conditions or local codes require the unit to be attached to the pad, tie-down bolts should be used and fastened through knockouts provided in the unit base pan. Refer to the unit mounting pattern in Fig. 2 to determine base pan size and knockout hole location. For hurricane tie-downs, contact the local distributor for details and PE (Professional Engineer)  certification, if required by local authorities. On rooftop applications, mount on a level platform or frame. Place unit above a load-bearing wall and isolate unit and tubing set from the structure. Arrange supporting members to adequately support the unit and minimize transmission of vibration to the building. Consult local codes governing rooftop applications. Roof-mounted units exposed to winds may require wind baffles. Consult the Application Guideline and Service Manual -Residential Split System Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps for wind baffle construction. NOTE: Unit must be level to within ±2 (±3/8 in./ft,.±9.5 mm/m) per compressor manufacturer specifications. Clearance Requirements When installing, allow sufficient space for airflow clearance, wiring, refrigerant piping, and service. Allow 24 in. (609.6 mm) clearance to service end of unit and 48 in. (1219.2  mm) (above unit. For proper airflow, a 6–in. (152.4 mm) clearance on 1 side of the unit and 12–in. (304.8 mm) on all remaining sides must be maintained. Maintain a distance of 24  in. (609.6 mm) between units or 18 in. (457.2 mm) if no overhang within 12 ft. (3.66 m) Position so water, snow, or ice from roof or eaves cannot fall directly on the unit. NOTE: 18” (457.2 mm) clearance option described above is approved for outdoor units with wire grille coil guard only. Units with louver panels require 24” (609.6  mm) between units. On rooftop applications, locate a unit at least 6 in. (152.4 mm) above roof surface. Operating Ambient The minimum outdoor operating ambient in a cooling mode without accessory is 55_F (12.78_C). The maximum outdoor operating ambient in cooling mode is 125_F (51.7_C)  for non–13 SEER models and 115_F (46.11_C) for 13 SEER models. Make Piping Connections WARNING PERSONAL INJURY AND ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. Relieve pressure and recover all refrigerant before system repair or final unit disposal. Use all service ports and open all flow–control devices, including solenoid valves. Federal regulations require that you do not vent refrigerant into the atmosphere. Recover during system repair or final unit disposal. CAUTION UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation. If ANY refrigerant tubing is buried, provide a 6–in (152.4 mm). vertical rise at service valve. Refrigerant tubing lengths up to 36–in (914.4 mm). may be buried without further special consideration. Do not bury lines more than 36–in. (914.4 mm). UNIT BASE PAN Dimension in. (mm) TIEDOWN KNOCKOUT LOCATIONS in. (mm) A B C 23 —1/2 X 23 —1/2 (596.9 X 596.9) 7 —13/16 (198.4) 4–7/16 (112.7) 18–1/16 (458.8) 26 X 26 (660.4 X 660.4) 9–1/8 (231.8) 4–7/16 (112.7) 21–1/4 (539.8) 31–1/2 X 31–1/2 (800.1 X 800.1) 9–1/8 (231.8) 6–9/16 (166.7) 24–11/16 (627.1) 35 X 35 (889 X 889) 9–1/8 (231.8) 6–9/16 (166.7) 28–7/16 (722.3) Fig. 2 — Tiedown Knockout Locations A05177  Outdoor units may be connected to indoor section using accessory tubing package or field–supplied refrigerant grade tubing of correct size and condition. Rated tubing diameters shown in Table 1 are recommended up to 80 ft. (24.38 m). See Product Data for acceptable alternate vapor diameters and associated capacity losses. For tubing requirements beyond 80 ft. (24.38 m), substantial capacity and performance losses can occur. Following the recommendations in the Longline Guideline will reduce these losses.  Refer to Table 1 for field tubing diameters. Refer to Table 6 for accessory requirements. There are no buried–line applications greater than 36–in. (914.4 mm) allowed. If refrigerant tubes or indoor coils are exposed to the atmosphere, they must be evacuated to 500 microns to eliminate contamination and moisture in the system. Outdoor Unit Connected to Factory Approved Indoor Unit The outdoor unit contains correct system refrigerant charge for operation with factory approved AHRI rated indoor unit when connected by 15 ft. (4.57 m) of field-supplied or factory–accessory tubing, and factory supplied filter drier. Check refrigerant charge for maximum efficiency. Refrigerant Tubing Connection Outdoor Connect vapor and liquid tubes to fittings on vapor and liquid service valves (see Table 1). Use refrigerant grade tubing Sweat Connection CAUTION UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation. Service valves must be wrapped in a heat–sinking material such as a wet cloth while brazing. Use refrigeration-grade tubing. Service valves are closed from the factory and ready for brazing. After wrapping the service valve with a wet cloth, braze sweat connections using industry-accepted methods and materials. Consult local code requirements. Refrigerant tubing and indoor coil are now ready for leak testing. This check should include all field and factory joints. Table 1 – Refrigerant Connections and Recommended Liquid and Vapor Tube Diameters (In.)   UNIT SIZE LIQUID RATED VAPOR* Connection &#38; Max. tube diameter Connection Diameter Tube Diameter CA13NA, CA14NA, CA15NA, CA16NA, CA16NW 18, 24 3/8 3/4 3/4 30 3/8 3/4 3/4 36 3/8 7/8 7/8 42, 48 3/8 7/8 7/8 60 3/8 7/8 1 —1/8 CA16NA Models Only 37, 49 3/8 7/8 7/8 61 3/8 7/8 1 —1/8 CA16NW Models Only 43 3/8 7/8 7/8 54, 61 3/8 7/8 1 —1/8 * Units are rated with 25 ft. (7.6 m) of lineset. See Product Datasheet for performance data when using different size and length line sets. Notes: Do not apply capillary tube to these units. For Tubing Set lengths between 80 and 200 ft. (24.38 and 60.96 m) horizontal or 35 ft. (10.7 m) vertical differential 250 ft. (76.2 m) Total Equivalent Length), refer to the  Residential Piping and Longline Guide line— Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps using Puron refrigerant. For alternate liquid line options on 18—42 size units, see Product Data or Residential Piping and Application Guideline Install Liquid–Line Filter Drier Indoor  CAUTION UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation. Installation of filter drier in liquid line is required. Filter drier must be wrapped in a heat–sinking material such as a wet cloth while brazing. Refer to Fig. 3 and install filter drier as follows: Braze 5–in. liquid tube to the indoor coil. Wrap filter drier with a damp cloth. Braze filter drier to above 5–in. (127 mm) liquid tube. Flow arrow must point towards the indoor coil. Connect and braze the liquid refrigerant tube to the filter drier. Fig. 3 — Liquid Line Filter Drier Evacuate Refrigerant Tubing and Indoor Coil CAUTION UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation. Never use the system compressor as a vacuum pump. Refrigerant tubes and indoor coil should be evacuated ystem is free of air and liquid water. A tight dry system will hold a vacuum of 1000 microns after approximately 7  minutes. See Fig. 4. Fig. 4 — Deep Vacuum Graph A95424 Final Tubing Check IMPORTANT: Check to be certain factory tubing on both indoor and outdoor units has not shifted during shipment. Ensure tubes are not rubbing against each other or any sheet metal or wires. Pay close attention to feeder tubes, making sure wire ties on feeder tubes are secure and tight. Installing with Indoor Piston Outdoor Unit Connected to Factory Approved Indoor Unit Check piston size shipped with the indoor unit to see if it matches the required indoor piston size. If it does not match, replace the indoor piston with the correct piston size. Refer to Product Data for piston size. NOTE: Correct pistons are shipped with select outdoor units in the accessory bag and are only for use in certain qualified and approved fan coils, i.e. FB4C. (See Product Data  for a list of approved fan coils that use accessory pistons.) The piston included with the FFMANP* and FPMAN* fan coils are unique to those products and CANNOT be replaced with the piston shipped with the outdoor unit. Refer to the AHRI Directory to check if a certain combination can use a piston or requires an accessory TXV. When changing the indoor pistons, use a backup wrench. Hand tighten hex nut, then tighten with wrench 1/2 turn. Do not exceed 30 ft−lbs. The indoor piston contains a Teflon ring (or seal) which is used to seat against the inside of the distributor body and must be installed properly to ensure proper seating. See Fig 5.  Fig. 5 — Indoor (Cooling) Piston Units with Cooling Mode TXV Units installed with cooling mode TXV require charging by the subcooling method. Operate unit a minimum of 15 minutes before checking charge. Measure liquid service valve pressure by attaching an accurate gauge to the service port. Measure liquid line temperature by attaching an accurate thermistor type or electronic thermometer to the liquid line near the outdoor coil. Refer to unit rating plate for required subcooling temperature. Refer to Table 2 — Rating Plate (required) Subcooling Temperature. Find the point where the required subcooling temperature intersects measured liquid service valve pressure. To obtain the required subcooling temperature at specific liquid line pressure, add refrigerant if liquid line temperature is higher than indicated or reclaim refrigerant if the temperature is lower. Allow a tolerance of ±3_F(±1.7_C). NOTE: If conditions are not favorable see Check Charge instructions on page 8. Units with Indoor Piston Units installed with indoor pistons require charging by the superheat method. The following procedure is valid when indoor airflow is within± 21 percent of its rated CFM. Operate unit a minimum of 15 minutes before checking charge. Measure suction pressure by attaching an accurate gauge to the suction valve service port. Measure suction temperature by attaching an accurate thermistor type or electronic thermometer to the suction line at the service valve. Measure outdoor air dry–bulb temperature with a thermometer. Measure indoor air (entering indoor coil) wet–bulb temperature with a sling psychrometer. RefertoTable3–Superheat Charging — AC Only.Find outdoor temperature and evaporator entering air wet–bulb temperature. At this intersection, note superheat. Where a dash (—-) appears on the table, do not attempt to charge system under these conditions, or refrigerant slugging may occur. The charge must be weighed in, adding or removing  0.6 oz/ft of 3/8 liquid line above or below 15 feet (4.6m) respectively. Refer to Table 4 — Required Suction–Line Temperature. Find superheat temperature (from #6 above) and suction pressure. At this intersection, note suction line temperature. If the unit has a higher suction line temperature than charted temperature, add refrigerant until the charted temperature is reached. If the unit has a lower suction line temperature than charted temperature, reclaim the refrigerant until the charted temperature is reached. When adding refrigerant, charge in liquid form into suction service port using a flow–restricting device. If outdoor air temperature or pressure at suction valve changes, charge to new suction line temperature indicated on the chart. Optimum performance will be achieved when the operating charge produces 6_F suction superheat at suction service valve with 95_F(35_C) outdoor ambient and  0_F(27_C) dry-bulb (67_F/19_C) wet bulb) indoor temperature (DOE “A” test conditions) at rated airflow. Table 2 – Rating Plate (required) Subcooling Temperatures Measure Liquid Pressure (PSIG) R– 410A Required Liquid Line Temperature _F (_C) ºF (ºC) ºF (ºC) ºF (ºC) ºF (ºC) ºF (ºC) ºF (ºC) 6 3 8 4 10 6 12 7 14 8 16 9 251 78 26 76 24 74 23 72 22 70 21 68 20 259 80 27 78 26 76 24 74 23 72 22 70 21 266 82 28 80 27 78 26 76 24 74 23 72 22 274 84 29 82 28 80 27 78 26 76 24 74 23 283 86 30 84 29 82 28 80 27 78 26 76 24 291 88 31 86 30 84 29 82 28 80 27 78 26 299 90 32 88 31 86 30 84 29 82 28 80 27 308 92 33 90 32 88 31 86 30 84 29 82 28 317 94 34 92 33 90 32 88 31 86 30 84 29 326 96 36 94 34 92 33 90 32 88 31 86 30 335 98 37 96 36 94 34 92 33 90 32 88 31 345 100 38 98 37 96 36 94 34 92 33 90 32 364 104 40 102 39 100 38 98 37 96 36 94 34 374 106 41 104 40 102 39 100 38 98 37 96 36 384 108 42 106 41 104 40 102 39 100 38 98 37 395 110 43 108 42 106 41 104 40 102 39 100 38 406 112 44 110 43 108 42 106 41 104 40 102 39 416 114 46 112 44 110 43 108 42 106 41 104 40 427 116 47 114 46 112 44 110 43 108 42 106 41 439 118 48 116 47 114 46 112 44 110 43 108 42 450 120 49 118 48 116 47 114 46 112 44 110 43 462 122 50 120 49 118 48 116 47 114 46 112 44 474 124 51 122 50 120 49 118 48 116 47 114 46 Table 3 – Superheat Charging — AC Only OUTDOOR TEMP  (_F) EVAPORATOR ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE (_F WB) 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 67 68 70 72 74 76 55 9 12 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 37 40 42 45 60 7 10 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 35 38 40 43 65 — 6 10 13 16 19 21 24 27 30 33 36 38 41 70 — — 7 10 13 16 19 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 75 — — — 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 28 31 34 37 80 — — — — 5 8 12 15 18 21 25 28 31 35 85 — — — — — — 8 11 15 19 22 26 30 33 90 — — — — — — 5 9 13 16 20 24 27 31 95 — — — — — — — 6 6 14 18 22 25 29 100 — — — — — — — — 8 12 15 20 23 27 105 — — — — — — — — 5 9 13 17 22 26 110 — — — — — — — — — 6 11 15 20 25 115 — — — — — — — — — — 8 14 18 23 *Optimum performance point, 95_ºF(35_ºC) outdoor ambient and (80_ºF/27_ºC dry bulb), (67_ºF/19_ºC wet bulb) indoor conditions. (DOE A Test Conditions) Where a dash (— — ) appears do not attempt to charge the system under these conditions or refrigerant slugging may occur. The charge must be weighed in. Note: Superheat _ºF is at low—side service port, Allow a tolerance of ±3_ºF(±1.7_ºC) Note: Indoor dry bulb between 70_ºFand80_ºF(21_ºCand27_ºC) Table 4 – Required Suction–Line Temperature   SUPERHEAT TEMP (_F) SUCTION PRESSURE AT SERVICE PORT (PSIG) 107.8 112.2 116.8 121.2 126 130.8 138.8 140.8 145.8 0 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 2 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 4 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 6 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 8 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 10 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 12 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 14 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 16 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 18 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 20 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71 22 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71 73 24 59 61 63 65 67 69 71 73 75 26 61 63 65 67 69 71 73 75 77 28 63 65 67 69 71 73 75 77 79 30 65 67 69 71 73 75 77 79 81 32 67 69 71 73 75 77 79 81 83 34 69 71 73 75 77 79 81 83 85 36 71 73 75 77 79 81 83 85 87 38 73 75 77 79 81 83 85 87 89 40 75 77 79 81 83 85 87 89 91 Make Electrical Connections Be sure field wiring complies with local and national fire, safety, and electrical codes, and voltage to the system is within limits shown on the unit rating plate. Contact local power company for correction of improper voltage. See unit rating plate for recommended circuit protection device. NOTE: Operation of unit on improper line voltage constitutes abuse and could affect unit reliability. See unit rating plate. Do not install the unit in a system where voltage may fluctuate above or below permissible limits. NOTE: Use copper wire only between disconnect switch and unit. NOTE: Install branch circuit disconnect of adequate size per NEC to handle unit starting current. Locate disconnect within sight from and readily accessible from the unit, per  Section 440–14 of NEC. Route Ground and Power Wires Remove access panel to gain access to unit wiring. Extend wires from disconnect through power wiring hole provided and into the unit control box. WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. The unit cabinet must have uninterrupted or unbroken ground to minimize personal injury if an electrical fault should occur. The ground may consist of electrical wire or metal conduit when installed in accordance with existing electrical codes. Connect Ground and Power Wires Connect the ground wire to the ground connection in the control box for safety. Connect power wiring to contactor as shown in Fig. 6. Fig. 6 — Line Connections Connect Control Wiring Route 24–v control wires through control wiring grommet and connect leads to control wiring (See Fig. 8). Refer to Installation Instructions packaged with thermostat. Use No.  18 AWG color-coded, insulated (35_C minimum) wire. If the thermostat is located more than 100 ft. (30.48 m) from the unit, as measured along the control voltage wires, use No.  16 AWG color-coded wire to avoid excessive voltage drop. All wiring must be NEC Class 2 and must be separated from incoming power leads. Use furnace transformer, fan coil transformer, or accessory transformer for control power, 24v/40va minimum. NOTE: The use of available 24v accessories may exceed the minimum 40va power requirement. Determine total transformer loading and increase the transformer capacity or split the load with an accessory transformer as required. Final Wiring Check IMPORTANT: Check factory wiring and field wire connections to ensure terminations are secured properly. Check wire routing to ensure wires are not in contact with tubing,  sheet metal, etc. CompressorCrankcaseHeater When equipped with a crankcase heater, furnish power to the heater a minimum of 24 hr before starting the unit. To furnish power to heater only, set thermostat to OFF and close electrical disconnect to the outdoor unit. A crankcase heater is required if refrigerant tubing is longer than 80 ft. (24.38 m). Refer to the Residential Piping and Longline Guideline and Service Manual Longline Section– Residential Split–System Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps. Install Electrical Accessories Refer to the individual instructions packaged with kits or accessories when installing. Start-Up CAUTION UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury, equipment damage or improper operation. Do not overcharge the system with refrigerant. Do not operate the unit in a vacuum or at negative pressure. Compressor dome temperatures may be hot. CAUTION PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury. Wear safety glasses, protective clothing, and gloves when handling refrigerant and observe the following: Front seating service valves are equipped with Schrader valves. Follow these steps to properly start-up system:  After the system is evacuated, fully open liquid and vapor service valves.  Unit is shipped with valve stem(s) front seated (closed) and caps installed. Replace stem caps after the system is opened to refrigerant flow. Replace caps finger–tight and tighten with wrench an additional 1/12 turn. Close electrical disconnects to energize the system.  Set room thermostat at the desired temperature. Be sure the setpoint is below indoor ambient temperature. Set room thermostat to COOL and fan control to ON or AUTO mode, as desired. Operate the unit for 15 minutes.  Check system refrigerant charge. 3–Phase Monitor In 3–phase units a small circuit board is factory installed to monoline voltage. A small led will flash if a phase problem exists. See code descriptions on the monitor. If LED is flashing, disconnect power to the unit and interchange 2 fields–wiring leads on the unit contactor. Fig. 7 — 3–Phase Monitor Control (Applies to 3–Phase Units Only) Table 5 – Three–Phase Monitor LED Indicators LED STATUS OFF No call for compressor operation FLASHING Reversed-phase ON Normal      CAUTION UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation. Ensure compressor rotation is correct. S 3– phase scroll compressors are rotation sensitive. S A flash LED on phase monitor indicates reverse rotation. (See Table 5) This will not allow the contractor to be energized. S Disconnect power to unit and interchange 2 field– wiring leads on the unit contactor. Sequence of Operation Turn on power to indoor and outdoor units. The transformer is energized. On a call for cooling, the thermostat makes circuits R–Y and R–G. Circuit R–Y energizes contactor, starting outdoor fan motor and compressor circuit. R–G energizes indoor unit blower relay, starting indoor blower motor on high speed. When the thermostat is satisfied, its contacts open, de-energizing contactor and blower relay. Compressor and motors stop. If the indoor unit is equipped with a time–delay relay circuit, the indoor blower will run an additional 90 seconds to increase system efficiency. Check Charge The factory charge amount and desired subcooling are shown on the unit rating plate. The charging method is shown on the information plate inside the unit. To properly check or adjust charge, conditions must be favorable for subcooling charging. Favorable conditions exist when the outdoor temperature is between 70_F and 100_F (21.11_C and 37.78_C), and the indoor temperature is between 70_F and 80_F (21.11_C and 26.67_C). Follow the procedure below: Adjust charge by adding or removing 0.6 oz/ft of 3/8 liquid line above or below 15ft (4.57 m) respectively. For standard refrigerant line lengths (80 ft/24.38 m or less), allow the system to operate in cooling mode at least 15 minutes. If conditions are favorable, check system charge by subcooling method. If any adjustment is necessary, adjust the charge slowly and allow the system to operate for 15 minutes to stabilize before declaring a properly charged system. If the indoor temperature is above 80_F (26.67_C), and the outdoor temperature is in the favorable range, adjust the system charge by weight based on line length and allow the indoor temperature to drop to 80_F (26.67_C) before attempting to check system charge by subcooling method as described above. If the indoor temperature is below 70_F (21.11_C), or the outdoor temperature is not in the favorable range, adjust the charge for line set length above or below 15ft (4.57 m) only. The charge level should then be appropriate for the system to achieve rated capacity. The charge level could then be checked at another time when both indoor and outdoor temperatures are in a more favorable range. NOTE: If the line length is beyond 80 ft (24.38 m) or greater than 35 ft (10.7 m) vertical separation, See Long Line Guideline for special charging requirements. Final Checks IMPORTANT: Before leaving job, be sure to do the following: Ensure that all wiring is routed away from tubing and sheet metal edges to prevent rub–through or wire pinching.  Ensure that all wiring and tubing are secure in the unit before adding panels and covers. Securely fasten all panels and covers.  Tighten service valve stem caps to 1/12–turn past finger tight.  Leave the Owner’s Manual with the owner. Explain system operation and periodic maintenance requirements outlined in the manual. Fill out the Dealer Installation Checklist and place it in the customer file. CARE AND MAINTENANCE For continuing high performance and to minimize possible equipment failure, periodic maintenance must be performed on this equipment. Frequency of maintenance may vary depending upon geographic areas, such as coastal applications. See Owner’s Manual for information. Table 6 – Accessory Usage ACCESSORY REQUIRED FOR LOW– AMBIENT COOLING APPLICATIONS (Below 55°F/12.8_C) REQUIRED FOR LONG LINE APPLICATIONS* REQUIRED FOR SEACOAST APPLICATIONS (Within 2 miles/3.22 km) Ball Bearing Fan Motor Yes{ No No Compressor Start Assist Capacitor and Relay Yes Yes No Crankcase Heater Yes Yes No Evaporator Freeze Thermostat Yes No No Hard Shut — Off TXV Yes Yes Yes Liquid Line Solenoid Valve No No No Motor Master or Low– ambient Pressure Switch Yes] No No Support Feet Recommended No Recommended Winter Start Control Yes No No * For tubing line sets between 80 and 200 ft. (24.38 and 60.96 m) and/or 35 ft. (10.7 m) vertical differential, refer to Residential Piping and Longline Guideline. Additional requirement for Low—Ambient Controller (full modulation feature) MotorMasterr Control. If the unit equipped with an ECM OD motor, both motor and fan need to be replaced per unit accessory guide to work properly. The unit will not meet AHRI rated efficiency once motor and fan are replaced to use this accessory.Fig. 8 — Generic Wiring Diagrams (See Thermostat Installation Instruction for specific unit combinations) PURON (R–410A) REFRIGERANT QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE Puron refrigerant operates at 50–70 percent higher pressures than R–22. Be sure that servicing equipment and replacement components are designed to operate with Puron refrigerant Puron refrigerant cylinders are rose-colored.  Recovery cylinder service pressure rating must be 400 PSIG, DOT 4BA400, or DOT BW400.  Puron refrigerant systems should be charged with liquid refrigerant. Use a commercial type metering device in the manifold hose when charging into suction line with compressor operating  Manifold sets should be 700 psig high side and 180 PSIG low side with 550 psig low–side retard. Use hoses with a 700 psig service pressure rating. Leak detectors should be designed to detect HFC refrigerant.  Puron refrigerant, as with other HFCs, is only compatible with POE oils. Vacuum pumps will not remove moisture from oil. Do not use liquid–line filter driers with rated working pressures less than 600 psig.  Do not leave Puron suction line filter driers in line longer than 72 hours.  Do not install a suction–line filter drier in the liquid line.  POE oils absorb moisture rapidly. Do not expose oil to the atmosphere. POE oils may cause damage to certain plastics and roofing materials  Wrap all filter driers and service valves with a wet cloth when brazing.  A factory-approved liquid–line filter drier is required on every unit. Do NOT use an R–22 TXV.  Never open the system to the atmosphere while it is under a vacuum. When system must be opened for service, recover refrigerant, evacuate then break vacuum with dry nitrogen and replace filter driers. Evacuate to 500 microns prior to recharging. Do not vent Puron refrigerant into the atmosphere. Do not use capillary tube coils. Observe all warnings, cautions, and bold text. Copyright 2017 Carrier Corp. S 7310 W. Morris St. S Indianapolis, IN 46231 Edition Date: 03/17 Catalog No: CA13NA—16NW—07SI The manufacturer reserves the right to change, at any time, specifications and designs without notice and without obligations. Replaces: CA13NA—16NW—06SI [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/carrier/split-system-air-conditioners/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-logo.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>CA13NA 018–060</strong><br />
<strong>CA14NA 018–060</strong><br />
<strong>CA15NA 018–060</strong><br />
<strong>CA16N* 018–061</strong><br />
<strong>SPLIT–SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS</strong><br />
<strong>WITH R–410A REFRIGERANT</strong></p>
<h4>Installation Instructions</h4>
<p><strong>SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS</strong></p>
<p>Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, maintenance, or use can cause an explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause death, personal injury,  or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency, or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory-authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product. Refer to the individual instructions packaged with the kits or accessories when installing.<br />
Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses, protective clothing, and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for brazing operations. Have fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions included in the literature and attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and current editions of the National  Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70. In Canada, refer to current editions of the Canadian electrical code CSA 22.1.</p>
<p>Recognize safety information. This is the safety–alert symbol<strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Godox-WL8P-Waterproof-LED-Light-Godox-WL8hjP-Wat.jpg" /></strong>When you see this symbol on the unit and in instructions or manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury.  Understand these signal words;<strong> DANGER, WARNING</strong>, and <strong>CAUTION</strong>. These words are used with the safety–alert symbol.<strong> DANGER</strong> identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death.<strong> WARNING</strong> signifies hazards that could result in personal injury or death. <strong>CAUTION</strong> is used to identify unsafe practices which would result in minor personal injury or product and property damage.<strong> NOTE</strong> is used to highlight suggestions that will result in enhanced installation,  reliability, or operation.</p>
<table border="0" width="64" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Godox-WL8P-Waterproof-LED-Light-Godox-WL8hjP-Wat.jpg" />WARNING</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><strong>ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.<br />
Before installing, modifying, or servicing the system, the main electrical disconnect switch must be in the OFF position. There may be more than 1 disconnect switch. Lockout and tag switch with a suitable warning label.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table border="0" width="128" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td class="xl65" colspan="2" width="128" height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Godox-WL8P-Waterproof-LED-Light-Godox-WL8hjP-Wat.jpg" />WARNING</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Split-System-Air-Conditioners-icon.webp" /></td>
<td><strong>EXPLOSION HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this warning could result in death, serious personal injury, and/or property damage.<br />
Never use air or gases containing oxygen for leak testing or operating refrigerant compressors. Pressurized mixtures of air or gases containing oxygen can lead to an explosion.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>GENERAL</h4>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> In some cases, noise in the living area has been traced to gas pulsations from improper installation of equipment.</p>
<ol>
<li>Locate unit away from windows, patios, decks, etc. where unit operation sound may disturb customer.</li>
<li>Ensure that vapor and liquid tube diameters are appropriate for unit capacity.</li>
<li>Run refrigerant tubes as directly as possible by avoiding unnecessary turns and bends.</li>
<li>Leave some slack between structure and unit to absorb vibration.</li>
<li>When passing refrigerant tubes through the wall, seal the opening with RTV or other pliable silicon-based caulk (see Fig. 1).</li>
<li>Avoid direct tubing contact with water pipes, ductwork, floor joists, wall studs, floors, and walls.</li>
<li>Do not suspend refrigerant tubing from joists and studs with a rigid wire or strap which comes in direct contact with tubing (see Fig. 1).</li>
<li>Ensure that tubing insulation is pliable and completely surrounds the vapor tube.</li>
<li>When necessary, use hanger straps that are 1 in. (25.4 mm) wide and conform to the shape of tubing insulation (see Fig. 1).</li>
<li>Isolate hanger straps from insulation by using metal sleeves bent to conform to the shape of insulation.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Avoid contact between tubing and structure<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Split-System-Air-Conditioners.webp" /><strong>Fig. 1 — Piping Installation</strong></p>
<p>For proper unit operation, check refrigerant charge using the charging information located on the control box cover and/or in the Check Charge section of this instruction.<br />
<strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> Maximum liquid–line size is 3/8–in. OD for all residential applications including long line. Refer to Residential Piping and Longline Guideline for further information.<br />
<strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> Always install the factory–supplied liquid–line filter drier. If replacing the filter drier, refer to Product Data Digest for an appropriate part number. Obtain replacement filter driers from your distributor or branch.</p>
<h4>INSTALLATION</h4>
<p>IMPORTANT: Effective January 1, 2015, all split systems and packaged air conditioners must be installed pursuant to applicable regional efficiency standards issued by the  Department of Energy.</p>
<table border="0" width="64" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Godox-WL8P-Waterproof-LED-Light-Godox-WL8hjP-Wat.jpg" />CAUTION</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><strong>CUT HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury.<br />
Sheet metal parts may have sharp edges or burrs. Use care and wear appropriate protective clothing and gloves when handling parts.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Check Equipment and Job Site</strong><br />
<strong>UNPACK UNIT</strong><br />
Move to the final location. Remove carton taking care not to damage the unit.<br />
<strong>Inspect Equipment</strong><br />
File claim with shipping company prior to installation if the shipment is damaged or incomplete. Locate unit rating plate on unit corner panel. It contains information needed to properly install the unit. Check rating plate to be sure unit matches job specifications.<br />
<strong>Install on a Solid, Level Mounting Pad</strong><br />
If conditions or local codes require the unit to be attached to the pad, tie-down bolts should be used and fastened through knockouts provided in the unit base pan. Refer to the unit mounting pattern in Fig. 2 to determine base pan size and knockout hole location. For hurricane tie-downs, contact the local distributor for details and PE (Professional Engineer)  certification, if required by local authorities.<br />
On rooftop applications, mount on a level platform or frame. Place unit above a load-bearing wall and isolate unit and tubing set from the structure. Arrange supporting members to adequately support the unit and minimize transmission of vibration to the building. Consult local codes governing rooftop applications. Roof-mounted units exposed to winds may require wind baffles. Consult the Application Guideline and Service Manual -Residential Split System Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps for wind baffle construction.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> Unit must be level to within ±2 (±3/8 in./ft,.±9.5 mm/m) per compressor manufacturer specifications.<br />
<strong>Clearance Requirements</strong><br />
When installing, allow sufficient space for airflow clearance, wiring, refrigerant piping, and service. Allow 24 in. (609.6 mm) clearance to service end of unit and 48 in. (1219.2  mm) (above unit. For proper airflow, a 6–in. (152.4 mm) clearance on 1 side of the unit and 12–in. (304.8 mm) on all remaining sides must be maintained. Maintain a distance of 24  in. (609.6 mm) between units or 18 in. (457.2 mm) if no overhang within 12 ft. (3.66 m) Position so water, snow, or ice from roof or eaves cannot fall directly on the unit.<br />
<strong>NOTE: 18” (457.2 mm) clearance option described above is approved for outdoor units with wire grille coil guard only. Units with louver panels require 24” (609.6  mm) between units.<br />
</strong>On rooftop applications, locate a unit at least 6 in. (152.4 mm) above roof surface.<br />
<strong>Operating Ambient</strong><br />
The minimum outdoor operating ambient in a cooling mode without accessory is 55_F (12.78_C). The maximum outdoor operating ambient in cooling mode is 125_F (51.7_C)  for non–13 SEER models and 115_F (46.11_C) for 13 SEER models.<br />
<strong>Make Piping Connections</strong></p>
<table border="0" width="64" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Godox-WL8P-Waterproof-LED-Light-Godox-WL8hjP-Wat.jpg" />WARNING</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><strong>PERSONAL INJURY AND ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.<br />
Relieve pressure and recover all refrigerant before system repair or final unit disposal. Use all service ports and open all flow–control devices, including solenoid valves. Federal regulations require that you do not vent refrigerant into the atmosphere. Recover during system repair or final unit disposal.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table border="0" width="64" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Godox-WL8P-Waterproof-LED-Light-Godox-WL8hjP-Wat.jpg" />CAUTION</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><strong>UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation.<br />
If ANY refrigerant tubing is buried, provide a 6–in (152.4 mm). vertical rise at service valve. Refrigerant tubing lengths up to 36–in (914.4 mm). may be buried without further special consideration. Do not bury lines more than 36–in. (914.4 mm).</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Split-System-Air-Conditioners-fig.webp" /></p>
<table width="1239">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="91"><strong>UNIT BASE PAN<br />
</strong><strong>Dimension in. (mm)</strong></td>
<td colspan="3" width="228"><strong>TIEDOWN KNOCKOUT LOCATIONS in. (mm)</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="76"><strong>A</strong></td>
<td width="76"><strong>B</strong></td>
<td width="76"><strong>C</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91">23 —1/2 X 23 —1/2 (596.9 X 596.9)</td>
<td width="76">7 —13/16 (198.4)</td>
<td width="76">4–7/16 (112.7)</td>
<td width="76">18–1/16 (458.8)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91">26 X 26 (660.4 X 660.4)</td>
<td width="76">9–1/8 (231.8)</td>
<td width="76">4–7/16 (112.7)</td>
<td width="76">21–1/4 (539.8)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91">31–1/2 X 31–1/2 (800.1 X 800.1)</td>
<td width="76">9–1/8 (231.8)</td>
<td width="76">6–9/16 (166.7)</td>
<td width="76">24–11/16 (627.1)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91">35 X 35 (889 X 889)</td>
<td width="76">9–1/8 (231.8)</td>
<td width="76">6–9/16 (166.7)</td>
<td width="76">28–7/16 (722.3)</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Fig. 2 — Tiedown Knockout Locations A05177 </strong></p>
<p>Outdoor units may be connected to indoor section using accessory tubing package or field–supplied refrigerant grade tubing of correct size and condition. Rated tubing diameters shown in Table 1 are recommended up to 80 ft. (24.38 m). See Product Data for acceptable alternate vapor diameters and associated capacity losses. For tubing requirements beyond 80 ft. (24.38 m), substantial capacity and performance losses can occur. Following the recommendations in the Longline Guideline will reduce these losses.  Refer to Table 1 for field tubing diameters. Refer to Table 6 for accessory requirements.</p>
<p>There are no buried–line applications greater than 36–in. (914.4 mm) allowed.<br />
If refrigerant tubes or indoor coils are exposed to the atmosphere, they must be evacuated to 500 microns to eliminate contamination and moisture in the system.</p>
<p><strong>Outdoor Unit Connected to Factory Approved Indoor Unit</strong><br />
The outdoor unit contains correct system refrigerant charge for operation with factory approved AHRI rated indoor unit when connected by 15 ft. (4.57 m) of field-supplied or factory–accessory tubing, and factory supplied filter drier. Check refrigerant charge for maximum efficiency.<br />
<strong>Refrigerant Tubing Connection Outdoor</strong><br />
Connect vapor and liquid tubes to fittings on vapor and liquid service valves (see Table 1). Use refrigerant grade tubing<br />
<strong>Sweat Connection</strong></p>
<table border="0" width="64" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Godox-WL8P-Waterproof-LED-Light-Godox-WL8hjP-Wat.jpg" />CAUTION</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><strong>UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation.<br />
Service valves must be wrapped in a heat–sinking material such as a wet cloth while brazing.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Use refrigeration-grade tubing. Service valves are closed from the factory and ready for brazing. After wrapping the service valve with a wet cloth, braze sweat connections using industry-accepted methods and materials. Consult local code requirements. Refrigerant tubing and indoor coil are now ready for leak testing. This check should include all field and factory joints.</p>
<p><strong>Table 1 – Refrigerant Connections and Recommended Liquid and Vapor Tube Diameters (In.)</strong></p>
<table width="1341">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="112"><strong> </strong></p>
<p><strong>UNIT SIZE</strong></td>
<td width="69"><strong>LIQUID</strong></td>
<td colspan="2" width="138"><strong>RATED VAPOR*</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="69"><strong>Connection </strong><strong>&amp; Max. tube diameter</strong></td>
<td width="69"><strong>Connection </strong><strong>Diameter</strong></td>
<td width="69"><strong>Tube Diameter</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="4" width="319"><strong>CA13NA, CA14NA, CA15NA, CA16NA, CA16NW</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112"><strong>18,</strong> <strong>24</strong></td>
<td width="69">3/8</td>
<td width="69">3/4</td>
<td width="69">3/4</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112"><strong>30</strong></td>
<td width="69">3/8</td>
<td width="69">3/4</td>
<td width="69">3/4</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112"><strong>36</strong></td>
<td width="69">3/8</td>
<td width="69">7/8</td>
<td width="69">7/8</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112"><strong>42,</strong> <strong>48</strong></td>
<td width="69">3/8</td>
<td width="69">7/8</td>
<td width="69">7/8</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112"><strong>60</strong></td>
<td width="69">3/8</td>
<td width="69">7/8</td>
<td width="69">1 —1/8</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="4" width="319"><strong>CA16NA Models Only</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112"><strong>37,</strong> <strong>49</strong></td>
<td width="69">3/8</td>
<td width="69">7/8</td>
<td width="69">7/8</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112"><strong>61</strong></td>
<td width="69">3/8</td>
<td width="69">7/8</td>
<td width="69">1 —1/8</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="4" width="319"><strong>CA16NW Models Only</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112"><strong>43</strong></td>
<td width="69">3/8</td>
<td width="69">7/8</td>
<td width="69">7/8</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="112"><strong>54,</strong> <strong>61</strong></td>
<td width="69">3/8</td>
<td width="69">7/8</td>
<td width="69">1 —1/8</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>* Units are rated with 25 ft. (7.6 m) of lineset. See Product Datasheet for performance data when using different size and length line sets.<br />
<strong>Notes:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Do not apply capillary tube to these units.</li>
<li>For Tubing Set lengths between 80 and 200 ft. (24.38 and 60.96 m) horizontal or 35 ft. (10.7 m) vertical differential 250 ft. (76.2 m) Total Equivalent Length), refer to the  Residential Piping and Longline Guide line— Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps using Puron refrigerant.</li>
<li>For alternate liquid line options on 18—42 size units, see Product Data or Residential Piping and Application Guideline</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Install Liquid–Line Filter Drier Indoor </strong></p>
<table border="0" width="64" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Godox-WL8P-Waterproof-LED-Light-Godox-WL8hjP-Wat.jpg" />CAUTION</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><strong>UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation.</p>
<ol>
<li>Installation of filter drier in liquid line is required.</li>
<li>Filter drier must be wrapped in a heat–sinking material such as a wet cloth while brazing.</li>
</ol>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Refer to Fig. 3 and install filter drier as follows:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Braze 5–in. liquid tube to the indoor coil.</li>
<li>Wrap filter drier with a damp cloth.</li>
<li>Braze filter drier to above 5–in. (127 mm) liquid tube. Flow arrow must point towards the indoor coil.</li>
<li>Connect and braze the liquid refrigerant tube to the filter drier.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Split-System-Air-Conditioners-fig-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 3 — Liquid Line Filter Drier<br />
</strong></p>
<p><strong>Evacuate Refrigerant Tubing and Indoor Coil</strong></p>
<table border="0" width="64" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Godox-WL8P-Waterproof-LED-Light-Godox-WL8hjP-Wat.jpg" />CAUTION</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><strong>UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation.<br />
Never use the system compressor as a vacuum pump.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Refrigerant tubes and indoor coil should be evacuated ystem is free of air and liquid water. A tight dry system will hold a vacuum of 1000 microns after approximately 7  minutes. See Fig. 4.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Split-System-Air-Conditioners-fig-2.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 4 — Deep Vacuum Graph A95424</strong></p>
<p><strong>Final Tubing Check</strong><br />
<strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> Check to be certain factory tubing on both indoor and outdoor units has not shifted during shipment. Ensure tubes are not rubbing against each other or any sheet metal or wires. Pay close attention to feeder tubes, making sure wire ties on feeder tubes are secure and tight.<br />
<strong>Installing with Indoor<br />
Piston Outdoor Unit Connected to Factory Approved Indoor Unit</strong><br />
Check piston size shipped with the indoor unit to see if it matches the required indoor piston size. If it does not match, replace the indoor piston with the correct piston size. Refer to Product Data for piston size.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Correct pistons are shipped with select outdoor units in the accessory bag and are only for use in certain qualified and approved fan coils, i.e. FB4C. (See Product Data  for a list of approved fan coils that use accessory pistons.)<br />
The piston included with the FFMANP* and FPMAN* fan coils are unique to those products and CANNOT be replaced with the piston shipped with the outdoor unit. Refer to the AHRI Directory to check if a certain combination can use a piston or requires an accessory TXV.<br />
When changing the indoor pistons, use a backup wrench. Hand tighten hex nut, then tighten with wrench 1/2 turn. Do not exceed 30 ft−lbs. The indoor piston contains a Teflon ring (or seal) which is used to seat against the inside of the distributor body and must be installed properly to ensure proper seating. See Fig 5. <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Split-System-Air-Conditioners-fig-3.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 5 — Indoor (Cooling) Piston<br />
</strong></p>
<p><strong>Units with Cooling Mode TXV<br />
</strong>Units installed with cooling mode TXV require charging by the subcooling method.</p>
<ol>
<li>Operate unit a minimum of 15 minutes before checking charge.</li>
<li>Measure liquid service valve pressure by attaching an accurate gauge to the service port.</li>
<li>Measure liquid line temperature by attaching an accurate thermistor type or electronic thermometer to the liquid line near the outdoor coil.</li>
<li>Refer to unit rating plate for required subcooling temperature.</li>
<li>Refer to Table 2 — Rating Plate (required) Subcooling Temperature. Find the point where the required subcooling temperature intersects measured liquid service valve pressure.</li>
<li>To obtain the required subcooling temperature at specific liquid line pressure, add refrigerant if liquid line temperature is higher than indicated or reclaim refrigerant if the temperature is lower. Allow a tolerance of ±3_F(±1.7_C).</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> If conditions are not favorable see Check Charge instructions on page 8.</p>
<p><strong>Units with Indoor Piston</strong><br />
Units installed with indoor pistons require charging by the superheat method.<br />
The following procedure is valid when indoor airflow is within± 21 percent of its rated CFM.</p>
<ol>
<li>Operate unit a minimum of 15 minutes before checking charge.</li>
<li>Measure suction pressure by attaching an accurate gauge to the suction valve service port.</li>
<li>Measure suction temperature by attaching an accurate thermistor type or electronic thermometer to the suction line at the service valve.</li>
<li>Measure outdoor air dry–bulb temperature with a thermometer.</li>
<li>Measure indoor air (entering indoor coil) wet–bulb temperature with a sling psychrometer.</li>
<li>RefertoTable3–Superheat Charging — AC Only.Find outdoor temperature and evaporator entering air wet–bulb temperature. At this intersection, note superheat. Where a dash (—-) appears on the table, do not attempt to charge system under these conditions, or refrigerant slugging may occur. The charge must be weighed in, adding or removing  0.6 oz/ft of 3/8 liquid line above or below 15 feet (4.6m) respectively.</li>
<li>Refer to Table 4 — Required Suction–Line Temperature. Find superheat temperature (from #6 above) and suction pressure. At this intersection, note suction line temperature.</li>
<li>If the unit has a higher suction line temperature than charted temperature, add refrigerant until the charted temperature is reached.</li>
<li>If the unit has a lower suction line temperature than charted temperature, reclaim the refrigerant until the charted temperature is reached.</li>
<li>When adding refrigerant, charge in liquid form into suction service port using a flow–restricting device.</li>
<li>If outdoor air temperature or pressure at suction valve changes, charge to new suction line temperature indicated on the chart.</li>
<li>Optimum performance will be achieved when the operating charge produces 6_F suction superheat at suction service valve with 95_F(35_C) outdoor ambient and  0_F(27_C) dry-bulb (67_F/19_C) wet bulb) indoor temperature (DOE “A” test conditions) at rated airflow.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Table 2 – Rating Plate (required) Subcooling Temperatures</strong></p>
<table width="1486">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3" width="91"><strong>Measure Liquid Pressure </strong><strong>(PSIG)</strong></td>
<td colspan="12" width="581"><strong>R– 410A Required Liquid Line Temperature _F (_C)</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="48"><strong>ºF</strong></td>
<td width="49"><strong>(ºC)</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>ºF</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>(ºC)</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>ºF</strong></td>
<td width="49"><strong>(ºC)</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>ºF</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>(ºC)</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>ºF</strong></td>
<td width="49"><strong>(ºC)</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>ºF</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>(ºC)</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="48"><strong>6</strong></td>
<td width="49"><strong>3</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>8</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>4</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>10</strong></td>
<td width="49"><strong>6</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>12</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>7</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>14</strong></td>
<td width="49"><strong>8</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>16</strong></td>
<td width="48"><strong>9</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>251</strong></td>
<td width="48">78</td>
<td width="49">26</td>
<td width="48">76</td>
<td width="48">24</td>
<td width="48">74</td>
<td width="49">23</td>
<td width="48">72</td>
<td width="48">22</td>
<td width="48">70</td>
<td width="49">21</td>
<td width="48">68</td>
<td width="48">20</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>259</strong></td>
<td width="48">80</td>
<td width="49">27</td>
<td width="48">78</td>
<td width="48">26</td>
<td width="48">76</td>
<td width="49">24</td>
<td width="48">74</td>
<td width="48">23</td>
<td width="48">72</td>
<td width="49">22</td>
<td width="48">70</td>
<td width="48">21</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>266</strong></td>
<td width="48">82</td>
<td width="49">28</td>
<td width="48">80</td>
<td width="48">27</td>
<td width="48">78</td>
<td width="49">26</td>
<td width="48">76</td>
<td width="48">24</td>
<td width="48">74</td>
<td width="49">23</td>
<td width="48">72</td>
<td width="48">22</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>274</strong></td>
<td width="48">84</td>
<td width="49">29</td>
<td width="48">82</td>
<td width="48">28</td>
<td width="48">80</td>
<td width="49">27</td>
<td width="48">78</td>
<td width="48">26</td>
<td width="48">76</td>
<td width="49">24</td>
<td width="48">74</td>
<td width="48">23</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>283</strong></td>
<td width="48">86</td>
<td width="49">30</td>
<td width="48">84</td>
<td width="48">29</td>
<td width="48">82</td>
<td width="49">28</td>
<td width="48">80</td>
<td width="48">27</td>
<td width="48">78</td>
<td width="49">26</td>
<td width="48">76</td>
<td width="48">24</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>291</strong></td>
<td width="48">88</td>
<td width="49">31</td>
<td width="48">86</td>
<td width="48">30</td>
<td width="48">84</td>
<td width="49">29</td>
<td width="48">82</td>
<td width="48">28</td>
<td width="48">80</td>
<td width="49">27</td>
<td width="48">78</td>
<td width="48">26</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>299</strong></td>
<td width="48">90</td>
<td width="49">32</td>
<td width="48">88</td>
<td width="48">31</td>
<td width="48">86</td>
<td width="49">30</td>
<td width="48">84</td>
<td width="48">29</td>
<td width="48">82</td>
<td width="49">28</td>
<td width="48">80</td>
<td width="48">27</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>308</strong></td>
<td width="48">92</td>
<td width="49">33</td>
<td width="48">90</td>
<td width="48">32</td>
<td width="48">88</td>
<td width="49">31</td>
<td width="48">86</td>
<td width="48">30</td>
<td width="48">84</td>
<td width="49">29</td>
<td width="48">82</td>
<td width="48">28</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>317</strong></td>
<td width="48">94</td>
<td width="49">34</td>
<td width="48">92</td>
<td width="48">33</td>
<td width="48">90</td>
<td width="49">32</td>
<td width="48">88</td>
<td width="48">31</td>
<td width="48">86</td>
<td width="49">30</td>
<td width="48">84</td>
<td width="48">29</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>326</strong></td>
<td width="48">96</td>
<td width="49">36</td>
<td width="48">94</td>
<td width="48">34</td>
<td width="48">92</td>
<td width="49">33</td>
<td width="48">90</td>
<td width="48">32</td>
<td width="48">88</td>
<td width="49">31</td>
<td width="48">86</td>
<td width="48">30</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>335</strong></td>
<td width="48">98</td>
<td width="49">37</td>
<td width="48">96</td>
<td width="48">36</td>
<td width="48">94</td>
<td width="49">34</td>
<td width="48">92</td>
<td width="48">33</td>
<td width="48">90</td>
<td width="49">32</td>
<td width="48">88</td>
<td width="48">31</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>345</strong></td>
<td width="48">100</td>
<td width="49">38</td>
<td width="48">98</td>
<td width="48">37</td>
<td width="48">96</td>
<td width="49">36</td>
<td width="48">94</td>
<td width="48">34</td>
<td width="48">92</td>
<td width="49">33</td>
<td width="48">90</td>
<td width="48">32</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>364</strong></td>
<td width="48">104</td>
<td width="49">40</td>
<td width="48">102</td>
<td width="48">39</td>
<td width="48">100</td>
<td width="49">38</td>
<td width="48">98</td>
<td width="48">37</td>
<td width="48">96</td>
<td width="49">36</td>
<td width="48">94</td>
<td width="48">34</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>374</strong></td>
<td width="48">106</td>
<td width="49">41</td>
<td width="48">104</td>
<td width="48">40</td>
<td width="48">102</td>
<td width="49">39</td>
<td width="48">100</td>
<td width="48">38</td>
<td width="48">98</td>
<td width="49">37</td>
<td width="48">96</td>
<td width="48">36</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>384</strong></td>
<td width="48">108</td>
<td width="49">42</td>
<td width="48">106</td>
<td width="48">41</td>
<td width="48">104</td>
<td width="49">40</td>
<td width="48">102</td>
<td width="48">39</td>
<td width="48">100</td>
<td width="49">38</td>
<td width="48">98</td>
<td width="48">37</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>395</strong></td>
<td width="48">110</td>
<td width="49">43</td>
<td width="48">108</td>
<td width="48">42</td>
<td width="48">106</td>
<td width="49">41</td>
<td width="48">104</td>
<td width="48">40</td>
<td width="48">102</td>
<td width="49">39</td>
<td width="48">100</td>
<td width="48">38</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>406</strong></td>
<td width="48">112</td>
<td width="49">44</td>
<td width="48">110</td>
<td width="48">43</td>
<td width="48">108</td>
<td width="49">42</td>
<td width="48">106</td>
<td width="48">41</td>
<td width="48">104</td>
<td width="49">40</td>
<td width="48">102</td>
<td width="48">39</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>416</strong></td>
<td width="48">114</td>
<td width="49">46</td>
<td width="48">112</td>
<td width="48">44</td>
<td width="48">110</td>
<td width="49">43</td>
<td width="48">108</td>
<td width="48">42</td>
<td width="48">106</td>
<td width="49">41</td>
<td width="48">104</td>
<td width="48">40</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>427</strong></td>
<td width="48">116</td>
<td width="49">47</td>
<td width="48">114</td>
<td width="48">46</td>
<td width="48">112</td>
<td width="49">44</td>
<td width="48">110</td>
<td width="48">43</td>
<td width="48">108</td>
<td width="49">42</td>
<td width="48">106</td>
<td width="48">41</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>439</strong></td>
<td width="48">118</td>
<td width="49">48</td>
<td width="48">116</td>
<td width="48">47</td>
<td width="48">114</td>
<td width="49">46</td>
<td width="48">112</td>
<td width="48">44</td>
<td width="48">110</td>
<td width="49">43</td>
<td width="48">108</td>
<td width="48">42</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>450</strong></td>
<td width="48">120</td>
<td width="49">49</td>
<td width="48">118</td>
<td width="48">48</td>
<td width="48">116</td>
<td width="49">47</td>
<td width="48">114</td>
<td width="48">46</td>
<td width="48">112</td>
<td width="49">44</td>
<td width="48">110</td>
<td width="48">43</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>462</strong></td>
<td width="48">122</td>
<td width="49">50</td>
<td width="48">120</td>
<td width="48">49</td>
<td width="48">118</td>
<td width="49">48</td>
<td width="48">116</td>
<td width="48">47</td>
<td width="48">114</td>
<td width="49">46</td>
<td width="48">112</td>
<td width="48">44</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="91"><strong>474</strong></td>
<td width="48">124</td>
<td width="49">51</td>
<td width="48">122</td>
<td width="48">50</td>
<td width="48">120</td>
<td width="49">49</td>
<td width="48">118</td>
<td width="48">48</td>
<td width="48">116</td>
<td width="49">47</td>
<td width="48">114</td>
<td width="48">46</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Table 3 – Superheat Charging — AC Only</strong></p>
<table width="1486">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="136"><strong>OUTDOOR TEMP  (</strong>_<strong>F)</strong></td>
<td colspan="14" width="536"><strong>EVAPORATOR ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE (</strong>_<strong>F WB)</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="39"><strong>50</strong></td>
<td width="38"><strong>52</strong></td>
<td width="39"><strong>54</strong></td>
<td width="38"><strong>56</strong></td>
<td width="38"><strong>58</strong></td>
<td width="38"><strong>60</strong></td>
<td width="38"><strong>62</strong></td>
<td width="38"><strong>64</strong></td>
<td width="38"><strong>67</strong></td>
<td width="38"><strong>68</strong></td>
<td width="38"><strong>70</strong></td>
<td width="38"><strong>72</strong></td>
<td width="38"><strong>74</strong></td>
<td width="39"><strong>76</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>55</strong></td>
<td width="39">9</td>
<td width="38">12</td>
<td width="39">14</td>
<td width="38">17</td>
<td width="38">20</td>
<td width="38">23</td>
<td width="38">26</td>
<td width="38">29</td>
<td width="38">32</td>
<td width="38">35</td>
<td width="38">37</td>
<td width="38">40</td>
<td width="38">42</td>
<td width="39">45</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>60</strong></td>
<td width="39">7</td>
<td width="38">10</td>
<td width="39">12</td>
<td width="38">15</td>
<td width="38">18</td>
<td width="38">21</td>
<td width="38">24</td>
<td width="38">27</td>
<td width="38">30</td>
<td width="38">33</td>
<td width="38">35</td>
<td width="38">38</td>
<td width="38">40</td>
<td width="39">43</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>65</strong></td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">6</td>
<td width="39">10</td>
<td width="38">13</td>
<td width="38">16</td>
<td width="38">19</td>
<td width="38">21</td>
<td width="38">24</td>
<td width="38">27</td>
<td width="38">30</td>
<td width="38">33</td>
<td width="38">36</td>
<td width="38">38</td>
<td width="39">41</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>70</strong></td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="39">7</td>
<td width="38">10</td>
<td width="38">13</td>
<td width="38">16</td>
<td width="38">19</td>
<td width="38">21</td>
<td width="38">24</td>
<td width="38">27</td>
<td width="38">30</td>
<td width="38">33</td>
<td width="38">36</td>
<td width="39">39</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>75</strong></td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">6</td>
<td width="38">9</td>
<td width="38">12</td>
<td width="38">15</td>
<td width="38">18</td>
<td width="38">21</td>
<td width="38">24</td>
<td width="38">28</td>
<td width="38">31</td>
<td width="38">34</td>
<td width="39">37</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>80</strong></td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">5</td>
<td width="38">8</td>
<td width="38">12</td>
<td width="38">15</td>
<td width="38">18</td>
<td width="38">21</td>
<td width="38">25</td>
<td width="38">28</td>
<td width="38">31</td>
<td width="39">35</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>85</strong></td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">8</td>
<td width="38">11</td>
<td width="38">15</td>
<td width="38">19</td>
<td width="38">22</td>
<td width="38">26</td>
<td width="38">30</td>
<td width="39">33</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>90</strong></td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">5</td>
<td width="38">9</td>
<td width="38">13</td>
<td width="38">16</td>
<td width="38">20</td>
<td width="38">24</td>
<td width="38">27</td>
<td width="39">31</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>95</strong></td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">6</td>
<td width="38">6</td>
<td width="38">14</td>
<td width="38">18</td>
<td width="38">22</td>
<td width="38">25</td>
<td width="39">29</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>100</strong></td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">8</td>
<td width="38">12</td>
<td width="38">15</td>
<td width="38">20</td>
<td width="38">23</td>
<td width="39">27</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>105</strong></td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">5</td>
<td width="38">9</td>
<td width="38">13</td>
<td width="38">17</td>
<td width="38">22</td>
<td width="39">26</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>110</strong></td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">6</td>
<td width="38">11</td>
<td width="38">15</td>
<td width="38">20</td>
<td width="39">25</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="136"><strong>115</strong></td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="39">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">—</td>
<td width="38">8</td>
<td width="38">14</td>
<td width="38">18</td>
<td width="39">23</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>*Optimum performance point, 95_<strong>º</strong>F(35_<strong>º</strong>C) outdoor ambient and (80_<strong>º</strong>F/27_<strong>º</strong>C dry bulb), (67_<strong>º</strong>F/19_<strong>º</strong>C wet bulb) indoor conditions. (DOE A Test Conditions)<br />
Where a dash (— — ) appears do not attempt to charge the system under these conditions or refrigerant slugging may occur. The charge must be weighed in.<br />
<strong>Note:</strong> Superheat _<strong>º</strong>F is at low—side service port, Allow a tolerance of ±3_<strong>º</strong>F(±1.7_<strong>º</strong>C)<br />
<strong>Note:</strong> Indoor dry bulb between 70_<strong>º</strong>Fand80_<strong>º</strong>F(21_<strong>º</strong>Cand27_<strong>º</strong>C)</p>
<p><strong>Table 4 – Required Suction–Line Temperature</strong></p>
<table width="1446">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="122"><strong> </strong></p>
<p><strong>SUPERHEAT TEMP (</strong>_<strong>F)</strong></td>
<td colspan="9" width="550"><strong>SUCTION PRESSURE AT SERVICE PORT (PSIG)</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="63"><strong>107.8</strong></td>
<td width="63"><strong>112.2</strong></td>
<td width="63"><strong>116.8</strong></td>
<td width="63"><strong>121.2</strong></td>
<td width="49"><strong>126</strong></td>
<td width="63"><strong>130.8</strong></td>
<td width="63"><strong>138.8</strong></td>
<td width="63"><strong>140.8</strong></td>
<td width="62"><strong>145.8</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>0</strong></td>
<td width="63">35</td>
<td width="63">37</td>
<td width="63">39</td>
<td width="63">41</td>
<td width="49">43</td>
<td width="63">45</td>
<td width="63">47</td>
<td width="63">49</td>
<td width="62">51</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>2</strong></td>
<td width="63">37</td>
<td width="63">39</td>
<td width="63">41</td>
<td width="63">43</td>
<td width="49">45</td>
<td width="63">47</td>
<td width="63">49</td>
<td width="63">51</td>
<td width="62">53</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>4</strong></td>
<td width="63">39</td>
<td width="63">41</td>
<td width="63">43</td>
<td width="63">45</td>
<td width="49">47</td>
<td width="63">49</td>
<td width="63">51</td>
<td width="63">53</td>
<td width="62">55</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>6</strong></td>
<td width="63">41</td>
<td width="63">43</td>
<td width="63">45</td>
<td width="63">47</td>
<td width="49">49</td>
<td width="63">51</td>
<td width="63">53</td>
<td width="63">55</td>
<td width="62">57</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>8</strong></td>
<td width="63">43</td>
<td width="63">45</td>
<td width="63">47</td>
<td width="63">49</td>
<td width="49">51</td>
<td width="63">53</td>
<td width="63">55</td>
<td width="63">57</td>
<td width="62">59</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>10</strong></td>
<td width="63">45</td>
<td width="63">47</td>
<td width="63">49</td>
<td width="63">51</td>
<td width="49">53</td>
<td width="63">55</td>
<td width="63">57</td>
<td width="63">59</td>
<td width="62">61</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>12</strong></td>
<td width="63">47</td>
<td width="63">49</td>
<td width="63">51</td>
<td width="63">53</td>
<td width="49">55</td>
<td width="63">57</td>
<td width="63">59</td>
<td width="63">61</td>
<td width="62">63</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>14</strong></td>
<td width="63">49</td>
<td width="63">51</td>
<td width="63">53</td>
<td width="63">55</td>
<td width="49">57</td>
<td width="63">59</td>
<td width="63">61</td>
<td width="63">63</td>
<td width="62">65</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>16</strong></td>
<td width="63">51</td>
<td width="63">53</td>
<td width="63">55</td>
<td width="63">57</td>
<td width="49">59</td>
<td width="63">61</td>
<td width="63">63</td>
<td width="63">65</td>
<td width="62">67</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>18</strong></td>
<td width="63">53</td>
<td width="63">55</td>
<td width="63">57</td>
<td width="63">59</td>
<td width="49">61</td>
<td width="63">63</td>
<td width="63">65</td>
<td width="63">67</td>
<td width="62">69</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>20</strong></td>
<td width="63">55</td>
<td width="63">57</td>
<td width="63">59</td>
<td width="63">61</td>
<td width="49">63</td>
<td width="63">65</td>
<td width="63">67</td>
<td width="63">69</td>
<td width="62">71</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>22</strong></td>
<td width="63">57</td>
<td width="63">59</td>
<td width="63">61</td>
<td width="63">63</td>
<td width="49">65</td>
<td width="63">67</td>
<td width="63">69</td>
<td width="63">71</td>
<td width="62">73</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>24</strong></td>
<td width="63">59</td>
<td width="63">61</td>
<td width="63">63</td>
<td width="63">65</td>
<td width="49">67</td>
<td width="63">69</td>
<td width="63">71</td>
<td width="63">73</td>
<td width="62">75</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>26</strong></td>
<td width="63">61</td>
<td width="63">63</td>
<td width="63">65</td>
<td width="63">67</td>
<td width="49">69</td>
<td width="63">71</td>
<td width="63">73</td>
<td width="63">75</td>
<td width="62">77</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>28</strong></td>
<td width="63">63</td>
<td width="63">65</td>
<td width="63">67</td>
<td width="63">69</td>
<td width="49">71</td>
<td width="63">73</td>
<td width="63">75</td>
<td width="63">77</td>
<td width="62">79</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>30</strong></td>
<td width="63">65</td>
<td width="63">67</td>
<td width="63">69</td>
<td width="63">71</td>
<td width="49">73</td>
<td width="63">75</td>
<td width="63">77</td>
<td width="63">79</td>
<td width="62">81</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>32</strong></td>
<td width="63">67</td>
<td width="63">69</td>
<td width="63">71</td>
<td width="63">73</td>
<td width="49">75</td>
<td width="63">77</td>
<td width="63">79</td>
<td width="63">81</td>
<td width="62">83</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>34</strong></td>
<td width="63">69</td>
<td width="63">71</td>
<td width="63">73</td>
<td width="63">75</td>
<td width="49">77</td>
<td width="63">79</td>
<td width="63">81</td>
<td width="63">83</td>
<td width="62">85</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>36</strong></td>
<td width="63">71</td>
<td width="63">73</td>
<td width="63">75</td>
<td width="63">77</td>
<td width="49">79</td>
<td width="63">81</td>
<td width="63">83</td>
<td width="63">85</td>
<td width="62">87</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>38</strong></td>
<td width="63">73</td>
<td width="63">75</td>
<td width="63">77</td>
<td width="63">79</td>
<td width="49">81</td>
<td width="63">83</td>
<td width="63">85</td>
<td width="63">87</td>
<td width="62">89</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="122"><strong>40</strong></td>
<td width="63">75</td>
<td width="63">77</td>
<td width="63">79</td>
<td width="63">81</td>
<td width="49">83</td>
<td width="63">85</td>
<td width="63">87</td>
<td width="63">89</td>
<td width="62">91</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4><strong>Make Electrical Connections</strong></h4>
<p>Be sure field wiring complies with local and national fire, safety, and electrical codes, and voltage to the system is within limits shown on the unit rating plate. Contact local power company for correction of improper voltage. See unit rating plate for recommended circuit protection device.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> Operation of unit on improper line voltage constitutes abuse and could affect unit reliability. See unit rating plate. Do not install the unit in a system where voltage may fluctuate above or below permissible limits.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> Use copper wire only between disconnect switch and unit.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> Install branch circuit disconnect of adequate size per NEC to handle unit starting current. Locate disconnect within sight from and readily accessible from the unit, per  Section 440–14 of NEC.<br />
<strong>Route Ground and Power Wires</strong><br />
Remove access panel to gain access to unit wiring. Extend wires from disconnect through power wiring hole provided and into the unit control box.</p>
<table border="0" width="64" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Godox-WL8P-Waterproof-LED-Light-Godox-WL8hjP-Wat.jpg" />WARNING</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><strong>ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.<br />
The unit cabinet must have uninterrupted or unbroken ground to minimize personal injury if an electrical fault should occur. The ground may consist of electrical wire or metal conduit when installed in accordance with existing electrical codes.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Connect Ground and Power Wires</strong><br />
Connect the ground wire to the ground connection in the control box for safety. Connect power wiring to contactor as shown in Fig. 6.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Split-System-Air-Conditioners-fig-7.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 6 — Line Connections</strong></p>
<p><strong>Connect Control Wiring</strong><br />
Route 24–v control wires through control wiring grommet and connect leads to control wiring (See Fig. 8). Refer to Installation Instructions packaged with thermostat. Use No.  18 AWG color-coded, insulated (35_C minimum) wire. If the thermostat is located more than 100 ft. (30.48 m) from the unit, as measured along the control voltage wires, use No.  16 AWG color-coded wire to avoid excessive voltage drop. All wiring must be NEC Class 2 and must be separated from incoming power leads.<br />
Use furnace transformer, fan coil transformer, or accessory transformer for control power, 24v/40va minimum.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> The use of available 24v accessories may exceed the minimum 40va power requirement. Determine total transformer loading and increase the transformer capacity or split the load with an accessory transformer as required.</p>
<p><strong>Final Wiring Check</strong><br />
<strong>IMPORTANT</strong>: Check factory wiring and field wire connections to ensure terminations are secured properly. Check wire routing to ensure wires are not in contact with tubing,  sheet metal, etc.</p>
<p><strong>CompressorCrankcaseHeater</strong><br />
When equipped with a crankcase heater, furnish power to the heater a minimum of 24 hr before starting the unit. To furnish power to heater only, set thermostat to OFF and close electrical disconnect to the outdoor unit.<br />
A crankcase heater is required if refrigerant tubing is longer than 80 ft. (24.38 m). Refer to the Residential Piping and Longline Guideline and Service Manual Longline Section– Residential Split–System Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps.</p>
<p><strong>Install Electrical Accessories</strong><br />
Refer to the individual instructions packaged with kits or accessories when installing.<br />
<strong>Start-Up</strong></p>
<table border="0" width="64" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Godox-WL8P-Waterproof-LED-Light-Godox-WL8hjP-Wat.jpg" />CAUTION</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><strong>UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury, equipment damage or improper operation.</p>
<ul>
<li>Do not overcharge the system with refrigerant.</li>
<li>Do not operate the unit in a vacuum or at negative pressure.</li>
<li>Compressor dome temperatures may be hot.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table border="0" width="64" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Godox-WL8P-Waterproof-LED-Light-Godox-WL8hjP-Wat.jpg" /> CAUTION</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><strong>PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury.<br />
Wear safety glasses, protective clothing, and gloves when handling refrigerant and observe the following:<br />
Front seating service valves are equipped with Schrader valves.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Follow these steps to properly start-up system:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li> After the system is evacuated, fully open liquid and vapor service valves.</li>
<li> Unit is shipped with valve stem(s) front seated (closed) and caps installed. Replace stem caps after the system is opened to refrigerant flow. Replace caps finger–tight and tighten with wrench an additional 1/12 turn.</li>
<li>Close electrical disconnects to energize the system.</li>
<li> Set room thermostat at the desired temperature. Be sure the setpoint is below indoor ambient temperature.</li>
<li>Set room thermostat to COOL and fan control to ON or AUTO mode, as desired. Operate the unit for 15 minutes.  Check system refrigerant charge.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>3–Phase Monitor</strong><br />
In 3–phase units a small circuit board is factory installed to monoline voltage. A small led will flash if a phase problem exists. See code descriptions on the monitor. If LED is flashing, disconnect power to the unit and interchange 2 fields–wiring leads on the unit contactor.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Split-System-Air-Conditioners-fig-5.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 7 — 3–Phase Monitor Control (Applies to 3–Phase Units Only)</strong><br />
<strong>Table 5 – Three–Phase Monitor LED Indicators</strong></p>
<table width="1380">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="134"><strong>LED</strong></td>
<td width="183"><strong>STATUS</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="134"><strong>OFF</strong></td>
<td width="183">No call for compressor operation</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="134"><strong>FLASHING</strong></td>
<td width="183">Reversed-phase</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="134"><strong>ON</strong></td>
<td width="183">Normal</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="317"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Godox-WL8P-Waterproof-LED-Light-Godox-WL8hjP-Wat.jpg" />     </strong><strong>CAUTION</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="317"><strong>UNIT DAMAGE HAZARD</strong></p>
<p>Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation.</p>
<p>Ensure compressor rotation is correct.</p>
<p>S 3<strong>– </strong>phase scroll compressors are rotation sensitive.</p>
<p>S A flash LED on phase monitor indicates reverse rotation. (See Table 5)</p>
<p>This will not allow the contractor to be energized.</p>
<p>S Disconnect power to unit and interchange 2 field<strong>– </strong>wiring leads on the unit contactor.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Sequence of Operation</strong><br />
Turn on power to indoor and outdoor units. The transformer is energized.<br />
On a call for cooling, the thermostat makes circuits R–Y and R–G. Circuit R–Y energizes contactor, starting outdoor fan motor and compressor circuit. R–G energizes indoor unit blower relay, starting indoor blower motor on high speed.<br />
When the thermostat is satisfied, its contacts open, de-energizing contactor and blower relay. Compressor and motors stop. If the indoor unit is equipped with a time–delay relay circuit, the indoor blower will run an additional 90 seconds to increase system efficiency.</p>
<p><strong>Check Charge</strong><br />
The factory charge amount and desired subcooling are shown on the unit rating plate. The charging method is shown on the information plate inside the unit. To properly check or adjust charge, conditions must be favorable for subcooling charging. Favorable conditions exist when the outdoor temperature is between 70_F and 100_F (21.11_C and 37.78_C), and the indoor temperature is between 70_F and 80_F (21.11_C and 26.67_C). Follow the procedure below:</p>
<p>Adjust charge by adding or removing 0.6 oz/ft of 3/8 liquid line above or below 15ft (4.57 m) respectively.<br />
For standard refrigerant line lengths (80 ft/24.38 m or less), allow the system to operate in cooling mode at least 15 minutes. If conditions are favorable, check system charge by subcooling method. If any adjustment is necessary, adjust the charge slowly and allow the system to operate for 15 minutes to stabilize before declaring a properly charged system.</p>
<p>If the indoor temperature is above 80_F (26.67_C), and the outdoor temperature is in the favorable range, adjust the system charge by weight based on line length and allow the indoor temperature to drop to 80_F (26.67_C) before attempting to check system charge by subcooling method as described above.</p>
<p>If the indoor temperature is below 70_F (21.11_C), or the outdoor temperature is not in the favorable range, adjust the charge for line set length above or below 15ft (4.57 m) only. The charge level should then be appropriate for the system to achieve rated capacity. The charge level could then be checked at another time when both indoor and outdoor temperatures are in a more favorable range.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: If the line length is beyond 80 ft (24.38 m) or greater than 35 ft (10.7 m) vertical separation, See Long Line Guideline for special charging requirements.</p>
<p><strong>Final Checks<br />
IMPORTANT</strong>: Before leaving job, be sure to do the following:</p>
<ol>
<li>Ensure that all wiring is routed away from tubing and sheet metal edges to prevent rub–through or wire pinching.</li>
<li> Ensure that all wiring and tubing are secure in the unit before adding panels and covers. Securely fasten all panels and covers.</li>
<li> Tighten service valve stem caps to 1/12–turn past finger tight.</li>
<li> Leave the Owner’s Manual with the owner. Explain system operation and periodic maintenance requirements outlined in the manual.</li>
<li>Fill out the Dealer Installation Checklist and place it in the customer file.</li>
</ol>
<h4>CARE AND MAINTENANCE</h4>
<p>For continuing high performance and to minimize possible equipment failure, periodic maintenance must be performed on this equipment.<br />
Frequency of maintenance may vary depending upon geographic areas, such as coastal applications. See Owner’s Manual for information.<br />
<strong>Table 6 – Accessory Usage</strong></p>
<table width="1400">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="244"><strong>ACCESSORY</strong></td>
<td width="169"><strong>REQUIRED FOR LOW– AMBIENT </strong><strong>COOLING APPLICATIONS</strong></p>
<p><strong>(Below</strong> <strong>55</strong>°<strong>F/12.8_C)</strong></td>
<td width="134"><strong>REQUIRED FOR LONG LINE </strong><strong>APPLICATIONS*</strong></td>
<td width="127"><strong>REQUIRED FOR </strong><strong>SEACOAST APPLICATIONS</strong></p>
<p><strong>(Within 2 miles/3.22 km)</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="244"><strong>Ball</strong> <strong>Bearing Fan Motor</strong></td>
<td width="169">Yes{</td>
<td width="134">No</td>
<td width="127">No</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="244"><strong>Compressor Start Assist Capacitor and Relay</strong></td>
<td width="169">Yes</td>
<td width="134">Yes</td>
<td width="127">No</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="244"><strong>Crankcase Heater</strong></td>
<td width="169">Yes</td>
<td width="134">Yes</td>
<td width="127">No</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="244"><strong>Evaporator Freeze Thermostat</strong></td>
<td width="169">Yes</td>
<td width="134">No</td>
<td width="127">No</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="244"><strong>Hard</strong> <strong>Shut</strong> <strong>—</strong> <strong>Off</strong><strong> TXV</strong></td>
<td width="169">Yes</td>
<td width="134">Yes</td>
<td width="127">Yes</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="244"><strong>Liquid Line Solenoid Valve</strong></td>
<td width="169">No</td>
<td width="134">No</td>
<td width="127">No</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="244"><strong>Motor Master</strong> <strong>or Low– ambient Pressure Switch</strong></td>
<td width="169">Yes]</td>
<td width="134">No</td>
<td width="127">No</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="244"><strong>Support Feet</strong></td>
<td width="169">Recommended</td>
<td width="134">No</td>
<td width="127">Recommended</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="244"><strong>Winter Start Control</strong></td>
<td width="169">Yes</td>
<td width="134">No</td>
<td width="127">No</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>* For tubing line sets between 80 and 200 ft. (24.38 and 60.96 m) and/or 35 ft. (10.7 m) vertical differential, refer to Residential Piping and Longline Guideline.<br />
Additional requirement for Low—Ambient Controller (full modulation feature) MotorMasterr Control.<br />
If the unit equipped with an ECM OD motor, both motor and fan need to be replaced per unit accessory guide to work properly. The unit will not meet AHRI rated efficiency once motor and fan are replaced to use this accessory.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Split-System-Air-Conditioners-icon-1.webp" /><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Split-System-Air-Conditioners-fig-6-1024x560-1.webp" /><strong>Fig. 8 — Generic Wiring Diagrams (See Thermostat Installation Instruction for specific unit combinations)</strong></p>
<p><strong>PURON (R–410A) REFRIGERANT QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE<br />
</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Puron refrigerant operates at 50–70 percent higher pressures than R–22. Be sure that servicing equipment and replacement<br />
components are designed to operate with Puron refrigerant</li>
<li>Puron refrigerant cylinders are rose-colored.</li>
<li> Recovery cylinder service pressure rating must be 400 PSIG, DOT 4BA400, or DOT BW400.</li>
<li> Puron refrigerant systems should be charged with liquid refrigerant. Use a commercial type metering device in the manifold hose when charging into suction line with compressor operating</li>
<li> Manifold sets should be 700 psig high side and 180 PSIG low side with 550 psig low–side retard.</li>
<li>Use hoses with a 700 psig service pressure rating.</li>
<li>Leak detectors should be designed to detect HFC refrigerant.</li>
<li> Puron refrigerant, as with other HFCs, is only compatible with POE oils.</li>
<li>Vacuum pumps will not remove moisture from oil.</li>
<li>Do not use liquid–line filter driers with rated working pressures less than 600 psig.</li>
<li> Do not leave Puron suction line filter driers in line longer than 72 hours.</li>
<li> Do not install a suction–line filter drier in the liquid line.</li>
<li> POE oils absorb moisture rapidly. Do not expose oil to the atmosphere.</li>
<li>POE oils may cause damage to certain plastics and roofing materials</li>
<li> Wrap all filter driers and service valves with a wet cloth when brazing.</li>
<li> A factory-approved liquid–line filter drier is required on every unit.</li>
<li>Do NOT use an R–22 TXV.</li>
<li> Never open the system to the atmosphere while it is under a vacuum.</li>
<li>When system must be opened for service, recover refrigerant, evacuate then break vacuum with dry nitrogen and replace filter driers.<br />
Evacuate to 500 microns prior to recharging.</li>
<li>Do not vent Puron refrigerant into the atmosphere.</li>
<li>Do not use capillary tube coils.</li>
<li>Observe all warnings, cautions, and bold text.</li>
</ul>
<p>Copyright 2017 Carrier Corp.<br />
S 7310 W. Morris St.<br />
S Indianapolis, IN 46231<br />
Edition Date: 03/17<br />
<strong>Catalog No: CA13NA—16NW—07SI</strong><br />
The manufacturer reserves the right to change, at any time, specifications and designs without notice and without obligations.<br />
Replaces: CA13NA—16NW—06SI</p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit"><input id="comment_post_ID" name="comment_post_ID" type="hidden" value="1665963" /><br />
<input id="comment_parent" name="comment_parent" type="hidden" value="0" /></p>
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Carrier Infinity Touch Control Thermostat Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/carrier/infinity-touch-thermostat/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 27 Mar 2023 16:54:09 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Carrier]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=36284</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[&#160; SYSTXCCITW01–A, SYSTXCCITN01–A &#38; SYSTXCCITC01–A Infinityr Touch Control Installation Instructions NOTE: Read the entire instruction manual before starting the installation. US Patents: Carrierr® U.S. Pat No. 7,243,004, Carrierr® U.S. Pat No. 7,775,452, pointSET™ U.S. Pat No. 7,415,102 Safety Considerations Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, maintenance, or use can cause explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause death, personal injury or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory-authorized kits or accessories when modifying this HVAC system. Refer to the individual instructions packaged with the kits or accessories when installing. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses, protective clothing, and work gloves. Have a fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings and cautions included in literature and attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and the current edition of the National Electrical Code  (NEC) NFPA 70. In Canada, refer to the current editions of the Canadian Electrical Code CSA C22.1. Recognize safety information. When you see this symbol on the unit and in instructions or manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING,andCAUTION. These words are used with the safety–alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards, which will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies hazards, which could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices, which may result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions that will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation. Introduction The Infinityr® System consists of several intelligent communicating components which include the Infinityr® Touch Control (or User Interface), variable speed furnace or FE fan coil, and 2–stage AC or HP, which continually communicate with each other via a four-wire connection called the ABCD bus. Commands, operating conditions, and other data are passed continually between components over the ABCD bus. The result is a new level of comfort, versatility, and simplicity. All Infinityr® furnaces or fan coils are variable–speed and multi-stage for maximum flexibility, efficiency, and comfort. They support controlled ventilation, humidification, dehumidification, and air quality control. Either an Infinityr (communicating), or a standard single-stage 24VAC controlled outdoor unit may be used. When using conventional single-stage outdoor units, the Infinity furnace or fan coil provides the 24-volt signals needed to control them. Also, the Infinityr®  Network Interface Module (P/N SYSTXCCNIM01) allows the connection of a Carrier HRV or ERV without the need for separate wall control. When using a Carrier HRV or ERV with a zoned system, the Infinityr® Zone board allows connection of a Carrier HRV or ERV without the need for separate wall control. All system components are controlled through the wall-mounted Infinity Touch Control, which replaces the conventional thermostat and provides the homeowner with a single wall control for all features of the system. Quick Start Set Time and Date From the main screen, touch MENU, on the bottom of the control. The TIME/DATE icon allows you to set the time and date for the Infinityr® Touch Control. To set the HOUR, MINUTE, MONTH, DAY, or YEAR touch the feature you wish to change. Use the Up () and Down () buttons to make the appropriate changes. When you have completed all of the settings touch SAVE. If you make a mistake you may touch CANCEL and begin again. Set Dealer Information From the main screen, touch MENU, on the bottom of the control. The SERVICE icon allows you to upload your contact information into the Infinity Touch Control. A12176 Format your contact information and logo (if applicable) using the PC/MAC application, save it to a standard USB drive. See Section 6.7. Touch the SERVICE icon for about 10 seconds, then touch DEALER LOGO UPLOAD. Place the USB drive into the USB port on the bottom of the Infinity Touch Control and follow the on screen prompts. More detailed information can be found on HVACPartners.com under the Product tab&#62; Thermostats &#38; Controls&#62; SYSTXCCITW01&#62; Documents &#38; Downloads&#62; Marketing/Miscellaneous&#62; Infinity Touch Control Dealer Logo Application — Instructions. Installation Overview This instruction covers installation of the Infinityr® Touch Control and the Infinityr Wireless Access Point only. Physical installation instructions for the indoor and outdoor equipment, and accessories are provided with each unit. Setup, commissioning, operation, and troubleshooting of the Infinityr® System are covered only in this installation instruction. It is the guide to connecting the system components and commissioning the system once all physical components are installed. Special screen prompts and start-up capabilities are provided in the Infinityr® System to simplify and automate the initial commissioning of the system. Install the Infinity Touch Control according to this instruction. Install indoor unit, outdoor unit, and accessories according to their instructions. Wire complete system according to this instruction. Setup, commission, and operate system according to this instruction to assure a smooth and trouble-free startup. Check Equipment Inspect equipment. File a claim with shipping company prior to installation if shipment is damaged or incomplete. Location WARNING ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. Disconnect power before routing control wiring. All wiring must comply with national, local, and state codes. Wall Control The Infinity Touch Control is the command center for the Infinity System. It should be located where it is easily accessible and visible to the adult homeowner or end-user. For accurate temperature measurement, the following guidelines should be followed: The Infinity Touch Control and Remote Room Sensors SHOULD be mounted: Approximately 5–ft (1.5 m) from the floor. Close to or in a frequently used room, preferably on an inside partitioning wall. On a section of wall without pipes or ductwork. The Infinity Touch Control and Remote Room Sensors SHOULD NOT be mounted: Close to a window, on an outside wall, or next to a door leading to the outside. Exposed to direct light or heat from a lamp, sun, fireplace, or other temperature–radiating objects which could cause a false reading. Close to or in direct airflow from supply registers. In areas with poor air circulation, such as behind a door or in an alcove. Remote Room Sensors A Remote Room Sensor can be used with the Infinity Touch Control to take the place of the control’s internal temperature sensor. This allows the Infinity Touch Control to be mounted in areas with less than optimal airflow (such as near an exterior door, window or in a closet). The remote sensor can be wired to the terminal block connectors labeled S1 and S2 at the control’s backplate, or the ZS1 and ZS1C connection at the Damper Control Module. In either case, the  Infinity Touch Control will automatically detect the Remote Room Sensor and ignore its internal temperature sensor. Remote Room Sensor Averaging Typically, one remote sensor is used but, multiple sensors may be used and averaged in some applications. Averaging requires a special series-parallel wiring method with a specific number of sensors. See figure below. It is also important to note the humidity sensor cannot be remotely located, so do not locate the  Infinity Control in an area where humidity sensing may not be accurate. Smart Sensors (for zoning applications) Any zone may use a Smart Sensor. It provides a temperature display and buttons to adjust the desired temperature in that zone only. It also displays outdoor temperature and indoor humidity sensed at the control. Only one Smart Sensor may be used per zone. They cannot be averaged like Remote Room Sensors. If a  Smart Sensor is used in a zone, a Remote Room Sensor may also be used in the same zone. The Remote Room Sensor has priority over the Smart Sensor. The  Smart Sensor will display the Remote Room Sensor temperature. NOTE: Smart Sensors must be addressed to identify which zone it will control. See Smart Sensor Installation Instructions for details. Wiring Considerations Ordinary thermostat wire is recommended. Use 22 AWG or larger for normal wiring applications. Continuous wire lengths over 100 ft. should use 20 AWG or larger. NOTE: ABCD bus wiring only requires a four-wire connection; however, it is good practice to run thermostat cable having more than four wires in the event of a damaged or broken wire during installation. Each communicating device in the Infinityr Zone System has a four-pin connector labeled ABCD. It is recommended that the following color code be used  when wiring each device: A — Green = Data A B — Yellow = Data B C — White = 24VAC (Com) D — Red = 24VAC (Hot) WARNING ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. Before installing, modifying, or servicing the system, the main electrical disconnect switch must be in the OFF position. There may be more than 1 disconnect switch.  Lockout and tag switch with a suitable warning label. Turn off all power to equipment. If an existing Infinityr Control or other control is being replaced: Remove existing control from wall. Disconnect wires from existing control. Discard or recycle old control.  NOTE: Mercury is a hazardous waste, if existing control contains any mercury, it MUST be disposed of properly. The Infinity Touch Control does not contain mercury. Select Infinity Control mounting plastic (backplate and decorative backplate if desired). Route wires through large hole in mounting plastic. Level rear plastic against wall (for aesthetic value only; Infinity Touch Control need not be level to operate properly) and mark wall through two mounting holes. Drill two 3/16–in (4.8 mm) mounting holes in wall where marked. Secure mounting plastic to wall using two screws and anchors provided. Adjust length and routing of each wire to reach each wire entry on the connector backplate. Strip 1/4–in (6.4 mm) of insulation from each wire. Match and connect thermostat wires to proper terminals on control backplate. See wiring diagrams in Appendix A. Push any excess wire into the wall. Seal hole in wall to prevent any air leaks. Leaks can affect operation. Attach Infinity Control to the mounting plastic by lining up the plastic guides on the back of the control with the opening on the mounting plastic and push on. Perform installation of all other system equipment (i.e. dampers, humidifier, ventilator, UV lights, etc.). Turn on power to equipment. Shielded Wire If the thermostat wiring will be located near or in parallel with high voltage wiring, radio, TV, or Ethernet wiring, then four-conductor, twisted–pair, shielded cable can be used to reduce or eliminate potential interference. The shield wire should be connected to the C terminal, or ground, at the indoor unit. The shield wire should NOT be connected to any terminal at the user interface. Connecting the shield to the ground at both ends can cause current loops in the shield, reducing shield effectiveness. Connect one pair of the two–pair (minimum) cable to the A and B communication terminals, and another pair to the C and D terminals at both ends of the cable. The shield wire should ONLY be connected at the indoor equipment ground or C terminal. Note that some outdoor units only require the A and B  connections. See the outdoor unit installation instructions for more information. Damper Control Module (zoning systems only) All wiring is run back to the Damper Control Module. Select a location near the furnace or fan coil where wiring from the control, each Remote Room Sensor or Smart Sensor, each damper actuator, and the equipment itself can come together easily. The Damper Control Module is approved for indoor use only and should never be installed with any of its components exposed to the elements. The Damper Control Module (and zone dampers) may be installed in any area where the temperature remains between –4°F to 158° F (–20° C to70° C), and there is no condensation. The cover must be installed to prevent damage from other sources. Do not locate where it will be accessible to children. It may be mounted in either vertical or horizontal position. Remember that wiring access is likely the most important consideration. CAUTION PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury. To prevent possible damage to the Damper Control Module, DO NOT mount on plenum, ductwork, or flush against furnace or fan coil. Mounting First become familiar with all plastic assembly pieces shown on the following page. The Infinity Touch Control will snap together with the backplate. A backplate is supplied. Attach backplate using only a small hole in the wall allowing a four-wire connection to pass through. Mount the assembly to the backplate. NOTE: Once Infinity Control is secured to wall with the backplate assembly (snapped together), care must be taken not to bend or break the interlocking tabs when removing. Decorative Backplate Sold separately, a thin decorative backplate is available to hide any marks/screw holes left from the previous thermostat. This decorative backplate (or beauty ring) is used by snapping it onto the back of the mounting plate before securing the plate to the wall. A12213 NOTE: Once the Infinity Touch Control is secured to wall with the backplate assembly (snapped together), care must be taken not to bend or break the interlocking tabs when removing. Humidifier Connections A 24VAC bypass or fan powered humidifier may be installed. NOTE: Do NOT use a traditional humidistat to control humidifier operation. If a humidifier is installed, let the Infinity Touch Control operate humidifier. Bypass Humidifier A bypass humidifier should be wired directly to the furnace or fan coil HUM and 24VAC COM terminals. The Infinity Control Touch will automatically energize the HUM output during a call for humidification. Fan Powered Humidifiers Most fan-powered humidifiers produce internal 24VAC in order to energize upon a switch or contact closure. For this application, a 24VAC N.O. Isolation Relay (DPST) MUST be used to prevent mixing the internal humidifier power with the indoor equipment transformer. Applying 24VAC isolation relay coil to furnace or fan coil HUM and COM terminals will allow the Infinity Touch Control to automatically energize the HUM output during a call for humidification. The N.O. relay contacts will be used to energize the humidifier. See fan-powered humidifier installation instructions for more details. Commissioning This section addresses initial power-up (or commissioning) of a new Infinity® Touch Control. The control will communicate and identify all components in the Infinityr® System. The following is a typical example for a communicating variable–speed furnace/fan coil with a 2–stage air–conditioner/heat pump (including HYBRIDHEAT® dual fuel system). Searching for Indoor Unit The Infinity Touch Control will light up and begin the commissioning process by displaying “Searching for indoor unit”. This includes Infinityr® small packaged products (SPP), with UI Version 8.0 software or later. A12177 NOTE: If the Infinity–compatible indoor equipment (furnace or fan coil) cannot be found, the control will display “Indoor unit not found”. This MUST be corrected before the initial power-up sequence can continue. Proceed to the next section, Searching for an outdoor unit. If it is not corrected, the Infinity Touch  Control will go into its DEMO operating mode. Searching for Outdoor Unit The Infinity Touch Control will then proceed to communicate with the outdoor unit by displaying “Searching for outdoor unit”. This includes Infinityr small packaged products (SPP), with UI Version 8.0 software or later. NOTE: If the outdoor unit cannot be found, the control will display “Outdoor unit not found”. Select the appropriate unit installed; then, touch NEXT. AC1Stage – 1–stage air conditioner *AC2Stage – 2–stage air conditioner *HP1Stage – 1–stage heat pump *HP2Stage – 2–stage heat pump None – No outdoor unit installed NOTE: For small packaged products (SPP), the selection screen is not needed and will not appear. The installer will first be instructed to select the appropriate size of the outdoor unit; then, touch SELECT. *Network Interference Module (NIM) may be required for these selections to be displayed. Indoor Evaporator Selection If a furnace is installed with a variable-capacity heat pump, a screen will appear to select the installed indoor evaporator coil. This selection is used to adequately calculate the refrigerant charge required while in the heat pump charging screens under the Heat Pump Checkout menu (See page 44). Select “other” for non–Carrier evaporators. Electric Heater Selection If the indoor equipment is a fan coil, the control will display “Searching for heater” until one is found. If the electric heater is not self–identifying, the select heater screen will appear. Touch the appropriate heater size; then, touch SELECT. Hydronic Heat Application The Infinity Touch Control supports 2 types of Hydronic Heat applications: Hot water coil in combination with an FE fan coil and heat pump, or hot water coil as sole heat source with an FE fan coil. Non–zoned FE fan coil combined with radiant hot water heat. In either application, a Hydronic Heat kit should be installed in place of an electric heater. See FE fan coil Product Data for accessory part number. The system will self–identify that hydronic heat has been installed during electric heater selection. The system will treat the hot water coil as either auxiliary heat in a heat pump application, or the sole heat source. Setup options for Hydronic Heat applications are described in the setup section of this instruction. A13117 Searching for SAM Module (If Applicable) “Searching for SAM Module” will appear on the screen to determine if a System Access Module, used for home automation only, is connected to the system. NOTE: For more information regarding the SAM Module, reference the latest version of the application specification entitled “Carrier Communicating HVAC System” (Version 2 or later), available on HVACpartners.com, or the System Access Module Installation Instructions. Searching for Zones (If Applicable) “Zoning — Searching” will appear on the screen to determine if any zones are present. The screen will show Zone 1, Zone 2, etc., and indicate all zones having either a Remote Room Sensor, or smart sensors associated with them. If the system contains smart sensors, they must be assigned a zone number before continuing. See the Smart Sensor Installation Instructions on how to assign Smart Sensors to their respective zones. After each zone has been identified, touch NEXT. Filter Type Selection The installer will next be prompted to select the air filter type installed with the Infinity System. After the selection is made, touch NEXT. Air Filter: 1–in. to 4–in. media filter EAC: high voltage electronic air cleaner Air Purifier: Infinityr® or Performancet™ Air Purifier Humidifier Installation Next, the installer will be prompted to select whether a humidifier is installed in the system. Select YES or NO, then touch NEXT. Ultraviolet Lights Installation Next, the installer will be prompted to select whether ultraviolet lights are installed in the system. Select YES or NO, then touch NEXT. Equipment Summary The equipment summary screen will appear after accessories have been selected. This screen will give a summary of all equipment automatically found or manually selected. If an incorrect selection was made, touch REINSTALL to restart the installation process. Static Pressure Check The static pressure check screen will appear next. The system will perform a static pressure check. This process will take about 1–1/2 minutes to complete. When completed, a screen will appear displaying the static pressure (in inches) across the equipment at the expected highest delivered airflow. If the blower RPM is greater than 1200, then a warning will appear, but equipment operation and the TrueSenset™ dirty filter detection operation will not be affected. When the static pressure check is complete, touch NEXT. NOTE: The static pressure check occurs only at initial installation, or when INSTALL isrunintheINSTALL/SERVICE menu. Duct Assessment (zoning applications only) The duct assessment screen will be displayed next for zoning applications. Touch NEXT to start Duct Assessment. Duct Assessment will measure the relative size of the ductwork, up to and through the dampers. These measurements are used to control the correct amount of airflow in the zoned system. Status messages will appear on the screen to indicate what the system is doing. The process will take approximately one minute per zone. The duct assessment will override a call for heat or cool. A duct assessment will automatically occur each day at a user-selectable time. The factory default time is 1:00 p.m. but, may be changed by entering the Zoning  Setup menu (see pages 36 — 37). If there is an active call for heating or cooling, the system will wait until the call is satisfied before it performs the duct assessment. The system will first open all zones and drive the blower to 175 CFM/ton of cooling (or the minimum indoor unit’s airflow, whichever is greater). It will then take a static pressure measurement. The system will then close all zones and open one zone at a time, taking a static pressure measurement for each zone. The system will then close all zones and take a pressure measurement, getting a value for the duct leakage up to and through the dampers. With these static pressure measurements, the system will calculate the relative size of each zone as well as the percent leakage through the dampers At the end of the process, the display will show the relative size of each zone duct. If the Infinity Touch Control detects an error (damper not moving or damper wired backward), it will perform the duct assessment again. If it still detects a  damper problem, it will default the measurements into equal sizes, with 10% leakage, and display the zone number for the suspected zone damper. After the duct assessment is complete, touch NEXT. Service Menu The Service menus contain a set of vital information. This information enables the installer or service person to view a summary of what has been installed, etc. This information is not covered in the Owner’s Manual. To enter service menus, touch menu, then touch and hold the SERVICE icon for at least ten seconds. The following screens are available in installation and service. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE. NOTE: See the Owner’s Manual for information regarding software upgrades. Equipment Summary Touch EQUIPMENT SUMMARY to show indoor unit type and model number, outdoor unit type (and model number if a 2–stage unit), filter type, any accessories that are installed, and the number of zones in the system. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE. Installation Touch INSTALLATION to perform the start-up process in order to learn all equipment in system. Press right side button to initiate the process. Touch NEXT to begin the process. Touch Duct Assessment to perform a duct assessment. This can be done if duct modifications have been made since the installation of the UI. Duct assessment can be performed without performing a full system install. A12146 NOTE: For Small Packaged Products (SPP), please use the following instructions for Set–up (Section 6.3), Checkout (Section 6.4), and Service (Section 6.5): –For PAC AC Indoor and OAC HP Indoor, follow Fan Coil instructions. –For Gas PAC Indoor and Gas PHP Indoor, follow Furnace instructions. –For all PAC Outdoor, follow AC/Heat Pump instructions. Set up NOTE: Depending upon the equipment installed, the following options will be displayed. Indoor: Furnace Fan coil PAC AC Indoor PAC HP Indoor GAS PAC Indoor GAS PHP Indoor Outdoor: AC/Heat pump PAC AC outdoor PAC HP outdoor GAS PAC outdoor GAS PHP outdoor Once the equipment has been selected, the appropriate menus will be displayed. Thermostat First touch SETUP, then touch THERMOSTAT to set up the parameters for the Infinity® Touch Control. Auto Mode set up Once the auto changeover option has been selected, touch SAVE. Enable or Disable: Choose to enable or disable auto changeover mode Default = Enable Auto changeover time: Adjustable from 5 to 120 minutes Default = 30 minutes Heat/Cool Deadband The minimum difference enforced between heating and cooling desired temperatures. The deadband does not change when the user changes between Fahrenheit  (°F) and Celsius (°C). Ex: A 2° deadband will be 2°For2°Canddoes not change with units, °Fand °C. This can allow one setting to “push” the other to maintain this difference. When the correct deadband is set, touch SAVE. Deadband: Adjustable from 0 to 6° F Default = 2° Offsets This option allows calibration (or deliberate miscalibration) of the temperature and humidity sensors. These offsets are added to the actual temperature/humidity values. When the correct offsets are made, touch SAVE. Outdoor temperature: Adjustable from –5 to 5°F(-3to3°C) Default = 0°F Humidity: Adjustable from –10 – 10% Reset factory defaults This option allows the installer to reset certain factory parameters. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. Program Schedule: Reset back to pre-programmed time and temperature. User Settings: Reset user settings back to pre-programmed values. Install Settings: Reset installation settings back to pre-programmed values. Last 10 Faults: Reset the last 10 system faults under the Service menu. Scheduling Enable This option lets the installer allow programming features. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. Scheduling: On or Off Default = On Smart Recovery Enable Applies to programmable operation only. Will start recovery 90 minutes prior to scheduled change in both heating and cooling mode. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. Smart Recovery: On or Off Default = On NOTE: The “Temperature Units Display” set–up section has been moved to the Homeowner Screens. See the Owner’s Manual for more information. Fan Coil First touch SETUP, then touch FAN COIL to set up the parameters for the fan coil unit. A12188 Airflow This option allows the installer to select the appropriate airflow based on the needs of the installation. The QUIET airflow means the minimum cooling airflow that the system can safely run (typically 300 CFM/ton). Use this setting if duct noise is a severe problem. Note that duct sweating in high humidity environments could become an issue at low airflows. The COMFORT airflow means airflow is varied depending on humidity and temperature demand settings. This selection enables the full dehumidify and comfort capabilities of the system. The EFF325 airflow is a fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings – no dehumidification airflow reduction is performed. This is nominally 325 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. The EFF350 airflow is a fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings – no dehumidification airflow reduction is performed. This is nominally 350 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used.  The MAX airflow is a fixed 400 CFM/ton. No dehumidification airflow reduction is performed. The dehumidify airflow, when set to NORMAL, is allowed to adjust to a minimum to satisfy the dehumidification call. When set to HIGH, the minimum airflow during the dehumidify mode is increased to reduce duct and register to sweat. Also, the airflow increases minimum airflow during normal cooling operations to help reduce duct sweating. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. Cooling Airflow: Quiet, Comfort, EFF325, EFF350, or Max Default = Comfort Dehumidify Airflow: Normal or High Default = Normal Altitude Static Pressure selection: 0 to 10,000 feet. This is used to correct the static pressure readings the system performs. Fan Coil Dehumidification The Dehum Drain Time option turns off the continuous fan at the end of cooling for five minutes in order to drain the indoor coil of water. The fan will only be turned off if a dehumidify demand existed at the start of or during the cooling cycle. The Electric Reheat option enables the electric heat to be used while cool–to–dehumidify is running. This will allow the cool–to–dehumidify function to run longer, greatly improving humidity control in cooling mode. Accumulated electrical energy used while reheating (in kilowatt-hours) is shown on the Fan Coil Run  Hours screen and can be reset there. This option is only available with fan coil systems. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. Dehum Drain Time: Adjustable from 5 to 60 minutes or OFF Default = 15 minutes Electric Reheat: Yes or No Default = No Fan Coil G–Terminal This setup option selects desired operation when the R to G contact is closed on the fan coil control board. Under this function option, fan turns on fan to the selected fan speed when G terminal is energized. Use the alert function to select the contact state for an alert. Select Normally Open or Normally Closed, and then save your selection. Shutdown shuts off fan and equipment when initiated. After the selections are made, touch Save. A13229 Fan Coil G–Terminal Alert Use the alert function to select the contact state for an alert. Select Normally Open or Normally Closed, and then save your selection. A13230 Shutdown: This setup option selects the change of state required for the shutdown. Select Normally Open or Normally Closed, and then save your selection. A13231 Furnace First touch SETUP, then touch FURNACE to set up the parameters for the furnace unit. Furnace Airflow Selects the airflow of the furnace when heating. EFFICIENCY is the airflow used to meet specified ratings, COMFORT is a decreased airflow used to increase the output air temperature and provide increased comfort. For the Low heat rise option, set to ON if the system contains a bypass humidifier. The ON setting will increase the furnace low heat airflow. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. Furnace Air Flow: Comfort or Efficiency Default = Comfort Low Heat Rise: On or Off Default = Off AC/HP Air Flow This option elects the airflow of the furnace when cooling, heat pump heating, and dehumidification. The QUIET airflow means the minimum cooling airflow that the system can safely run (typically 300 CFM/ton). Use this setting if duct noise is a severe problem. Note that duct sweating in high humidity environments could become an issue at low airflows. The COMFORT airflow means airflow is varied depending on humidity and temperature demand settings. This selection enables the full dehumidify and comfort capabilities of the system. The EFF325 airflow is a fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings – no dehumidification airflow reduction is performed. This is nominally 325 CFM/ton but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. The EFF350 airflow is a fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings – no dehumidification airflow reduction is performed. This is nominally 350 CFM/ton but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. The MAX airflow is a fixed 400 CFM/ton. No dehumidification airflow reduction is performed. The dehumidify airflow, when set to NORMAL, the airflow is allowed to adjust to a minimum to satisfy the dehumidification call. When set to HIGH, the minimum airflow during the dehumidify mode is increased to reduce duct and register to sweat. Also, the airflow increases minimum airflow during normal cooling operations to help reduce duct sweating. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. Cool: Quiet, Comfort, EFF325, EFF350, or Max Default = Comfort HP Heat: Comfort or EFF350 Default = Comfort Dehumidify: Normal or High Default = Normal Furnace Staging This option controls the staging of the furnace and selects the minimum amount of time low stage must operate before high stage is activated. SYSTEM setting will allow the Infinity Zone Control to determine furnace staging. LOW will only run the low stage of furnace heat. LOW–MED will run the low and medium stages (2 stages of heat). MED will only run the medium stage of heat. MED–HIGH will run the medium and high stages (2 stages of heat). HIGH will only run the high stage of furnace heat. NOTE: Two-stage furnace has LOW and HIGH selections only. Stages: System, Low, Low–Med, Med, Med–High, or High Default = System Furnace Airflow Limits (modulating furnace only) The following settings allow the installer to restrict the furnace within certain minimum and maximum airflows. These airflows are converted to capacities. The Min and Max limits are determined by the equipment size. These settings are not the same as the zoning airflow limits. Min. modulating limits: Minimum CFM to run a modulating furnace. This will increase the minimum operating capacity of the furnace. Default value is the furnace airflow for the lowest heat capacity. Max. modulating limits: Maximum CFM to run a modulating furnace. This will increase the maximum operating capacity of the furnace. Default value is the furnace air flow for the highest heat capacity Furnace Off Delay This option denotes the amount of time the blower will continue to run after heating has shut off. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. Furnace Off Delay: 90, 120, 150 or 180 seconds Default = 120 seconds Altitude For gas de–rating, this setting will adjust the furnace’s airflow to compensate for altitude. Altitude adjustment is not available with older furnaces. Please see furnace instructions for further details. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. Altitude: 0000 – 2000, US 2001 – 3000, CN 2100 – 4500, US 3001 – 4000, US 4001 – 5000, US 5001 6000, US 6001 – 7000, US 7001 – 8000, US 8001 – 9000, and US &#62; 9000. Default = US 2001–3000 Static Pressure selection: 0 to 10,000 feet. This value is used to correct the static pressure readings the system performs. Furnace Dehumidifier Drain This option selects the time the continuous fan turns off at the end of cooling in order to drain the indoor coil of water. The fan will only be turned off if a dehumidify demand existed at the start of or during the cooling cycle. Dehumidify Drain Time: Adjustable from 5 to 60 minutes Default = 15 minutes Furnace G Terminal This setup option selects desired operation when the R–G circuit changes state on the furnace control board depending on setup. Under the function option, FAN turns on fan to selected fan speed when G terminal is energized. SHUTDOWN shuts off fan and equipment when initiated. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. Function: Disabled, Fan or Shutdown Default = Disabled Fan Speed:Low,Med,orHigh Default = Low Shutdown: Normally Open Normally Closed The shutdown function may not be immediate. Blower off delays, etc., will still be used. The shutdown is not intended for commercial applications. If immediate shutdown is required, provision must be made to remove power to indoor unit. Furnace G–Terminal Alert Use the alert function to select the contact state for an alert. Select Normally Open or Normally Closed, and then save your selection. A13230 Shutdown: This setup option selects the change of state required for shutdown. Select Normally Open or Normally Closed, and then save your selection. AC/Heat Pump First touch SETUP, then touch AC/HEAT PUMP to set up the parameters for the AC/Heat Pump unit. A12190 Latching High Cool Latch System in Control The system will decide which stage should be running to satisfy the cooling demand. High Cool Temperature above which only the high stage of cooling will be energized. Only Low Cool The system will only run in low-stage cooling. High Heat Latch A13228 System in Control The system will decide which stage should be running to satisfy the heating demand. High Heat Temperature below which only the high stage of heating will be energized. Only Low Heat The system will only run in low-stage heating. Cooling Lockout Outside temperature below which cooling will not be provided. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. Cooling Lockout Temp: None, 45, 50 or 55 (_F) Default = None Defrost Interval Time interval at which defrost cycles can occur on a heat pump. AUTO means the defrost interval is optimized by the outdoor control. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. Set Defrost Interval: 30, 60, 90, 120 minutes or AUTO Default = 30 minutes Low Ambient Cooling Selecting YES will enable the low ambient cooling operation in the outdoor unit. This setting is only available with communicating outdoor units and with  Cooling Lockout set to NONE. Low ambient kits are not needed with communicating outdoor units. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. Low Ambient Cooling: Yes or No Default = No Quiet Shift This option turns on Quiet Shift function in 1–stage or 2–stage communicating heat pumps. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. NOTE: This option is not available with variable speed heat pumps. Quiet Shift:OnorOff Default = Off AC/Heat Pump RPM Max Used with variable capacity heat pumps, this option clamps the operating speed of the heat pump to this maximum. Used to reduce operating noise while in high heating capacity. Reducing this value will reduce the heating capacity of the heat pump. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. AC Heat Pump Max RPM: Adjustable from 4500 – 7000 Default = 4500 RPM Defrost Fan Delay Turns on the outdoor unit fan at the end of a defrost cycle for approximately 12 seconds. This helps to reduce any nuisance refrigerant noise caused by the switching reversing valve. This setup is only available on communicating heat pumps. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. Defrost Fan Delay: Yes or No Default = No Brownout Disable This option turns off the high voltage brownout detection function in the outdoor unit control. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. Brownout Disable: On or Off Default = Off Energy Efficiency This option is used to input the published ratings of the installed air conditioner or heat pump as part of the energy tracking calculation. After the ratings are  entered, touch SAVE. Heat Source Lockout First touch SETUP, then touch HEAT SOURCE LOCKOUTS to set up the parameters for the AC/Heat Pump unit. For hydronic heat applications, this option allows the installer to set the lockout temperatures below which only the hydronic coil will operate, and the lockout temperature above which the hydronic coil will not operate. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. A12149 HP Lockout: Adjustable from 5 to 55°F(–15to13°C) or None Default = None Furnace, Electric Heat or Hydronic Lockout: Adjustable from 5 to 55°F (–15to13_C) or None Default = None Defrost with Furnace, Electric Heat or Hydronic: Yes or No Default = Yes Zoning (If Applicable) First touch SETUP, then touch ZONING to set up the parameters for the zoning system (if applicable). Zoning Disable This option allows the installer to enable or disable zoning. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. Disable Zoning: Yes or No Default = No Zone Offsets This option allows actual temperature offset for each zone, allowing calibration (or deliberate miscalibration) of each sensor. Use the Left (&#60;) or Right (&#62;) buttons to change the zone. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. Temperature Offset: Adjustable between –5 to 5_F(–3to3_C) Default = 0_F Zone Airflow Limits Since a bypass damper is prohibited in this system, this setting is used to select the maximum allowable noise/airflow relationship into each zone based on air noise and comfort requirements. LOW means 100% of maximum assessed airflow; MED–LOW means 138% of maximum assessed airflow; MEDIUM means  176% of maximum assessed airflow; MED-HIGH means 214% of maximum assessed airflow; HIGH means 250% of maximum assessed airflow; and NO LIMIT means the equipment does not stage down. CFM associated with each limit is shown on the screen. Compare this value with the equipment’s low stage CFM value to ensure that equipment will run for each zone. Assessed airflow is determined as described in DUCT ASSESSMENT. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. Touch the zone name that you wish to change Select the zone to adjust airflow: Low, Med–Low, Medium, Med–High, High, or No Limit Default = High Duct Assessment Time This option allows the installer to select the time in which the duct assessment will be performed. After the selection is made, touch SAVE. Duct Assessment Time: Selectable between 12 AM and 11PM Default = 1 PM Accessories First touch SETUP, then touch ACCESSORIES to set up the parameters for the accessories installed with the system. A12192 Filter With this option, the installer has the option of selecting pressure monitoring, the type of filter installed, and the time interval for cleaning. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. Pressure Monitoring (not available with Electric Air Cleaner): Enable or Disable Default = Enable Clean Interval: Selectable from 1 to 18 months Default = 3 months Filter Type: Air Filter, Electric Air Cleaner, or Air Purifier Filter type is selected during installation; otherwise default = air filter Humidifier With this option, the installer has the option of selecting whether a humidifier is installed, to humidify with the fan in low speed, and the time interval for changing the humidifier pad. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. Humidifier Installed: Yes or No Humidifier selection made during installation; otherwise default = no Change Pad: Selectable from 1 to 24 months Default = 12 months Humidify with Fan: Yes or No Default = No Ultraviolet Lights With this option, the installer has the option of selecting whether ultraviolet lights are installed, and the time interval for changing the ultraviolet lights. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. UV Lights Installed: Yes or No UV Lights selection made during installation; otherwise default = no Change Interval: Selectable from 1 to 48 months Default = 12 months Ventilator When a ventilator is installed, the installer has the option of selecting the time interval for cleaning the ventilator. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. Clean Interval: Selectable from 60, 90, 120, 150 or 180 days Default = 90 days Utility Curtailment Utility Saver is used to forcing the equipment to a lower stage (low or off) when activated by the utility company, typically during peak load times. This setup is available only if the equipment has a utility saver input (refer to outdoor equipment Installation Instructions). This setup controls the response of the equipment when the utility saver input is active. DISABLED means that the curtailment function is not active. TURN OFF means the outdoor unit is to be turned off when the curtailment function is active. LOW STAGE means the outdoor unit will run in lows stage when the curtailment function is active. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. A12193 Cooling: Disabled, Low Stage or Turn off Default = Disabled Heat Pump: Disabled, Low Stage or Turn off Default = Disabled Hydronic Airflow This option allows the installer to select the airflow for the fan coil when paired with a hydronic coil. After the selections are made, touch SAVE. A12194 Airflow: Selectable between Off to Max in 50 CFM increments Off = 450 CFM, MAX = (odu_size in KBTU * 400) / 12) Default = Off Blower On Delay: Selectable from 0 to 240 seconds Default = 30 seconds Blower Off Delay: Selectable from 0 to 240 seconds Default = 0 seconds Check out Touch CHECKOUT to view the equipment installed in the system. Perform checkout test to make sure each piece of equipment is operating properly. Electric Heat If you have a fan coil with electric heaters, this menu item will allow the heaters to be exercised. With self–identifying electric heaters, three stages of electric heat are available to be exercised in any combination. Non–identifying heaters will only provide one stage of heat. After the selections are made, touch START. Low Heat: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes Default = 5 minutes Medium Heat: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes Default = 5 minutes High Heat: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes Default = 5 minutes Furnace Make sure the furnace is properly installed. This option allows the furnace to be exercised. First, a low heat run time and high heat run-time are selected. The furnace will execute its ignition start-up sequence. This sequence will be displayed on the screen. After the gas valve and blower motor turn on, the screen will show the current operating status of the furnace.  After the selections are made, touch START. Low Heat: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes Default = 5 minutes High Heat: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes Default = 5 minutes Hydronic This option allows the hydronic heat relay to be exercised. First, it will energize the relay and turns on the blower. This sequence will be displayed on the screen.  After the selections are made, touch START. Hydronic heater check: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes Default = 5 minutes Air Conditioning This option allows the air conditioner to be exercised. With a 2–stage AC unit, a low cool and a high cool run-time are independently selectable to exercise. The display will change to show the AC operating status. After the selections are made, touch START. NOTE: Airflows during Checkout modes are fixed to the EFFICIENCY setting and are independent of other airflow settings. To view airflows for normal air conditioning cooling mode, exit the CHECKOUT screen and apply a heating demand to the system. Low Cool Run Time: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes Default = 5 minutes High Cool Run Time: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes Default = 5 minutes Heat Pump Heating The heat pump heating mode can be exercised with this menu option. With a 2–stage heat pump, a Low Heat and a High Heat Run Time are independently selectable to exercise. For variable speed heat pumps, you can select the speed at which the heat pump will exercise. After the selections are made, touch START. NOTE: Airflows during Checkout modes are fixed to the EFFICIENCY setting and are independent of other airflow settings. To view airflows for normal air conditioning cooling mode, exit the CHECKOUT screen and apply a heating demand to the system. Low Heat Run Time: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes Default = 5 minutes High Heat Run Time: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes Default = 5 minutes Speed (variable speed heat pump only): Selectable from lowest available to 100% Default = lowest available as specified by variable speed heat pump Defrost: Yes or No Default = No Heat Pump Cooling The heat pump cooling mode can be exercised with this menu option. With a 2–stage heat pump, a Low Cool Run Time and a High Cool Run Time are independently selectable to exercise. For variable speed heat pumps, you can select the speed at which the heat pump will exercise. After the selections are made, touch START. NOTE: Airflows during Checkout modes are fixed to the EFFICIENCY setting and are independent of other airflow settings. To view airflows for normal air conditioning cooling mode, exit the CHECKOUT screen and apply a heating demand to the system. Low Cool Run Time: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes Default = 5 minutes High Cool Run Time: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes Default = 5 minutes Speed (variable speed heat pump only): Selectable from lowest available to 100% Default = lowest available as specified by variable speed heat pump Humidifier The humidifier can be exercised On and Off with this menu option. To end the humidifier checkout, touch STOP. Humidifier Check: On or Off Ventilator The ventilator can be exercised through all of its operating speeds with this menu option. To end the ventilator checkout, touch STOP. Humidifier Check: High, Low or Off Zoning (If Applicable) Airflow Limits Because there is no bypass damper, the zone airflow limit check will allow the installer to assess the airflow noise generated by the system providing the maximum amount of airflow to each zone. Touch AIRFLOW LIMITS: When START is touched, the selected zone’s damper will fully open, all others will close, and the indoor unit will provide the maximum airflow for that zone (as selected in SETUP — ZONING, Airflow Limits). If the airflow noise is objectionable,  the installer can select a lower airflow noise limit. If the noise is not objectionable, the installer should leave HIGH selected, or even NO LIMIT. NOTE: Selecting a lower airflow noise limit may decrease the homeowner’s comfort in that zone. Touch the Left (&#60;) or Right (&#62;) buttons to change the desired zones. Once the proper airflow limits are set, touch SAVE,those zoning CHECKOUT menu. Damper/Sensor Check The Sensor/Damper Check allows the installer to check each zone damper for operation, as well as insure the zone sensor corresponds to that particular zone. When first initiated, the Zone 1 damper will fully open, and all other zones will close. Using the Left (&#60;) or Right (&#62;) buttons, the installer can select each zone and verify the damper is fully open while all other dampers remain closed. After proper damper operation has been verified, the installer can now check and verify that each Remote Room Sensor corresponds to the proper zone damper in the same zone. For systems with remote room sensor, temporarily disconnect any other zone Remote Room Sensor (at sensor location). That zone damper will now open, while the Zone 1 damper will close. For systems using Smart Sensors, the installer may press and hold the Hold and Mode buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds to change the zone under test. This should be done with each zone to verify that the zone sensor corresponds to that particular zone. Once each zone has been checked, touch DONE to return to the ZONING CHECKOUT menu. Zone Duct Assessment This screen shows the results from the previous duct assessment. The duct assessment is performed at initial start-up and at 1 P.M. or the installer selected time each day. If another duct assessment is desired, the service technician should perform a reinstall of the system. NOTE: A Duct Assessment will automatically occur every 24 hours at selected time to check system static and calibrate dampers. Once the duct assessment is complete, touch DONE to return to the ZONING CHECKOUT menu. Sensor Type This option shows a list of all zones with corresponding sensor types. Service Information The Service Info menu will only show the equipment installed in the system. To enter this menu of options, touch SERVICE INFORMATION. Advanced Diagnostics When viewing the Service Information screen, there is a button labeled View Diagnostics, which provides the top 3 most likely root causes for the most recent fault. NOTE: This feature is only available with compatible models. Those models are currently the FE fan coil, the modulating furnace, and the modulating heat pump. Fan Coil Status The fan coil status screen displays relevant information about the fan coil operation. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE. Furnace Status The furnace status screen displays relevant information about the furnace operation. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus,  touch DONE. AC Status The AC status screen displays relevant information about the AC operation. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE. A12199 Heat Pump Status The heat pump status screen displays relevant information about the heat pump operation. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE. A12200 Zoning Status The zoning status screen displays relevant information about the zoning operation. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus,  touch DONE. A12201 Last 10 System Faults This screen will show the last 10 events that occurred throughout the system. Each entry has the time and date incident recorded. These events are stored in the memory of the control and are resettable in the THERMOSTAT SETUP screen under the RESET FACTORY DEFAULT selection. Each entry shows the equipment that generated the event. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE. A12151 Run/Fault History This information is stored in the equipment circuit boards (if communicating) and displayed on the control. The indoor unit and outdoor unit (if communicating)  have the following histories. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE. Resettable Faults: Fault counters for each piece of equipment that can be reset. Cycle Counters: Number of heat/cool/power cycles the unit has performed. Run Times: Lifetime hours of operation in heating, cooling, and how long the unit has been powered. A12202 Model/Serial Numbers This menu item allows the installer to view the model number, serial number (if available), and control software version (if available) of all communicating pieces of equipment in the system, including the wall control. This information resides in the original equipment circuit board(s) from the factory. If an equipment circuit board has been replaced, the model and serial number will no longer be displayed. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus,  touch DONE. Service Phone Number This menu item allows the installer to view the name and phone number that the homeowner can call for future service of the system. This name and phone number will appear to the homeowner whenever a service reminder pop–up message is displayed (i.e. Change Filter, etc.). To return to the previous screen, touch  BACK. To exit, touch DONE. See Section 6.7. Energy Tracking Watt Meter This menu item allows the installer to view the energy usage of each piece of equipment connected to the system. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK.  To exit the Service menus, touch DONE. A12203 Refrigerant Charging For variable speed heat pumps, a refrigerant charging menu is available to aid in the proper charging of the system. Enter the menu from the service screens by touching REFRIGERANT CHARGING. A12204 Charging Within the CHARGING screens, the installer will have the ability to enter the LINESET length and the VA PO R L I N E diameter. After the selections are made, touch NEXT. Lineset: Selectable from 5 to 200 feet Vapor line: Selectable with various diameters by using the up and down buttons Next, the installer will enter the WEIGH-IN screen to verify the current total charge is accurate. Once the installer has confirmed, touch DONE. Next, the installer will enter the SERVICE VALVE SUBCOOL screen. This screen will show the current liquid line subcool target (in _F). To begin the charging,  touch START. If the outdoor temperatures are not in the required range, Service Valve Subcool may not be available. Next, the installer will enter the SERVICE VALVE INFORMATION screen. The current liquid line subcool target, stabilization time, mode and speed in rpm,  EXV position in percent, indoor airflow in CFM, outdoor coil temperature in _F, indoor temperature in _F, outdoor temperature in _F, compressor discharge pressure in psig, and accumulator suction pressure in psig are displayed on this screen. Once the stabilization time has expired, touch DONE. Pump down Because this system has an inverter-controlled compressor, suction pressure transducer, and EXV, the conventional procedure cannot be used to “pump down” and isolate the refrigerant into the outdoor unit. The control has provisions to assist in performing this function. Select mode to pump down in (COOL or HEAT).  COOL mode allows refrigerant to be isolated in outdoor unit. HEAT mode allows the refrigerant to be isolated in indoor coil and lineset. Set desired time period. Default time period for procedure is 120 minutes. Touch START to begin the pump-down process. Unit will begin running in selected mode after a brief delay. Evacuation Because this system has an EXV for the heating expansion device, additional steps must be taken to open the EXV if the heat pump unit must be evacuated for service reasons. If the EXV is not open when pulling a vacuum or recovering refrigerant from the heat pump unit, extended evacuation time may be required and/or inadequate vacuum obtained. The control has provisions to open the EXV for refrigerant recovery and/or evacuation. Set desired time period. Default time period for procedure is 120 minutes. Touch START on UI to open the valve. Begin evacuation or refrigerant recovery as required for the procedure after control indicates the EXV is open. Power may be removed from heat pump after the control indicates “READY TO EVACUATE.” Dealer Logo Touch DEALER LOGO to upload the dealer logo and contact information from a standard USB memory device connected to the Infinityr Touch Control. The “Dealer Logo Application” PC/MAC software download available at www.MyInfinityTouch.Carrier.com/Infinity/downloads is required to properly format the dealer logo and contact information for use on the wall control. Along with the dealer logo (if any), three lines of dealer information are provided on the wall control: Dealer name (50 characters, max) Dealer phone number (20 characters, max) Dealer URL (50 characters, max) The wall control dealer information display is 30 characters wide. Dealer names and URLs over 30 characters will be split into two lines on the display. The PC/MAC software application to format the dealer logo and contact information can be found at: www.MyInfinityTouch.Carrier.com/Infinity/downloads Download the program and follow the program instructions. Once the dealer logo and contact information have been properly loaded onto the USB memory device, insert the USB device into the bottom edge of the  Infinity Touch Control. The control will prompt you whether or not to upload the dealer logo. Once complete, you will receive a confirmation that your upload was successful. If the information was not stored properly on the USB device, you will receive an error message that the dealer logo was not found. Refer back to the PC/MAC software application instructions and try again. Once the upload is complete, touch NEXT. If you have problems, contact your distributor service manager for support. Wireless Set–up With the appropriate models, the Infinity® Touch Control can connect to the in-home Wi-Fi to connect the Infinity System to the Internet. The model SYSTXCCITW01 wall control comes bundled with an Infinity Wireless Access Point. This establishes an independent Infinity System Wi-Fi network. The model SYSTXCCITC01–A is intended to connect to an existing home Wi-Fi network, or to be added to an existing Infinity System Wi-Fi network. If the in-home  Wi-Fi is found to be incompatible with SYSTXCCITC01–A, an Infinity Wireless Access Point (SYSTXXXGWR01) or any other compatible wireless router can be installed to establish Wi-Fi connectivity. Please call 1–800–CARRIER for support with Wi-Fi set–up and connection to the MyInfinity Server. The ability to remotely access and adjust the settings of the Infinity® Touch Control with the MyInfinity web and mobile applications is dependent on the compatibility of the user’s computer/network or mobile device, the Infinity Touch Control, and/or the MyInfinity web server with, and the availability of, the user’s Internet service provider or mobile device carrier service. Carrier Corporation makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, including, to the extent permitted by applicable law, any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose or use, about the compatibility of the user’s computer/network, or mobile device, with the Infinity Touch Control, and/or the MyInfinity web server, with, and the availability of, the user’s Internet service provider or mobile device carrier service, or that the ability to remotely access and adjust the settings of the Infinity Touch Control will not be negatively affected by the network-related modifications, upgrades, or similar activity of the user’s Internet service provider or mobile device carrier service. NOTE: See the Owner’s Manual for information regarding software upgrades. SYSTXCCITC01–A Models (only) To establish Wi-Fi connectivity to the Infinity Touch Control using the in-home router or wireless access point the wireless access point SSID and password/passkey must be known for setting–up. A13241 Select the WIRELESS from the menu screen Make sure the Wi–Fi connection is enabled, by touching ENABLED. Touch SETUP A WI–FI CONNECTION to begin the process. Next, touch SCAN FOR AVAILABLE ACCESS POINTS. A13235 On the next screen look for the SSID of the router/access point. After being selected, it will be outlined in faint blue. Then select NEXT. A13236 The selected network will show. Choose an appropriate Wi-Fi security. Usually auto-detect will correctly identify the type of security used. If the network has no security it will show as on the left, but a secured network will prompt for the Wi-Fi security key. If a Wi–Fi security key is shown as on the right hand picture above then select the white bar and enter the security key, then select NEXT. Touch in the security key area, and the keyboard will appear. Use the on screen keyboard to enter the Wi–Fi security key, then touch NEXT. The control will inform you if the [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/carrier/infinity-touch-thermostat/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Logo-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>SYSTXCCITW01–A, SYSTXCCITN01–A &amp; SYSTXCCITC01–A Infinityr Touch Control<br />
Installation Instructions<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Thermostat-Instructions.webp" /><br />
</strong></p>
<p>NOTE: Read the entire instruction manual before starting the installation.<br />
US Patents: Carrierr® U.S. Pat No. 7,243,004, Carrierr® U.S. Pat No. 7,775,452, pointSET™ U.S. Pat No. 7,415,102</p>
<h3>Safety Considerations</h3>
<p>Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, maintenance, or use can cause explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause death, personal injury or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory-authorized kits or accessories when modifying this HVAC system. Refer to the individual instructions packaged with the kits or accessories when installing.<br />
Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses, protective clothing, and work gloves. Have a fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings and cautions included in literature and attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and the current edition of the National Electrical Code  (NEC) NFPA 70. In Canada, refer to the current editions of the Canadian Electrical Code CSA C22.1.</p>
<p>Recognize safety information. When you see this symbol <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/3-189.webp" />on the unit and in instructions or manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING,andCAUTION. These words are used with the safety–alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards, which will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies hazards, which could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices, which may result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions that will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation.</p>
<h3>Introduction</h3>
<p>The Infinityr® System consists of several intelligent communicating components which include the Infinityr® Touch Control (or User Interface), variable speed furnace or FE fan coil, and 2–stage AC or HP, which continually communicate with each other via a four-wire connection called the ABCD bus. Commands, operating conditions, and other data are passed continually between components over the ABCD bus. The result is a new level of comfort, versatility, and simplicity.<br />
All Infinityr® furnaces or fan coils are variable–speed and multi-stage for maximum flexibility, efficiency, and comfort. They support controlled ventilation, humidification, dehumidification, and air quality control. Either an Infinityr (communicating), or a standard single-stage 24VAC controlled outdoor unit may be used.</p>
<p>When using conventional single-stage outdoor units, the Infinity furnace or fan coil provides the 24-volt signals needed to control them. Also, the Infinityr®  Network Interface Module (P/N SYSTXCCNIM01) allows the connection of a Carrier HRV or ERV without the need for separate wall control.<br />
When using a Carrier HRV or ERV with a zoned system, the Infinityr® Zone board allows connection of a Carrier HRV or ERV without the need for separate wall control.<br />
All system components are controlled through the wall-mounted Infinity Touch Control, which replaces the conventional thermostat and provides the homeowner with a single wall control for all features of the system.</p>
<h3>Quick Start</h3>
<h4>Set Time and Date</h4>
<p>From the main screen, touch MENU, on the bottom of the control. The TIME/DATE icon allows you to set the time and date for the Infinityr® Touch Control.</p>
<ul>
<li>To set the HOUR, MINUTE, MONTH, DAY, or YEAR touch the feature you wish to change.</li>
<li>Use the Up (<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Up.webp" />) and Down (<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Down.webp" />) buttons to make the appropriate changes.</li>
<li>When you have completed all of the settings touch SAVE.</li>
<li>If you make a mistake you may touch CANCEL and begin again.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-CANCEL-and-begin-again.webp" /></p>
<h4>Set Dealer Information</h4>
<p>From the main screen, touch MENU, on the bottom of the control. The SERVICE icon allows you to upload your contact information into the Infinity Touch Control.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Set-Dealer-Information.webp" /></p>
<p>A12176</p>
<ul>
<li>Format your contact information and logo (if applicable) using the PC/MAC application, save it to a standard USB drive. See Section 6.7.</li>
<li>Touch the SERVICE icon for about 10 seconds, then touch DEALER LOGO UPLOAD.</li>
<li>Place the USB drive into the USB port on the bottom of the Infinity Touch Control and follow the on screen prompts.</li>
<li>More detailed information can be found on HVACPartners.com under the Product tab&gt; Thermostats &amp; Controls&gt; SYSTXCCITW01&gt; Documents &amp; Downloads&gt; Marketing/Miscellaneous&gt; Infinity Touch Control Dealer Logo Application — Instructions.</li>
</ul>
<h3>Installation</h3>
<h4>Overview</h4>
<p>This instruction covers installation of the Infinityr® Touch Control and the Infinityr Wireless Access Point only. Physical installation instructions for the indoor and outdoor equipment, and accessories are provided with each unit.<br />
Setup, commissioning, operation, and troubleshooting of the Infinityr® System are covered only in this installation instruction. It is the guide to connecting the system components and commissioning the system once all physical components are installed. Special screen prompts and start-up capabilities are provided in the Infinityr® System to simplify and automate the initial commissioning of the system.</p>
<ul>
<li>Install the Infinity Touch Control according to this instruction.</li>
<li>Install indoor unit, outdoor unit, and accessories according to their instructions.</li>
<li>Wire complete system according to this instruction.</li>
<li>Setup, commission, and operate system according to this instruction to assure a smooth and trouble-free startup.</li>
</ul>
<h4>Check Equipment</h4>
<p>Inspect equipment. File a claim with shipping company prior to installation if shipment is damaged or incomplete.</p>
<h4>Location</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/3-189.webp" /><strong>WARNING</strong><br />
<strong>ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.<br />
Disconnect power before routing control wiring.</p>
<p>All wiring must comply with national, local, and state codes.</p>
<h5>Wall Control</h5>
<p>The Infinity Touch Control is the command center for the Infinity System. It should be located where it is easily accessible and visible to the adult homeowner or end-user. For accurate temperature measurement, the following guidelines should be followed:<br />
The Infinity Touch Control and Remote Room Sensors SHOULD be mounted:</p>
<ul>
<li>Approximately 5–ft (1.5 m) from the floor.</li>
<li>Close to or in a frequently used room, preferably on an inside partitioning wall.</li>
<li>On a section of wall without pipes or ductwork.</li>
</ul>
<p>The Infinity Touch Control and Remote Room Sensors SHOULD NOT be mounted:</p>
<ul>
<li>Close to a window, on an outside wall, or next to a door leading to the outside.</li>
<li>Exposed to direct light or heat from a lamp, sun, fireplace, or other temperature–radiating objects which could cause a false reading.</li>
<li>Close to or in direct airflow from supply registers.</li>
<li>In areas with poor air circulation, such as behind a door or in an alcove.</li>
</ul>
<h5>Remote Room Sensors</h5>
<p>A Remote Room Sensor can be used with the Infinity Touch Control to take the place of the control’s internal temperature sensor. This allows the Infinity Touch Control to be mounted in areas with less than optimal airflow (such as near an exterior door, window or in a closet). The remote sensor can be wired to the terminal block connectors labeled S1 and S2 at the control’s backplate, or the ZS1 and ZS1C connection at the Damper Control Module. In either case, the  Infinity Touch Control will automatically detect the Remote Room Sensor and ignore its internal temperature sensor.</p>
<h6>Remote Room Sensor Averaging</h6>
<p>Typically, one remote sensor is used but, multiple sensors may be used and averaged in some applications. Averaging requires a special series-parallel wiring method with a specific number of sensors. See figure below. It is also important to note the humidity sensor cannot be remotely located, so do not locate the  Infinity Control in an area where humidity sensing may not be accurate.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Remote-Room-Sensor-Averaging.webp" /></p>
<h5>Smart Sensors (for zoning applications)</h5>
<p>Any zone may use a Smart Sensor. It provides a temperature display and buttons to adjust the desired temperature in that zone only. It also displays outdoor temperature and indoor humidity sensed at the control. Only one Smart Sensor may be used per zone. They cannot be averaged like Remote Room Sensors. If a  Smart Sensor is used in a zone, a Remote Room Sensor may also be used in the same zone. The Remote Room Sensor has priority over the Smart Sensor. The  Smart Sensor will display the Remote Room Sensor temperature.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: Smart Sensors must be addressed to identify which zone it will control. See Smart Sensor Installation Instructions for details.</p>
<h4>Wiring Considerations</h4>
<p>Ordinary thermostat wire is recommended. Use 22 AWG or larger for normal wiring applications. Continuous wire lengths over 100 ft. should use 20 AWG or larger.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: ABCD bus wiring only requires a four-wire connection; however, it is good practice to run thermostat cable having more than four wires in the event of a damaged or broken wire during installation.<br />
Each communicating device in the Infinityr Zone System has a four-pin connector labeled ABCD. It is recommended that the following color code be used  when wiring each device:</p>
<p>A — Green = Data A<br />
B — Yellow = Data B<br />
C — White = 24VAC (Com)<br />
D — Red = 24VAC (Hot)</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Wiring-Considerations.webp" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/3-189.webp" /><strong>WARNING</strong></p>
<p><strong>ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.<br />
Before installing, modifying, or servicing the system, the main electrical disconnect switch must be in the OFF position. There may be more than 1 disconnect switch.  Lockout and tag switch with a suitable warning label.</p>
<ul>
<li>Turn off all power to equipment.</li>
<li>If an existing Infinityr Control or other control is being replaced:
<ul>
<li>Remove existing control from wall.</li>
<li>Disconnect wires from existing control.</li>
<li>Discard or recycle old control.
<ul>
<li> NOTE: Mercury is a hazardous waste, if existing control contains any mercury, it MUST be disposed of properly. The Infinity Touch Control does not contain mercury.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Select Infinity Control mounting plastic (backplate and decorative backplate if desired).</li>
<li>Route wires through large hole in mounting plastic. Level rear plastic against wall (for aesthetic value only; Infinity Touch Control need not be level to operate properly) and mark wall through two mounting holes.</li>
<li>Drill two 3/16–in (4.8 mm) mounting holes in wall where marked.</li>
<li>Secure mounting plastic to wall using two screws and anchors provided.</li>
<li>Adjust length and routing of each wire to reach each wire entry on the connector backplate. Strip 1/4–in (6.4 mm) of insulation from each wire.</li>
<li>Match and connect thermostat wires to proper terminals on control backplate.
<ul>
<li>See wiring diagrams in Appendix A.</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Push any excess wire into the wall. Seal hole in wall to prevent any air leaks. Leaks can affect operation.</li>
<li>Attach Infinity Control to the mounting plastic by lining up the plastic guides on the back of the control with the opening on the mounting plastic and push on.</li>
<li>Perform installation of all other system equipment (i.e. dampers, humidifier, ventilator, UV lights, etc.).</li>
<li>Turn on power to equipment.</li>
</ul>
<h5>Shielded Wire</h5>
<p>If the thermostat wiring will be located near or in parallel with high voltage wiring, radio, TV, or Ethernet wiring, then four-conductor, twisted–pair, shielded cable can be used to reduce or eliminate potential interference. The shield wire should be connected to the C terminal, or ground, at the indoor unit. The shield wire should <strong>NOT</strong> be connected to any terminal at the user interface. Connecting the shield to the ground at both ends can cause current loops in the shield, reducing shield effectiveness.<br />
Connect one pair of the two–pair (minimum) cable to the A and B communication terminals, and another pair to the C and D terminals at both ends of the cable. The shield wire should ONLY be connected at the indoor equipment ground or C terminal. Note that some outdoor units only require the A and B  connections. See the outdoor unit installation instructions for more information.</p>
<h5>Damper Control Module (zoning systems only)</h5>
<p>All wiring is run back to the Damper Control Module. Select a location near the furnace or fan coil where wiring from the control, each Remote Room Sensor or Smart Sensor, each damper actuator, and the equipment itself can come together easily. The Damper Control Module is approved for indoor use only and should never be installed with any of its components exposed to the elements. The Damper Control Module (and zone dampers) may be installed in any area where the temperature remains between –4°F to 158° F (–20° C to70° C), and there is no condensation. The cover must be installed to prevent damage from other sources.<br />
Do not locate where it will be accessible to children. It may be mounted in either vertical or horizontal position. Remember that wiring access is likely the most important consideration.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/3-189.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong><br />
<strong>PERSONAL INJURY HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury.<br />
To prevent possible damage to the Damper Control Module, DO NOT mount on plenum, ductwork, or flush against furnace or fan coil.</p>
<h4>Mounting</h4>
<p>First become familiar with all plastic assembly pieces shown on the following page. The Infinity Touch Control will snap together with the backplate. A backplate is supplied. Attach backplate using only a small hole in the wall allowing a four-wire connection to pass through. Mount the assembly to the backplate.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Mounting.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: Once Infinity Control is secured to wall with the backplate assembly (snapped together), care must be taken not to bend or break the interlocking tabs<br />
when removing.</p>
<h5>Decorative Backplate</h5>
<p>Sold separately, a thin decorative backplate is available to hide any marks/screw holes left from the previous thermostat. This decorative backplate (or beauty ring) is used by snapping it onto the back of the mounting plate before securing the plate to the wall.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Decorative-Backplate.webp" /></p>
<p>A12213</p>
<p>NOTE: Once the Infinity Touch Control is secured to wall with the backplate assembly (snapped together), care must be taken not to bend or break the interlocking tabs when removing.</p>
<h4>Humidifier Connections</h4>
<p>A 24VAC bypass or fan powered humidifier may be installed.<br />
NOTE: Do NOT use a traditional humidistat to control humidifier operation. If a humidifier is installed, let the Infinity Touch Control operate humidifier.</p>
<h5>Bypass Humidifier</h5>
<p>A bypass humidifier should be wired directly to the furnace or fan coil HUM and 24VAC COM terminals. The Infinity Control Touch will automatically energize the HUM output during a call for humidification.</p>
<h5>Fan Powered Humidifiers</h5>
<p>Most fan-powered humidifiers produce internal 24VAC in order to energize upon a switch or contact closure. For this application, a 24VAC N.O. Isolation Relay (DPST) MUST be used to prevent mixing the internal humidifier power with the indoor equipment transformer. Applying 24VAC isolation relay coil to furnace or fan coil HUM and COM terminals will allow the Infinity Touch Control to automatically energize the HUM output during a call for humidification. The N.O.<br />
relay contacts will be used to energize the humidifier. See fan-powered humidifier installation instructions for more details.</p>
<h3>Commissioning</h3>
<p>This section addresses initial power-up (or commissioning) of a new Infinity® Touch Control. The control will communicate and identify all components in the<br />
Infinityr® System. The following is a typical example for a communicating variable–speed furnace/fan coil with a 2–stage air–conditioner/heat pump (including HYBRIDHEAT® dual fuel system).</p>
<h4>Searching for Indoor Unit</h4>
<p>The Infinity Touch Control will light up and begin the commissioning process by displaying “Searching for indoor unit”. This includes Infinityr® small packaged products (SPP), with UI Version 8.0 software or later.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Searching-for-Indoor-Unit.webp" /></p>
<p>A12177</p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: If the Infinity–compatible indoor equipment (furnace or fan coil) cannot be found, the control will display “Indoor unit not found”. This MUST be corrected before the initial power-up sequence can continue. Proceed to the next section, Searching for an outdoor unit. If it is not corrected, the Infinity Touch  Control will go into its DEMO operating mode.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Searching-for-Indoor-Unit.webp" /></p>
<h4>Searching for Outdoor Unit</h4>
<p>The Infinity Touch Control will then proceed to communicate with the outdoor unit by displaying “Searching for outdoor unit”. This includes Infinityr small packaged products (SPP), with UI Version 8.0 software or later.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: If the outdoor unit cannot be found, the control will display “Outdoor unit not found”.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select the appropriate unit installed; then, touch NEXT.
<ul>
<li>AC1Stage – 1–stage air conditioner</li>
<li>*AC2Stage – 2–stage air conditioner</li>
<li>*HP1Stage – 1–stage heat pump</li>
<li>*HP2Stage – 2–stage heat pump</li>
<li>None – No outdoor unit installed</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: For small packaged products (SPP), the selection screen is not needed and will not appear.</p>
<ul>
<li>The installer will first be instructed to select the appropriate size of the outdoor unit; then, touch SELECT.<br />
*Network Interference Module (NIM) may be required for these selections to be displayed.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Searching-for-Outdoor-Unit.webp" /></p>
<h4>Indoor Evaporator Selection</h4>
<p>If a furnace is installed with a variable-capacity heat pump, a screen will appear to select the installed indoor evaporator coil. This selection is used to adequately calculate the refrigerant charge required while in the heat pump charging screens under the Heat Pump Checkout menu (See page 44). Select “other” for non–Carrier evaporators.</p>
<h4>Electric Heater Selection</h4>
<p>If the indoor equipment is a fan coil, the control will display “Searching for heater” until one is found. If the electric heater is not self–identifying, the select heater screen will appear. Touch the appropriate heater size; then, touch SELECT.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Electric-Heater-Selection.webp" /></p>
<h5>Hydronic Heat Application</h5>
<p>The Infinity Touch Control supports 2 types of Hydronic Heat applications:</p>
<ol>
<li>Hot water coil in combination with an FE fan coil and heat pump, or hot water coil as sole heat source with an FE fan coil.</li>
<li>Non–zoned FE fan coil combined with radiant hot water heat.<br />
In either application, a Hydronic Heat kit should be installed in place of an electric heater. See FE fan coil Product Data for accessory part number. The system will self–identify that hydronic heat has been installed during electric heater selection.<br />
The system will treat the hot water coil as either auxiliary heat in a heat pump application, or the sole heat source. Setup options for Hydronic Heat applications are described in the setup section of this instruction.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Hydronic-Heat-Application.webp" /></p>
<p>A13117</p>
<h4>Searching for SAM Module (If Applicable)</h4>
<p>“Searching for SAM Module” will appear on the screen to determine if a System Access Module, used for home automation only, is connected to the system.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: For more information regarding the SAM Module, reference the latest version of the application specification entitled “Carrier Communicating HVAC System” (Version 2 or later), available on HVACpartners.com, or the System Access Module Installation Instructions.</p>
<h4>Searching for Zones (If Applicable)</h4>
<p>“Zoning — Searching” will appear on the screen to determine if any zones are present. The screen will show Zone 1, Zone 2, etc., and indicate all zones having either a Remote Room Sensor, or smart sensors associated with them. If the system contains smart sensors, they must be assigned a zone number before continuing. See the Smart Sensor Installation Instructions on how to assign Smart Sensors to their respective zones. After each zone has been identified, touch NEXT.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Searching-for-Zones-If-Applicable.webp" /></p>
<h4>Filter Type Selection</h4>
<p>The installer will next be prompted to select the air filter type installed with the<br />
Infinity System. After the selection is made, touch NEXT.</p>
<ul>
<li>Air Filter: 1–in. to 4–in. media filter</li>
<li>EAC: high voltage electronic air cleaner</li>
<li>Air Purifier: Infinityr® or Performancet™ Air Purifier</li>
</ul>
<h4>Humidifier Installation</h4>
<p>Next, the installer will be prompted to select whether a humidifier is installed in the system. Select YES or NO, then touch NEXT.</p>
<h4>Ultraviolet Lights Installation</h4>
<p>Next, the installer will be prompted to select whether ultraviolet lights are installed in the system. Select YES or NO, then touch NEXT.</p>
<h4>Equipment Summary</h4>
<p>The equipment summary screen will appear after accessories have been selected.<br />
This screen will give a summary of all equipment automatically found or manually selected. If an incorrect selection was made, touch REINSTALL to restart the<br />
installation process.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Equipment-Summary.webp" /></p>
<h4>Static Pressure Check</h4>
<p>The static pressure check screen will appear next. The system will perform a static pressure check. This process will take about 1–1/2 minutes to complete. When completed, a screen will appear displaying the static pressure (in inches) across the equipment at the expected highest delivered airflow. If the blower RPM is greater than 1200, then a warning will appear, but equipment operation and the TrueSenset™ dirty filter detection operation will not be affected. When the static pressure check is complete, touch NEXT. NOTE: The static pressure check occurs only at initial installation, or when INSTALL isrunintheINSTALL/SERVICE menu.</p>
<h4>Duct Assessment (zoning applications only)</h4>
<p>The duct assessment screen will be displayed next for zoning applications. Touch NEXT to start Duct Assessment. Duct Assessment will measure the relative size of the ductwork, up to and through the dampers. These measurements are used to control the correct amount of airflow in the zoned system. Status messages will appear on the screen to indicate what the system is doing. The process will take approximately one minute per zone. The duct assessment will override a call for heat or cool.</p>
<p>A duct assessment will automatically occur each day at a user-selectable time. The factory default time is 1:00 p.m. but, may be changed by entering the Zoning  Setup menu (see pages 36 — 37). If there is an active call for heating or cooling, the system will wait until the call is satisfied before it performs the duct assessment. The system will first open all zones and drive the blower to 175 CFM/ton of cooling (or the minimum indoor unit’s airflow, whichever is greater). It will then take a static pressure measurement. The system will then close all zones and open one zone at a time, taking a static pressure measurement for each zone.</p>
<p>The system will then close all zones and take a pressure measurement, getting a value for the duct leakage up to and through the dampers. With these static pressure measurements, the system will calculate the relative size of each zone as well as the percent leakage through the dampers At the end of the process, the display will show the relative size of each zone duct.<br />
If the Infinity Touch Control detects an error (damper not moving or damper wired backward), it will perform the duct assessment again. If it still detects a  damper problem, it will default the measurements into equal sizes, with 10% leakage, and display the zone number for the suspected zone damper. After the duct assessment is complete, touch NEXT.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Duct-Assessment-zoning-applications-only.webp" /></p>
<h3>Service Menu</h3>
<p>The Service menus contain a set of vital information. This information enables the installer or service person to view a summary of what has been installed, etc. This information is not covered in the Owner’s Manual.<br />
To enter service menus, touch menu, then touch and hold the SERVICE icon for at least ten seconds. The following screens are available in installation and service. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: See the Owner’s Manual for information regarding software upgrades.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Owners-Manual-for-information-regarding-software-upgrades.webp" /></p>
<h4>Equipment Summary</h4>
<p>Touch EQUIPMENT SUMMARY to show indoor unit type and model number, outdoor unit type (and model number if a 2–stage unit), filter type, any accessories that are installed, and the number of zones in the system. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Equipment-Summary-1.webp" /></p>
<h4>Installation</h4>
<p>Touch INSTALLATION to perform the start-up process in order to learn all equipment in system. Press right side button to initiate the process. Touch NEXT to begin the process.<br />
Touch Duct Assessment to perform a duct assessment. This can be done if duct modifications have been made since the installation of the UI. Duct assessment can be performed without performing a full system install.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Installation.webp" /></p>
<p>A12146</p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: For Small Packaged Products (SPP), please use the following instructions for Set–up (Section 6.3), Checkout (Section 6.4), and Service (Section 6.5):<br />
–For PAC AC Indoor and OAC HP Indoor, follow Fan Coil instructions.<br />
–For Gas PAC Indoor and Gas PHP Indoor, follow Furnace instructions.<br />
–For all PAC Outdoor, follow AC/Heat Pump instructions.</p>
<h4>Set up</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Set-up.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: Depending upon the equipment installed, the following options will be displayed.</p>
<ul>
<li>Indoor:
<ul>
<li>Furnace</li>
<li>Fan coil</li>
<li>PAC AC Indoor</li>
<li>PAC HP Indoor</li>
<li>GAS PAC Indoor</li>
<li>GAS PHP Indoor</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Outdoor:
<ul>
<li>AC/Heat pump</li>
<li>PAC AC outdoor</li>
<li>PAC HP outdoor</li>
<li>GAS PAC outdoor</li>
<li>GAS PHP outdoor</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Once the equipment has been selected, the appropriate menus will be displayed.</p>
<h5>Thermostat</h5>
<p>First touch SETUP, then touch THERMOSTAT to set up the parameters for the Infinity® Touch Control.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Thermostat.webp" /></p>
<h6>Auto Mode set up</h6>
<p>Once the auto changeover option has been selected, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Enable or Disable: Choose to enable or disable auto changeover mode
<ul>
<li>Default = Enable</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Auto changeover time: Adjustable from 5 to 120 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 30 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Heat/Cool Deadband</h6>
<p>The minimum difference enforced between heating and cooling desired temperatures. The deadband does not change when the user changes between Fahrenheit  (°F) and Celsius (°C). Ex: A 2° deadband will be 2°For2°Canddoes not change with units, °Fand °C. This can allow one setting to “push” the other to maintain this difference. When the correct deadband is set, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Deadband: Adjustable from 0 to 6° F
<ul>
<li>Default = 2°</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Offsets</h6>
<p>This option allows calibration (or deliberate miscalibration) of the temperature and humidity sensors. These offsets are added to the actual temperature/humidity<br />
values. When the correct offsets are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Outdoor temperature: Adjustable from –5 to 5°F(-3to3°C)
<ul>
<li>Default = 0°F</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Humidity: Adjustable from –10 – 10%</li>
</ul>
<h6>Reset factory defaults</h6>
<p>This option allows the installer to reset certain factory parameters. After the selections are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Program Schedule: Reset back to pre-programmed time and temperature.</li>
<li>User Settings: Reset user settings back to pre-programmed values.</li>
<li>Install Settings: Reset installation settings back to pre-programmed values.</li>
<li>Last 10 Faults: Reset the last 10 system faults under the Service menu.</li>
</ul>
<h6>Scheduling Enable</h6>
<p>This option lets the installer allow programming features. After the selection is made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Scheduling: On or Off
<ul>
<li>Default = On</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Smart Recovery Enable</h6>
<p>Applies to programmable operation only. Will start recovery 90 minutes prior to scheduled change in both heating and cooling mode. After the selection is made,<br />
touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Smart Recovery: On or Off
<ul>
<li>Default = On</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>NOTE: The “Temperature Units Display” set–up section has been moved to the Homeowner Screens. See the Owner’s Manual for more information.</p>
<h5>Fan Coil</h5>
<p>First touch SETUP, then touch FAN COIL to set up the parameters for the fan coil unit.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Fan-Coil.webp" /></p>
<p>A12188</p>
<h6>Airflow</h6>
<p>This option allows the installer to select the appropriate airflow based on the needs of the installation. The QUIET airflow means the minimum cooling airflow that the system can safely run (typically 300 CFM/ton). Use this setting if duct noise is a severe problem. Note that duct sweating in high humidity environments could become an issue at low airflows. The COMFORT airflow means airflow is varied depending on humidity and temperature demand settings. This selection enables the full dehumidify and comfort capabilities of the system. The EFF325 airflow is a fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings – no dehumidification airflow reduction is performed. This is nominally 325 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. The EFF350 airflow is a fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings – no dehumidification airflow reduction is performed. This is nominally 350 CFM/ton, but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used.  The MAX airflow is a fixed 400 CFM/ton. No dehumidification airflow reduction is performed.</p>
<p>The dehumidify airflow, when set to NORMAL, is allowed to adjust to a minimum to satisfy the dehumidification call. When set to HIGH, the minimum airflow during the dehumidify mode is increased to reduce duct and register to sweat. Also, the airflow increases minimum airflow during normal cooling operations to help reduce duct sweating.<br />
After the selections are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Cooling Airflow: Quiet, Comfort, EFF325, EFF350, or Max
<ul>
<li>Default = Comfort</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Dehumidify Airflow: Normal or High
<ul>
<li>Default = Normal</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Altitude</h6>
<ul>
<li>Static Pressure selection: 0 to 10,000 feet. This is used to correct the static pressure readings the system performs.</li>
</ul>
<h6>Fan Coil Dehumidification</h6>
<p>The Dehum Drain Time option turns off the continuous fan at the end of cooling for five minutes in order to drain the indoor coil of water. The fan will only be turned off if a dehumidify demand existed at the start of or during the cooling cycle.<br />
The Electric Reheat option enables the electric heat to be used while cool–to–dehumidify is running. This will allow the cool–to–dehumidify function to run longer, greatly improving humidity control in cooling mode. Accumulated electrical energy used while reheating (in kilowatt-hours) is shown on the Fan Coil Run  Hours screen and can be reset there. This option is only available with fan coil systems.<br />
After the selections are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Dehum Drain Time: Adjustable from 5 to 60 minutes or OFF
<ul>
<li>Default = 15 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Electric Reheat: Yes or No
<ul>
<li>Default = No</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Fan Coil G–Terminal</h6>
<p>This setup option selects desired operation when the R to G contact is closed on the fan coil control board. Under this function option, fan turns on fan to the selected fan speed when G terminal is energized. Use the alert function to select the contact state for an alert. Select Normally Open or Normally Closed, and then save your selection. Shutdown shuts off fan and equipment when initiated. After the selections are made, touch Save.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Fan-Coil-G-Terminal.webp" /></p>
<p>A13229</p>
<h6>Fan Coil G–Terminal Alert</h6>
<p>Use the alert function to select the contact state for an alert. Select Normally Open or Normally Closed, and then save your selection.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Furnace-G-Terminal-Alert.webp" /></p>
<p>A13230</p>
<p>Shutdown: This setup option selects the change of state required for the shutdown. Select Normally Open or Normally Closed, and then save your selection.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Normally-Open-or-Normally-Closed.webp" /></p>
<p>A13231</p>
<h5>Furnace</h5>
<p>First touch SETUP, then touch FURNACE to set up the parameters for the furnace unit.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Furnace.webp" /></p>
<h6>Furnace Airflow</h6>
<p>Selects the airflow of the furnace when heating. EFFICIENCY is the airflow used to meet specified ratings, COMFORT is a decreased airflow used to increase the output air temperature and provide increased comfort.</p>
<p>For the Low heat rise option, set to ON if the system contains a bypass humidifier.<br />
The ON setting will increase the furnace low heat airflow.<br />
After the selections are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Furnace Air Flow: Comfort or Efficiency
<ul>
<li>Default = Comfort</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Low Heat Rise: On or Off
<ul>
<li>Default = Off</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>AC/HP Air Flow</h6>
<p>This option elects the airflow of the furnace when cooling, heat pump heating, and dehumidification.<br />
The QUIET airflow means the minimum cooling airflow that the system can safely run (typically 300 CFM/ton). Use this setting if duct noise is a severe problem. Note that duct sweating in high humidity environments could become an issue at low airflows. The COMFORT airflow means airflow is varied depending on humidity and temperature demand settings. This selection enables the full dehumidify and comfort capabilities of the system. The EFF325 airflow is a fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings – no dehumidification airflow reduction is performed.<br />
This is nominally 325 CFM/ton but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. The<br />
EFF350 airflow is a fixed airflow used to achieve specified ratings – no dehumidification airflow reduction is performed. This is nominally 350 CFM/ton but will vary if a 2–stage outdoor unit is used. The MAX airflow is a fixed 400 CFM/ton. No dehumidification airflow reduction is performed.<br />
The dehumidify airflow, when set to NORMAL, the airflow is allowed to adjust to a minimum to satisfy the dehumidification call. When set to HIGH, the minimum airflow during the dehumidify mode is increased to reduce duct and register to sweat. Also, the airflow increases minimum airflow during normal cooling operations to help reduce duct sweating.<br />
After the selections are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Cool: Quiet, Comfort, EFF325, EFF350, or Max</li>
<li>Default = Comfort</li>
<li>HP Heat: Comfort or EFF350</li>
<li>Default = Comfort</li>
<li>Dehumidify: Normal or High</li>
<li>Default = Normal</li>
</ul>
<h6>Furnace Staging</h6>
<p>This option controls the staging of the furnace and selects the minimum amount of time low stage must operate before high stage is activated. SYSTEM setting will allow the Infinity Zone Control to determine furnace staging. LOW will only run the low stage of furnace heat. LOW–MED will run the low and medium stages (2 stages of heat). MED will only run the medium stage of heat. MED–HIGH will run the medium and high stages (2 stages of heat). HIGH will only run the high stage of furnace heat.<br />
NOTE: Two-stage furnace has LOW and HIGH selections only.</p>
<ul>
<li>Stages: System, Low, Low–Med, Med, Med–High, or High
<ul>
<li>Default = System</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Furnace Airflow Limits (modulating furnace only)</h6>
<p>The following settings allow the installer to restrict the furnace within certain minimum and maximum airflows. These airflows are converted to capacities. The Min and Max limits are determined by the equipment size. These settings are not the same as the zoning airflow limits.</p>
<ul>
<li>Min. modulating limits: Minimum CFM to run a modulating furnace. This will increase the minimum operating capacity of the furnace.
<ul>
<li>Default value is the furnace airflow for the lowest heat capacity.</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Max. modulating limits: Maximum CFM to run a modulating furnace. This will increase the maximum operating capacity of the furnace.
<ul>
<li>Default value is the furnace air flow for the highest heat capacity</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Furnace Off Delay</h6>
<p>This option denotes the amount of time the blower will continue to run after heating has shut off. After the selection is made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Furnace Off Delay: 90, 120, 150 or 180 seconds
<ul>
<li>Default = 120 seconds</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Altitude</h6>
<p>For gas de–rating, this setting will adjust the furnace’s airflow to compensate for altitude. Altitude adjustment is not available with older furnaces. Please see furnace instructions for further details. After the selection is made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Altitude: 0000 – 2000, US 2001 – 3000, CN 2100 – 4500, US 3001 – 4000, US 4001 – 5000, US 5001 6000, US 6001 – 7000, US 7001 – 8000, US 8001 – 9000, and US &gt; 9000.
<ul>
<li>Default = US 2001–3000</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Static Pressure selection: 0 to 10,000 feet. This value is used to correct the static pressure readings the system performs.</li>
</ul>
<h6>Furnace Dehumidifier Drain</h6>
<p>This option selects the time the continuous fan turns off at the end of cooling in order to drain the indoor coil of water. The fan will only be turned off if a dehumidify demand existed at the start of or during the cooling cycle.</p>
<ul>
<li>Dehumidify Drain Time: Adjustable from 5 to 60 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 15 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Furnace G Terminal</h6>
<p>This setup option selects desired operation when the R–G circuit changes state on the furnace control board depending on setup.<br />
Under the function option, FAN turns on fan to selected fan speed when G terminal is energized. SHUTDOWN shuts off fan and equipment when initiated.<br />
After the selections are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Function: Disabled, Fan or Shutdown
<ul>
<li>Default = Disabled</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Fan Speed:Low,Med,orHigh
<ul>
<li>Default = Low</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Shutdown:
<ul>
<li>Normally Open</li>
<li>Normally Closed</li>
<li>The shutdown function may not be immediate. Blower off delays, etc., will still be used. The shutdown is not intended for commercial applications. If immediate shutdown is required, provision must be made to remove power to indoor unit.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Furnace G–Terminal Alert</h6>
<p>Use the alert function to select the contact state for an alert. Select Normally Open or Normally Closed, and then save your selection.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Fan-Coil-G-Terminal-Alert.webp" /></p>
<p>A13230</p>
<p>Shutdown: This setup option selects the change of state required for shutdown.<br />
Select Normally Open or Normally Closed, and then save your selection.</p>
<h5>AC/Heat Pump</h5>
<p>First touch SETUP, then touch AC/HEAT PUMP to set up the parameters for the AC/Heat Pump unit.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-AC-Heat-Pump.webp" /></p>
<p>A12190</p>
<h6>Latching</h6>
<p><strong>High Cool Latch</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-High-Cool-Latch.webp" /></p>
<ul>
<li>System in Control</li>
<li>The system will decide which stage should be running to satisfy the cooling demand.</li>
<li>High Cool
<ul>
<li>Temperature above which only the high stage of cooling will be energized.</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Only Low Cool
<ul>
<li>The system will only run in low-stage cooling.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>High Heat Latch</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-High-Heat-Latch.webp" /></p>
<p>A13228</p>
<ul>
<li>System in Control
<ul>
<li>The system will decide which stage should be running to satisfy the heating demand.</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>High Heat
<ul>
<li>Temperature below which only the high stage of heating will be energized.</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Only Low Heat
<ul>
<li>The system will only run in low-stage heating.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Cooling Lockout</h6>
<p>Outside temperature below which cooling will not be provided. After the selection is made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Cooling Lockout Temp: None, 45, 50 or 55 (_F)
<ul>
<li>Default = None</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Defrost Interval</h6>
<p>Time interval at which defrost cycles can occur on a heat pump. AUTO means the defrost interval is optimized by the outdoor control. After the selection is made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Set Defrost Interval: 30, 60, 90, 120 minutes or AUTO
<ul>
<li>Default = 30 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Low Ambient Cooling</h6>
<p>Selecting YES will enable the low ambient cooling operation in the outdoor unit. This setting is only available with communicating outdoor units and with  Cooling Lockout set to NONE. Low ambient kits are not needed with communicating outdoor units. After the selection is made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Low Ambient Cooling: Yes or No</li>
<li>Default = No</li>
</ul>
<h6>Quiet Shift</h6>
<p>This option turns on Quiet Shift function in 1–stage or 2–stage communicating heat pumps. After the selection is made, touch SAVE.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: This option is not available with variable speed heat pumps.</p>
<ul>
<li>Quiet Shift:OnorOff
<ul>
<li>Default = Off</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>AC/Heat Pump RPM Max</h6>
<p>Used with variable capacity heat pumps, this option clamps the operating speed of the heat pump to this maximum. Used to reduce operating noise while in high heating capacity. Reducing this value will reduce the heating capacity of the heat pump. After the selection is made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>AC Heat Pump Max RPM: Adjustable from 4500 – 7000
<ul>
<li>Default = 4500 RPM</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Defrost Fan Delay</h6>
<p>Turns on the outdoor unit fan at the end of a defrost cycle for approximately 12 seconds. This helps to reduce any nuisance refrigerant noise caused by the switching reversing valve. This setup is only available on communicating heat pumps. After the selection is made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Defrost Fan Delay: Yes or No
<ul>
<li>Default = No</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Brownout Disable</h6>
<p>This option turns off the high voltage brownout detection function in the outdoor unit control. After the selection is made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Brownout Disable: On or Off
<ul>
<li>Default = Off</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Energy Efficiency</h6>
<p>This option is used to input the published ratings of the installed air conditioner or heat pump as part of the energy tracking calculation. After the ratings are  entered, touch SAVE.</p>
<h6>Heat Source Lockout</h6>
<p>First touch SETUP, then touch HEAT SOURCE LOCKOUTS to set up the parameters for the AC/Heat Pump unit.<br />
For hydronic heat applications, this option allows the installer to set the lockout temperatures below which only the hydronic coil will operate, and the lockout temperature above which the hydronic coil will not operate. After the selections are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Heat-Source-Lockout.webp" /></p>
<p>A12149</p>
<ul>
<li>HP Lockout: Adjustable from 5 to 55°F(–15to13°C) or None
<ul>
<li>Default = None</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Furnace, Electric Heat or Hydronic Lockout: Adjustable from 5 to 55°F (–15to13_C) or None
<ul>
<li>Default = None</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Defrost with Furnace, Electric Heat or Hydronic: Yes or No
<ul>
<li>Default = Yes</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h5>Zoning (If Applicable)</h5>
<p>First touch SETUP, then touch ZONING to set up the parameters for the zoning system (if applicable).</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Zoning-If-Applicable.webp" /></p>
<h6>Zoning Disable</h6>
<p>This option allows the installer to enable or disable zoning. After the selection is made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Disable Zoning: Yes or No
<ul>
<li>Default = No</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Zone Offsets</h6>
<p>This option allows actual temperature offset for each zone, allowing calibration (or deliberate miscalibration) of each sensor. Use the Left (&lt;) or Right (&gt;) buttons to change the zone. After the selection is made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Temperature Offset: Adjustable between –5 to 5_F(–3to3_C)
<ul>
<li>Default = 0_F</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Zone Airflow Limits</h6>
<p>Since a bypass damper is prohibited in this system, this setting is used to select the maximum allowable noise/airflow relationship into each zone based on air noise and comfort requirements. LOW means 100% of maximum assessed airflow; MED–LOW means 138% of maximum assessed airflow; MEDIUM means  176% of maximum assessed airflow; MED-HIGH means 214% of maximum assessed airflow; HIGH means 250% of maximum assessed airflow; and NO LIMIT means the equipment does not stage down.</p>
<p>CFM associated with each limit is shown on the screen. Compare this value with the equipment’s low stage CFM value to ensure that equipment will run for each zone. Assessed airflow is determined as described in DUCT ASSESSMENT. After the selections are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Touch the zone name that you wish to change</li>
<li>Select the zone to adjust airflow: Low, Med–Low, Medium, Med–High, High, or No Limit
<ul>
<li>Default = High</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Duct Assessment Time</h6>
<p>This option allows the installer to select the time in which the duct assessment will be performed. After the selection is made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Duct Assessment Time: Selectable between 12 AM and 11PM
<ul>
<li>Default = 1 PM</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h5>Accessories</h5>
<p>First touch SETUP, then touch ACCESSORIES to set up the parameters for the accessories installed with the system.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Accessories.webp" /></p>
<p>A12192</p>
<h6>Filter</h6>
<p>With this option, the installer has the option of selecting pressure monitoring, the type of filter installed, and the time interval for cleaning. After the selections are<br />
made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Pressure Monitoring (not available with Electric Air Cleaner): Enable or Disable
<ul>
<li>Default = Enable</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Clean Interval: Selectable from 1 to 18 months
<ul>
<li>Default = 3 months</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Filter Type: Air Filter, Electric Air Cleaner, or Air Purifier
<ul>
<li>Filter type is selected during installation; otherwise default = air filter</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Humidifier</h6>
<p>With this option, the installer has the option of selecting whether a humidifier is installed, to humidify with the fan in low speed, and the time interval for changing the humidifier pad. After the selections are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Humidifier Installed: Yes or No
<ul>
<li>Humidifier selection made during installation; otherwise default = no</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Change Pad: Selectable from 1 to 24 months
<ul>
<li>Default = 12 months</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Humidify with Fan: Yes or No
<ul>
<li>Default = No</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Ultraviolet Lights</h6>
<p>With this option, the installer has the option of selecting whether ultraviolet lights are installed, and the time interval for changing the ultraviolet lights. After the<br />
selections are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>UV Lights Installed: Yes or No
<ul>
<li>UV Lights selection made during installation; otherwise default = no</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Change Interval: Selectable from 1 to 48 months
<ul>
<li>Default = 12 months</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h6>Ventilator</h6>
<p>When a ventilator is installed, the installer has the option of selecting the time interval for cleaning the ventilator. After the selections are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Clean Interval: Selectable from 60, 90, 120, 150 or 180 days
<ul>
<li>Default = 90 days</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h5>Utility Curtailment</h5>
<p>Utility Saver is used to forcing the equipment to a lower stage (low or off) when activated by the utility company, typically during peak load times. This setup is available only if the equipment has a utility saver input (refer to outdoor equipment Installation Instructions). This setup controls the response of the equipment when the utility saver input is active. DISABLED means that the curtailment function is not active. TURN OFF means the outdoor unit is to be turned off when the curtailment function is active. LOW STAGE means the outdoor unit will run in lows stage when the curtailment function is active. After the selections are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Utility-Curtailment.webp" /></p>
<p>A12193</p>
<ul>
<li>Cooling: Disabled, Low Stage or Turn off
<ul>
<li>Default = Disabled</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Heat Pump: Disabled, Low Stage or Turn off
<ul>
<li>Default = Disabled</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h5>Hydronic Airflow</h5>
<p>This option allows the installer to select the airflow for the fan coil when paired with a hydronic coil. After the selections are made, touch SAVE.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Hydronic-Airflow.webp" /></p>
<p>A12194</p>
<ul>
<li>Airflow: Selectable between Off to Max in 50 CFM increments
<ul>
<li>Off = 450 CFM, MAX = (odu_size in KBTU * 400) / 12)</li>
<li>Default = Off</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Blower On Delay: Selectable from 0 to 240 seconds
<ul>
<li>Default = 30 seconds</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Blower Off Delay: Selectable from 0 to 240 seconds
<ul>
<li>Default = 0 seconds</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h4>Check out</h4>
<p>Touch CHECKOUT to view the equipment installed in the system. Perform checkout test to make sure each piece of equipment is operating properly.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Electric-Heat.webp" /></p>
<h4>Electric Heat</h4>
<p>If you have a fan coil with electric heaters, this menu item will allow the heaters to be exercised. With self–identifying electric heaters, three stages of electric heat are available to be exercised in any combination. Non–identifying heaters will only provide one stage of heat. After the selections are made, touch START.</p>
<ul>
<li>Low Heat: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 5 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Medium Heat: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 5 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>High Heat: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 5 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h5>Furnace</h5>
<p>Make sure the furnace is properly installed.<br />
This option allows the furnace to be exercised. First, a low heat run time and high heat run-time are selected. The furnace will execute its ignition start-up sequence.<br />
This sequence will be displayed on the screen. After the gas valve and blower motor turn on, the screen will show the current operating status of the furnace.  After the selections are made, touch START.</p>
<ul>
<li>Low Heat: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 5 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>High Heat: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 5 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h5>Hydronic</h5>
<p>This option allows the hydronic heat relay to be exercised. First, it will energize the relay and turns on the blower. This sequence will be displayed on the screen.  After the selections are made, touch START.</p>
<ul>
<li>Hydronic heater check: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 5 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h5>Air Conditioning</h5>
<p>This option allows the air conditioner to be exercised. With a 2–stage AC unit, a low cool and a high cool run-time are independently selectable to exercise. The display will change to show the AC operating status. After the selections are made, touch START.</p>
<p>NOTE: Airflows during Checkout modes are fixed to the EFFICIENCY setting and are independent of other airflow settings. To view airflows for normal air conditioning cooling mode, exit the CHECKOUT screen and apply a heating demand to the system.</p>
<ul>
<li>Low Cool Run Time: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 5 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>High Cool Run Time: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 5 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h4>Heat Pump Heating</h4>
<p>The heat pump heating mode can be exercised with this menu option. With a 2–stage heat pump, a Low Heat and a High Heat Run Time are independently<br />
selectable to exercise.<br />
For variable speed heat pumps, you can select the speed at which the heat pump will exercise.<br />
After the selections are made, touch START.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: Airflows during Checkout modes are fixed to the EFFICIENCY setting and are independent of other airflow settings. To view airflows for normal air conditioning cooling mode, exit the CHECKOUT screen and apply a heating demand to the system.</p>
<ul>
<li>Low Heat Run Time: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 5 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>High Heat Run Time: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 5 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Speed (variable speed heat pump only): Selectable from lowest available to 100%
<ul>
<li>Default = lowest available as specified by variable speed heat pump</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Defrost: Yes or No
<ul>
<li>Default = No</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h5>Heat Pump Cooling</h5>
<p>The heat pump cooling mode can be exercised with this menu option. With a 2–stage heat pump, a Low Cool Run Time and a High Cool Run Time are independently selectable to exercise.</p>
<p>For variable speed heat pumps, you can select the speed at which the heat pump will exercise.<br />
After the selections are made, touch <strong>START</strong>.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: Airflows during Checkout modes are fixed to the EFFICIENCY setting and are independent of other airflow settings. To view airflows for normal air conditioning cooling mode, exit the CHECKOUT screen and apply a heating demand to the system.</p>
<ul>
<li>Low Cool Run Time: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 5 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>High Cool Run Time: Selectable from 0 to 120 minutes
<ul>
<li>Default = 5 minutes</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Speed (variable speed heat pump only): Selectable from lowest available to 100%
<ul>
<li>Default = lowest available as specified by variable speed heat pump</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<h5>Humidifier</h5>
<p>The humidifier can be exercised On and Off with this menu option. To end the humidifier checkout, touch STOP.</p>
<ul>
<li>Humidifier Check: On or Off</li>
</ul>
<h5>Ventilator</h5>
<p>The ventilator can be exercised through all of its operating speeds with this menu option. To end the ventilator checkout, touch STOP.</p>
<ul>
<li>Humidifier Check: High, Low or Off</li>
</ul>
<h5>Zoning (If Applicable)</h5>
<h6>Airflow Limits</h6>
<p>Because there is no bypass damper, the zone airflow limit check will allow the installer to assess the airflow noise generated by the system providing the maximum amount of airflow to each zone. Touch AIRFLOW LIMITS: When START is touched, the selected zone’s damper will fully open, all others will close, and the indoor unit will provide the maximum airflow for that zone (as selected in SETUP — ZONING, Airflow Limits). If the airflow noise is objectionable,  the installer can select a lower airflow noise limit. If the noise is not objectionable, the installer should leave HIGH selected, or even NO LIMIT.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: Selecting a lower airflow noise limit may decrease the homeowner’s comfort in that zone.</p>
<p>Touch the Left (&lt;) or Right (&gt;) buttons to change the desired zones. Once the proper airflow limits are set, touch SAVE,those zoning CHECKOUT menu.</p>
<h6>Damper/Sensor Check</h6>
<p>The Sensor/Damper Check allows the installer to check each zone damper for operation, as well as insure the zone sensor corresponds to that particular zone. When first initiated, the Zone 1 damper will fully open, and all other zones will close. Using the Left (&lt;) or Right (&gt;) buttons, the installer can select each zone and verify the damper is fully open while all other dampers remain closed.</p>
<p>After proper damper operation has been verified, the installer can now check and verify that each Remote Room Sensor corresponds to the proper zone damper in the same zone. For systems with remote room sensor, temporarily disconnect any other zone Remote Room Sensor (at sensor location). That zone damper will now open, while the Zone 1 damper will close.</p>
<p>For systems using Smart Sensors, the installer may press and hold the Hold and Mode buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds to change the zone under test. This should be done with each zone to verify that the zone sensor corresponds to that particular zone.<br />
Once each zone has been checked, touch DONE to return to the ZONING CHECKOUT menu.</p>
<h6>Zone Duct Assessment</h6>
<p>This screen shows the results from the previous duct assessment. The duct assessment is performed at initial start-up and at 1 P.M. or the installer selected time each day. If another duct assessment is desired, the service technician should perform a reinstall of the system.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: A Duct Assessment will automatically occur every 24 hours at selected time to check system static and calibrate dampers.<br />
Once the duct assessment is complete, touch DONE to return to the ZONING CHECKOUT menu.</p>
<h6>Sensor Type</h6>
<p>This option shows a list of all zones with corresponding sensor types.</p>
<h4>Service Information</h4>
<p>The Service Info menu will only show the equipment installed in the system. To enter this menu of options, touch SERVICE INFORMATION.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Service-Information.webp" /></p>
<h5>Advanced Diagnostics</h5>
<p>When viewing the Service Information screen, there is a button labeled View Diagnostics, which provides the top 3 most likely root causes for the most recent fault.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: This feature is only available with compatible models. Those models are currently the FE fan coil, the modulating furnace, and the modulating heat pump.</p>
<h5>Fan Coil Status</h5>
<p>The fan coil status screen displays relevant information about the fan coil operation. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Fan-Coil-Status.webp" /></p>
<h5>Furnace Status</h5>
<p>The furnace status screen displays relevant information about the furnace operation. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus,  touch DONE.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Furnace-Status.webp" /></p>
<h5>AC Status</h5>
<p>The AC status screen displays relevant information about the AC operation. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-AC-Status.webp" /></p>
<p>A12199</p>
<h5>Heat Pump Status</h5>
<p>The heat pump status screen displays relevant information about the heat pump operation. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Heat-Pump-Status.webp" /></p>
<p>A12200</p>
<h5>Zoning Status</h5>
<p>The zoning status screen displays relevant information about the zoning operation. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus,  touch DONE.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Zoning-Status.webp" /></p>
<p>A12201</p>
<h5>Last 10 System Faults</h5>
<p>This screen will show the last 10 events that occurred throughout the system. Each entry has the time and date incident recorded. These events are stored in the<br />
memory of the control and are resettable in the THERMOSTAT SETUP screen under the RESET FACTORY DEFAULT selection. Each entry shows the equipment that generated the event. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Last-10-System-Faults.webp" /></p>
<p>A12151</p>
<h5>Run/Fault History</h5>
<p>This information is stored in the equipment circuit boards (if communicating) and displayed on the control. The indoor unit and outdoor unit (if communicating)  have the following histories. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus, touch DONE.</p>
<ul>
<li>Resettable Faults: Fault counters for each piece of equipment that can be reset.</li>
<li>Cycle Counters: Number of heat/cool/power cycles the unit has performed.</li>
<li>Run Times: Lifetime hours of operation in heating, cooling, and how long the unit has been powered.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Fault-History.webp" /></p>
<p>A12202</p>
<h5>Model/Serial Numbers</h5>
<p>This menu item allows the installer to view the model number, serial number (if available), and control software version (if available) of all communicating pieces of equipment in the system, including the wall control. This information resides in the original equipment circuit board(s) from the factory. If an equipment circuit board has been replaced, the model and serial number will no longer be displayed. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK. To exit the Service menus,  touch DONE.</p>
<h5>Service Phone Number</h5>
<p>This menu item allows the installer to view the name and phone number that the homeowner can call for future service of the system. This name and phone number will appear to the homeowner whenever a service reminder pop–up message is displayed (i.e. Change Filter, etc.). To return to the previous screen, touch  BACK. To exit, touch DONE. See Section 6.7.</p>
<h5>Energy Tracking Watt Meter</h5>
<p>This menu item allows the installer to view the energy usage of each piece of equipment connected to the system. To return to the previous screen, touch BACK.  To exit the Service menus, touch DONE.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Energy-Tracking-Watt-Meter.webp" /></p>
<p>A12203</p>
<h4>Refrigerant Charging</h4>
<p>For variable speed heat pumps, a refrigerant charging menu is available to aid in the proper charging of the system. Enter the menu from the service screens by touching REFRIGERANT CHARGING.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Refrigerant-Charging.webp" /></p>
<p>A12204</p>
<h5>Charging</h5>
<p>Within the CHARGING screens, the installer will have the ability to enter the LINESET length and the VA PO R L I N E diameter. After the selections are made, touch NEXT.</p>
<ul>
<li>Lineset: Selectable from 5 to 200 feet</li>
<li>Vapor line: Selectable with various diameters by using the up and down buttons</li>
</ul>
<p>Next, the installer will enter the WEIGH-IN screen to verify the current total charge is accurate. Once the installer has confirmed, touch DONE.<br />
Next, the installer will enter the SERVICE VALVE SUBCOOL screen. This screen will show the current liquid line subcool target (in _F). To begin the charging,  touch START. If the outdoor temperatures are not in the required range, Service Valve Subcool may not be available.<br />
Next, the installer will enter the SERVICE VALVE INFORMATION screen. The current liquid line subcool target, stabilization time, mode and speed in rpm,  EXV position in percent, indoor airflow in CFM, outdoor coil temperature in _F, indoor temperature in _F, outdoor temperature in _F, compressor discharge pressure in psig, and accumulator suction pressure in psig are displayed on this screen. Once the stabilization time has expired, touch DONE.</p>
<h5>Pump down</h5>
<p>Because this system has an inverter-controlled compressor, suction pressure transducer, and EXV, the conventional procedure cannot be used to “pump down” and isolate the refrigerant into the outdoor unit. The control has provisions to assist in performing this function.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select mode to pump down in (COOL or HEAT).  COOL mode allows refrigerant to be isolated in outdoor unit. HEAT mode allows the refrigerant to be isolated in indoor coil and lineset. Set desired time period.
<ul>
<li>Default time period for procedure is 120 minutes.</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Touch START to begin the pump-down process. Unit will begin running in selected mode after a brief delay.</li>
</ul>
<h5>Evacuation</h5>
<p>Because this system has an EXV for the heating expansion device, additional steps must be taken to open the EXV if the heat pump unit must be evacuated for service reasons. If the EXV is not open when pulling a vacuum or recovering refrigerant from the heat pump unit, extended evacuation time may be required and/or inadequate vacuum obtained. The control has provisions to open the EXV for refrigerant recovery and/or evacuation.</p>
<ul>
<li>Set desired time period.
<ul>
<li>Default time period for procedure is 120 minutes.</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Touch START on UI to open the valve.</li>
<li>Begin evacuation or refrigerant recovery as required for the procedure after control indicates the EXV is open. Power may be removed from heat pump after the control indicates “READY TO EVACUATE.”</li>
</ul>
<h4>Dealer Logo</h4>
<p>Touch DEALER LOGO to upload the dealer logo and contact information from a standard USB memory device connected to the Infinityr Touch Control. The “Dealer Logo Application” PC/MAC software download available at <a href="https://www.MyInfinityTouch.Carrier.com/Infinity/downloads" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.MyInfinityTouch.Carrier.com/Infinity/downloads</a> is required to properly format the dealer logo and contact information for use on the wall control.<br />
Along with the dealer logo (if any), three lines of dealer information are provided on the wall control:<br />
Dealer name (50 characters, max)<br />
Dealer phone number (20 characters, max)<br />
Dealer URL (50 characters, max)<br />
The wall control dealer information display is 30 characters wide. Dealer names and URLs over 30 characters will be split into two lines on the display.<br />
The PC/MAC software application to format the dealer logo and contact information can be found at:<br />
<a href="https://www.MyInfinityTouch.Carrier.com/Infinity/downloads" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.MyInfinityTouch.Carrier.com/Infinity/downloads</a><br />
<strong>Download</strong> the program and follow the program instructions.<br />
Once the dealer logo and contact information have been properly loaded onto the USB memory device, insert the USB device into the bottom edge of the  Infinity Touch Control. The control will prompt you whether or not to upload the dealer logo. Once complete, you will receive a confirmation that your upload was successful. If the information was not stored properly on the USB device, you will receive an error message that the dealer logo was not found. Refer back to the PC/MAC software application instructions and try again. Once the upload is complete, touch NEXT.<br />
If you have problems, contact your distributor service manager for support.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Dealer-Logo.webp" /></p>
<h3>Wireless Set–up</h3>
<p>With the appropriate models, the Infinity® Touch Control can connect to the in-home Wi-Fi to connect the Infinity System to the Internet. The model SYSTXCCITW01 wall control comes bundled with an Infinity Wireless Access Point. This establishes an independent Infinity System Wi-Fi network. The model SYSTXCCITC01–A is intended to connect to an existing home Wi-Fi network, or to be added to an existing Infinity System Wi-Fi network. If the in-home  Wi-Fi is found to be incompatible with SYSTXCCITC01–A, an Infinity Wireless Access Point (SYSTXXXGWR01) or any other compatible wireless router can be installed to establish Wi-Fi connectivity.</p>
<p>Please call 1–800–CARRIER for support with Wi-Fi set–up and connection to the MyInfinity Server.</p>
<p>The ability to remotely access and adjust the settings of the Infinity® Touch Control with the MyInfinity web and mobile applications is dependent on the compatibility of the user’s computer/network or mobile device, the Infinity Touch Control, and/or the MyInfinity web server with, and the availability of, the user’s Internet service provider or mobile device carrier service. Carrier Corporation makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, including, to the extent permitted by applicable law, any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose or use, about the compatibility of the user’s computer/network, or mobile device, with the Infinity Touch Control, and/or the MyInfinity web server, with, and the availability of, the user’s Internet service provider or mobile device carrier service, or that the ability to remotely access and adjust the settings of the Infinity Touch Control will not be negatively affected by the network-related modifications, upgrades, or similar activity of the user’s Internet service provider or mobile device carrier service.<br />
NOTE: See the Owner’s Manual for information regarding software upgrades.</p>
<h4>SYSTXCCITC01–A Models (only)</h4>
<p>To establish Wi-Fi connectivity to the Infinity Touch Control using the in-home router or wireless access point the wireless access point SSID and password/passkey must be known for setting–up.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/SYSTXCCITW01-A-Models-only.webp" /></p>
<p>A13241</p>
<ul>
<li>Select the WIRELESS from the menu screen</li>
<li>Make sure the Wi–Fi connection is enabled, by touching ENABLED.</li>
<li>Touch SETUP A WI–FI CONNECTION to begin the process.</li>
<li>Next, touch SCAN FOR AVAILABLE ACCESS POINTS.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/SETUP-A-WI-FI-CONNECTION.webp" /></p>
<p>A13235</p>
<ul>
<li>On the next screen look for the SSID of the router/access point. After being selected, it will be outlined in faint blue. Then select NEXT.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-On-the-next-screen-look-for-the-SSID.webp" /></p>
<p>A13236</p>
<ul>
<li>The selected network will show. Choose an appropriate Wi-Fi security. Usually auto-detect will correctly identify the type of security used. If the network has no security it will show as on the left, but a secured network will prompt for the Wi-Fi security key.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Choose-an-appropriate-Wi-Fi-security.webp" /></p>
<ul>
<li>If a Wi–Fi security key is shown as on the right hand picture above then select the white bar and enter the security key, then select NEXT.</li>
<li>Touch in the security key area, and the keyboard will appear.
<ul>
<li>Use the on screen keyboard to enter the Wi–Fi security key, then touch NEXT.</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>The control will inform you if the connection is successful. If so, touch DONE.
<ul>
<li>If the connection is unsuccessful, verify that the proper information has been entered before you touch RETRY. The control will go through the process again.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-control-will-inform-you-if-the-connection-is-successful.webp" /></p>
<p>A13238</p>
<ul>
<li>After the control has connected to the network, go to <a href="https://www.myinfinitytouch.carrier.com/login" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.MyInfinity.Carrier.com</a> to register the unit and begin remote access. This requires the MAC  address and serial number of the Infinity® Touch Wall Control. To find the serial number and MAC address of the Infinity® Touch Wall Control, click on  Menu, Down Arrow, Wireless and View MyInfinity Info. This screen will provide the information needed on the MyInfinity website during registration.</li>
<li>If you have any issues, please contact your servicing dealer.</li>
<li>When the connection to the MyInfinity web server has been established, the status screen will show Connected for both Wi-Fi and the server.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-connection-to-the-MyInfinity-web-server.webp" /></p>
<h4>SYSTXCCITW01–A Models (only)</h4>
<p>To establish the Wi-Fi connectivity to the Infinity Touch Control through the Infinity System Wireless Access Point (TP–LINKR® Device), connect the WAN (BLUE port) connection of TP-LINK Wireless Access Point to the home’s existing router LAN port using the provided Ethernet cable. The LAN ports on the back of the TP-LINK Wireless Access Point should not be used for other devices. The Infinity (TP-LINK) Wireless Access Point should only be used for connection of the Infinity Touch Control(s) and is not intended to be used wired or wirelessly with any other devices.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-SYSTXCCITC01-A-Models-only.webp" /></p>
<p>A12114</p>
<ul>
<li>Select the WIRELESS from the menu screen</li>
<li>Make sure the Wi-Fi connection is enabled, by touching ENABLED.</li>
<li>Touch SETUP A WI-FI CONNECTION to begin the process.</li>
<li>Next, touch SCAN FOR AVAILABLE ACCESS POINTS.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-SYSTXCCITC01-A-Models.webp" /></p>
<ul>
<li>Select the myHVACxxxxxx connection from the list, then touch NEXT (my HVAC is followed by the last 6 digits of your Wireless Access Point’s MAC address; see the label on the bottom of the TP-LINK Wireless Access Point).</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-SSID-Security-Key.webp" /></p>
<p>A12357</p>
<ul>
<li>You may have to use the down arrow to scan to the next screen to find “myHVACxxxxxx”.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/the-down-arrow-to-scan.webp" /></p>
<p>A12116</p>
<ul>
<li>Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the Wi-Fi security key, then touch NEXT.
<ul>
<li>Touch in the security key area, and the keyboard will appear.</li>
<li>The security key can be found on the back of the TP-LINK Wireless Access Point.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-screen-keyboard-to-enter-the-Wi-Fi-security-key.webp" /></p>
<ul>
<li>The control will inform you if the connection is successful. If so, touch DONE.
<ul>
<li>If the connection is unsuccessful, verify that the proper information has been entered before you touch RETRY. The control will go through the process again.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/connection-is-successful.webp" /><br />
A12118</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>After your control has connected to the network, go to <a href="https://www.myinfinitytouch.carrier.com/login" target="_blank" rel="noopener">www.MyInfinity.Carrier.com</a> to register the unit and begin remote access. This requires the MAC  address and serial number of the InfinityR Touch Wall Control, NOT the Wireless Access Point. To find the serial number and MAC address of the Infinity  Touch Wall Control, click on Menu, Down Arrow, Wireless and View My Infinityr Info. This screen will provide the information needed on the MyInfinityr website during registration.</li>
<li>If you have any issues, please contact your servicing dealer.</li>
<li>When the connection to the MyInfinity web server has been established, the status screen will show Connected for both Wi-Fi and the server. TP-LINK is a trademark of TP-LINK Technologies Co., Ltd.</li>
</ul>
<h3>Appendix A — Wiring Diagrams</h3>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Appendix-A-Wiring-Diagrams.webp" /></p>
<p>*<strong>NOTE</strong>: Some outdoor units do not require the “C” and “D” connections. See outdoor unit Installation Instructions.<br />
*<strong>NOTE</strong>: For SPP products, ABCD connection between Indoor and Outdoor control boards are pre-wired at the factory.<br />
*<strong>NOTE</strong>: For new SPP installations in which the OAT Sensor is required, please refer to the SPP Installation Instructions.</p>
<p>A13124</p>
<p><strong>Universal Four–Wire Connection</strong></p>
<p><strong>Variable-Speed</strong><br />
<strong>Furnace/Fan Coil</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Variable-Speed.webp" /></p>
<p>A12354</p>
<p>Connection Diagram for Furnace or FE Fan Coil with 1-Stage Air Conditioning</p>
<p><strong>Variable-Speed</strong><br />
<strong>Fan Coil</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-User-Interface-1.webp" /></p>
<p>A12355<br />
Connection Diagram for FE Fan Coil with Non–communication 1–Stage Heat Pump</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Connection-Diagram-for-FE-Fan-Coil.webp" /></p>
<p>Zoning Connection for Communicating Indoor Unit with 2–Stage Communicating Outdoor Unit</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-Zoning-Connection-for-Communicating-Indoor-Unit.webp" /></p>
<p>Zoning Connection Diagram for Furnace or FE Fan Coil with Non–Communicating 1–Stage Air Conditioning</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Zoning-Connection-diagram-for-FE-Fan-Coil.webp" /></p>
<p>Zoning Connection diagram for FE Fan Coil with Non–communicating 1-Stage Heat Pump</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/G-Input-Wiring-for-Blower-Operation.webp" /></p>
<p>G Input Wiring for Blower Operation</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/G-Input-Wiring-for-System-Shutdown.webp" /></p>
<p>G Input Wiring for System Shutdown</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/Carrier-Infinity-Touch-Control-QR-Code.webp" /></p>
<pre>997­-011280-­7-­R</pre>
<p>Infinity and HYBRID HEAT are trademarks or registered trademarks of Carrier Corporation in the United States and other countries. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective holders.<br />
Copyright 2013 Carrier Corp. S 7310 W. Morris St. S Indianapolis, IN 46231</p>
<p>Edition Date: 11/13<br />
997-011280-7-R<br />
Catalog No: SYSTXCCITW—07SI<br />
Manufacturer reserves the right to change, at any time, specifications and designs without notice and without obligations.<br />
Replaces: New</p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit"><input id="comment_post_ID" name="comment_post_ID" type="hidden" value="83460" /><br />
<input id="comment_parent" name="comment_parent" type="hidden" value="0" /></p>
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Carrier FB4C Fan Coil Unit Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/carrier/fb4c-fan-coil-unit/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 05 Apr 2023 06:18:33 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Carrier]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=61690</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[&#160; Carrier FB4C Fan Coil Unit Instruction Manual NOTE: Read the entire instruction manual before starting the installation. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, maintenance, or use can cause explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause death, personal injury or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency, or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory–authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product. Refer to the individual instructions packaged with kits or accessories when installing. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses, protective clothing and work gloves. Have a fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions included in literature and attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and the current editions of the National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70. In Canada, refer to the current editions of the Canadian Electrical Code CSA C22.1. Recognize safety information. This is the safety–alert symbol . When you see this symbol on the unit and in instruction manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION. These words are used with the safety–alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies hazards which could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices which may result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions which will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation. WARNING ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. Before installing or servicing unit, always turn off all power to unit. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Turn off accessory heater power if applicable. Lock out and tag switch with a suitable warning label. CAUTION CUT HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury. Sheet metal parts may have sharp edges or burrs. Use care and wear appropriate protective clothing and gloves when handling parts. INTRODUCTION FB4C models are R–410A Fan Coils designed for installation flexibility. These units are designed to meet the low air leak requirements currently in effect. FB4CNF(018–048) uses a refrigerant piston metering device. A TXV is used on FB4CNP(018–061). All FB4C fan coils use a multi–tap ECM motor for efficiency. These units have be designed for upflow, downflow (kit required), and horizontal orientations, including manufactured and mobile home applications. These units require a field supplied air filter, and are designed specifically for R–410A refrigerant air conditioners and heat pumps as shipped. These units are available for systems of 18,000 through 60,000 BTUh nominal cooling capacity. Factory– authorized, field — installed electric heater packages are available in sizes 5 through 30kW. See Product Data literature for all available accessory kits. INSTALLATION Unpack unit and move to final location. Remove carton taking care not to damage unit. Inspect equipment for damage prior to installation. File claim with shipping company if shipment is damaged or incomplete. Locate unit rating plate which contains proper installation information. Check rating plate to be sure unit matches job specifications. Step 2 — Mount Unit Unit can stand or lie on floor, or hang from ceiling or wall. Allow space for wiring, piping, and servicing unit. IMPORTANT: When unit is installed over a finished ceiling and/or living area, building codes may require a field–supplied secondary condensate pan to be installed under the entire unit. Some localities may allow as an alternative, the running of a separate, secondary condensate line. Consult local codes for additional restrictions or precautions. A. Upflow Installation If return air is to be ducted through a floor, set unit on floor over opening and use 1/8 to 1/4–in (3 to 6 mm) thick fireproof resilient gasket between duct, unit, and floor. Side return is a field option on slope coil models. Cut opening per dimensions. (See Fig. 1.) A field–supplied bottom closure is required. Fig. 1 — Slope Coil Unit in Upflow Application B. Downflow Installation In this application, field conversion of the evaporator is required using accessory downflow kit along with an accessory base kit. Use fireproof resilient gasket, 1/8 to 1/4–in (3 to 6 mm) thick, between duct, unit, and floor. CAUTION UNIT OR PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage. The conversion of the fan coil to downflow requires special procedures for the condensate drains on both A–coil and slope units. The vertical drains have an overflow hole between the primary and secondary drain holes. This hole is plugged for all applications except downflow, but must be used for downflow. During the conversion process, remove the plastic cap covering the vertical drains only and discard. Remove the plug from the overflow hole and discard. At completion of the downflow installation, caulk around the vertical pan fitting to door joint to retain the low air leak performance of the unit. NOTE: To convert units for downflow applications, refer to Installation Instructions supplied with kit for proper installation. For slope fan coils, use kit Part No. KFADC0201SLP. For A–coils, use kit Part No. KFADC0401ACL. Use fireproof resilient gasket, 1/8 to 1/4–in (3 to 6 mm) thick, between duct, unit, and floor. NOTE: Gasket kit number KFAHD0101SLP is also required for all downflow applications to maintain low air leak/low sweat performance. C. Horizontal Installation Units must not be installed with access panels facing up or down. All other units are factory built for horizontal left installation. (See Fig. 2 and 3.) When suspending unit from ceiling, dimples in casing indicate suitable location of screws for mounting metal support straps. (See Fig. 2.) CAUTION PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage. For optimum condensate drainage performance in horizontal installations, unit should be leveled along its length and width. For horizontal applications having high return static and humid return air, the Water Management Kit, KFAHC0125AAA, may need to be used to assist in water management. Fig. 2 — Slope Coil Unit in Horizontal Left Application Fig. 3 — A–Coil in Horizontal Left Application NOTE: Modular units can be disassembled and components moved separately to installation area for reassembly. This process accommodates small scuttle holes and limiting entrances to installation sites. (See Fig. 4 .) Fig. 4 — Removal of Brackets on Modular Units Horizontal Right Conversion of Units With Slope Coils NOTE: Gasket kit number KFAHD0101SLP is required for horizontal slope coil conversion to maintain low air leak/low sweat performance. Remove blower and coil access panel and fitting panel. (See Fig. 5.) Remove coil mounting screw securing coil assembly to right side casing flange. Remove coil assembly. Lay fan coil unit on its right side and reinstall coil assembly with condensate pan down. (See Fig. 5.) Attach coil to casing flange using coil mounting screw previously removed. Make sure the pan cap in the fitting door is properly seated on the fitting door to retain the low air leak rating of the unit. Add gaskets from kit KFAHD per kit instructions. Align holes with tubing connections and condensate pan connections, and reinstall access panels and fitting panel. Make sure liquid and suction tube grommets are in place to prevent air leaks and cabinet sweating. Install after brazing. Fig. 5 — Conversion for Horizontal Right Applications Horizontal Right Conversion of UnitsWith A–Coils Remove blower and coil access panels. (See Fig. 6.)                     Fig. 6 — Conversion for Horizontal Right Applications Using A–Coil Remove metal clip securing fitting panel to condensate pan. Remove fitting panel. Remove 2 snap–in clips securing A–coil in unit. Slide coil and pan assembly out of unit. Remove horizontal drain pan support bracket from coil support rail on left side of unit and reinstall on coil support rail on right side of unit. (See Fig. 7.) Fig. 7 — Drain Pan Support Bracket Convert air–seal assembly for horizontal right.                                                               a. Remove air–seal assembly from coil by removing 4 screws. (See Fig. 6.)                           b. Remove air splitter (B) from coil seal assembly by removing 3 screws. (See Fig. 3–factory shipped inset.)                                                                                                                          c. Remove filter plate (A) and install air splitter (B) in place of filter plate. d. Install filter plate (A) as shown in horizontal right application. e. Remove condensate troughs (C) and install on opposite tube sheets. f. Install hose onto plastic spout. Install horizontal pan on right side of coil assembly. Slide coil assembly into casing. Be sure coil bracket on each corner of vertical pan engages coil support rails. Reinstall 2 snap–in clips to correctly position and secure coil assembly in unit. Be sure clip with large offsets is used on right side of unit to secure horizontal pan. Remove two oval fitting caps from the left side of the coil door and fitting panel. Remove insulation knockouts on right side of coil access panel. Remove 2 oval coil access panel plugs and reinstall into holes on left side of coil access panel and fitting panel. Install condensate pan fitting caps (from item 10) in the right side of the coil door making sure that the cap snaps and seats cleanly on the back side of the coil door. Make sure no insulation interferes with seating of the cap. Reinstall access fitting panels, aligning holes with tubing connections and condensate pan connections. Be sure to reinstall metal clip between fitting panel and vertical condensate pan. Make sure liquid and suction tube grommets are in place to prevent air leaks and cabinet sweating. D. Manufactured and Mobile Home Housing Applications Fan coil unit must be secured to the structure using field– supplied hardware. Allow a minimum of 24–in (610 mm) clearance from access panels. Recommended method of securing for typical applications: a. If fan coil is away from wall, attach pipe strap to top of fan coil using no. 10 self–tapping screws. Angle strap down and away fromback of fan coil, remove all slack, and fasten to wall stud of structure using 5/16–in. lag screws. Typical both sides of fan coil. Fig. 8 — A–Coil b. If fan coil is against wall, secure fan coil to wall stud using 1/8–in (3 mm) thick right–angle brackets. Attach brackets to fan coilusing no. 10 self–tapping screws and towall stud using 5/16–in. lag screws. (See Fig. 8.) Connect supply–air duct over the outside of 3/4–in (19 mm) flanges provided on supply–air opening. Secure duct to flange, using proper fasteners for type of duct used, and seal duct–to–unit joint. If return–air flanges are required, install factory–authorized accessory kit. Use flexible connectors between ductwork and unit to prevent transmission of vibration. When electric heater is installed, use heat–resistant material for flexible connector between ductwork and unit at discharge connection. Ductwork passing through unconditioned space must be insulated and covered with vapor barrier. Units equipped with 20–30kW electric heaters require a 1–in (25 mm) clearance to combustible materials for the first 36–in (914 mm) of supply duct. Duct work Acoustical Treatment Metal duct systems that do not have a 90_ elbow and 10–ft (3m) of main duct to first branch takeoff may require internal acoustical insulation lining. As an alternative, fibrous ductwork may be used if constructed and installed in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA construction standard on fibrous glass ducts. Both acoustical lining and fibrous ductwork shall comply with National Fire Protection Association as tested by UL Standard 181 for Class 1 air ducts. FB4C units from the factory protect the low voltage circuit with a 3 amp automotive type fuse in–line on the wire harness and Does Not contain a circuit board. Motor speeds and time delay function are built into the motor (see section E for clarification). When a factory–approved accessory control package has been installed, check all factory wiring per unit wiring diagram and inspect factory wiring connections to be sure none were loosened in transit or installation. If a different control package is required, see unit rating plate. CAUTION PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage. If a disconnect switch is to be mounted on unit, select a location where drill or fastener will not contact electrical or refrigerant components. Before proceeding with electrical connections, make certain that supply voltage, frequency, phase, and ampacity are as specified on the unit rating plate. See unit wiring label for proper field high– and low–voltage wiring. Make all electrical connections in accordance with the NEC and any local codes or ordinances that may apply. Use copper wire only. The unit must have a separate branch electric circuit with a field–supplied disconnect switch located within sight from, and readily accessible from, the unit. On units with a factory–installed disconnect with pull–out removed, service and maintenance can be safely performed on only the load side of the control package. WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. Field wires on the line side of the disconnect found in the fan coil unit remain live, even when the pull–out is removed. Service and maintenance to incoming wiring cannot be performed until the main disconnect switch (remote to the unit) is turned off. A. Line Voltage Connections If unit will contain accessory electric heater, remove and discard power plug from fan coil and connect male plug from heater to female plug from unit wiring harness. (See Electric Heater Installation Instructions.) For units without electric heater: Connect 208/230v power leads from field disconnect to yellow and black stripped leads. Connect ground wire to unit ground lug. NOTE: Units installed without electric heat should have a field–supplied sheet metal block–off plate covering the heater opening. This will reduce air leakage and formation of exterior condensation. B. 24–v Control System Connection To Unit Wire low voltage in accordance with wiring label on the blower. (See Fig. 9 through 14.) Use no. 18 AWG color–coded, insulated (35_C minimum) wire to make the low–voltage connections between the thermostat, the unit, and the outdoor equipment. If the thermostat is located more than 100–ft (30 m) from the unit (as measured along the low–voltage wire), use no. 16 AWG color–coded, insulated (35_C minimum) wire. All wiring must be NEC Class 1 and must be separated from incoming power leads. Fig. 9 — Wiring Layout Air Conditioning Unit (Cooling Only) Fig. 10 — Wiring Layout Air Conditioning Unit (Cooling and 1–Stage Heat Fig. 11 — Wiring Layout Heat Pump Unit (Cooling and 2–Stage Heat with No Outdoor Thermostat) Fig. 12 — Wiring Layout Heat Pump Unit (Cooling and 2–Stage Heat with 1 Outdoor Thermostat) Fig. 13 — Wiring Layout Heat Pump Unit (Cooling and 2–Stage Heat with 2 Outdoor Thermostats) Fig. 14 — Wiring Layout Heat Pump Unit (Cooling and 2–Stage Heat for Manufactured Housing) Refer to outdoor unit wiring instructions for any additional wiring procedure recommendations. Transformer Information Transformer is factory–wired for 230v operation. For 208v applications, disconnect the black wire from the 230v terminal on transformer and connect it to the 208v terminal. (See Fig. 15.) Fig. 15 — Transformer Connections  CAUTION PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage. If W2, W3, and E on any 3 stage heater (18, 20, 24, or 30kW) are individually connected as with outdoor thermostats or any other situation, emergency heat relay must be used. This relay is in kit Part No. KHOT0201SEC and is normally used with kit Part No. KHAOT0301FST for 2 outdoor thermostat systems. The controls are factory circuited for single–stage operation. For 2–stage operation, use outdoor thermostat kit Part No. KHAOT0301FST, and for 3–stage use both kits Part No. KHAOT0201SEC and KHAOT0301FST. When 2 stages are desired, cut W3 at the W2 wire nut, strip and reconnect per the thermostat kit instruction. (See Fig. 13.) When 3 stages are desired, cut the W2 wire nut off and discard. Strip W2, W3, and E and reconnect per thermostat kit instructions. (See Fig. 13.) NOTE: When 3 stages are used or anytime the E terminal is not tied to W2, the emergency heat relay, part of outdoor kit Part No. KHAOT0201SEC must be used. C. Manufactured Housing In manufactured housing applications, the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 24, Chapter XX, Part 3280.714 requires that supplemental electric heat be locked out at outdoor temperatures above 40_F (4_C), except for a heat pump defrost cycle. Refer to Fig. 14 for typical low voltage wiring with outdoor thermostat. D. Ground Connections  WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. According to NEC, ANSI/NFPA 70, and local codes, the cabinet must have an uninterrupted or unbroken ground to minimize personal injury if an electrical fault should occur. The ground may consist of electrical wire or metal conduit when installed in accordance with existing electrical codes. If conduit connection uses reducing washers, a separate ground wire must be used. NOTE: Use UL–listed conduit and conduit connector for connecting supply wire(s) to unit to obtain proper grounding. Grounding may also be accomplished by using grounding lugs provided in control box. E. Minimum CFM and Motor Speed Selection The fan speed selection is done at the motor connector. Units with or without electric heaters require a minimum CFM. Refer to the unit wiring label to ensure that the fan speed selected is not lower than the minimum fan speed indicated. † electric heat airflow is same CFM as Tap 3, except 0 sec off delay ‡ high static applications, see airflow tables for max airflow To change motor speeds disconnect the BLUE fan lead from motor connector terminal #2 (factory default position) and move to desired speed-tap; 1, 2, 3, or 5. Speed-taps 1, 2, and 3 have a 90 second blower off time delay pre-programmed into the motor. Speed-tap 4 is used for electric heat only (with 0 second blower time delay) and the WHITE wire should remain on tap 4. Speed-tap 5 is used for high static applications, but has a 0 second blower time delay pre-programmed into the motor. See Airflow Performance tables for actual CFM. Also, see Fig. 16 for motor speed selection location. NOTE: In low static applications, lower motor speed tap should be used to reduce possibility of water being blown off coil. Fig. 16 — Motor Speed Selection for FB4C Only Use accessory tubing package or field–supplied tubing of refrigerant grade. Suction tube must be insulated. Do not use damaged, dirty, or contaminated tubing because it may plug refrigerant flow–control device. ALWAYS evacuate the coil and field–supplied tubing to 500 microns before opening outdoor unit service valves. CAUTION PRODUCT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage. A brazing shield MUST be used when tubing sets are being brazed to the unit connections to prevent damage to the unit surface and condensate pan fitting caps. Units have sweat suction and liquid tube connections. Make suction tube connection first. Cut tubing to correct length. Insert tube into sweat connection on unit until it bottoms. Braze connection using silver bearing or non–silver bearing brazing materials. Do not use solder (materials which melt below 800_F / 427_C). Consult local code requirements. Evacuate coil and tubing system to 500 microns using deep vacuum method. CAUTION PRODUCT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage. Wrap a wet cloth around rear of fitting to prevent damage to piston assembly or TXV and factory–made joints. FB4CNF units contain a factory installed piston with Teflon ring for sizes 018 thru 048 only. The FB4CNP(018–061) size units come equipped with a R–410A refrigerant TXV. If a piston replacement is required, check piston size shown on indoor unit rating plate to see if it matches required outdoor piston size. The outdoor piston size will be found on the outdoor unit rating plate, product data or installation instructions depending on the model. If the fan coil piston does not match, replace indoor piston with correct outdoor piston. With some outdoor units a piston is shipped with outdoor unit; if no piston is shipped with the outdoor unit one can be ordered from Replacement Components. When changing piston, use a back–up wrench. (See Fig. 17). Hand tighten hex nut, then tighten with wrench 1/2 turn. Do not exceed 30 ft–lbs. NOTE: The indoor piston contains a Teflon ring (or seal) which is used to seat against the inside of distributor body, and must be installed properly to ensure proper seating in the direction for cooling operation. Always use outdoor units designed to match indoor fan coil applications. Fig. 17 — Refrigerant Flow — Control Device CAUTION PRODUCT OPERATION HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in improper product operation. If using a TXV in conjunction with a single–phase reciprocating compressor, a compressor start capacitor and relay are required. Consult outdoor unit pre–sale literature for start assist kit part number. To connect drains, the cap openings must be removed. Use a knife to start the opening near the tab and using pliers, pull the tab to remove the disk. Clean the edge of the opening if necessary and install the condensate line. Finally caulk around the lines where they exit the fitting to retain the low leak rating of the unit. CAUTION UNIT OR PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage. The conversion of the fan coil to downflow requires special procedures for the condensate drains on both A–coil and slope units. The vertical drains have an overflow hole between the primary and secondary drain holes. This hole is plugged for all applications except downflow, but must be used for downflow. During the conversion process, remove the plastic cap covering the vertical drains only and discard. Remove the plug from the overflow hole and discard. At completion of the downflow installation, caulk around the vertical pan fitting to door joint to retain the low air leak performance of the unit. Units are equipped with primary and secondary 3/4–in. FPT drain connections. For proper condensate line installations see Fig. 1, 2, 3, 5 and 6. To prevent property damage and achieve optimum drainage performance, BOTH primary and secondary drain lines should be installed and include properly–sized condensate traps. (See Fig. 18 and 19.) Factory–approved condensate traps are available. It is recommended that PVC fittings be used on the plastic condensate pan. Finger–tighten plus 1–1/2 turns. Do not over–tighten. Use pipe dope. Fig. 18 — Recommended Condensate Trap Fig. 19 — Condensate Trap and Unit CAUTION PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage. Shallow running traps are inadequate and DO NOT allow proper condensate drainage. (See Fig. 20.) Fig. 20 — Insufficient Condensate Trap NOTE: When connecting condensate drain lines, avoid blocking filter access panel, thus preventing filter removal. After connection, prime both primary and secondary condensate traps. NOTE: If unit is located in or above a living space where damage may result from condensate overflow, a field–supplied, external condensate pan should be installed underneath the entire unit, and a secondary condensate line (with appropriate trap) should be run from the unit into the pan. Any condensate in this external condensate pan should be drained to a noticeable place. As an alternative to using an external condensate pan, some localities may allow the use of a separate 3/4–in (19 mm) condensate line (with appropriate trap) to a place where the condensate will be noticeable. The owner of the structure must be informed that when condensate flows from the secondary drain or external condensate pan, the unit requires servicing or water damage will occur. Install traps in the condensate lines as close to the coil as possible. (See Fig. 19.) Make sure that the outlet of each trap is below its connection to the condensate pan to prevent condensate from overflowing the drain pan. Prime all traps, test for leaks, and insulate traps if located above a living area. Condensate drain lines should be pitched downward at a minimum slope of 1–in (25 mm) for every 10–ft (3 m) of length. Consult local codes for additional restrictions or precautions. Humidifier Connect humidifier and humidistat to fan coil unit as shown in Fig. 21 and Fig. 22. The cooling lockout relay is optional. A. Continuous Fan Thermostat closes R to G. G energizes fan relay on PCB which completes circuit to indoor blower motor. When G is de–energized, there is a 90–sec delay before relay opens. B. Cooling Mode Thermostat energizes R to G, R to Y, and R to O (heat pump only). G energizes fan relay on PCB which completes circuit to indoor blower motor. When G is de–energized, there is a 90–sec delay before fan relay opens. C. Heat Pump Heating with Auxiliary Electric Heat Thermostat energizes R to G, R to Y, and R to W. G energizes fan relay on PCB which completes circuit to indoor blower motor. W energizes electric heat relay(s) which completes circuit to heater element(s). When W is de–energized, electric heat relay(s) open, turning off heater elements. When G is de–energized there is a 90–sec delay before fan relay opens. Thermostat closes R to W. W energizes electric heat relay(s) which completes circuit to heater element(s). Blower motor is energized through normally closed contacts on fan relay. When W is de–energized, electric heat relay(s) opens. Fig. 22 — Wiring Layout of Humidifier to Fan Coil With Electric Heat START–UP PROCEDURES Refer to outdoor unit Installation Instructions for system start–up instructions and refrigerant charging method details. CAUTION UNIT COMPONENT HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in product damage. Never operate unit without a filter. Damage to blower motor or coil may result. Factory authorized filter kits must be used when locating the filter inside the unit. For those applications where access to an internal filter is impractical, a field–supplied filter must be installed in the return duct system. CARE AND MAINTENANCE To continue high performance and minimize possible equipment failure, it is essential that periodic maintenance be performed on this equipment. Consult your local dealer as to the proper frequency of maintenance contract. The ability to properly perform maintenance on this equipment requires certain mechanical skills and tools. If you do not possess these, contact your dealer for maintenance. The only consumer service recommended or required is filter replacement or cleaning on a monthly basis. AIRFLOW PERFORMANCE TABLES Table 1 – FB4C Airflow Performance (CFM) NOTES: Airflow based upon dry coil at 230v with factory–approved filter and electric heater (2 element heater sizes 018 through 036, 3 element heater sizes 042 through 061). For FB4C models, airflow at 208 volts is approximately the same as 230 volts because the multi–tap ECM motor is a constant torque motor. The torque doesn’t drop off at the speeds the motor operates. To avoid potential for condensate blowing out of drain pan prior to making drain trap: Return static pressure must be less than 0.40 in. wc. Horizontal applications of 042 — 061 sizes must have supply static greater than 0.20 in. wc. Airflow above 400 cfm/ton on 048–061 size could result in condensate blowing off coil or splashing out of drain pan. Table 2 – FB4C Air Delivery Performance Correction Component Pressure Drop (in. wc) at Indicated Airflow (Dry to Wet Coil) Table 3 – Electric Heater Static Pressure Drop (in. wc) R–410A QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE R–410A refrigerant operates at 50–70 percent higher pressures than R–22. Be sure that servicing equipment and replacement components are designed to operate with R–410A refrigerant. R–410A refrigerant cylinders are rose colored. Recovery cylinder service pressure rating must be 400 psig, DOT 4BA400 or DOT BW400. R–410A refrigerant systems should be charged with liquid refrigerant. Use a commercial type metering device in the manifold hose when charging into suction line with compressor operating Manifold sets should be 700 psig high side and 180 psig low side with 550 psig low–side retard. Use hoses with 700 psig service pressure rating. Leak detectors should be designed to detect HFC refrigerant. R–410A refrigerant, as with other HFCs, is only compatible with POE oils. Vacuum pumps will not remove moisture from oil. Do not use liquid–line filter driers with rated working pressures less than 600 psig. Do not leave R–410A refrigerant suction line filter driers in line longer than 72 hours. Do not install a suction–line filter drier in liquid line. POE oils absorb moisture rapidly. Do not expose oil to atmosphere. POE oils may cause damage to certain plastics and roofing materials. Wrap all filter driers and service valves with wet cloth when brazing. A factory approved liquid–line filter drier is required on every unit. Do NOT use an R–22 TXV. If indoor unit is equipped with a R–22 TXV or piston metering device, it must be changed to a hard–shutoff R–410A refrigerant TXV. Never open system to atmosphere while it is under a vacuum. When system must be opened for service, recover refrigerant, evacuate then break vacuum with dry nitrogen and replace filter driers. Evacuate to 500 microns prior to recharging. Do not vent R–410A refrigerant into the atmosphere. Do not use capillary tube coils. Observe all warnings, cautions, and bold text. All indoor coils must be installed with a hard–shutoff R–410A refrigerant TXV metering device. Copyright 2015 CAC / BDP D 7310 W. Morris St. D Indianapolis, IN 46231 Manufacturer reserves the right to change, at any time, specifications and designs without notice and without obligations. [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/carrier/fb4c-fan-coil-unit/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>&nbsp;</p>
<h3>Carrier FB4C Fan Coil Unit Instruction Manual</h3>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Carrier-FB4C-Fan-Coil-Unit-300x300-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Read the entire instruction manual before starting the installation.</p>
<h3>SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS</h3>
<p>Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, maintenance, or use can cause explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause death, personal injury or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency, or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory–authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product. Refer to the individual instructions packaged with kits or accessories when installing.</p>
<p>Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses, protective clothing and work gloves. Have a fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions included in literature and attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and the current editions of the National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70.</p>
<p>In Canada, refer to the current editions of the Canadian Electrical Code CSA C22.1.</p>
<p>Recognize safety information. This is the safety–alert symbol . When you see this symbol on the unit and in instruction manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury.</p>
<p>Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION. These words are used with the safety–alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies hazards which could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices which may result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions which will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /><strong> WARNING</strong></p>
<p><strong>ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.</p>
<p>Before installing or servicing unit, always turn off all power to unit. There may be more than one disconnect switch. Turn off accessory heater power if applicable. Lock out and tag switch with a suitable warning label.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>CUT HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury.<br />
Sheet metal parts may have sharp edges or burrs. Use care and wear appropriate protective clothing and gloves when handling parts.</p>
<h3>INTRODUCTION</h3>
<p>FB4C models are R–410A Fan Coils designed for installation flexibility. These units are designed to meet the low air leak requirements currently in effect.</p>
<p>FB4CNF(018–048) uses a refrigerant piston metering device. A TXV is used on FB4CNP(018–061). All FB4C fan coils use a multi–tap ECM motor for efficiency. These units have be designed for upflow, downflow (kit required), and horizontal orientations, including manufactured and mobile home applications.</p>
<p>These units require a field supplied air filter, and are designed specifically for R–410A refrigerant air conditioners and heat pumps as shipped. These units are available for systems of 18,000 through 60,000 BTUh nominal cooling capacity. Factory– authorized, field — installed electric heater packages are available in sizes 5 through 30kW. See Product Data literature for all available accessory kits.</p>
<h3>INSTALLATION</h3>
<p>Unpack unit and move to final location. Remove carton taking care not to damage unit. Inspect equipment for damage prior to installation. File claim with shipping company if shipment is damaged or incomplete.</p>
<p>Locate unit rating plate which contains proper installation information. Check rating plate to be sure unit matches job specifications.</p>
<p><strong>Step 2 — Mount Unit</strong><br />
Unit can stand or lie on floor, or hang from ceiling or wall. Allow space for wiring, piping, and servicing unit.</p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> When unit is installed over a finished ceiling and/or living area, building codes may require a field–supplied secondary condensate pan to be installed under the entire unit. Some localities may allow as an alternative, the running of a separate, secondary condensate line. Consult local codes for additional restrictions or precautions.</p>
<p><strong>A. Upflow Installation</strong><br />
If return air is to be ducted through a floor, set unit on floor over opening and use 1/8 to 1/4–in (3 to 6 mm) thick fireproof resilient gasket between duct, unit, and floor.</p>
<p>Side return is a field option on slope coil models. Cut opening per dimensions. (See Fig. 1.) A field–supplied bottom closure is required.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-20-Upflow-Installation-300x259-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 1 — Slope Coil Unit in Upflow Application</strong></p>
<p><strong>B. Downflow Installation</strong><br />
In this application, field conversion of the evaporator is required using accessory downflow kit along with an accessory base kit. Use fireproof resilient gasket, 1/8 to 1/4–in (3 to 6 mm) thick, between duct, unit, and floor.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>UNIT OR PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage.</p>
<p>The conversion of the fan coil to downflow requires special procedures for the condensate drains on both A–coil and slope units. The vertical drains have an overflow hole between the primary and secondary drain holes. This hole is plugged for all applications except downflow, but must be used for downflow. During the conversion process, remove the plastic cap covering the vertical drains only and discard. Remove the plug from the overflow hole and discard. At completion of the downflow installation, caulk around the vertical pan fitting to door joint to retain the low air leak performance of the unit.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> To convert units for downflow applications, refer to Installation Instructions supplied with kit for proper installation. For slope fan coils, use kit Part No. KFADC0201SLP. For A–coils, use kit Part No. KFADC0401ACL. Use fireproof resilient gasket, 1/8 to 1/4–in (3 to 6 mm) thick, between duct, unit, and floor.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Gasket kit number KFAHD0101SLP is also required for all downflow applications to maintain low air leak/low sweat performance.</p>
<p><strong>C. Horizontal Installation</strong><br />
Units must not be installed with access panels facing up or down. All other units are factory built for horizontal left installation. (See Fig. 2 and 3.) When suspending unit from ceiling, dimples in casing indicate suitable location of screws for mounting metal support straps. (See Fig. 2.)</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage.</p>
<p>For optimum condensate drainage performance in horizontal installations, unit should be leveled along its length and width.</p>
<p>For horizontal applications having high return static and humid return air, the Water Management Kit, KFAHC0125AAA, may need to be used to assist in water management.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-2-Slope-Coil-Unit-in-Horizontal-Left-Application-300x252-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 2</strong> — Slope Coil Unit in Horizontal Left Application</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-3-A-Coil-in-Horizontal-Left-Application-300x172-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 3 — A–Coil in Horizontal Left Application</strong></p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Modular units can be disassembled and components moved separately to installation area for reassembly. This process accommodates small scuttle holes and limiting entrances to installation sites. (See Fig. 4 .)</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-4-Removal-of-Brackets-on-Modular-Units-Horizontal-241x300-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 4 — Removal of Brackets on Modular Units Horizontal Right Conversion of Units With Slope Coils</strong></p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Gasket kit number KFAHD0101SLP is required for horizontal slope coil conversion to maintain low air leak/low sweat performance.</p>
<ol>
<li>Remove blower and coil access panel and fitting panel. (See Fig. 5.)</li>
<li>Remove coil mounting screw securing coil assembly to right side casing flange.</li>
<li>Remove coil assembly.</li>
<li>Lay fan coil unit on its right side and reinstall coil assembly with condensate pan down. (See Fig. 5.)</li>
<li>Attach coil to casing flange using coil mounting screw previously removed.</li>
<li>Make sure the pan cap in the fitting door is properly seated on the fitting door to retain the low air leak rating of the unit.</li>
<li>Add gaskets from kit KFAHD per kit instructions.</li>
<li>Align holes with tubing connections and condensate pan connections, and reinstall access panels and fitting panel.</li>
</ol>
<p>Make sure liquid and suction tube grommets are in place to prevent air leaks and cabinet sweating. Install after brazing.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-5-Conversion-for-Horizontal-Right-Applications-300x190-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 5 — Conversion for Horizontal Right Applications</strong></p>
<p><strong>Horizontal Right Conversion of UnitsWith A–Coils</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Remove blower and coil access panels. (See Fig. 6.)                     <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-6-Conversion-for-Horizontal-Right-Applications-300x202-1.webp" /><strong>Fig. 6 — Conversion for Horizontal Right Applications Using A–Coil</strong></li>
<li>Remove metal clip securing fitting panel to condensate pan.<br />
Remove fitting panel.</li>
<li>Remove 2 snap–in clips securing A–coil in unit.</li>
<li>Slide coil and pan assembly out of unit.</li>
<li>Remove horizontal drain pan support bracket from coil support rail on left side of unit and reinstall on coil support rail on right side of unit. (See Fig. 7.) <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-7-Drain-Pan-Support-Bracket-300x266-1.webp" /><strong>Fig. 7 — Drain Pan Support Bracket</strong></li>
<li><strong>Convert air–seal assembly for horizontal right.                                                               </strong>a. Remove air–seal assembly from coil by removing 4 screws. (See Fig. 6.)                           b. Remove air splitter (B) from coil seal assembly by removing 3 screws. (See Fig. 3–factory shipped inset.)                                                                                                                          c. Remove filter plate (A) and install air splitter (B) in place of filter plate.<br />
d. Install filter plate (A) as shown in horizontal right application.<br />
e. Remove condensate troughs (C) and install on opposite tube sheets.<br />
f. Install hose onto plastic spout.</li>
<li>Install horizontal pan on right side of coil assembly.</li>
<li>Slide coil assembly into casing. Be sure coil bracket on each corner of vertical pan engages coil support rails.</li>
<li>Reinstall 2 snap–in clips to correctly position and secure coil assembly in unit. Be sure clip with large offsets is used on right side of unit to secure horizontal pan.</li>
<li>Remove two oval fitting caps from the left side of the coil door and fitting panel.</li>
<li>Remove insulation knockouts on right side of coil access panel.</li>
<li>Remove 2 oval coil access panel plugs and reinstall into holes on left side of coil access panel and fitting panel.</li>
<li>Install condensate pan fitting caps (from item 10) in the right side of the coil door making sure that the cap snaps and seats cleanly on the back side of the coil door. Make sure no insulation interferes with seating of the cap.</li>
<li>Reinstall access fitting panels, aligning holes with tubing connections and condensate pan connections. Be sure to reinstall metal clip between fitting panel and vertical condensate pan.</li>
</ol>
<p>Make sure liquid and suction tube grommets are in place to prevent air leaks and cabinet sweating.</p>
<p><strong>D. Manufactured and Mobile Home Housing Applications<br />
</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Fan coil unit must be secured to the structure using field– supplied hardware.</li>
<li>Allow a minimum of 24–in (610 mm) clearance from access panels.</li>
<li>Recommended method of securing for typical applications:<br />
a. If fan coil is away from wall, attach pipe strap to top of fan coil using no. 10 self–tapping screws. Angle strap down and away fromback of fan coil, remove all slack, and fasten to wall stud of structure using 5/16–in. lag screws. Typical both sides of fan coil.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-8-A-Coil-279x300-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 8 — A–Coil</strong></p>
<p>b. If fan coil is against wall, secure fan coil to wall stud using 1/8–in (3 mm) thick right–angle brackets. Attach brackets to fan coilusing no. 10 self–tapping screws and towall stud using 5/16–in. lag screws. (See Fig. 8.)</p>
<p>Connect supply–air duct over the outside of 3/4–in (19 mm) flanges provided on supply–air opening. Secure duct to flange, using proper fasteners for type of duct used, and seal duct–to–unit joint. If return–air flanges are required, install factory–authorized accessory kit.</p>
<p>Use flexible connectors between ductwork and unit to prevent transmission of vibration. When electric heater is installed, use heat–resistant material for flexible connector between ductwork and unit at discharge connection. Ductwork passing through unconditioned space must be insulated and covered with vapor barrier.</p>
<p>Units equipped with 20–30kW electric heaters require a 1–in (25 mm) clearance to combustible materials for the first 36–in (914 mm) of supply duct.</p>
<p><strong>Duct work Acoustical Treatment</strong><br />
Metal duct systems that do not have a 90_ elbow and 10–ft (3m) of main duct to first branch takeoff may require internal acoustical insulation lining. As an alternative, fibrous ductwork may be used if constructed and installed in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA construction standard on fibrous glass ducts. Both acoustical lining and fibrous ductwork shall comply with National Fire Protection Association as tested by UL Standard 181 for Class 1 air ducts.</p>
<p>FB4C units from the factory protect the low voltage circuit with a 3 amp automotive type fuse in–line on the wire harness and Does Not contain a circuit board. Motor speeds and time delay function are built into the motor (see section E for clarification). When a factory–approved accessory control package has been installed, check all factory wiring per unit wiring diagram and inspect factory wiring connections to be sure none were loosened in transit or installation. If a different control package is required, see unit rating plate.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage.</p>
<p>If a disconnect switch is to be mounted on unit, select a location where drill or fastener will not contact electrical or refrigerant components.</p>
<p>Before proceeding with electrical connections, make certain that supply voltage, frequency, phase, and ampacity are as specified on the unit rating plate. See unit wiring label for proper field high– and low–voltage wiring. Make all electrical connections in accordance with the NEC and any local codes or ordinances that may apply. Use copper wire only.</p>
<p>The unit must have a separate branch electric circuit with a field–supplied disconnect switch located within sight from, and readily accessible from, the unit.</p>
<p>On units with a factory–installed disconnect with pull–out removed, service and maintenance can be safely performed on only the load side of the control package.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /><strong>WARNING</strong></p>
<p><strong>ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD</strong></p>
<p>Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.</p>
<p>Field wires on the line side of the disconnect found in the fan coil unit remain live, even when the pull–out is removed. Service and maintenance to incoming wiring cannot be performed until the main disconnect switch (remote to the unit) is turned off.</p>
<p><strong>A. Line Voltage Connections</strong></p>
<p>If unit will contain accessory electric heater, remove and discard power plug from fan coil and connect male plug from heater to female plug from unit wiring harness. (See Electric Heater Installation Instructions.)</p>
<p>For units without electric heater:</p>
<ol>
<li>Connect 208/230v power leads from field disconnect to yellow and black stripped leads.</li>
<li>Connect ground wire to unit ground lug.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Units installed without electric heat should have a field–supplied sheet metal block–off plate covering the heater opening. This will reduce air leakage and formation of exterior condensation.</p>
<p><strong>B. 24–v Control System</strong></p>
<p><strong>Connection To Unit</strong></p>
<p>Wire low voltage in accordance with wiring label on the blower. (See Fig. 9 through 14.) Use no. 18 AWG color–coded, insulated (35_C minimum) wire to make the low–voltage connections between the thermostat, the unit, and the outdoor equipment. If the thermostat is located more than 100–ft (30 m) from the unit (as measured along the low–voltage wire), use no. 16 AWG color–coded, insulated (35_C minimum) wire. All wiring must be NEC Class 1 and must be separated from incoming power leads.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-9-Wiring-Layout-Air-Conditioning-Unit-300x239-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 9 — Wiring Layout Air Conditioning Unit (Cooling Only)</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-10-Wiring-Layout-Air-Conditioning-Unit-300x255-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 10 — Wiring Layout Air Conditioning Unit (Cooling and 1–Stage Heat</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-11-Wiring-Layout-Heat-Pump-Unit-300x252-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 11 — Wiring Layout Heat Pump Unit (Cooling and 2–Stage Heat with No Outdoor Thermostat)</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-12-Wiring-Layout-Heat-Pump-Unit-300x251-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 12 — Wiring Layout Heat Pump Unit (Cooling and 2–Stage Heat with 1 Outdoor Thermostat)</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-13-Wiring-Layout-Heat-Pump-Unit-Cooling-and-235x300-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 13 — Wiring Layout Heat Pump Unit (Cooling and 2–Stage Heat with 2 Outdoor Thermostats)</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-14-Wiring-Layout-Heat-Pump-Unit-300x173-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 14 — Wiring Layout Heat Pump Unit (Cooling and 2–Stage Heat for Manufactured Housing)</strong></p>
<p>Refer to outdoor unit wiring instructions for any additional wiring procedure recommendations.</p>
<p><strong>Transformer Information</strong></p>
<p>Transformer is factory–wired for 230v operation. For 208v applications, disconnect the black wire from the 230v terminal on transformer and connect it to the 208v terminal. (See Fig. 15.)</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-15-Transformer-Connections-300x227-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 15 — Transformer Connections</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /> <strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD</strong></p>
<p>Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage.</p>
<p>If W2, W3, and E on any 3 stage heater (18, 20, 24, or 30kW) are individually connected as with outdoor thermostats or any other situation, emergency heat relay must be used. This relay is in kit Part No. KHOT0201SEC and is normally used with kit Part No. KHAOT0301FST for 2 outdoor thermostat systems.</p>
<p>The controls are factory circuited for single–stage operation. For 2–stage operation, use outdoor thermostat kit Part No. KHAOT0301FST, and for 3–stage use both kits Part No. KHAOT0201SEC and KHAOT0301FST.</p>
<p>When 2 stages are desired, cut W3 at the W2 wire nut, strip and reconnect per the thermostat kit instruction. (See Fig. 13.) When 3 stages are desired, cut the W2 wire nut off and discard. Strip W2, W3, and E and reconnect per thermostat kit instructions. (See Fig. 13.)</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> When 3 stages are used or anytime the E terminal is not tied to W2, the emergency heat relay, part of outdoor kit Part No. KHAOT0201SEC must be used.</p>
<p><strong>C. Manufactured Housing</strong></p>
<p>In manufactured housing applications, the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 24, Chapter XX, Part 3280.714 requires that supplemental electric heat be locked out at outdoor temperatures above 40_F (4_C), except for a heat pump defrost cycle. Refer to Fig. 14 for typical low voltage wiring with outdoor thermostat.</p>
<p><strong>D. Ground Connections</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /> <strong>WARNING</strong></p>
<p><strong>ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD</strong></p>
<p>Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death.</p>
<p>According to NEC, ANSI/NFPA 70, and local codes, the cabinet must have an uninterrupted or unbroken ground to minimize personal injury if an electrical fault should occur. The ground may consist of electrical wire or metal conduit when installed in accordance with existing electrical codes. If conduit connection uses reducing washers, a separate ground wire must be used.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Use UL–listed conduit and conduit connector for connecting supply wire(s) to unit to obtain proper grounding. Grounding may also be accomplished by using grounding lugs provided in control box.</p>
<p><strong>E. Minimum CFM and Motor Speed Selection</strong></p>
<p>The fan speed selection is done at the motor connector. Units with or without electric heaters require a minimum CFM. Refer to the unit wiring label to ensure that the fan speed selected is not lower than the minimum fan speed indicated.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-16-Minimum-CFM-and-Motor-Speed-Selection-300x81-1.webp" /></p>
<p>† electric heat airflow is same CFM as Tap 3, except 0 sec off delay<br />
‡ high static applications, see airflow tables for max airflow</p>
<p>To change motor speeds disconnect the BLUE fan lead from motor connector terminal #2 (factory default position) and move to desired speed-tap; 1, 2, 3, or 5.</p>
<p>Speed-taps 1, 2, and 3 have a 90 second blower off time delay pre-programmed into the motor. Speed-tap 4 is used for electric heat only (with 0 second blower time delay) and the WHITE wire should remain on tap 4. Speed-tap 5 is used for high static applications, but has a 0 second blower time delay pre-programmed into the motor. See Airflow Performance tables for actual CFM. Also, see Fig. 16 for motor speed selection location.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> In low static applications, lower motor speed tap should be used to reduce possibility of water being blown off coil.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-17-Motor-Speed-Selection-for-FB4C-Only-1-300x231-1.webp" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-18-Motor-Speed-Selection-for-FB4C-Only-300x247-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 16 — Motor Speed Selection for FB4C Only</strong></p>
<p>Use accessory tubing package or field–supplied tubing of refrigerant grade. Suction tube must be insulated. Do not use damaged, dirty, or contaminated tubing because it may plug refrigerant flow–control device. ALWAYS evacuate the coil and field–supplied tubing to 500 microns before opening outdoor unit service valves.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>PRODUCT DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage.</p>
<p>A brazing shield MUST be used when tubing sets are being brazed to the unit connections to prevent damage to the unit surface and condensate pan fitting caps.</p>
<p>Units have sweat suction and liquid tube connections. Make suction tube connection first.</p>
<ol>
<li>Cut tubing to correct length.</li>
<li>Insert tube into sweat connection on unit until it bottoms.</li>
<li>Braze connection using silver bearing or non–silver bearing brazing materials. Do not use solder (materials which melt below 800_F / 427_C). Consult local code requirements.</li>
<li>Evacuate coil and tubing system to 500 microns using deep vacuum method.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /><strong> CAUTION</strong></p>
<p>PRODUCT DAMAGE HAZARD<br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage.</p>
<p>Wrap a wet cloth around rear of fitting to prevent damage to piston assembly or TXV and factory–made joints.</p>
<p>FB4CNF units contain a factory installed piston with Teflon ring for sizes 018 thru 048 only. The FB4CNP(018–061) size units come equipped with a R–410A refrigerant TXV. If a piston replacement is required, check piston size shown on indoor unit rating plate to see if it matches required outdoor piston size. The outdoor piston size will be found on the outdoor unit rating plate, product data or installation instructions depending on the model. If the fan coil piston does not match, replace indoor piston with correct outdoor piston. With some outdoor units a piston is shipped with outdoor unit; if no piston is shipped with the outdoor unit one can be ordered from Replacement Components. When changing piston, use a back–up wrench. (See Fig. 17). Hand tighten hex nut, then tighten with wrench 1/2 turn. Do not exceed 30 ft–lbs.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> The indoor piston contains a Teflon ring (or seal) which is used to seat against the inside of distributor body, and must be installed properly to ensure proper seating in the direction for cooling operation.</p>
<p>Always use outdoor units designed to match indoor fan coil applications.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-19-Refrigerant-Flow-Control-Device-300x291-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 17 — Refrigerant Flow — Control Device</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>PRODUCT OPERATION HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in improper product operation.</p>
<p>If using a TXV in conjunction with a single–phase reciprocating compressor, a compressor start capacitor and relay are required. Consult outdoor unit pre–sale literature for start assist kit part number.</p>
<p>To connect drains, the cap openings must be removed. Use a knife to start the opening near the tab and using pliers, pull the tab to remove the disk. Clean the edge of the opening if necessary and install the condensate line. Finally caulk around the lines where they exit the fitting to retain the low leak rating of the unit.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>UNIT OR PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage.</p>
<p>The conversion of the fan coil to downflow requires special procedures for the condensate drains on both A–coil and slope units. The vertical drains have an overflow hole between the primary and secondary drain holes. This hole is plugged for all applications except downflow, but must be used for downflow. During the conversion process, remove the plastic cap covering the vertical drains only and discard. Remove the plug from the overflow hole and discard. At completion of the downflow installation, caulk around the vertical pan fitting to door joint to retain the low air leak performance of the unit.</p>
<p>Units are equipped with primary and secondary 3/4–in. FPT drain connections. For proper condensate line installations see Fig. 1, 2, 3, 5 and 6. To prevent property damage and achieve optimum drainage performance, BOTH primary and secondary drain lines should be installed and include properly–sized condensate traps. (See Fig. 18 and 19.) Factory–approved condensate traps are available. It is recommended that PVC fittings be used on the plastic condensate pan. Finger–tighten plus 1–1/2 turns. Do not over–tighten. Use pipe dope.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-20-Recommended-Condensate-Trap-300x202-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 18 — Recommended Condensate Trap</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-21-Condensate-Trap-and-Unit-300x266-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 19 — Condensate Trap and Unit</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in product or property damage. Shallow running traps are inadequate and DO NOT allow proper condensate drainage. (See Fig. 20.)</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-22-DO-NOT-USE-SHALLOW-RUNNING-TRAPS-300x199-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 20 — Insufficient Condensate Trap</strong></p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> When connecting condensate drain lines, avoid blocking filter access panel, thus preventing filter removal. After connection, prime both primary and secondary condensate traps.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> If unit is located in or above a living space where damage may result from condensate overflow, a field–supplied, external condensate pan should be installed underneath the entire unit, and a secondary condensate line (with appropriate trap) should be run from the unit into the pan. Any condensate in this external condensate pan should be drained to a noticeable place. As an alternative to using an external condensate pan, some localities may allow the use of a separate 3/4–in (19 mm) condensate line (with appropriate trap) to a place where the condensate will be noticeable. The owner of the structure must be informed that when condensate flows from the secondary drain or external condensate pan, the unit requires servicing or water damage will occur.</p>
<p>Install traps in the condensate lines as close to the coil as possible. (See Fig. 19.) Make sure that the outlet of each trap is below its connection to the condensate pan to prevent condensate from overflowing the drain pan. Prime all traps, test for leaks, and insulate traps if located above a living area. Condensate drain lines should be pitched downward at a minimum slope of 1–in (25 mm) for every 10–ft (3 m) of length. Consult local codes for additional restrictions or precautions.</p>
<p><strong>Humidifier</strong><br />
Connect humidifier and humidistat to fan coil unit as shown in Fig. 21 and Fig. 22. The cooling lockout relay is optional.</p>
<p><strong>A. Continuous Fan</strong><br />
Thermostat closes R to G. G energizes fan relay on PCB which completes circuit to indoor blower motor. When G is de–energized, there is a 90–sec delay before relay opens.</p>
<p><strong>B. Cooling Mode</strong><br />
Thermostat energizes R to G, R to Y, and R to O (heat pump only). G energizes fan relay on PCB which completes circuit to indoor blower motor. When G is de–energized, there is a 90–sec delay before fan relay opens.</p>
<p><strong>C. Heat Pump Heating with Auxiliary Electric Heat</strong><br />
Thermostat energizes R to G, R to Y, and R to W. G energizes fan relay on PCB which completes circuit to indoor blower motor. W energizes electric heat relay(s) which completes circuit to heater element(s). When W is de–energized, electric heat relay(s) open, turning off heater elements. When G is de–energized there is a 90–sec delay before fan relay opens.</p>
<p>Thermostat closes R to W. W energizes electric heat relay(s) which completes circuit to heater element(s). Blower motor is energized through normally closed contacts on fan relay. When W is de–energized, electric heat relay(s) opens.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-22-Wiring-Layout-of-Humidifier-to-Heat-Pump-220x300-1.webp" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-23-Wiring-Layout-of-Humidifier-to-Fan-Coil-With-Electric-Heat-273x300-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 22 — Wiring Layout of Humidifier to Fan Coil With Electric Heat</strong></p>
<p><strong>START–UP PROCEDURES</strong><br />
Refer to outdoor unit Installation Instructions for system start–up instructions and refrigerant charging method details.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/warning-8.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>UNIT COMPONENT HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in product damage. Never operate unit without a filter. Damage to blower motor or coil may result. Factory authorized filter kits must be used when locating the filter inside the unit. For those applications where access to an internal filter is impractical, a field–supplied filter must be installed in the return duct system.</p>
<h3>CARE AND MAINTENANCE</h3>
<p>To continue high performance and minimize possible equipment failure, it is essential that periodic maintenance be performed on this equipment. Consult your local dealer as to the proper frequency of maintenance contract.</p>
<p>The ability to properly perform maintenance on this equipment requires certain mechanical skills and tools. If you do not possess these, contact your dealer for maintenance. The only consumer service recommended or required is filter replacement or cleaning on a monthly basis.</p>
<h3>AIRFLOW PERFORMANCE TABLES</h3>
<p><strong>Table 1 – FB4C Airflow Performance (CFM)</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-24-AIRFLOW-PERFORMANCE-TABLES-300x155-1.webp" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-25-AIRFLOW-PERFORMANCE-TABLES-300x147-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTES:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Airflow based upon dry coil at 230v with factory–approved filter and electric heater (2 element heater sizes 018 through 036, 3 element heater sizes 042 through 061). For FB4C models, airflow at 208 volts is approximately the same as 230 volts because the multi–tap ECM motor is a constant torque motor. The torque doesn’t drop off at the speeds the motor operates.</li>
<li>To avoid potential for condensate blowing out of drain pan prior to making drain trap:<br />
Return static pressure must be less than 0.40 in. wc. Horizontal applications of 042 — 061 sizes must have supply static greater than 0.20 in. wc.</li>
<li>Airflow above 400 cfm/ton on 048–061 size could result in condensate blowing off coil or splashing out of drain pan.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Table 2 – FB4C Air Delivery Performance Correction Component Pressure Drop (in. wc) at Indicated Airflow (Dry to Wet Coil)</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-26-FB4C-Air-Delivery-Performance-Correction-Component-Pressure-Drop-300x81-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Table 3 – Electric Heater Static Pressure Drop (in. wc)</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/FIG-27-Electric-Heater-Static-Pressure-Drop-300x55-1.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>R–410A QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>R–410A refrigerant operates at 50–70 percent higher pressures than R–22. Be sure that servicing equipment and replacement components are designed to operate with R–410A refrigerant.</li>
<li>R–410A refrigerant cylinders are rose colored.</li>
<li>Recovery cylinder service pressure rating must be 400 psig, DOT 4BA400 or DOT BW400.</li>
<li>R–410A refrigerant systems should be charged with liquid refrigerant. Use a commercial type metering device in the manifold hose when charging into suction line with compressor operating</li>
<li>Manifold sets should be 700 psig high side and 180 psig low side with 550 psig low–side retard.</li>
<li>Use hoses with 700 psig service pressure rating.</li>
<li>Leak detectors should be designed to detect HFC refrigerant.</li>
<li>R–410A refrigerant, as with other HFCs, is only compatible with POE oils.</li>
<li>Vacuum pumps will not remove moisture from oil.</li>
<li>Do not use liquid–line filter driers with rated working pressures less than 600 psig.</li>
<li>Do not leave R–410A refrigerant suction line filter driers in line longer than 72 hours.</li>
<li>Do not install a suction–line filter drier in liquid line.</li>
<li>POE oils absorb moisture rapidly. Do not expose oil to atmosphere.</li>
<li>POE oils may cause damage to certain plastics and roofing materials.</li>
<li>Wrap all filter driers and service valves with wet cloth when brazing.</li>
<li>A factory approved liquid–line filter drier is required on every unit.</li>
<li>Do NOT use an R–22 TXV.</li>
<li>If indoor unit is equipped with a R–22 TXV or piston metering device, it must be changed to a hard–shutoff R–410A refrigerant TXV.</li>
<li>Never open system to atmosphere while it is under a vacuum.</li>
<li>When system must be opened for service, recover refrigerant, evacuate then break vacuum with dry nitrogen and replace filter driers. Evacuate to 500 microns prior to recharging.</li>
<li>Do not vent R–410A refrigerant into the atmosphere.</li>
<li>Do not use capillary tube coils.</li>
<li>Observe all warnings, cautions, and bold text.</li>
<li>All indoor coils must be installed with a hard–shutoff R–410A refrigerant TXV metering device.</li>
</ul>
<p>Copyright 2015 CAC / BDP D 7310 W. Morris St. D Indianapolis, IN 46231</p>
<p>Manufacturer reserves the right to change, at any time, specifications and designs without notice and without obligations.</p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit"><input id="comment_post_ID" name="comment_post_ID" type="hidden" value="1667416" /><br />
<input id="comment_parent" name="comment_parent" type="hidden" value="0" /></p>
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Carrier Ductless Split Unit System 40MAHB Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/carrier/ductless-system-40mahb/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Sun, 25 Jun 2023 04:58:43 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Carrier]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=122495</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[&#160; 40MAHB Ductless Split Unit System Sizes 9, 12, 18, 24, 30 and 36 Installation Instructions NOTE: Read the entire instruction manual before starting the installation. Images are for illustration purposes only. Actual models may differ slightly. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, maintenance, or use can cause an explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause death, personal injury, or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency, or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory-authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product. Refer to the individual instructions packaged with kits or accessories when installing. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses, protective clothing, and work gloves. Have a fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions included in the literature and attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and the current editions of the National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70. In Canada, refer to the current editions of the Canadian Electrical Code CSA C22.1. Recognize safety information. This is the safety alert symbol. When you see this symbol on the unit and in instruction manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION. These words are used with the safety alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies hazards that could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices which may result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions that will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation. WARNING ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. Before installing, modifying, or servicing the system, the main electrical disconnect switch must be in the OFF position. There may be more than 1 disconnect switch. Lockout and tag switch with a suitable warning label. WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in death, serious personal injury, and/or property damage. Never use air or gases containing oxygen for leak testing or operating refrigerant compressors. Pressurized mixtures of air or gases containing oxygen can lead to an explosion. CAUTION EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation. Do not bury more than 36 in. (914 mm) of refrigerant pipe in the ground. If any section of pipe is buried, there must be a 6 in. (152 mm) vertical rise to the valve connections on the outdoor units. If more than the recommended length is buried, the refrigerant may migrate to the cooler buried section during extended periods of system shutdown. This causes refrigerant slugging and could possibly damage the compressor at start-up. ACCESSORIES The system is shipped with the following accessories (see Table 1). Use all of the installation parts and accessories to install the system. Improper installation may result in water leakage, electrical shock and fire, or cause the equipment to fail. Keep the installation manual in a safe place and do not discard any other accessories until the installation work has been completed. Table 1 — Accessories NAME SHAPE QUANTITY Installation Manual 2-3 Drain Joint 1 Seal (for cooling and heating models) 1 Mounting Plate 1 Anchor 5-8 (depending on models) Mounting Plate Screw 5-8 (depending on models) Remote Controller 1 Battery 2 Remote Controller Holder (optional) 1 Remote Controller Holder Screw (optional) 2 Small Filter (Must be installed on the back of the main air fitter by an authorized technician during unit installation) 1-2 depending on the model Table 2 — Accessories NAME SHAPE QUANTITY (PC) Connecting Pipe Assembly Liquid Side 1/4in(cD 6.35) These parts must be purchased separately. Consult the dealer about the proper pipe size of the unit purchased. 3/8in (0 9.52) Gas Side 3/8in (0 9.52) 1/2in (012.7) 5/8in (016) 3/4in (019) Magnetic Ring and Clamp (if supplied refer to the wiring diagram to install it to the cable. Varies by model PARTS NOTE: Illustrations in this manual are for reference only. The actual shape of the indoor unit and parts may differ slightly. Wall Mounting Plate Front Panel Louver Air Filter Drainage Pipe  Signal Cable Refrigerant Piping Remote Controller Remote Controller Holder (some units) Outdoor Unit Power Cable (some units) NOTES: – If the outdoor unit is higher than the indoor unit, prevent rain from flowing into the indoor unit along the connection pipe by making an inverted trap in the connection pipe before it enters the wall to the indoor unit. This ensures that rain drips from the connection pipe before it enters the wall. – Piping and the interconnecting wiring are field supplied. – The illustration above (Fig. 2) is only a sketch. Different models may differ slightly. The units listed in Table 3 are addressed in these installation instructions. Table 3 — Indoor Units DESCRIPTION BTUH V-PH-HZ ID MODEL NO. 12 115-1-60 40MAHBQ12XA1 HIGH WALL HEAT PUMP 9 208 230-1-60 40MAHBQ09XA3 12 40MAHBQ12XA3 18 40MAHBQ18XA3 24 40MAHBQ24XA3 30 40MAHBQ3OXA3 36 40MAHBQ36XA3 NOTE: The installation must be performed in accordance with the requirement of local and national standards. The installation may differ slightly in some areas. NOTE: Different models have different front panels and display windows. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Allow sufficient space for airflow and unit service. Fig. 5 — on page 7 for the minimum required distances between the unit and walls or ceilings. Table 4 — Indoor Unit Pipe Sizes UNIT SIZES 12K (115V) 9K (208/230V) 12K (208/230V) 18K (208/230V) 24K (208/230V) 30K (208/230V) 36K (208/230V) GAS PIPE in 0.5 0.375 0.5 0.5 0.626 0.626 0.626 (mm) 13. (10.) 13. 13. 16. 16. 16. LIQUID PIPE in 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.375 0.375 0.375 (mm) 25 25 25 25 10. 10. 10. WIRING All wires must be sized per NEC (National Electrical Code) or CEC (Canadian Electrical Code) and local codes. See the rating plate and/ or the installation instructions of the compatible outdoor unit for MCA (minimum circuit amps) and MOCP (maximum overcurrent protection) to correctly size the wires and the disconnect fuse or breakers respectively. Recommended Connection Method for Power and Communication Wiring: The main power is supplied to the outdoor unit. The field supplied 14/ 3 power/communication wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor unit consisting of four (4) wires and provides the power for the indoor unit. Two wires are high voltage AC power, one is communication wiring and the other is a ground wire. Wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit is polarity sensitive. The use of BX wire is NOT recommended. If installed in a high Electromagnetic field (EMF) area and communication issues exist, a 14/2 stranded shielded wire can be used to replace L2/N and (S) between outdoor unit and indoor unit landing the shield onto the ground in the outdoor unit only. WARNING EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation. Wires should be sized based on NEC and local codes. CAUTION EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation. Be sure to comply with local codes while running a wire from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit. Every wire must be connected firmly. Loose wiring may cause the terminal to overheat or result in unit malfunction. A fire hazard may also exist. Ensure all wiring is tightly connected. No wire should touch the refrigerant tubing, compressor or any moving parts. Disconnecting means must be provided and shall be located within sight and readily accessible from the air conditioner. Connecting cable with conduit shall be routed through the hole in the conduit panel. NOTE: The main power is supplied to the outdoor unit. When disconnecting the power of the outdoor unit, the indoor unit would lose power. A disconnect switch is not required on the Indoor unit side on the wiring between the Outdoor and Indoor unit. A 3 pole disconnect may be used for extra protection between the Indoor and Outdoor units. DIMENSIONS HIGH WALL UNIT SIZE 12K 9K 12K 18K 24K 30K 36K (Voltage) (115V) (208/230V) (208/230V) (208/230V) (208/230V) (208/230V) (208/230V) DIMENSIONS Height (H) In (mm) 11.61 (295) 11.61 (295) 11.61 (295) 12.56 (319) 14.57 (370) 14.57 (370) 14.57 (370) Width (W) In (mm) 31.3 (795) 31.3 (795) 31.3 (795) 37.99 (965) 44.88 (1140) 44.88 (1140) 44.88 (1140) Depth (D) In (mm) 8.86 (225) 8.86 (225) 8.86 (225) 9.41 (239) 10.83 (275) 10.83 (275) 10.83 (275) PACKING Height (H) In (mm) 12.01 (305) 12.01 (305) 12.01 (305) 12.80 (325) 13.98 (355) 13.98 (355) 13.98 (355) Width (W) In (mm) 34.25 (870) 34.25 (870) 34.25 (870) 41.14 (1045) 48.43 (1230) 48.43 (1230) 48.43 (1230) Depth (D) In (mm) 14.57 (370) 14.57 (370) 14.57 (370) 15.75 (400) 17.91 (455) 17.91 (455) 17.91 (455) Thickness In (mm) 0.295 (7.5) 0.295 (7.5) 0.295 (7.5) 0.295 (7.5) 0.295 (7.5) 0.295 (7.5) 0.295 (7.5) Weight – Gross lbs. (kg) 29.10 (13.2) 28.88 (13.1) 28.88 (13.1) 35.71 (16.2) 54.89 (24.9) 54.89 (24.9) 54.89 (24.9) Weight – Net lbs. (kg) 22.93 (10.4) 22.71(10.3) 22.71(10.3) 27.12 (12.3) 43.65 (19.8) 43.65 (19.8) 43.65 (19.8) CLEARANCES NOTE: The top clearance recommended for proper return airflow is 5.9in (15cm). Reduction of this clearance may decrease unit performance. This may be reduced to 3.2in (80mm) as long as the right and left clearances are achieved. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION Before installing the indoor unit, ensure compatibility with the outdoor unit using the product data as a reference. It is also necessary to confirm the proper application of the equipment and to perform a heat load calculation for proper sizing. Step 1 – Check Equipment Unpack the unit and move to the final location. Remove the carton, taking care not to damage the unit. Inspect the equipment for damage prior to installation. File a claim with the shipping company if the shipment is damaged or incomplete. Locate the unit rating plate, which contains the proper installation information. Check the rating plate to be sure the unit matches the job specifications. The indoor unit should be installed in a location that meets the following requirements: Enough room for installation and maintenance Enough room for the lines and drainpipe A horizontal ceiling and a structure that can sustain the weight of the indoor unit The air inlet and outlet are not impeded CAUTION DO NOT install the unit in the following locations: Areas with oil drilling or fracking Coastal areas with high salt content in the air Areas with caustic gases in the air, such as near hot springs Areas with power fluctuations, such as factories Enclosed spaces, such as cabinets Areas with strong electromagnetic waves Areas that store flammable materials or gas Rooms with high humidity, such as bathrooms or laundry rooms. WARNING PRODUCT INSTALLATION Installation must be performed by an authorized dealer or specialist. A defective installation can cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire. The installation must be performed according to the installation instructions. Improper installation can cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire. (In North America, installation must be performed in accordance with the requirements of NEC or CEC by authorized personnel only.) Contact an authorized service technician for repair or maintenance of this unit. This appliance must be installed in accordance with local codes. Only use the included accessories, parts, and specified parts for installation. Using non-standard parts can cause water leakage, electrical shock, fire, or unit failure. Install drainage piping according to the instructions in this manual. Improper drainage may cause water damage to your home and property. For units that have an auxiliary electric heater, DO NOT install the unit within 3 feet (1 meter) of any combustible materials. DO NOT install the unit in a location that may be exposed to combustible gas leaks. If combustible gas accumulates around the unit, it may cause a fire. DO NOT turn on the power until all work has been completed. When moving or relocating the system, consult experienced service technicians for the disconnection and reinstallation of the unit. Step 2 – Select the Installation Location Before installing the indoor unit, choose an appropriate location. The following are standards that should help you choose an appropriate location for the unit. Proper installation locations must meet the following standards: Good air circulation Convenient drainage Noise from the unit will not disturb others Firm and solid—the location will not vibrate A location at least 3.28 ft. (1m) from all other electrical devices (e.g., TV, radio, computer) DO NOT install the unit in the following locations: a. Near any source of heat, steam, or combustible gas b. Near flammable items such as curtains or clothing c. Near any obstacle that might block air circulation d. Near the doorway e. In a location subject to direct sunlight NOTE: When selecting a location leave ample room for a wall hole (refer to the drill wall hole for connective piping step) for the signal cable and refrigerant piping that connect the indoor and outdoor units. The default position for all piping is the right side of the indoor unit (while facing the unit). However, the unit can accommodate piping to either left or right. Step 3 – Attach the Mounting Plate to the Wall Use the following steps to attach the mounting plate to the wall. Carefully remove the mounting plate, which is attached to the back of the indoor unit. The mounting plate should be located horizontally and at the level on the wall. All minimum spacings should be maintained. If the wall is the block, brick, concrete or similar material, drill 0.2in (5 mm) diameter holes and inserts anchors for the appropriate mounting screws. Attach the mounting plate. Drill holes in the wall: a. If the wall is brick, concrete or of similar material, drill a 5mm-diameter (0.2in-diameter) hole into the wall and insert the sleeve anchors provided. b. Next, secure the mounting plate to the wall by tightening the screws directly into the clip anchors. Step 4 – Drill Wall Holes for Connective Piping Determine the location of the wall hole based on the position of the mounting plate. Refer to the Mounting Plate Dimensions. Use a 2.5in (65mm) or 3.54in (90mm) (depending on models) core drill to drill a hole in the wall. Make sure that the hole is drilled at a slightly downward angle so the outdoor end of the hole is lower than the indoor end by about 0.2 – 0.275in (5 – 7mm). This ensures proper water drainage. Place the protective wall cuff in the hole. This protects the edges of the hole and helps to seal it once the installation is complete. Mounting Plate Dimensions Different model sizes have different mounting plates. Ensure there is enough room to mount the indoor unit (refer to Figures 11−14). The following measurements can be located on these figures: Width of the mounting plate Height of mounting plate Width of the indoor unit relative to plate Height of indoor unit relative to the plate The recommended position of wall hole (both to the left and right of mounting plate) Relative distances between screw holes. NOTE: When the gas side connective pipe is 5/8in (16mmΦ) or more, the wall hole should be 3.54in (90mm). DRILL A HOLE IN THE WALL FOR THE INTERCONNECTING PIPING, DRAIN, AND WIRING  Refrigerant Line Routing The refrigerant lines may be routed in any of the four directions. For maximum serviceability, it is recommended to have refrigerant line flare connections and the drain connections on the outside of the wall that the fan coil can be mounted on. If piping is going through the back, determine the pipe hole position using the mounting plate as a template. Drill pipe hole diameter per values given in figures 11 through 14. The outside pipe hole is 1/2−in. (13 mm) min. lower than the inside pipe hole, so it slants slightly downward. Step 4 – Prepare Refrigerant Piping The refrigerant piping is inside an insulating sleeve attached to the back of the unit. The installer must prepare the piping before passing it through the hole in the wall. Based on the position of the wall hole relative to the mounting plate, choose the side from which the piping exits the unit. If the wall hole is behind the unit, keep the knock-out panel in place. If the wall hole is to the side of the indoor unit, remove the plastic knock-out panel from that side of the unit. This creates a slot through which your piping can exit the unit. Use needle-nose pliers if the plastic panel is too difficult to remove by hand. If the existing connective piping is already embedded in the wall, proceed directly to “Step 5 – Connect the Drain Hose”. If there is no embedded piping, connect the indoor unit’s refrigerant piping to the connective piping that connects the indoor and outdoor units. NOTE: Refrigerant piping can exit the indoor unit from four different angles; left-hand side, right-hand side, left rear, right rear. CAUTION Be extremely careful not to dent or damage the piping while bending them away from the unit. Any dents in the piping will affect the unit’s performance. Step 5 – Connect the Drain Hose By default, the drain hose is attached to the left-hand side of the unit (when you are facing the back of the unit). However, it can also be attached to the right-hand side. To ensure proper drainage, attach the drain hose on the same side that your refrigerant piping exits the unit. Attach a drain hose extension (purchased separately) to the end of the drain hose. Wrap the connection point firmly with Teflon tape to ensure a good seal and to prevent leaks. For the portion of the drain hose that remains indoors, wrap it with foam pipe insulation to prevent condensation. Remove the air filter and pour a small amount of water into the drain pan to ensure that water flows smoothly from the unit. NOTE: Be sure to arrange the drain hose according to Figure 17. CORRECT Ensure there are no kinks or dents in the drain hose to ensure proper drainage. NOT CORRECT Ensure there are no kinks or dents in the drain hose to ensure proper drainage. NOT CORRECT Kinks in the drain hose create water traps. NOT CORRECT Do not place the end of the drain hose in water or in containers that collect water. This prevents proper drainage. Fig. 17 — Drain Hose Placement Plug the Unused Drain Hole To prevent unwanted leaks, plug the unused drain hole with the rubber plug provided. CAUTION All wiring must comply with local and national electrical codes, regulations and must be installed by a licensed electrician. All electrical connections must be made according to the Electrical Connection Diagram located on the panels of the indoor and outdoor units. If there is a serious safety issue with the power supply, stop work immediately. Explain your reasoning to the client, and refuse to install the unit until the safety issue is properly resolved. Power voltage should be within 90-110% of rated voltage. The insufficient power supply can cause malfunction, electrical shock, or fire. If connecting power to fixed wiring, a surge protector and main power switch should be installed. If connecting power to fixed wiring, a switch or circuit breaker that disconnects all poles and has a contact separation of at least 1/8in (3mm) must be incorporated in the fixed wiring. The qualified technician must use an approved circuit breaker or switch. Only connect the unit to an individual branch circuit outlet. Do not connect another appliance to that outlet. Properly ground the air conditioner. Every wire must be firmly connected. Loose wiring can cause the terminal to overheat, resulting in product malfunction and possible fire. Do not let wires touch or rest against refrigerant tubing, the compressor, or any moving parts within the unit. To avoid getting an electric shock, never touch the electrical components soon after the power supply has been turned off. After turning off the power, always wait 10 minutes or more before you touch the electrical components. WARNING Before performing any electrical or wiring work, turn off the main power to the system. Step 6 – Connect the Signal and Power Cables All wires must be sized per NEC (National Electrical Code) or CEC (Canadian Electrical Code) and local codes. See the rating plate and/ or the installation instructions of the compatible outdoor unit for MCA (minimum circuit amps) and MOCP (maximum overcurrent protection) to correctly size the wires and the disconnect fuse or breakers respectively. Recommended Connection Method for Power and  Communication Wiring: The main power is supplied to the outdoor unit. The field supplied 14/ 3 power/communication wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor unit consisting of four (4) wires and provides the power for the indoor unit. Two wires are high voltage AC power, one is communication wiring and the other is a ground wire. Wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit is polarity sensitive. The use of BX wire is NOT recommended. If installed in a high Electromagnetic field (EMF) area and communication issues exist, a 14/2 stranded shielded wire can be used to replace L2/N and (S) between the outdoor unit and indoor unit landing the shield onto the ground in the outdoor unit only. Open the front panel of the indoor unit. Use a screwdriver to open the wire box cover on the right side of the unit. This reveals the terminal block. WARNING All wiring must be performed strictly in accordance with the wiring diagram located on the back of the indoor unit’s front panel. Unscrew the cable clamp, below the terminal block, and place it to the side. Facing the back of the unit, remove the plastic panel on the bottom left-hand side. Feed the signal wire through this slot, from the back of the unit to the front. Facing the front of the unit, connect the wire according to the indoor wiring diagram, connect the u-lug and firmly screw each wire to its corresponding terminal. CAUTION DO NOT MIX UP LIVE AND NULL WIRES This is dangerous and can cause the air conditioning unit to malfunction. After checking to ensure every connection is secure, use the cable clamp to fasten the signal cable to the unit. Screw the cable clamp down tightly. Replace the wire cover on the front of the unit, and the plastic panel on the back. NOTE: The wiring connection process may differ slightly between units and regions. Step 7 – Wrap Piping and Cables Before passing the piping, drain hose, and the signal cable through the wall hole, bundle them together to save space, protect them, and insulate them (not applicable in North America). Bundle the drain hose, refrigerant pipes, and signal cable. NOTE: Ensure the drain hose is at the bottom of the bundle. Placing the drain hose at the top of the bundle can cause the drain pan to overflow, which can lead to fire or water damage. NOTE: While bundling these items together, do not intertwine or cross the signal cable with any other wiring. Using adhesive vinyl tape, attach the drain hose to the underside of the refrigerant pipes. Using insulation tape, wrap the signal wire, refrigerant pipes, and drain hose tightly together. Double-check that all items are bundled. NOTE: When wrapping the bundle, keep the ends of the piping unwrapped. Technicians may need to access them to test for leaks at the end of the installation process (refer to the Electrical Checks and Leak Checks section). Step 8 – Mount the Indoor Unit If new connected piping to the outdoor unit has been installed, complete the following steps: If you have already passed the refrigerant piping through the hole in the wall, proceed to step 4. Otherwise, double-check that the ends of the refrigerant pipes are sealed to prevent dirt or foreign materials from entering the pipes. Slowly pass the wrapped bundle of refrigerant pipes, drain hose, and signal wire through the hole in the wall. Hook the top of the indoor unit on the upper hook of the mounting plate. Ensure the unit is hooked firmly on the mounting by applying slight pressure to the left and right-hand sides of the unit. The unit should not jiggle or shift. Using even pressure, push down on the bottom half of the unit. Keep pushing down until the unit snaps onto the hooks along the bottom of the mounting plate. Again, check that the unit is firmly mounted by applying slight pressure to the left and the right-hand sides of the unit. If refrigerant piping is already embedded in the wall, complete the  following steps: Hook the top of the indoor unit on the upper hook of the mounting plate. Use a bracket or wedge to prop up the unit, allowing enough room to connect the refrigerant piping, signal cable, and the drain hose. Connect the drain hose and refrigerant piping.  Keep the pipe connection point exposed to perform the leak test (refer to Electrical Checks and Leak Checks section of this manual). After the leak test, wrap the connection point with insulation tape. Remove the bracket or wedge that is propping up the unit. Using even pressure, push down on the bottom half of the unit. Keep pushing down until the unit snaps onto the hooks along the bottom of the mounting plate. NOTE: Keep in mind that the hooks on the mounting plate are smaller than the holes on the back of the unit. If you find that you do not have ample room to connect embedded pipes to the indoor unit, the unit can be adjusted left or right by about 1.18-1.95in (30-50mm), depending on the model. ELECTRICAL DATA Table 6 — Electrical Data HIGH WALL 12K 9K 12K 18K 24K 30K 36K INDOOR UNITS HP (115V) (208/230V) (208/230V) (208/230V) (208/230V) (208/230V) (208/230V) Running Current (A) 0.467 0.182 0.182 0.11 0.364 0.364 0.364 Power Consumption (W) 20 20 20 30 58 58 58 Power Factor (%) 82. 66. 95. 70. 94 97. 99. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS INSTALL ALL POWER, INTERCONNECTING WIRING, AND PIPING TO THE INDOOR UNIT Run interconnecting piping and wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor unit. Run an interconnecting cable through the hole in the wall (outside to inside). Lift the indoor unit into position and route piping and drain through the hole in the wall (inside to outside). Fit the interconnecting wiring into the backside of the indoor unit. Put an upper claw at the back of the indoor unit on the upper hook of the mounting plate and move the indoor unit from side to side to ensure it is securely hooked. See “Mounting Plate Dimensions” and Fig. 9 — on page 9 for reference. Open the indoor unit’s front cover and remove the field wiring terminal block cover. Pull the interconnecting wire up from the back of the indoor unit and position close to the terminal block on the indoor unit. Push the lower part of the indoor unit up on the wall, then move the indoor unit from side to side, up and down to ensure it is hooked securely (see Fig. 26). Connect the wiring from the outdoor unit per the connection diagram (see Fig. 23 and Fig. 24). Replace the field wiring cover and close the indoor unit’s front cover. Piping: a. Cut the pipe, with a pipe cutter, at 90 degrees (see Fig. 27). b. Remove the service connection (if provided with the unit). c. Remove all the burrs from the cut cross-section of the pipe avoiding any burrs inside the tubes. d. Remove the flare nuts attached to the indoor and outdoor units. e. Install the correct size flare nut onto the tubing and make the flare connection. Refer to Table 7 for the flare nut spaces. Table 7 — Flare Nut Spacing OUTER DIAM. (MM) A (MM) MAX. MIN. Ø 1/4” (6.35) 0.05 (1.3) 0.03 (0.7) Ø 3/8” (9.52) 0.06 (1.6) 0.04 (1.0) Ø 1/2” (12.7) 0.07 (1.8) 0.04 (1.0) Ø 5/8” (15.88) 0.09 (2.2) 0.08 (2.0) f. Apply a small amount of refrigerant oil to the flare connection on the tubing. g. Align the center of the pipes and/or service valve. h. Connect both the liquid and gas piping to the indoor unit i. Tighten the flare nut using a torque wrench as specified in Table 8. Brass Flare  Size Recommended Seating Torque for Brass Flare Nuts N-m Ø1/4 8-10 Ft. – Lbs. 10.8 to 13.6 Ø3/8 15-18 Ft. – Lbs. 20.3 to 24.4 Ø1/2 28-32 Ft. – Lbs. 38.0 to 43.4 Ø5/8 38-42 Ft. – Lbs. 51.5 to 56.9 Ø3/4 50-55 Ft. – Lbs. 68.0 to 74.6 FINAL TUBING CHECK IMPORTANT: Ensure the certain factory tubing on the indoor unit has not shifted during shipment. Ensure the tubes are not rubbing against each other or any sheet metal. Pay close attention to feeder tubes and ensure the wire ties on the feeder tubes are secure and tight. DRAIN CONNECTIONS Connect the drain line. The drain line must not have a trap anywhere in its length, must pitch downwards, and must be insulated up to the outside wall (see Fig. 31). By default, the drain hose is attached to the left-hand side of unit (when facing the back of the unit). However, it can also be attached to the right-hand side. a. To ensure proper drainage, attach the drain hose on the same side that your refrigerant piping exits the unit. b. Attach a drain hose extension (purchased separately) to the end of the drain hose. c. Wrap the connection point firmly with Teflon tape to ensure a good seal and to prevent leaks. d. For the portion of the drain hose that remains indoors, wrap it with foam pipe insulation to prevent condensation. e. Remove the air filter and pour a small amount of water into the drain pan to ensure that water flows from the unit smoothly. Plug the Unused Drain Hole To prevent unwanted leaks, plug the unused drain hole with the rubber plug provided. NOTE: For proper orientation of the refrigerant piping, electrical cable and drain lines, refer to Fig. 32. NOTE: The factory insulation provided with the product is sufficient, therefore adding additional insulation to the refrigerant pipes is NOT recommended. Additional insulation may keep the product from attaching flush to the wall. NOTE: For applications where gravity cannot be used for drainage, a condensate pump accessory is available. Consult the condensate pump Installation Instructions for more information. WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL INSTALLATION Use the two screws supplied with the wireless remote control to attach the mounting bracket to the wall in a location selected by the customer and within operating range. Install the batteries in the remote control. Place the remote control into the remote control mounting bracket. NOTE: For remote control operation, refer to the remote control’s owner’s manual. WIRED REMOTE CONTROL INSTALLATION The wired remote controller comes with the following items: A set of installation instructions and owner’s manuals 3 M4X20 Screws to mount on the wall 4 wall plugs to mount on the wall 2 M4X25 to mount on the switch box 2 plastic screw bars to fix on the switch box 1 set of batteries 1 set of connecting wires to connect to the indoor unit’s main board To connect the wired remote controller to the indoor units, connect to the 4-pin connector located on the display board. To connect the wired remote controller to the indoor units: Replace the display board with the shipped kit. Install the adapter board (shipped with the kit). Connect the adapter board to the new display board. Follow the instructions on the wired controller installation instructions manual for more details. Connect the female Molex plug on the adapter board to the male Molex plug from the extension cable shipped with the kit. Connect the extension cable to the wired controller For setup instructions, refer to the controller installation manual. START-UP Test Operation Perform a test operation after completing a gas leak and electrical safety check (see Fig. 35). Push ON/OFF on the remote control to begin testing. NOTE: A protection feature prevents the air conditioner from activating for approximately 3 to 4 minutes. Push MODE, select COOLING, HEATING, FAN mode to check that all functions work correctly. To run the test using the MANUAL button on the indoor unit: a. Open the front panel of the indoor unit; b. Push MANUAL once to energize the unit. The set conditions for manual operation are as follows: •Preset set point: 76°F (24°C) •Fan speed: AUTO •Discharge air direction: Pre-set position based on operation in the COOL or HEAT mode. Set the MANUAL button to OFF (by pushing it twice again) after completing the test operation. SYSTEM CHECKS Conceal the tubing where possible. Ensure the drain tube slopes downward along its entire length. Ensure all tubing and connections are properly insulated. Fasten tubes to the outside wall, when possible. Seal the hole through which the cables and tubing pass. INDOOR UNIT Do all remote control buttons function properly? Do the display panel lights work properly? Does the air deflection louver function properly? Does the drain work? Explain Following Items To Customer (with the aid of the Owner’s Manual): How to turn the air conditioner on and off; selecting COOLING, HEATING and other operating modes; setting a desired temperature; set the timer to automatically start and stop the air conditioner operation; and all other features of the remote control and display panel. How to remove and clean the air filter. How to set the air deflection louver. Explain care and maintenance. Present the owner’s manual and installation instructions to the customer. TROUBLESHOOTING For ease of service, the systems are equipped with diagnostic code display LEDs on both the indoor and outdoor units. The indoor diagnostic display is a combination of flashing LEDs on the display panel or the front of the unit. Some indoor units display error codes specifying failure modes in the outdoor units. If possible, always check the diagnostic codes displayed on the indoor unit first. The diagnostic codes displayed in the indoor and outdoor units are listed in Table 9. INDOOR UNIT DIAGNOSTIC GUIDES Table 9 — Indoor Unit Diagnostic Codes OPERATION LAMP (TIMES) TIMER LAMP DISPLAY ERROR INFORMATION *1 OFF EH 00/EH OA Indoor unit EEPROM parameter error *2 OFF EL 01 Indoor/outdoor unit communication error *3 OFF EH 02 Zero-crossing signal detection error *4 OFF EH 03 Indoor fan operating outside of the normal range *5 OFF EC 51 Outdoor unit EEPROM parameter error *5 OFF EC 52 T3 is in an open circuit or has short-circuited *5 OFF EC 53 T4 is in an open circuit or has short-circuited *5 OFF EC 54 TP is in an open circuit or has short-circuited *5 OFF EC 56 T2B is in an open circuit or has short-circuited *6 OFF EH 60 T1 is in an open circuit or has short-circuited *6 OFF EH 61 T2 is in an open circuit or has short-circuited *12 OFF EC 07 Outdoor fan operating outside of the normal range *9 OFF EH Ob Indoor PCB/Display board communication error *8 OFF EL OC Refrigerant leakage detection *7 FLASH PC 00 IPM malfunction or IGBT OSCP *2 FLASH PC 01 Overvoltage or over low voltage protection *3 FLASH PC 02 Compressor or IPM high temp/pressure protection *5 FLASH PC 04 Inverter compressor drive error *1 FLASH PC 08 Current overload protection *6 FLASH PC 40 Communication error between the outdoor chip and compressor chip *7 FLASH PC 03 Low-pressure protection *1 ON — Indoor unit mode conflict *9 OFF EH b1 Indoor board and Multi-function communication error *11 OFF FH Od Ionizer malfunction O (on − light) X (off − light) ☆(flash) For additional diagnostic information, refer to the service manual. INDOOR UNIT FUNCTIONAL CODES Table 10 — Indoor Unit Functional Codes DISPLAY DESCRIPTION dF Defrost SC Self-clean CL Filter cleaning reminder CL Active Clean (*model dependent) nF Filter replacement reminder FP Heating in room temperature under 8°C FC Forced cooling AP AP mode of WIFI connection CP Remote switched off LL Remote or Wire controller Lock On Time On Off Time Off E-C-O ECO mode SD Power abnormal detection dl Receive DR1 signal d2 Receive DR2 signal d3 Receive DR3 signal dE DR input error signal FH OP AP mode is activated / no WIFI kit installed FH Od See outdoor unit for Error Code information EH/EC/EL/PC See outdoor unit for Error Code information DUCTLESS START-UP CHECKLIST – Single Zone Installation Data Site Address:__________________ City:_______________________State:___________ Zip Code:__________ Installing Contractor:______________ Contractor Contact #: ( ) _____-____ Job Name:___________________ Start-up Date:___________________ Distributor:______________________ System Details UNITS MODEL NO. SERIAL NO. CONTROLLER OUTDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT A Are the outdoor unit and indoor unit compatible? YES:______ NO:______ Wiring Electrical Wire Size and Type Used? AWG:__________ TYPE:_________ Are there any breaks, splices, wire nuts or butt connectors between the outdoor unit and the indoor unit? Was the wiring from the outdoor unit port to the correct indoor unit verified? REMARKS:______________________ YES:______ NO:______ YES:______ NO:______ Voltage Check Wiring: Single Zone Outdoor Unit Disconnect 1 (L1 ):GND Outdoor Unit Terminal Block 1 (L1):GND NOTES: 2(L2): GND 2(L2): GND 1 (L1): L2(2) 1 (L1):2(L2) Indoor Unit Voltage Check @ Outdoor Unit 1 (L1 ): GND Indoor Unit Voltage Check @ Indoor Unit 1 (L1): GND NOTES: 2(L2): GND 2(L2): GND 1 (L1 ):2(L2) 1 (L1 ):2(L2) 2(L2):3(S) 2(L2):3(S) Outdoor Unit Disconnect 1 (L1): GND Outdoor Unit Terminal Block 1 (L1 ): GND NOTES: 2(L2): GND 2(L2): GND 1 (L1 ): L2(2) 1 (L1 ):2(L2) Indoor Unit Voltage Check @ Outdoor Unit 1 (L1 ): GND Indoor Unit Voltage Check @ Indoor Unit 1 (L1 ): GND NOTES: 2(L2): GND 2(L2): GND 1 (L1 ):2(L2) 1 (L1 ):2(L2) 2(L2):3(S) 2(L2):3(S) Ductless Start-Up Checklist (CONT) Piping Leak Check: The system held 500 psig (max. 550psi) for a minimum of 30 minutes using dry nitrogen. YES:______ NO:______ Evacuation Method: Was the Triple Evacuation Method used as outlined in the installation manual? YES:______ NO:______ Was the Deep Vacuum Method used as outlined in the installation manual? YES:______ NO:_______ Did the System Hold 500 microns for 1 hour? YES:______ NO:_______ Does the line set to match the diameter of the evaporator connections? YES:______ NO:_______ For Conventional Fan Coils, does the line set to match the outdoor unit size? YES:______ NO:_______ Single Zone Piping: Has the liquid pipe length been measured and the additional charge calculated? Size:___________ Length:_________ Charge:____________ NOTES:…………………. PORT LIQUID SIZE SUCTION SIZE LENGTH CHARGE NOTES: A Performance Check For 1:1 Single Zone Systems: Adjust the set-point to create an operational call for the desired testing operation. Allow the system to run for a minimum of 10 min. and record the following details: (Operational data recorded on applicable heads with the wireless remote controller’s Point Check function) UNIT SET-POINT MODE T1 T2 T3 T4 Tb Tp Th LA/Lr A NOTE: T1 – Ambient Space Temperature Sensor T2 – IDU Coil Temperature Sensor T3 – Outdoor Coil Temperature Sensor T4 – Outdoor Ambient Temperature Tb – Suction Line Temperature @PMV Tp – Discharge Temperature Sensor Th – IPM Board Temperature LA/Lr – PMV Temperature Error Codes Were there any error codes present at the start-up? YES:______ NO:______ Indoor Unit Error Code: Notes: Outdoor Unit Error Code: Wall Controller: 24V Interface: Comments: Copyright 2020 Carrier Corp D 3300 Riverwood Parkway Atlanta GA, 30339 Edition Date: 12/20 Catalog No. 40MAHB-01SI The manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. Replaces: NEW [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/carrier/ductless-system-40mahb/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p><strong>40MAHB</strong><br />
<strong>Ductless Split Unit System</strong><br />
<strong>Sizes 9, 12, 18, 24, 30 and 36<br />
Installation Instructions</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-DIMENSIONS.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Read the entire instruction manual before starting the installation.<br />
Images are for illustration purposes only. Actual models may differ slightly.</p>
<h4>SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS</h4>
<p>Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, maintenance, or use can cause an explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause death, personal injury, or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency, or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or agency must use factory-authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product. Refer to the individual instructions packaged with kits or accessories when installing.<br />
Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses, protective clothing, and work gloves. Have a fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions included in the literature and attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and the current editions of the National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA 70.<br />
In Canada, refer to the current editions of the Canadian Electrical Code CSA C22.1. Recognize safety information. This is the safety alert symbol. When you see this symbol on the unit and in instruction manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION. These words are used with the safety alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death.<br />
WARNING signifies hazards that could result in personal injury or death.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-3.webp" /> CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices which may result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions that will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation.</p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-3.webp" />WARNING</strong><br />
<strong>ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury or death. Before installing, modifying, or servicing the system, the main electrical disconnect switch must be in the OFF position. There may be more than 1 disconnect switch. Lockout and tag switch with a suitable warning label.</p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-3.webp" /> WARNING</strong><br />
<strong>EXPLOSION HAZARD</strong><br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/EXPLOSION-HAZARD.webp" />Failure to follow this warning could result in death, serious personal injury, and/or property damage.<br />
Never use air or gases containing oxygen for leak testing or operating refrigerant compressors. Pressurized mixtures of air or gases containing oxygen can lead to an explosion.</p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-3.webp" /> CAUTION</strong><br />
<strong>EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation.<br />
Do not bury more than 36 in. (914 mm) of refrigerant pipe in the ground. If any section of pipe is buried, there must be a 6 in. (152 mm) vertical rise to the valve connections on the outdoor units. If more than the recommended length is buried, the refrigerant may migrate to the cooler buried section during extended periods of system shutdown. This causes refrigerant slugging and could possibly damage the compressor at start-up.</p>
<h4>ACCESSORIES</h4>
<p>The system is shipped with the following accessories (see Table 1). Use all of the installation parts and accessories to install the system. Improper installation may result in water leakage, electrical shock and fire, or cause the equipment to fail. Keep the installation manual in a safe place and do not discard any other accessories until the installation work has been completed.<br />
<strong>Table 1 — Accessories</strong></p>
<table width="827">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="120"><strong>NAME</strong></td>
<td width="143"><strong>SHAPE</strong></td>
<td width="87"><strong>QUANTITY</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="120">Installation Manual</td>
<td width="143"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Installation-Manual.webp" /></td>
<td width="87">2-3</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="120">Drain Joint</td>
<td width="143"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Drain-Joint.webp" /></td>
<td width="87">1</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="120">Seal (for cooling<br />
and heating models)</td>
<td width="143"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Seal.webp" /></td>
<td width="87">1</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="120">Mounting Plate</td>
<td width="143"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Mounting-Plate.webp" /></td>
<td width="87">1</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="120">Anchor</td>
<td width="143"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Anchor.webp" /></td>
<td width="87">5-8<br />
(depending<br />
on models)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="120">Mounting Plate<br />
Screw</td>
<td width="143"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Mounting-Plate-1.webp" /></td>
<td width="87">5-8<br />
(depending<br />
on models)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="120">Remote Controller</td>
<td width="143"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Remote-Controller.webp" /></td>
<td width="87">1</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="120">Battery</td>
<td width="143"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Battery.webp" /></td>
<td width="87">2</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="120">Remote Controller<br />
Holder (optional)</td>
<td width="143"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Holder.webp" /></td>
<td width="87">1</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="120">Remote Controller<br />
Holder Screw<br />
(optional)</td>
<td width="143"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Holder-Screw.webp" /></td>
<td width="87">2</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="120">Small Filter (Must be installed on the back of the<br />
main air fitter by an authorized technician during<br />
unit installation)</td>
<td width="143"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Small-Filter.webp" /></td>
<td width="87">1-2<br />
depending<br />
on the model</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Table 2 — Accessories</strong></p>
<table width="846">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="197"><strong>NAME</strong></td>
<td colspan="2" width="282"><strong>SHAPE</strong></td>
<td width="198"><strong>QUANTITY (PC)</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="6" width="197">Connecting<br />
Pipe Assembly</td>
<td rowspan="2" width="110">Liquid<br />
Side</td>
<td width="172">1/4in(cD 6.35)</td>
<td rowspan="6" width="198">These parts must be purchased separately.<br />
Consult the dealer about the proper pipe size of the<br />
unit purchased.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="172">3/8in (0 9.52)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="4" width="110">Gas Side</td>
<td width="172">3/8in (0 9.52)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="172">1/2in (012.7)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="172">5/8in (016)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="172">3/4in (019)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="197">Magnetic Ring and Clamp (if supplied refer to the wiring diagram to install it to the cable.</td>
<td colspan="2" width="282"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Magnetic-Ring.webp" /></td>
<td width="198">Varies by model</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>PARTS</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-PARTS.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Illustrations in this manual are for reference only. The actual shape of the indoor unit and parts may differ slightly.</p>
<ol>
<li>Wall Mounting Plate</li>
<li>Front Panel</li>
<li>Louver</li>
<li>Air Filter</li>
<li>Drainage Pipe</li>
<li> Signal Cable</li>
<li>Refrigerant Piping</li>
<li>Remote Controller</li>
<li>Remote Controller Holder (some units)</li>
<li>Outdoor Unit Power Cable (some units)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>NOTES:</strong><br />
– If the outdoor unit is higher than the indoor unit, prevent rain from flowing into the indoor unit along the connection pipe by making an inverted trap in the connection pipe before it enters the wall to the indoor unit. This ensures that rain drips from the connection pipe before it enters the wall.<br />
– Piping and the interconnecting wiring are field supplied.<br />
– The illustration above (Fig. 2) is only a sketch. Different models may differ slightly.<br />
The units listed in Table 3 are addressed in these installation instructions.</p>
<p><strong>Table 3 — Indoor Units</strong></p>
<table width="849">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="135"><strong>DESCRIPTION</strong></td>
<td width="77"><strong>BTUH</strong></td>
<td width="134"><strong>V-PH-HZ</strong></td>
<td width="178"><strong>ID MODEL NO.</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="135"></td>
<td width="77">12</td>
<td width="134">115-1-60</td>
<td width="178">40MAHBQ12XA1</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="6" width="135">HIGH WALL<br />
HEAT PUMP</td>
<td width="77">9</td>
<td rowspan="6" width="134">208 230-1-60</td>
<td width="178">40MAHBQ09XA3</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="77">12</td>
<td width="178">40MAHBQ12XA3</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="77">18</td>
<td width="178">40MAHBQ18XA3</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="77">24</td>
<td width="178">40MAHBQ24XA3</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="77">30</td>
<td width="178">40MAHBQ3OXA3</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="77">36</td>
<td width="178">40MAHBQ36XA3</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> The installation must be performed in accordance with the requirement of local and national standards. The installation may differ slightly in some areas.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-PARTS-2.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Different models have different front panels and display windows.</p>
<h4><strong>SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS</strong></h4>
<p>Allow sufficient space for airflow and unit service. Fig. 5 — on page 7 for the minimum required distances between the unit and walls or ceilings.<br />
T<strong>able 4 — Indoor Unit Pipe Sizes</strong></p>
<table width="1068">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="246">UNIT SIZES</td>
<td width="117">12K<br />
(115V)</td>
<td width="117">9K<br />
(208/230V)</td>
<td width="118">12K<br />
(208/230V)</td>
<td width="117">18K<br />
(208/230V)</td>
<td width="118">24K<br />
(208/230V)</td>
<td width="117">30K<br />
(208/230V)</td>
<td width="118">36K<br />
(208/230V)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="175">GAS PIPE</td>
<td width="71">in</td>
<td width="117">0.5</td>
<td width="117">0.375</td>
<td width="118">0.5</td>
<td width="117">0.5</td>
<td width="118">0.626</td>
<td width="117">0.626</td>
<td width="118">0.626</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="71">(mm)</td>
<td width="117">13.</td>
<td width="117">(10.)</td>
<td width="118">13.</td>
<td width="117">13.</td>
<td width="118">16.</td>
<td width="117">16.</td>
<td width="118">16.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="175">LIQUID PIPE</td>
<td width="71">in</td>
<td width="117">0.25</td>
<td width="117">0.25</td>
<td width="118">0.25</td>
<td width="117">0.25</td>
<td width="118">0.375</td>
<td width="117">0.375</td>
<td width="118">0.375</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="71">(mm)</td>
<td width="117">25</td>
<td width="117">25</td>
<td width="118">25</td>
<td width="117">25</td>
<td width="118">10.</td>
<td width="117">10.</td>
<td width="118">10.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>WIRING</h4>
<p>All wires must be sized per NEC (National Electrical Code) or CEC (Canadian Electrical Code) and local codes. See the rating plate and/ or the installation instructions of the compatible outdoor unit for MCA (minimum circuit amps) and MOCP (maximum overcurrent protection) to correctly size the wires and the disconnect fuse or breakers respectively.<br />
Recommended Connection Method for Power and Communication Wiring:<br />
The main power is supplied to the outdoor unit. The field supplied 14/ 3 power/communication wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor unit consisting of four (4) wires and provides the power for the indoor unit. Two wires are high voltage AC power, one is communication wiring and the other is a ground wire. Wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit is polarity sensitive. The use of BX wire is NOT recommended.<br />
If installed in a high Electromagnetic field (EMF) area and communication issues exist, a 14/2 stranded shielded wire can be used to replace L2/N and (S) between outdoor unit and indoor unit landing the shield onto the ground in the outdoor unit only.</p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-3.webp" /> WARNING</strong><br />
<strong>EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation.<br />
Wires should be sized based on NEC and local codes.<br />
<strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-3.webp" /> CAUTION</strong><br />
<strong>EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper operation.<br />
Be sure to comply with local codes while running a wire from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit.<br />
Every wire must be connected firmly. Loose wiring may cause the terminal to overheat or result in unit malfunction. A fire hazard may also exist. Ensure all wiring is tightly connected.<br />
No wire should touch the refrigerant tubing, compressor or any moving parts.<br />
Disconnecting means must be provided and shall be located within sight and readily accessible from the air conditioner. Connecting cable with conduit shall be routed through the hole in the conduit panel.<br />
NOTE: The main power is supplied to the outdoor unit. When disconnecting the power of the outdoor unit, the indoor unit would lose power. A disconnect switch is not required on the Indoor unit side on the wiring between the Outdoor and Indoor<br />
unit. A 3 pole disconnect may be used for extra protection between the Indoor and Outdoor units.</p>
<h4>DIMENSIONS</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-DIMENSIONS.webp" /></p>
<table width="1072">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="208">HIGH WALL UNIT SIZE</td>
<td width="83"></td>
<td width="112">12K</td>
<td width="111">9K</td>
<td width="111">12K</td>
<td width="112">18K</td>
<td width="111">24K</td>
<td width="111">30K</td>
<td width="113">36K</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208">(Voltage)</td>
<td width="83"></td>
<td width="112">(115V)</td>
<td width="111">(208/230V)</td>
<td width="111">(208/230V)</td>
<td width="112">(208/230V)</td>
<td width="111">(208/230V)</td>
<td width="111">(208/230V)</td>
<td width="113">(208/230V)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="8" width="959">DIMENSIONS</td>
<td width="113"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208">Height (H)</td>
<td width="83">In (mm)</td>
<td width="112">11.61 (295)</td>
<td width="111">11.61 (295)</td>
<td width="111">11.61 (295)</td>
<td width="112">12.56 (319)</td>
<td width="111">14.57 (370)</td>
<td width="111">14.57 (370)</td>
<td width="113">14.57 (370)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208">Width (W)</td>
<td width="83">In (mm)</td>
<td width="112">31.3 (795)</td>
<td width="111">31.3 (795)</td>
<td width="111">31.3 (795)</td>
<td width="112">37.99 (965)</td>
<td width="111">44.88 (1140)</td>
<td width="111">44.88 (1140)</td>
<td width="113">44.88 (1140)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208">Depth (D)</td>
<td width="83">In (mm)</td>
<td width="112">8.86 (225)</td>
<td width="111">8.86 (225)</td>
<td width="111">8.86 (225)</td>
<td width="112">9.41 (239)</td>
<td width="111">10.83 (275)</td>
<td width="111">10.83 (275)</td>
<td width="113">10.83 (275)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="8" width="959">PACKING</td>
<td width="113"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208">Height (H)</td>
<td width="83">In (mm)</td>
<td width="112">12.01 (305)</td>
<td width="111">12.01 (305)</td>
<td width="111">12.01 (305)</td>
<td width="112">12.80 (325)</td>
<td width="111">13.98 (355)</td>
<td width="111">13.98 (355)</td>
<td width="113">13.98 (355)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208">Width (W)</td>
<td width="83">In (mm)</td>
<td width="112">34.25 (870)</td>
<td width="111">34.25 (870)</td>
<td width="111">34.25 (870)</td>
<td width="112">41.14 (1045)</td>
<td width="111">48.43 (1230)</td>
<td width="111">48.43 (1230)</td>
<td width="113">48.43 (1230)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208">Depth (D)</td>
<td width="83">In (mm)</td>
<td width="112">14.57 (370)</td>
<td width="111">14.57 (370)</td>
<td width="111">14.57 (370)</td>
<td width="112">15.75 (400)</td>
<td width="111">17.91 (455)</td>
<td width="111">17.91 (455)</td>
<td width="113">17.91 (455)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208">Thickness</td>
<td width="83">In (mm)</td>
<td width="112">0.295 (7.5)</td>
<td width="111">0.295 (7.5)</td>
<td width="111">0.295 (7.5)</td>
<td width="112">0.295 (7.5)</td>
<td width="111">0.295 (7.5)</td>
<td width="111">0.295 (7.5)</td>
<td width="113">0.295 (7.5)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208">Weight – Gross</td>
<td width="83">lbs. (kg)</td>
<td width="112">29.10 (13.2)</td>
<td width="111">28.88 (13.1)</td>
<td width="111">28.88 (13.1)</td>
<td width="112">35.71 (16.2)</td>
<td width="111">54.89 (24.9)</td>
<td width="111">54.89 (24.9)</td>
<td width="113">54.89 (24.9)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="208">Weight – Net</td>
<td width="83">lbs. (kg)</td>
<td width="112">22.93 (10.4)</td>
<td width="111">22.71(10.3)</td>
<td width="111">22.71(10.3)</td>
<td width="112">27.12 (12.3)</td>
<td width="111">43.65 (19.8)</td>
<td width="111">43.65 (19.8)</td>
<td width="113">43.65 (19.8)</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>CLEARANCES</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-CLEARANCES.webp" /></p>
<p>NOTE: The top clearance recommended for proper return airflow is 5.9in (15cm). Reduction of this clearance may decrease unit performance. This may be reduced to 3.2in (80mm) as long as the right and left clearances are achieved.</p>
<h4>PRIOR TO INSTALLATION</h4>
<p>Before installing the indoor unit, ensure compatibility with the outdoor unit using the product data as a reference. It is also necessary to confirm the proper application of the equipment and to perform a heat load calculation for proper sizing.</p>
<h4>Step 1 – Check Equipment</h4>
<p>Unpack the unit and move to the final location. Remove the carton, taking care not to damage the unit. Inspect the equipment for damage prior to installation. File a claim with the shipping company if the shipment is damaged or incomplete. Locate the unit rating plate, which contains the proper installation information. Check the rating plate to be sure the unit matches the job specifications.<br />
The indoor unit should be installed in a location that meets the following requirements:</p>
<ul>
<li>Enough room for installation and maintenance</li>
<li>Enough room for the lines and drainpipe</li>
<li>A horizontal ceiling and a structure that can sustain the weight of the indoor unit</li>
<li>The air inlet and outlet are not impeded</li>
</ul>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-3.webp" />CAUTION</strong></p>
<p>DO NOT install the unit in the following locations:</p>
<ul>
<li>Areas with oil drilling or fracking</li>
<li>Coastal areas with high salt content in the air</li>
<li>Areas with caustic gases in the air, such as near hot springs</li>
<li>Areas with power fluctuations, such as factories</li>
<li>Enclosed spaces, such as cabinets</li>
<li>Areas with strong electromagnetic waves</li>
<li>Areas that store flammable materials or gas</li>
<li>Rooms with high humidity, such as bathrooms or laundry rooms.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-3.webp" />WARNING</strong><br />
<strong>PRODUCT INSTALLATION</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Installation must be performed by an authorized dealer or specialist. A defective installation can cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.</li>
<li>The installation must be performed according to the installation instructions. Improper installation can cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire. (In North America, installation must be performed in accordance with the requirements of NEC or CEC by authorized personnel only.)</li>
<li>Contact an authorized service technician for repair or maintenance of this unit. This appliance must be installed in accordance with local codes.</li>
<li>Only use the included accessories, parts, and specified parts for installation. Using non-standard parts can cause water leakage, electrical shock, fire, or unit failure.</li>
<li>Install drainage piping according to the instructions in this manual.<br />
Improper drainage may cause water damage to your home and property.</li>
<li>For units that have an auxiliary electric heater, DO NOT install the unit within 3 feet (1 meter) of any combustible materials.</li>
<li>DO NOT install the unit in a location that may be exposed to combustible gas leaks. If combustible gas accumulates around the unit, it may cause a fire.</li>
<li>DO NOT turn on the power until all work has been completed.</li>
<li>When moving or relocating the system, consult experienced service technicians for the disconnection and reinstallation of the unit.</li>
</ul>
<h4>Step 2 – Select the Installation Location</h4>
<p>Before installing the indoor unit, choose an appropriate location.<br />
The following are standards that should help you choose an appropriate location for the unit.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-6.webp" /></p>
<p>Proper installation locations must meet the following standards:</p>
<ol>
<li>Good air circulation</li>
<li>Convenient drainage</li>
<li>Noise from the unit will not disturb others</li>
<li>Firm and solid—the location will not vibrate</li>
<li>A location at least 3.28 ft. (1m) from all other electrical devices<br />
(e.g., TV, radio, computer)</li>
<li>DO NOT install the unit in the following locations:<br />
a. Near any source of heat, steam, or combustible gas<br />
b. Near flammable items such as curtains or clothing<br />
c. Near any obstacle that might block air circulation<br />
d. Near the doorway<br />
e. In a location subject to direct sunlight</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> When selecting a location leave ample room for a wall hole (refer to the drill wall hole for connective piping step) for the signal cable and refrigerant piping that connect the indoor and outdoor units. The default position for all piping is the right side of the indoor unit (while facing the unit). However, the unit can accommodate piping to either left or right.</p>
<p>Step 3 – Attach the Mounting Plate to the Wall<br />
Use the following steps to attach the mounting plate to the wall.</p>
<ol>
<li>Carefully remove the mounting plate, which is attached to the back of the indoor unit.</li>
<li>The mounting plate should be located horizontally and at the level on the wall. All minimum spacings should be maintained.</li>
<li>If the wall is the block, brick, concrete or similar material, drill 0.2in (5 mm) diameter holes and inserts anchors for the appropriate mounting screws.</li>
<li>Attach the mounting plate.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-7.webp" /></li>
<li>Drill holes in the wall:<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-8.webp" /></li>
</ol>
<p>a. If the wall is brick, concrete or of similar material, drill a 5mm-diameter (0.2in-diameter) hole into the wall and insert the sleeve anchors provided.<br />
b. Next, secure the mounting plate to the wall by tightening the screws directly into the clip anchors.</p>
<p>Step 4 – Drill Wall Holes for Connective Piping</p>
<ol>
<li>Determine the location of the wall hole based on the position of the mounting plate. Refer to the Mounting Plate Dimensions.</li>
<li>Use a 2.5in (65mm) or 3.54in (90mm) (depending on models) core drill to drill a hole in the wall. Make sure that the hole is drilled at a slightly downward angle so the outdoor end of the hole is lower than the indoor end by about 0.2 – 0.275in (5 – 7mm). This ensures proper water drainage.</li>
<li>Place the protective wall cuff in the hole. This protects the edges of the hole and helps to seal it once the installation is complete.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Mounting Plate Dimensions</strong><br />
Different model sizes have different mounting plates. Ensure there is enough room to mount the indoor unit (refer to Figures 11−14). The following measurements can be located on these figures:</p>
<ul>
<li>Width of the mounting plate</li>
<li>Height of mounting plate</li>
<li>Width of the indoor unit relative to plate</li>
<li>Height of indoor unit relative to the plate</li>
<li>The recommended position of wall hole (both to the left and right of mounting plate)</li>
<li>Relative distances between screw holes.</li>
</ul>
<table border="0" width="128" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-11.webp" /></td>
<td width="64"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-14.webp" /></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>NOTE: When the gas side connective pipe is 5/8in (16mmΦ) or more, the wall hole should be 3.54in (90mm).<br />
<strong>DRILL A HOLE IN THE WALL FOR THE</strong><br />
<strong>INTERCONNECTING PIPING, DRAIN, AND WIRING </strong><br />
Refrigerant Line Routing<br />
The refrigerant lines may be routed in any of the four directions. For maximum serviceability, it is recommended to have refrigerant line flare connections and the drain connections on the outside of the wall that the fan coil can be mounted on. If piping is going through the back, determine the pipe hole position using the mounting plate as a template. Drill pipe hole diameter per values given in figures 11 through 14. The outside pipe hole is 1/2−in. (13 mm) min. lower than the inside pipe hole, so it slants slightly downward.</p>
<h4>Step 4 – Prepare Refrigerant Piping</h4>
<p>The refrigerant piping is inside an insulating sleeve attached to the back of the unit. The installer must prepare the piping before passing it through the hole in the wall.</p>
<ol>
<li>Based on the position of the wall hole relative to the mounting plate, choose the side from which the piping exits the unit.</li>
<li>If the wall hole is behind the unit, keep the knock-out panel in place. If the wall hole is to the side of the indoor unit, remove the plastic knock-out panel from that side of the unit. This creates a slot through which your piping can exit the unit. Use needle-nose pliers if the plastic panel is too difficult to remove by hand.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-15.webp" /></li>
<li>If the existing connective piping is already embedded in the wall, proceed directly to “Step 5 – Connect the Drain Hose”. If there is no embedded piping, connect the indoor unit’s refrigerant piping to the connective piping that connects the indoor and outdoor units.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-16.webp" /></li>
</ol>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Refrigerant piping can exit the indoor unit from four different angles; left-hand side, right-hand side, left rear, right rear.</p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-3.webp" /> CAUTION</strong><br />
Be extremely careful not to dent or damage the piping while bending them away from the unit. Any dents in the piping will affect the unit’s performance.</p>
<h4>Step 5 – Connect the Drain Hose</h4>
<p>By default, the drain hose is attached to the left-hand side of the unit (when you are facing the back of the unit). However, it can also be attached to the right-hand side. To ensure proper drainage, attach the drain hose on the same side that your refrigerant piping exits the unit. Attach a drain hose extension (purchased separately) to the end of the drain hose.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wrap the connection point firmly with Teflon tape to ensure a good seal and to prevent leaks.</li>
<li>For the portion of the drain hose that remains indoors, wrap it with foam pipe insulation to prevent condensation.</li>
<li>Remove the air filter and pour a small amount of water into the drain pan to ensure that water flows smoothly from the unit.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Be sure to arrange the drain hose according to Figure 17.</p>
<p><strong>CORRECT</strong><br />
Ensure there are no kinks or dents in the drain hose to ensure proper drainage.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-CORRECT.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOT CORRECT</strong><br />
Ensure there are no kinks or dents in the drain hose to ensure proper drainage.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-NOT-CORRECT.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOT CORRECT</strong><br />
Kinks in the drain hose create water traps. <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-NOT-CORRECT-2.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>NOT CORRECT</strong><br />
Do not place the end of the drain hose in water or in containers that collect water. This prevents proper drainage.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-NOT-CORRECT-3.webp" /></p>
<p>Fig. 17 — Drain Hose Placement</p>
<p><strong>Plug the Unused Drain Hole</strong><br />
To prevent unwanted leaks, plug the unused drain hole with the rubber plug provided.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-18.webp" /></p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-3.webp" /> CAUTION</strong><br />
All wiring must comply with local and national electrical codes, regulations and must be installed by a licensed electrician. All electrical connections must be made according to the Electrical Connection Diagram located on the panels of the indoor and outdoor units.<br />
If there is a serious safety issue with the power supply, stop work immediately. Explain your reasoning to the client, and refuse to<br />
install the unit until the safety issue is properly resolved.<br />
Power voltage should be within 90-110% of rated voltage.<br />
The insufficient power supply can cause malfunction, electrical shock, or fire.<br />
If connecting power to fixed wiring, a surge protector and main power switch should be installed. If connecting power to fixed wiring, a switch or circuit breaker that disconnects all poles and has a contact separation of at least 1/8in (3mm) must be incorporated in the fixed wiring.<br />
The qualified technician must use an approved circuit breaker or switch. Only connect the unit to an individual branch circuit outlet. Do not connect another appliance to that outlet.<br />
Properly ground the air conditioner.<br />
Every wire must be firmly connected. Loose wiring can cause the terminal to overheat, resulting in product malfunction and possible fire. Do not let wires touch or rest against refrigerant tubing, the compressor, or any moving parts within the unit.<br />
To avoid getting an electric shock, never touch the electrical components soon after the power supply has been turned off. After turning off the power, always wait 10 minutes or more before you touch the electrical components.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-3.webp" /><strong>WARNING</strong><br />
Before performing any electrical or wiring work, turn off the main power to the system.</p>
<h4>Step 6 – Connect the Signal and Power Cables</h4>
<p>All wires must be sized per NEC (National Electrical Code) or CEC (Canadian Electrical Code) and local codes. See the rating plate and/ or the installation instructions of the compatible outdoor unit for MCA (minimum circuit amps) and MOCP (maximum overcurrent protection) to correctly size the wires and the disconnect fuse or breakers respectively.<br />
Recommended Connection Method for Power and  Communication Wiring:<br />
The main power is supplied to the outdoor unit. The field supplied 14/ 3 power/communication wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor unit consisting of four (4) wires and provides the power for the indoor unit. Two wires are high voltage AC power, one is communication wiring and the other is a ground wire. Wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit is polarity sensitive. The use of BX wire is NOT recommended. If installed in a high Electromagnetic field (EMF) area and communication issues exist, a 14/2 stranded shielded wire can be used to replace L2/N and (S) between the outdoor unit and indoor unit landing the shield onto the ground in the outdoor unit only.</p>
<ol>
<li>Open the front panel of the indoor unit.</li>
<li>Use a screwdriver to open the wire box cover on the right side of the unit. This reveals the terminal block.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-19.webp" /><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-3.webp" /> WARNING<br />
</strong>All wiring must be performed strictly in accordance with the wiring diagram located on the back of the indoor unit’s front panel.</li>
<li>Unscrew the cable clamp, below the terminal block, and place it to the side.</li>
<li>Facing the back of the unit, remove the plastic panel on the bottom left-hand side.</li>
<li>Feed the signal wire through this slot, from the back of the unit to the front.</li>
<li>Facing the front of the unit, connect the wire according to the indoor wiring diagram, connect the u-lug and firmly screw each wire to its corresponding terminal.<br />
<strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-3.webp" /> CAUTION</strong><br />
DO NOT MIX UP LIVE AND NULL WIRES<br />
This is dangerous and can cause the air conditioning unit to malfunction.</li>
<li>After checking to ensure every connection is secure, use the cable clamp to fasten the signal cable to the unit. Screw the cable clamp down tightly.</li>
<li>Replace the wire cover on the front of the unit, and the plastic panel on the back.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> The wiring connection process may differ slightly between units and regions.</li>
</ol>
<h4>Step 7 – Wrap Piping and Cables</h4>
<p>Before passing the piping, drain hose, and the signal cable through the wall hole, bundle them together to save space, protect them, and insulate them (not applicable in North America).</p>
<ol>
<li>Bundle the drain hose, refrigerant pipes, and signal cable.<br />
NOTE: Ensure the drain hose is at the bottom of the bundle. Placing the drain hose at the top of the bundle can cause the drain pan to overflow, which can lead to fire or water damage. <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-20.webp" /><br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> While bundling these items together, do not intertwine or cross the signal cable with any other wiring.</li>
<li>Using adhesive vinyl tape, attach the drain hose to the underside of the refrigerant pipes.</li>
<li>Using insulation tape, wrap the signal wire, refrigerant pipes, and drain hose tightly together. Double-check that all items are bundled.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> When wrapping the bundle, keep the ends of the piping unwrapped. Technicians may need to access them to test for leaks at the end of the installation process (refer to the Electrical Checks and Leak Checks section).</li>
</ol>
<h4>Step 8 – Mount the Indoor Unit</h4>
<p>If new connected piping to the outdoor unit has been installed, complete the following steps:</p>
<ol>
<li>If you have already passed the refrigerant piping through the hole in the wall, proceed to step 4.</li>
<li>Otherwise, double-check that the ends of the refrigerant pipes are sealed to prevent dirt or foreign materials from entering the pipes.</li>
<li>Slowly pass the wrapped bundle of refrigerant pipes, drain hose, and signal wire through the hole in the wall.</li>
<li>Hook the top of the indoor unit on the upper hook of the mounting plate.</li>
<li>Ensure the unit is hooked firmly on the mounting by applying slight pressure to the left and right-hand sides of the unit. The unit should not jiggle or shift.</li>
<li>Using even pressure, push down on the bottom half of the unit. Keep pushing down until the unit snaps onto the hooks along the bottom of the mounting plate.</li>
<li>Again, check that the unit is firmly mounted by applying slight pressure to the left and the right-hand sides of the unit.</li>
</ol>
<p>If refrigerant piping is already embedded in the wall, complete the  following steps:</p>
<ol>
<li>Hook the top of the indoor unit on the upper hook of the mounting plate.</li>
<li>Use a bracket or wedge to prop up the unit, allowing enough room to connect the refrigerant piping, signal cable, and the drain hose. <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-21.webp" /></li>
<li>Connect the drain hose and refrigerant piping.</li>
<li> Keep the pipe connection point exposed to perform the leak test (refer to Electrical Checks and Leak Checks section of this manual).</li>
<li>After the leak test, wrap the connection point with insulation tape.</li>
<li>Remove the bracket or wedge that is propping up the unit.</li>
<li>Using even pressure, push down on the bottom half of the unit. Keep pushing down until the unit snaps onto the hooks along the bottom of the mounting plate.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Keep in mind that the hooks on the mounting plate are smaller than the holes on the back of the unit. If you find that you do not have ample room to connect embedded pipes to the indoor unit, the unit can be adjusted left or right by about 1.18-1.95in (30-50mm), depending on the model.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-22.webp" /></p>
<h4>ELECTRICAL DATA</h4>
<p><strong>Table 6 — Electrical Data</strong></p>
<table width="1074">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="251"><strong>HIGH WALL</strong></td>
<td width="121"><strong>12K</strong></td>
<td width="120"><strong>9K</strong></td>
<td width="120"><strong>12K</strong></td>
<td width="115"><strong>18K</strong></td>
<td width="115"><strong>24K</strong></td>
<td width="116"><strong>30K</strong></td>
<td width="116"><strong>36K</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="251">INDOOR UNITS HP</td>
<td width="121">(115V)</td>
<td width="120">(208/230V)</td>
<td width="120">(208/230V)</td>
<td width="115">(208/230V)</td>
<td width="115">(208/230V)</td>
<td width="116">(208/230V)</td>
<td width="116">(208/230V)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="189">Running Current</td>
<td width="62">(A)</td>
<td width="121">0.467</td>
<td width="120">0.182</td>
<td width="120">0.182</td>
<td width="115">0.11</td>
<td width="115">0.364</td>
<td width="116">0.364</td>
<td width="116">0.364</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="189">Power Consumption</td>
<td width="62">(W)</td>
<td width="121">20</td>
<td width="120">20</td>
<td width="120">20</td>
<td width="115">30</td>
<td width="115">58</td>
<td width="116">58</td>
<td width="116">58</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="189">Power Factor</td>
<td width="62">(%)</td>
<td width="121">82.</td>
<td width="120">66.</td>
<td width="120">95.</td>
<td width="115">70.</td>
<td width="115">94</td>
<td width="116">97.</td>
<td width="116">99.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>CONNECTION DIAGRAMS</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-25.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>INSTALL ALL POWER, INTERCONNECTING WIRING, AND PIPING TO THE INDOOR UNIT</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Run interconnecting piping and wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor unit.</li>
<li>Run an interconnecting cable through the hole in the wall (outside to inside).</li>
<li>Lift the indoor unit into position and route piping and drain through the hole in the wall (inside to outside). Fit the interconnecting wiring into the backside of the indoor unit.</li>
<li>Put an upper claw at the back of the indoor unit on the upper hook of the mounting plate and move the indoor unit from side to side to ensure it is securely hooked. See “Mounting Plate Dimensions” and Fig. 9 — on page 9 for reference.</li>
<li>Open the indoor unit’s front cover and remove the field wiring terminal block cover.</li>
<li>Pull the interconnecting wire up from the back of the indoor unit and position close to the terminal block on the indoor unit.</li>
<li>Push the lower part of the indoor unit up on the wall, then move the indoor unit from side to side, up and down to ensure it is hooked securely (see Fig. 26).<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-26.webp" /></li>
<li>Connect the wiring from the outdoor unit per the connection diagram (see Fig. 23 and Fig. 24).</li>
<li>Replace the field wiring cover and close the indoor unit’s front cover.</li>
<li>Piping:</li>
</ol>
<p>a. Cut the pipe, with a pipe cutter, at 90 degrees (see Fig. 27).<br />
b. Remove the service connection (if provided with the unit).<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-27.webp" /></p>
<p>c. Remove all the burrs from the cut cross-section of the pipe avoiding any burrs inside the tubes.<br />
d. Remove the flare nuts attached to the indoor and outdoor units.<br />
e. Install the correct size flare nut onto the tubing and make the flare connection. Refer to Table 7 for the flare nut spaces.</p>
<p><strong>Table 7 — Flare Nut Spacing</strong></p>
<table border="0" width="192" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td class="xl65" rowspan="2" width="64" height="40">OUTER DIAM. (MM)</td>
<td class="xl65" colspan="2" width="128">A (MM)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20">MAX.</td>
<td>MIN.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20">Ø 1/4” (6.35)</td>
<td>0.05 (1.3)</td>
<td>0.03 (0.7)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20">Ø 3/8” (9.52)</td>
<td>0.06 (1.6)</td>
<td>0.04 (1.0)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20">Ø 1/2” (12.7)</td>
<td>0.07 (1.8)</td>
<td>0.04 (1.0)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20">Ø 5/8” (15.88)</td>
<td>0.09 (2.2)</td>
<td>0.08 (2.0)</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-28.webp" /></p>
<p>f. Apply a small amount of refrigerant oil to the flare connection on the tubing.<br />
g. Align the center of the pipes and/or service valve.</p>
<p><img fetchpriority="high" decoding="async" class="aligncenter ezlazyloaded" src="images/43.webp" alt="Carrier Ductless Split Unit System 40MAHB- Fig 29" width="377" height="177" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-29.jpg?ezimgfmt=rs:377x177/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /></p>
<p>h. Connect both the liquid and gas piping to the indoor unit<br />
i. Tighten the flare nut using a torque wrench as specified in Table 8.</p>
<table border="0" width="192" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong>Brass Flare  Size</strong></td>
<td width="64"><strong>Recommended Seating Torque</strong><br />
<strong>for Brass Flare Nuts</strong></td>
<td width="64"><strong>N-m</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20">Ø1/4</td>
<td>8-10 Ft. – Lbs.</td>
<td>10.8 to 13.6</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20">Ø3/8</td>
<td>15-18 Ft. – Lbs.</td>
<td>20.3 to 24.4</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20">Ø1/2</td>
<td>28-32 Ft. – Lbs.</td>
<td>38.0 to 43.4</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20">Ø5/8</td>
<td>38-42 Ft. – Lbs.</td>
<td>51.5 to 56.9</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20">Ø3/4</td>
<td>50-55 Ft. – Lbs.</td>
<td>68.0 to 74.6</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img decoding="async" class="aligncenter ezlazyloaded" src="images/44.webp" alt="Carrier Ductless Split Unit System 40MAHB- Fig 30" width="440" height="232" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-30.jpg?ezimgfmt=rs:440x232/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /></p>
<p><strong>FINAL TUBING CHECK</strong><br />
<strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> Ensure the certain factory tubing on the indoor unit has not shifted during shipment. Ensure the tubes are not rubbing against each other or any sheet metal. Pay close attention to feeder tubes and ensure the wire ties on the feeder tubes are secure and tight.<br />
<strong>DRAIN CONNECTIONS</strong><br />
Connect the drain line. The drain line must not have a trap anywhere in its length, must pitch downwards, and must be insulated up to the outside wall (see Fig. 31). By default, the drain hose is attached to the left-hand side of unit (when facing the back of the unit). However, it can also be attached to the right-hand side.<br />
a. To ensure proper drainage, attach the drain hose on the same side that your refrigerant piping exits the unit.<br />
b. Attach a drain hose extension (purchased separately) to the end of the drain hose.<br />
c. Wrap the connection point firmly with Teflon tape to ensure a good seal and to prevent leaks.<br />
d. For the portion of the drain hose that remains indoors, wrap it with foam pipe insulation to prevent condensation.<br />
e. Remove the air filter and pour a small amount of water into the drain pan to ensure that water flows from the unit smoothly.<br />
<strong>Plug the Unused Drain Hole</strong><br />
To prevent unwanted leaks, plug the unused drain hole with the rubber plug provided.<img decoding="async" class="aligncenter ezlazyloaded" src="images/45.webp" alt="Carrier Ductless Split Unit System 40MAHB- Fig 31" width="496" height="168" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-31.jpg?ezimgfmt=rs:496x168/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> For proper orientation of the refrigerant piping, electrical cable and drain lines, refer to Fig. 32.<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="aligncenter ezlazyloaded" src="images/46.webp" alt="Carrier Ductless Split Unit System 40MAHB- Fig 32" width="502" height="266" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-32.jpg?ezimgfmt=rs:502x266/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /></p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> The factory insulation provided with the product is sufficient, therefore adding additional insulation to the refrigerant pipes is NOT recommended. Additional insulation may keep the product from attaching flush to the wall.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> For applications where gravity cannot be used for drainage, a condensate pump accessory is available.<br />
Consult the condensate pump Installation Instructions for more information.</p>
<h4>WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL INSTALLATION</h4>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="aligncenter ezlazyloaded" src="images/47.webp" alt="Carrier Ductless Split Unit System 40MAHB- Fig 33" width="367" height="639" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-33.jpg?ezimgfmt=rs:367x639/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /></p>
<ol>
<li>Use the two screws supplied with the wireless remote control to attach the mounting bracket to the wall in a location selected by the customer and within operating range.</li>
<li>Install the batteries in the remote control.</li>
<li>Place the remote control into the remote control mounting bracket.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> For remote control operation, refer to the remote control’s owner’s manual.</p>
<h4>WIRED REMOTE CONTROL INSTALLATION</h4>
<p>The wired remote controller comes with the following items:</p>
<ul>
<li>A set of installation instructions and owner’s manuals</li>
<li>3 M4X20 Screws to mount on the wall</li>
<li>4 wall plugs to mount on the wall</li>
<li>2 M4X25 to mount on the switch box</li>
<li>2 plastic screw bars to fix on the switch box</li>
<li>1 set of batteries</li>
<li>1 set of connecting wires to connect to the indoor unit’s main board</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="aligncenter ezlazyloaded" src="images/48.webp" alt="Carrier Ductless Split Unit System 40MAHB- Fig 34" width="307" height="352" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-34.jpg?ezimgfmt=rs:307x352/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" />To connect the wired remote controller to the indoor units, connect to the 4-pin connector located on the display board.<br />
To connect the wired remote controller to the indoor units:</p>
<ol>
<li>Replace the display board with the shipped kit.</li>
<li>Install the adapter board (shipped with the kit).</li>
<li>Connect the adapter board to the new display board. Follow the instructions on the wired controller installation instructions manual for more details.</li>
<li>Connect the female Molex plug on the adapter board to the male Molex plug from the extension cable shipped with the kit.</li>
<li>Connect the extension cable to the wired controller</li>
</ol>
<p>For setup instructions, refer to the controller installation manual.</p>
<h4>START-UP</h4>
<p><strong>Test Operation</strong><br />
Perform a test operation after completing a gas leak and electrical safety check (see Fig. 35).<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="aligncenter ezlazyloaded" src="images/49.webp" alt="Carrier Ductless Split Unit System 40MAHB- Fig 35" width="371" height="285" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/Carrier-Ductless-Split-Unit-System-40MAHB-Fig-35.jpg?ezimgfmt=rs:371x285/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /></p>
<ol>
<li>Push ON/OFF on the remote control to begin testing.<br />
NOTE: A protection feature prevents the air conditioner from activating for approximately 3 to 4 minutes.</li>
<li>Push MODE, select COOLING, HEATING, FAN mode to check that all functions work correctly.</li>
<li>To run the test using the MANUAL button on the indoor unit:<br />
a. Open the front panel of the indoor unit;<br />
b. Push MANUAL once to energize the unit. The set conditions for manual operation are as follows:<br />
•Preset set point: 76°F (24°C)<br />
•Fan speed: AUTO<br />
•Discharge air direction: Pre-set position based on operation in the COOL or HEAT mode.</li>
<li>Set the MANUAL button to OFF (by pushing it twice again) after completing the test operation.</li>
</ol>
<h4>SYSTEM CHECKS</h4>
<ol>
<li>Conceal the tubing where possible.</li>
<li>Ensure the drain tube slopes downward along its entire length.</li>
<li>Ensure all tubing and connections are properly insulated.</li>
<li>Fasten tubes to the outside wall, when possible.</li>
<li>Seal the hole through which the cables and tubing pass.</li>
</ol>
<h4>INDOOR UNIT</h4>
<ol>
<li>Do all remote control buttons function properly?</li>
<li>Do the display panel lights work properly?</li>
<li>Does the air deflection louver function properly?</li>
<li>Does the drain work?</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Explain Following Items To Customer (with the aid of the Owner’s Manual):</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>How to turn the air conditioner on and off; selecting COOLING, HEATING and other operating modes; setting a desired<br />
temperature; set the timer to automatically start and stop the air conditioner operation; and all other features of the remote control and display panel.</li>
<li>How to remove and clean the air filter.</li>
<li>How to set the air deflection louver.</li>
<li>Explain care and maintenance.</li>
<li>Present the owner’s manual and installation instructions to the customer.</li>
</ol>
<h4>TROUBLESHOOTING</h4>
<p>For ease of service, the systems are equipped with diagnostic code display LEDs on both the indoor and outdoor units. The indoor diagnostic display is a combination of flashing LEDs on the display panel or the front of the unit.<br />
Some indoor units display error codes specifying failure modes in the outdoor units. If possible, always check the diagnostic codes displayed on the indoor unit first.<br />
The diagnostic codes displayed in the indoor and outdoor units are listed in Table 9.</p>
<p><strong>INDOOR UNIT DIAGNOSTIC GUIDES<br />
</strong><strong>Table 9 — Indoor Unit Diagnostic Codes</strong></p>
<table width="1049">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="237"><strong>OPERATION LAMP (TIMES)</strong></td>
<td width="122"><strong>TIMER LAMP</strong></td>
<td width="138"><strong>DISPLAY</strong></td>
<td width="552"><strong>ERROR INFORMATION</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*1</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EH 00/EH OA</td>
<td width="552">Indoor unit EEPROM parameter error</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*2</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EL 01</td>
<td width="552">Indoor/outdoor unit communication error</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*3</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EH 02</td>
<td width="552">Zero-crossing signal detection error</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*4</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EH 03</td>
<td width="552">Indoor fan operating outside of the normal range</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*5</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EC 51</td>
<td width="552">Outdoor unit EEPROM parameter error</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*5</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EC 52</td>
<td width="552">T3 is in an open circuit or has short-circuited</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*5</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EC 53</td>
<td width="552">T4 is in an open circuit or has short-circuited</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*5</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EC 54</td>
<td width="552">TP is in an open circuit or has short-circuited</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*5</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EC 56</td>
<td width="552">T2B is in an open circuit or has short-circuited</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*6</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EH 60</td>
<td width="552">T1 is in an open circuit or has short-circuited</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*6</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EH 61</td>
<td width="552">T2 is in an open circuit or has short-circuited</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*12</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EC 07</td>
<td width="552">Outdoor fan operating outside of the normal range</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*9</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EH Ob</td>
<td width="552">Indoor PCB/Display board communication error</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*8</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EL OC</td>
<td width="552">Refrigerant leakage detection</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*7</td>
<td width="122">FLASH</td>
<td width="138">PC 00</td>
<td width="552">IPM malfunction or IGBT OSCP</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*2</td>
<td width="122">FLASH</td>
<td width="138">PC 01</td>
<td width="552">Overvoltage or over low voltage protection</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*3</td>
<td width="122">FLASH</td>
<td width="138">PC 02</td>
<td width="552">Compressor or IPM high temp/pressure protection</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*5</td>
<td width="122">FLASH</td>
<td width="138">PC 04</td>
<td width="552">Inverter compressor drive error</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*1</td>
<td width="122">FLASH</td>
<td width="138">PC 08</td>
<td width="552">Current overload protection</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*6</td>
<td width="122">FLASH</td>
<td width="138">PC 40</td>
<td width="552">Communication error between the outdoor chip and compressor chip</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*7</td>
<td width="122">FLASH</td>
<td width="138">PC 03</td>
<td width="552">Low-pressure protection</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*1</td>
<td width="122">ON</td>
<td width="138">—</td>
<td width="552">Indoor unit mode conflict</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*9</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">EH b1</td>
<td width="552">Indoor board and Multi-function communication error</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="237">*11</td>
<td width="122">OFF</td>
<td width="138">FH Od</td>
<td width="552">Ionizer malfunction</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>O (on − light) X (off − light) ☆(flash)<br />
For additional diagnostic information, refer to the service manual.</p>
<p><strong>INDOOR UNIT FUNCTIONAL CODES</strong><br />
<strong>Table 10 — Indoor Unit Functional Codes</strong></p>
<table width="1042">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="252"><strong>DISPLAY</strong></td>
<td width="790"><strong>DESCRIPTION</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">dF</td>
<td width="790">Defrost</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">SC</td>
<td width="790">Self-clean</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">CL</td>
<td width="790">Filter cleaning reminder</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">CL</td>
<td width="790">Active Clean (*model dependent)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">nF</td>
<td width="790">Filter replacement reminder</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">FP</td>
<td width="790">Heating in room temperature under 8°C</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">FC</td>
<td width="790">Forced cooling</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">AP</td>
<td width="790">AP mode of WIFI connection</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">CP</td>
<td width="790">Remote switched off</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">LL</td>
<td width="790">Remote or Wire controller Lock</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">On</td>
<td width="790">Time On</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">Off</td>
<td width="790">Time Off</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">E-C-O</td>
<td width="790">ECO mode</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">SD</td>
<td width="790">Power abnormal detection</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">dl</td>
<td width="790">Receive DR1 signal</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">d2</td>
<td width="790">Receive DR2 signal</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">d3</td>
<td width="790">Receive DR3 signal</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">dE</td>
<td width="790">DR input error signal</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">FH OP</td>
<td width="790">AP mode is activated / no WIFI kit installed</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">FH Od</td>
<td width="790">See outdoor unit for Error Code information</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="252">EH/EC/EL/PC</td>
<td width="790">See outdoor unit for Error Code information</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>DUCTLESS START-UP CHECKLIST – Single Zone</h4>
<p><strong>Installation Data</strong></p>
<p>Site Address:__________________<br />
City:_______________________State:___________ Zip Code:__________<br />
Installing Contractor:______________ Contractor Contact #: ( ) _____-____<br />
Job Name:___________________ Start-up Date:___________________<br />
Distributor:______________________</p>
<p><strong>System Details</strong></p>
<table width="843">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64"><strong>UNITS</strong></td>
<td width="64"><strong>MODEL NO.</strong></td>
<td width="64"><strong>SERIAL NO.</strong></td>
<td width="64"><strong>CONTROLLER</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">OUTDOOR UNIT</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">INDOOR UNIT A</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Are the outdoor unit and indoor unit compatible?<br />
YES:______ NO:______</p>
<p>Wiring Electrical<br />
Wire Size and Type Used? AWG:__________ TYPE:_________<br />
Are there any breaks, splices, wire nuts or butt connectors between the outdoor unit and the indoor unit? Was the wiring from the outdoor unit port to the correct indoor unit verified?<br />
REMARKS:______________________<br />
YES:______ NO:______<br />
YES:______ NO:______<br />
<strong>Voltage Check</strong><br />
Wiring: Single Zone</p>
<table width="1058">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td rowspan="5" width="131">Outdoor Unit<br />
Disconnect</td>
<td width="100">1 (L1 ):GND</td>
<td width="102"></td>
<td rowspan="5" width="126">Outdoor Unit<br />
Terminal Block</td>
<td width="115">1 (L1):GND</td>
<td width="124"></td>
<td width="360">NOTES:</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="100">2(L2): GND</td>
<td width="102"></td>
<td width="115">2(L2): GND</td>
<td width="124"></td>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3" width="100">1 (L1): L2(2)</td>
<td rowspan="3" width="102"></td>
<td rowspan="3" width="115">1 (L1):2(L2)</td>
<td rowspan="3" width="124"></td>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="5" width="131">Indoor Unit<br />
Voltage Check<br />
@ Outdoor Unit</td>
<td width="100">1 (L1 ): GND</td>
<td width="102"></td>
<td rowspan="5" width="126">Indoor Unit<br />
Voltage Check<br />
@ Indoor Unit</td>
<td width="115">1 (L1): GND</td>
<td width="124"></td>
<td width="360">NOTES:</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="100">2(L2): GND</td>
<td width="102"></td>
<td width="115">2(L2): GND</td>
<td width="124"></td>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="100">1 (L1 ):2(L2)</td>
<td width="102"></td>
<td width="115">1 (L1 ):2(L2)</td>
<td width="124"></td>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="100">2(L2):3(S)</td>
<td rowspan="2" width="102"></td>
<td rowspan="2" width="115">2(L2):3(S)</td>
<td rowspan="2" width="124"></td>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table width="1058">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td rowspan="5" width="131">Outdoor Unit<br />
Disconnect</td>
<td width="100">1 (L1): GND</td>
<td width="102"></td>
<td rowspan="5" width="126">Outdoor Unit<br />
Terminal Block</td>
<td width="115">1 (L1 ): GND</td>
<td width="124"></td>
<td width="360">NOTES:</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="100">2(L2): GND</td>
<td width="102"></td>
<td width="115">2(L2): GND</td>
<td width="124"></td>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3" width="100">1 (L1 ): L2(2)</td>
<td rowspan="3" width="102"></td>
<td rowspan="3" width="115">1 (L1 ):2(L2)</td>
<td rowspan="3" width="124"></td>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="6" width="131">Indoor Unit<br />
Voltage Check<br />
@ Outdoor Unit</td>
<td width="100">1 (L1 ): GND</td>
<td width="102"></td>
<td rowspan="6" width="126">Indoor Unit<br />
Voltage Check<br />
@ Indoor Unit</td>
<td width="115">1 (L1 ): GND</td>
<td width="124"></td>
<td width="360">NOTES:</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="100">2(L2): GND</td>
<td width="102"></td>
<td width="115">2(L2): GND</td>
<td width="124"></td>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="100">1 (L1 ):2(L2)</td>
<td rowspan="2" width="102"></td>
<td rowspan="2" width="115">1 (L1 ):2(L2)</td>
<td rowspan="2" width="124"></td>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="360"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="100">2(L2):3(S)</td>
<td rowspan="2" width="102"></td>
<td rowspan="2" width="115">2(L2):3(S)</td>
<td rowspan="2" width="124"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="360"></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Ductless Start-Up Checklist (CONT)</strong><br />
<strong>Piping</strong><br />
<strong>Leak Check:</strong><br />
The system held 500 psig (max. 550psi) for a minimum of 30 minutes using dry nitrogen. YES:______ NO:______<br />
<strong>Evacuation Method:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Was the Triple Evacuation Method used as outlined in the installation manual? YES:______ NO:______</li>
<li>Was the Deep Vacuum Method used as outlined in the installation manual? YES:______ NO:_______</li>
<li>Did the System Hold 500 microns for 1 hour? YES:______ NO:_______</li>
<li>Does the line set to match the diameter of the evaporator connections? YES:______ NO:_______</li>
<li>For Conventional Fan Coils, does the line set to match the outdoor unit size? YES:______ NO:_______</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Single Zone Piping:</strong><br />
Has the liquid pipe length been measured and the additional charge calculated?<br />
Size:___________ Length:_________ Charge:____________</p>
<p>NOTES:………………….</p>
<table width="1060">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="99"><strong>PORT</strong></td>
<td colspan="2" width="194"><strong>LIQUID SIZE</strong></td>
<td colspan="2" width="195"><strong>SUCTION SIZE</strong></td>
<td width="97"><strong>LENGTH</strong></td>
<td width="98"><strong>CHARGE</strong></td>
<td width="377"><strong>NOTES:</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2" width="99">A</td>
<td rowspan="2" width="97"></td>
<td rowspan="2" width="97"></td>
<td rowspan="2" width="98"></td>
<td rowspan="2" width="97"></td>
<td rowspan="2" width="97"></td>
<td rowspan="2" width="98"></td>
<td width="377"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="377"></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Performance Check</strong><br />
For 1:1 Single Zone Systems: Adjust the set-point to create an operational call for the desired testing operation. Allow the system to run for a minimum of 10 min. and record the following details:<br />
(Operational data recorded on applicable heads with the wireless remote controller’s Point Check function)</p>
<table width="1008">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64">UNIT</td>
<td width="64">SET-POINT</td>
<td width="64">MODE</td>
<td width="64">T1</td>
<td width="64">T2</td>
<td width="64">T3</td>
<td width="64">T4</td>
<td width="64">Tb</td>
<td width="64">Tp</td>
<td width="64">Th</td>
<td width="64">LA/Lr</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>A</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>T1 – Ambient Space Temperature Sensor</li>
<li>T2 – IDU Coil Temperature Sensor</li>
<li>T3 – Outdoor Coil Temperature Sensor</li>
<li>T4 – Outdoor Ambient Temperature</li>
<li>Tb – Suction Line Temperature @PMV</li>
<li>Tp – Discharge Temperature Sensor</li>
<li>Th – IPM Board Temperature</li>
<li>LA/Lr – PMV Temperature</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Error Codes</strong><br />
Were there any error codes present at the start-up?<br />
YES:______ NO:______</p>
<table border="0" width="192" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td class="xl65" width="64" height="20">Indoor Unit Error Code:</td>
<td class="xl65" width="64"></td>
<td class="xl65" width="64">Notes:</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td class="xl65" height="20">Outdoor Unit Error Code:</td>
<td class="xl65"></td>
<td class="xl65"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td class="xl65" height="20">Wall Controller:</td>
<td class="xl65"></td>
<td class="xl65"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td class="xl65" height="20">24V Interface:</td>
<td class="xl65"></td>
<td class="xl65"></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Comments:</strong></p>
<p>Copyright 2020 Carrier Corp D 3300 Riverwood Parkway Atlanta GA, 30339 Edition Date: 12/20 Catalog No. 40MAHB-01SI<br />
The manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.<br />
Replaces: NEW</p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit">
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Carrier High Wall Ductless System 40MAQ Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/carrier/ductless-system-40maq/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 05 Jul 2023 10:13:39 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Carrier]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=142252</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[40MAQ High Wall Ductless System Sizes 09 to 36 Owner’s Manual NOTE TO EQUIPMENT OWNER: Please read this Owner’s Information Manual carefully before installing and using this appliance and keep this manual for future reference. For your convenience, please record the model and serial numbers of your new equipment in the spaces provided. This information, along with the installation data and dealer contact information, will be helpful should your system require maintenance or service. UNIT INFORMATION Model # _______________________________ Serial # ________________________________ INSTALLATION INFORMATION Date Installed ___________________________ DEALERSHIP CONTACT INFORMATION Company Name: ______________________ Address:_____________________________ Phone Number:________________________ Technician Name:______________________ Specifications subject to change without notice. A NOTE ABOUT SAFETY Any time you see this symbol in manuals, instructions and on the unit, be aware of the potential for personal injury. There are 3 levels of precaution: DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies hazards that could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices which could result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions that will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation. WARNING PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, AND / OR PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury, death, or property damage. Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, maintenance, or use can cause an explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause personal injury or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency, or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or service agency must use factory-authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product. Read and follow all instructions and warnings, including labels shipped with or attached to the unit before operating your new air conditioner. GENERAL The high wall fan coil unit provides quiet, maximum comfort. In addition to cooling and/or heating, the high wall fan coil unit matched with an outdoor condensing unit filters and dehumidifies the air in the room to provide maximum comfort. IMPORTANT: The high wall fan coil unit should be installed by authorized personnel only; using approved tubing and accessories. If technical assistance, service, or repair is needed, contact the installer. The high wall fan coil unit can be set up and operated from the remote control (provided). If the remote is misplaced, the system can be operated from the “Auto” setting on the unit. Operating Modes The high wall fan coil unit has five operating modes: FAN Only AUTO HEATING (heat pumps only) COOLING DEHUMIDIFICATION FAN Only In the FAN Only mode, the system filters and circulates the room air without changing room air temperature. AUTO In the AUTO mode, the system automatically cools or heats the room according to the user-selected set point. NOTE: AUTO mode is recommended for use on single zone applications ONLY. Using AUTO CHANGEOVER on multi-zone applications could set an indoor unit to STANDBY mode, indicated with two dashes (–) on the display, which will turn off the indoor unit until all the indoor units are in the same mode (COOLING or HEATING). HEATING is the system’s priority mode. Simultaneous HEATING and COOLING is not allowed. HEATING In the HEATING mode, the system heats and filters the room air. COOLING In the COOLING mode, the system cools, dries, and filters the room air. DEHUMIDIFICATION (DRY) In the DEHUMIDIFICATION mode, the system dries, filters, and slightly cools the room air temperature. This model prioritizes air dehumidification but it does not take the place of a dehumidifier. Wireless Remote Control The remote control transmits commands to set up and operate the system. The control has a window display panel that displays the current system status. The control can be secured to a surface when used with the mounting bracket provided. Wired Remote Control (Optional) Refer to the Wired Controller manual. 24V Interface (Optional) Allows the control of the Ductless System with a third-party thermostat. Smartphone Control (Optional) Capability to be controlled by a smartphone adding the Wi-Fi® Interface Kit KSAIF0301AAA (sold separately). Specifications are subject to change without notice. PART NAMES 1. Front Panel 2. Air Inlet 3. Display 4. Air Filter 5. Right-Left Airflow Grille 6. Up-Down Airflow louver 7. Interconnecting Tubing 8. Control and Power Wiring to Indoor Unit 9. Service Valves 10. Remote Control 11. Remote Control Bracket 12. Self-Tapping Screws INDOOR UNIT DISPLAY INDICATOR SELECTED TEMPERATURE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC CODES INDICATOR DEFROST INDICATOR Illuminates when the coil is warming up to prevent cold blow or when the unit goes into defrost mode. OPERATION INDICATOR This indicator flashes once per second after power is on and illuminates when the unit is in operation. TIMER INDICATOR Illuminates during TIMER operation Displays temperature, operation feature and error codes: for 3 seconds when: • TIMER ON is set • FRESH, SWING, TURBO, or SILENCE features are turned on for 3 seconds when: • TIMER OFF is set • FRESH, SWING, TURBO, or SILENCE features are turned off when defrosting when the unit is self-cleaning when 46°F(8°C) or 54°F(12°C) heating mode is turned on Fig. 2 — Display Panel WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL Before you begin using your new air conditioner, familiarize yourself with the remote control. , Turns indoor unit s LED display ON and OFF. If you are sensitive to light during sleep, you can press the LED button to turn off the LED display on the indoor unit. Press again to turn it back on. Fig. 3 — Remote Controller Function Buttons NOTE: New Remote Controller starting on production of week 41 year 2016 (serial number 4116V10001). For advanced functions, refer to the RG57F3(B)/BGEFU1 Wireless Remote Controller’s Service Manual. WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL LCD SCREEN INDICATORS Fig. 4 — Wireless Remote Display REMOTE CONTROL CAUTION EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage. Handle the control with care and avoid getting the control wet. IMPORTANT: The remote control can operate the unit from a distance of up to 26 ft. (8 m) as long as there are no obstructions. When the timer function is used, the remote control should be kept in the vicinity of the fan coil (within 26 ft. / 8 m). The remote control can perform the following basic functions: Turn the system ON and OFF Select the operating mode Adjust room air temperature set point and fan speed Adjust right-left airflow direction Refer to the “INDOOR UNIT DISPLAY INDICATOR” on page 3 for a detailed description of all the capabilities of the remote control. Battery Installation Two AAA 1.5v alkaline batteries (included) are required for remote control operation. To install or replace batteries: Slide the back cover of the control to open the battery compartment. Insert the batteries. Follow the polarity markings inside the battery compartment. Replace the battery compartment cover. NOTES: When replacing batteries, do not use old batteries or a different type of battery. This may cause the remote control to malfunction.  If the remote is not going to be used for several weeks, remove the batteries. Otherwise, battery leakage may damage the remote control. The average battery life under normal use is about 6 months. Replace the batteries when there is no audible beep from the indoor unit or if the Transmission Indicator fails to light. When batteries are removed, the remote control erases all programmed settings. The control must be reprogrammed after the insertion of new batteries. Remote Control Operation – Quick Start NOTE: When transmitting a command from the remote control to the unit, be sure to point the control toward the right side of the unit. The unit confirms receipt of a command by sounding an audible beep. Turn the unit on by pushing ON/OFF. NOTE: If there is a preference for °C rather than °F (default), press and hold the + and – temperature setpoint buttons together for approximately 3 seconds. Select the desired mode by pushing MODE Fig. 5 —Modes Select the temperature setpoint by pointing the control toward the unit and pressing the increase/decrease temperature set point buttons until the desired temperature appears on the screen. Press FAN to select the desired fan speed. NOTE: If the unit is operating in DRY or AUTO mode, the fan speed will be automatically set. Set the airflow direction. When the unit is turned on, the Up-Down airflow louvers default to the cooling or heating position. The user can adjust the horizontal Up-Down airflow louver position by pushing DIRECT or have continuous louver movement by pressing SWING. Manual Operation If the remote control is lost, damaged, or the batteries are exhausted, MANUAL can be used to run the unit. When MANUAL is pressed once, the AUTO mode takes effect (heat or cool). When this button is pressed twice, the system enters the TEST mode and runs for 30 minutes in the COOLING mode (it will run in the AUTO mode afterward). When pressed three times, the system turns OFF. Fig. 6 — Manual Button The set conditions of manual operation are as follows: • Preset set point: 76°F (24°C) • Fan speed: AUTO Discharge air direction: Pre-set position based on operation in COOL or HEAT mode. REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS Pressing ON/OFF When the air conditioner is not in operation, the remote control displays the last setpoint and mode. • Press ON/OFF to start the unit. – The unit starts in the last operating mode and set point. The ON/OFF indicator appears. • Press ON/OFF to stop the unit. – All the indicator lights on the unit go out, and the remote control displays the setpoint and mode. NOTE: If ON/OFF is pressed too soon after a stop, the compressor will not start for 3 to 4 minutes due to the inherent protection against frequent compressor cycling. The unit only emits an audible beep when the signals are received correctly. Selecting an Operating Mode Use OPERATING MODE to select one of the available modes. Fig. 7 — Operating Modes Setting the Room Temperature SetPoint Press the increased temperature set point and decrease buttons to raise or lower the temperature. The unit confirms the signal receipt with a beep and the value of the set temperature appears on the display and changes accordingly. The temperature can be set between 62°F (17°C) and 86°F (30°C) in increments of 1°F or 1°C. NOTE: In the COOLING mode, if the temperature selected is higher than the room temperature, the unit will not start. The same applies for the HEATING mode if the selected temperature is lower than the room temperature. Selecting the Fan Speed Fig. 8 — Fan Speeds 1. Press FAN to select the fan speed. NOTE: When the unit is on, the fan runs continuously in cooling or heating. When in heating, there might be situations where the fan will slow down or shut off to prevent a cold blow. Select the Up-Down Louver Position To optimize comfort, the Up-Down louver operates in a preset range. Fig. 9 — Louver Position The up-down airflow louver can be adjusted by pressing DIRECT on the remote control and can be set to be stationary or moving continuously pressing SWING. The up-down louver position is stored in the settings, however, it is deactivated when the TURBO or MANUAL settings are set, or when a power interruption takes place. Air Direction Press DIRECT repeatedly to choose one of the up-down louver positions. Every time this button is pushed, the specific louver swings by 6 degrees. In the COOLING, DRY, and FAN ONLY modes, the louver swings in the cooling range. In the HEATING mode, the louver swings in the heating range. NOTE: Always use the remote control to adjust the up-down louver position, otherwise abnormal operation may occur. If the up-down louver is manually adjusted out of its range, power the unit off and then back on again. Auto Swing For automatic up-down louver swing, push SWING. Select Right-Left Direction of the Louver The right-left louvers can be adjusted manually to direct the airflow to achieve optimal comfort in the space. Fig. 11 — Deflector Rod Timer Function TIMER ON (to start the unit) and TIMER OFF (to stop the unit) can be used separately or together. Timer ON Only This function allows the unit to start automatically at the set time. The TIMER ON function can be set while the unit is on or off. UNIT ON 1. Press TIMER ON to initiate the auto-on time sequence. The set time is displayed in the remote control display. Every time TIMER ON is pressed, the time increases by 30 minutes, up to 10h. It increases by 60 minutes, afterward, until the time setting reaches 24h. When the TIMER ON is set, the TIMER light on the unit illuminates. The unit continues to run at the set time. TIMER ON UNIT OFF 1. Set the timer described in the UNIT ON section. The unit starts at the set time. 2. Adjust the TIMER ON settings to 0.0 to cancel this option. Timer OFF Only This function allows the unit to stop automatically at the set time. The time can be set while the unit is on or while it is off. UNIT ON 1. Press TIMER OFF to initiate the auto-off time sequence. The set time appears on the remote control display. Every time TIMER OFF is pressed, the time increases by 30 minutes, up to 10h. It increases by 60 minutes, afterward, until the time settings reach 24h. When the TIMER OFF is set, the timer light on the unit illuminates and the unit turns off automatically at the set time. TIMER OFF UNIT OFF 1. Set the TIMER OFF as described in the UNIT ON section. The TIMER display on the unit illuminates and the unit remains off. ON/OFF 2. Adjust the TIMER ON settings to 0.0 to cancel this option. Timer ON and Timer OFF Use both functions to program the unit to turn on and shut off at specified times. UNIT ON 1. Set TIME OFF as previously described. 2. Set TIME ON as previously described. The unit turns off automatically at the set TIME OFF and turns on at the set TIME ON. UNIT OFF 1. Set TIMER ON as previously described. 2. Set TIMER OFF as previously described. The unit starts automatically at the set TIME ON and turns off at the set TIME OFF. SLEEP Mode SLEEP mode is used to conserve energy and can be used when the unit is in the COOL, HEAT, or AUTO mode only. Fig. 12 — Sleep Mode COOLING Mode  1. Push SLEEP. After 1 hour the setpoint raises by 1.8°F (1°C). After another hour, the setpoint raises by another 1.8°F (1°C) and the fan runs in a low speed. The unit shuts off 5 hours after setting the SLEEP mode. SLEEP mode cancels if either MODE, TEMP, FAN, TIMER, or ON/OFF on the remote control is pressed. HEATING Mode Same as the COOLING mode however the setpoints are lowered by 1.8°F (1°C). TURBO Mode Use TURBO to cool or heat the room rapidly. 1. Press TURBO. An audible “beep” is heard if the indoor unit supports this function. The fan runs at super high speed. The TURBO mode terminates automatically 20 minutes after selecting TURBO. 2. To cancel TURBO, select TURBO mode again. When the TURBO mode terminates, the unit reverts to the original setting. SELF CLEAN Mode Press CLEAN to activate or deactivate the self-cleaning function. Under this function, the air conditioner automatically cleans and dries the evaporator. The cleaning cycle takes 30 minutes, after which the unit turns off automatically. The unit operates in the following sequence: •FAN ONLY mode at LOW fan speed •HEATING operation with LOW fan speed •FAN ONLY operation •Stop Operation •Turn off To cancel the CLEAN mode, press CLEAN. The operation ends and the unit turns off. This function can be activated only in the COOL or DRY modes. Before selecting this function, it is recommended to run the air conditioner under COOLING 1. Set TIMER ON as previously described. 2. Set TIMER OFF as previously described. The unit starts automatically at the set TIME ON and turns off at the set TIME OFF. operation for about half an hour. Once the SELF CLEAN function is activated, all timer settings will cancel. The indoor unit displays SC. NOTE: The SELF CLEAN mode is available ONLY on the single zone models. FOLLOW ME Mode Press FOLLOW to activate or deactivate this function. Under this setting, the temperature that appears in the remote control is the actual temperature at its location. The remote control sends this signal to the air conditioner every 3 minutes. This function is not available in the DRY and FAN modes. This function can  also be deactivated if: No, FOLLOW ME signal is received by the unit for a continuous 7 min Users adjust the operation mode Users turn off the unit Users turn off the FOLLOW ME function NOTE: If FOLLOW ME is used with the wireless remote controller, make sure that the remote’s IR sender is within line of sight of the IR receiver of the unit and is within the maximum range of 25 feet of the indoor unit. If FOLLOW ME is de-activated by pressing MODE, OFF, or FOLLOW ME on the remote, the icon on the remote will turn off. Freeze Protection (FP) Mode Press FP for approximately 2 seconds to activate or deactivate the freeze protection mode (heating set back). The indoor unit displays FP. NOTE: This function is only available in the heating mode. Under this function, the unit operates at high fan speed and the coil temperature automatically sets to 46°F (8°C). This mode can also be deactivated by pressing ON/OFF, SLEEP, MODE, FAN, or either TEMP. SILENCE Mode Press SLC to activate or deactivate the SILENCE Mode. Under this function, the compressor operates at low frequency and the indoor unit produces a faint breeze, which reduces the noise to the lowest level. Due to low the frequency operation of the compressor, it may result in insufficient cooling and heating capacity. LED Light Press LED to turn the display light on and off. Resetting the Remote Control If the batteries in the remote control are removed, the current settings will be canceled and the control returns to the initial settings and enters the STANDBY mode. Push ON/OFF to activate. Time Delay If ON/OFF is pressed too soon after a stop, the compressor will not start for 3 to 4 minutes due to the inherent protection against frequent compressor cycling. The unit only emits an audible beep when the signals are received correctly. Heating Features If the unit is in HEATING mode, there is a delay when the fan starts. The fan starts only after the coil is warmed up to prevent a cold blow. Auto Defrost Operation In the HEATING mode, if the outdoor coil is frosted, the indoor fan and outdoor fan turn off while the system removes the frost on the outdoor coil. The system automatically reverts to normal operation when frost is removed from the outdoor unit. Auto Start If the power fails while the unit is operating, the unit stores the operating condition, and it will start operation automatically under those conditions when the power is restored. Refrigerant Leakage Detection The indoor unit displays EC and the indication lamps continue flashing when it detects a refrigerant leak. CLEANING, MAINTENANCE, AND TROUBLESHOOTING CAUTION ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury or death. Always turn off power to the system before performing any cleaning or maintenance to the system. Turn off the outdoor disconnect switch located near the outdoor unit. Be sure to disconnect the indoor unit if on a separate switch. CAUTION EQUIPMENT DAMAGE/OPERATION HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper unit operation. Operating the system with dirty air filters may damage the indoor unit and could cause reduced cooling performance, intermittent system operation, frost build-up on indoor coil or blown fuses. Periodic Maintenance Periodic maintenance is recommended to ensure the proper operation of the unit. Recommended maintenance intervals may vary depending on the installation environment, e.g., dusty zones, etc. Refer to Table 1 on page 12. CAUTION CUT HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury. The coil fins are very sharp. Use caution when cleaning. Always wear safety protection. Cleaning the Coil Clean the coil at the beginning of each cooling season, or when necessary. Use a vacuum cleaner or a long-bristle brush to avoid damage to the coil fins. Cleaning the Air Filters Remove and clean the air filters once a month. A clogged air conditioner can reduce the cooling efficiency of your unit, and can also be bad for your health. NOTE: If air filters show signs of excessive wear or are torn, they must be replaced. Contact your local dealer for replacement filters. Lift the front panel of the indoor unit.&#124; Fig. 13 — Lift the front panel Press the tab on the end of the filter to loosen the buckle, lift it up, then pull it towards you. Pull the filter out. Fig. 14 — Grab the filter Fig. 15 — Pull the filter out If your filter has a small air freshening filter, un-clip it from the larger filter. Clean the air freshening filter with a hand-held vacuum. Fig. 16 — Air freshening filter Clean the large air filter with warm, soapy water. Be sure to use a mild detergent. Fig. 17 — Clean the filter Rinse the filter with fresh water, then shake off excess water. Dry it in a cool, dry place, and refrain from exposing it to direct sunlight. When dry, re-clip the air freshening filter to the larger filter, then slide it back into the indoor unit. Fig. 18 — Replace the filter Close the front panel of the indoor unit. CAUTION EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage. When cleaning the front panel, do not use water hotter than 105°F (40.6°C) and do not pour water onto the fan coil. Do not use abrasive or petroleum-based cleaners as they may damage the front panel. Cleaning the Indoor Unit Front Panel To clean the front panel on the indoor unit, wipe the outside with a soft, dry cloth. Pre-Season Inspection After long periods of non-use, or before periods of frequent use, perform the following steps: Fig. 19 — Pre-Season Inspection Preparing for Extended Shutdown Period Clean the filters and reposition them in the unit. Operate the unit in FAN ONLY mode for 12 hours to dry all internal parts. Turn the main power supply off and remove batteries from the remote control. Fig. 20 — Extended Shutdown Period Steps System Operation Recommendations The items outlined in the following list help to assure proper system operation: Replace both remote control batteries at the same time. Point the remote control toward the unit display panel when transmitting a command. Keep doors and windows closed while unit is operating. Contact an authorized service representative if a problem arises that cannot be easily resolved. Do not perform cleaning or maintenance activities while the unit is on. Keep the display panel on the unit away from direct sunlight and heat as this may interfere with remote control transmissions. Do not block air intakes and outlets on the indoor or outdoor units. Energy Saving Recommendations The following recommendations will add greater efficiency to the ductless system: Select a comfortable thermostat setting and leave it at chosen setting. Avoid continually raising and lowering the setting. Keep the filter clean. Frequent cleaning may be necessary depending on indoor air quality. Use drapes, curtains, or shades to keep direct sunlight from heating the room on very hot days. Limit the unit’s run time by using the TIMER function. Do not obstruct the air intake on the front panel. Turn on the air conditioning unit before the indoor air becomes too uncomfortable. TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to Table 2 before contacting your local dealer. Table 1 — Periodic Maintenance INDOOR UNIT EVERY MONTH EVERY 6MONTHS EVERY YEAR Clean Air Filter* • • Replace Carbon Filter • • Change Remote Control Batteries OUTDOOR UNIT EVERY MONTH EVERY 6 MONTHS EVERY YEAR Clean Outdoor Coil from Outside • Clean Outdoor Coil from Inside • Blow Air Over Electric Parts • Check Electric Connection Tightening • Clean Fan Wheels • Check Fan Tightening • Clean Drain Pants • * Increase frequency in dusty zones. † Maintenance to be carried out by qualified service personnel. Refer to the Installation Manual Table 2 — Troubleshooting PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION Unit/System Does Not Work · The circuit breaker has tripped or a fuse has blown. · Diagnostic lights illuminate.* · Voltage is too low. · Reset the circuit breaker or replace the fuse with the specified replacement fuse. · Call your service representative. · Call your service representative. Cooling is Not Working Properly · The filter is blocked by dust. · Temperature is not set properly. · A window or door is open. · The outdoor unit is obstructed. ·  The fan speed is too low. · The operation mode is in Fan instead of Cool. · Clean the air filter. · Check the temperature and reset if necessary. · Close the window or door. · Remove the obstruction. · Change the fan speed selection. · Change the operating mode to Cool or reset the unit. Heating is Not Working Properly · The filter is blocked with dust. · Temperature is set too low. · A window or door is open. · The outdoor unit is obstructed. · Check the temperature and reset if necessary. · Close the window or door. · Remove the obstruction. Unit Stops During Operation ·The Off timer is not operating correctly. ·Diagnostic lights illuminate.* · Restart the operating mode. · Call your service representative. * Diagnostic lights are a combination of lights that will illuminate in the display area on the unit. They are a combination of the lights you see during normal operation. Copyright 2020 Carrier Corp. D 3300 Riverwood Parkway Atlanta GA, 30339 Edition Date: 08/20 Catalog No. OM-40MAQ-07 Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue or change at any time, specifications, or designs without notice and without incurring obligations. Replaces: OM-40MAQ-06 [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/carrier/ductless-system-40maq/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>40MAQ</strong><br />
<strong>High Wall Ductless System</strong><br />
<strong>Sizes 09 to 36</strong></p>
<p><strong>Owner’s Manual</strong></p>
<p><strong>NOTE TO EQUIPMENT OWNER:</strong></p>
<p>Please read this Owner’s Information Manual carefully before installing and using this appliance and keep this manual for future reference.<br />
For your convenience, please record the model and serial numbers of your new equipment in the spaces provided. This information, along with the installation data and dealer contact information, will be helpful should your system require maintenance or service.</p>
<table border="0" width="128" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20">UNIT INFORMATION<br />
Model # _______________________________<br />
Serial # ________________________________<br />
INSTALLATION INFORMATION<br />
Date Installed ___________________________</td>
<td width="64">DEALERSHIP CONTACT INFORMATION<br />
Company Name: ______________________<br />
Address:_____________________________<br />
Phone Number:________________________<br />
Technician Name:______________________</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Specifications subject to change without notice.</p>
<h4>A NOTE ABOUT SAFETY</h4>
<p>Any time you see this<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Screenshot_8-329.webp" /> symbol in manuals, instructions and on the unit, be aware of the potential for personal injury. <strong>There are 3 levels of precaution:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li><strong>DANGER</strong> identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death.</li>
<li><strong>WARNING</strong> signifies hazards that could result in personal injury or death.</li>
<li><strong>CAUTION</strong> is used to identify unsafe practices which could result in minor personal injury or product and property damage.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong> is used to highlight suggestions that will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Westinghouse-WR43FX2019-43-Full-HD-Smart-Roku-TV-WARNING-2.webp" /><strong>WARNING</strong></p>
<p><strong>PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, AND / OR PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this warning could result in personal injury, death, or property damage.</p>
<p>Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service, maintenance, or use can cause an explosion, fire, electrical shock, or other conditions which may cause<br />
personal injury or property damage. Consult a qualified installer, service agency, or your distributor or branch for information or assistance. The qualified installer or service agency must use factory-authorized kits or accessories when modifying this product.</p>
<p>Read and follow all instructions and warnings, including labels shipped with or attached to the unit before operating your new air conditioner.</p>
<h4>GENERAL</h4>
<p>The high wall fan coil unit provides quiet, maximum comfort. In addition to cooling and/or heating, the high wall fan coil unit matched with an outdoor condensing unit filters and dehumidifies the air in the room to provide maximum comfort.</p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT</strong>: The high wall fan coil unit should be installed by authorized personnel only; using approved tubing and accessories. If technical assistance, service, or repair is needed, contact the installer. The high wall fan coil unit can be set up and operated from the remote control (provided). <strong>If the remote is misplaced, the system can be operated from the “Auto” setting on the unit</strong>.</p>
<p><strong>Operating Modes</strong><br />
The high wall fan coil unit has five operating modes:</p>
<ul>
<li>FAN Only</li>
<li>AUTO</li>
<li>HEATING (heat pumps only)</li>
<li>COOLING</li>
<li>DEHUMIDIFICATION</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>FAN Only</strong><br />
In the FAN Only mode, the system filters and circulates the room air without changing room air temperature.</p>
<p><strong>AUTO</strong><br />
In the AUTO mode, the system automatically cools or heats the room according to the user-selected set point.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> AUTO mode is recommended for use on single zone applications ONLY. Using AUTO CHANGEOVER on multi-zone applications could set an indoor unit to STANDBY mode, indicated with two dashes (–) on the display, which will turn off the indoor unit until all the indoor units are in the same mode (COOLING or</p>
<p><strong>HEATING). HEATING</strong> is the system’s priority mode. Simultaneous<br />
HEATING and COOLING is not allowed.</p>
<p><strong>HEATING</strong><br />
In the <strong>HEATING</strong> mode, the system heats and filters the room air.</p>
<p><strong>COOLING</strong><br />
In the <strong>COOLING</strong> mode, the system cools, dries, and filters the room air.</p>
<p><strong>DEHUMIDIFICATION (DRY)</strong><br />
In the DEHUMIDIFICATION mode, the system dries, filters, and slightly cools the room air temperature. This model prioritizes air dehumidification but it does not take the place of a dehumidifier.</p>
<p><strong>Wireless Remote Control</strong><br />
The remote control transmits commands to set up and operate the system. The control has a window display panel that displays the current system status. The control can be secured to a surface when used with the mounting bracket provided.</p>
<p><strong>Wired Remote Control (Optional)</strong><br />
Refer to the Wired Controller manual.</p>
<p><strong>24V Interface (Optional)</strong><br />
Allows the control of the Ductless System with a third-party thermostat.</p>
<p><strong>Smartphone Control (Optional)</strong><br />
Capability to be controlled by a smartphone adding the Wi-Fi® Interface Kit KSAIF0301AAA (sold separately).</p>
<p>Specifications are subject to change without notice.</p>
<h4>PART NAMES</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ.webp" /></p>
<table border="0" width="128" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20">1. Front Panel<br />
2. Air Inlet<br />
3. Display<br />
4. Air Filter<br />
5. Right-Left Airflow Grille<br />
6. Up-Down Airflow louver</td>
<td width="64">7. Interconnecting Tubing<br />
8. Control and Power Wiring<br />
to Indoor Unit<br />
9. Service Valves<br />
10. Remote Control<br />
11. Remote Control Bracket<br />
12. Self-Tapping Screws</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>INDOOR UNIT DISPLAY INDICATOR</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-syambol.webp" /></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-1.webp" /><strong>SELECTED TEMPERATURE</strong> SELF-DIAGNOSTIC CODES INDICATOR<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-2.webp" /><strong>DEFROST INDICATOR</strong><br />
Illuminates when the coil is warming up to prevent cold blow or when the unit goes into defrost mode.</p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-3.webp" /> OPERATION INDICATOR</strong><br />
This indicator flashes once per second after power is on and illuminates when the unit is in operation.</p>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-4.webp" /> TIMER INDICATOR</strong><br />
Illuminates during TIMER operation</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-5.webp" /> Displays temperature, operation feature and error codes:</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-6.webp" /> for 3 seconds when:<br />
• TIMER ON is set<br />
• FRESH, SWING, TURBO, or SILENCE features are turned on</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-7.webp" />for 3 seconds when:<br />
• TIMER OFF is set<br />
• FRESH, SWING, TURBO, or SILENCE features are turned off</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-8.webp" /> when defrosting<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-9.webp" /> when the unit is self-cleaning</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-10.webp" /> when 46°F(8°C) or 54°F(12°C) heating mode is turned on</p>
<p><strong>Fig. 2 — Display Panel</strong></p>
<h4>WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL</h4>
<p>Before you begin using your new air conditioner, familiarize yourself with the remote control.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-WIRELESS-REMOTE-CONTROL.webp" /></p>
<p>, Turns indoor unit s LED display ON and OFF. If you are sensitive to light during sleep, you can press the LED button to turn off the LED display on the indoor unit. Press again to turn it back on.</p>
<p><strong>Fig. 3 — Remote Controller Function Buttons</strong></p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: New Remote Controller starting on production of week 41 year 2016 (serial number 4116V10001). For advanced functions, refer to the RG57F3(B)/BGEFU1 Wireless Remote Controller’s Service Manual.</p>
<h4>WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL LCD SCREEN INDICATORS</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Wireless-Remote-Display.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 4 — Wireless Remote Display</strong></p>
<h4>REMOTE CONTROL</h4>
<p><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Screenshot_8-329.webp" /> CAUTION<br />
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD<br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage. Handle the control with care and avoid getting the control wet.</strong></p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT</strong>: The remote control can operate the unit from a distance of up to 26 ft. (8 m) as long as there are no obstructions. When the timer function is used, the remote control should be kept in the vicinity of the fan coil (within 26 ft. / 8 m).<br />
The remote control can perform the following basic functions:</p>
<ul>
<li>Turn the system ON and OFF</li>
<li>Select the operating mode</li>
<li>Adjust room air temperature set point and fan speed</li>
<li>Adjust right-left airflow direction</li>
</ul>
<p>Refer to the “INDOOR UNIT DISPLAY INDICATOR” on page 3 for a detailed description of all the capabilities of the remote control.</p>
<p><strong>Battery Installation</strong><br />
Two AAA 1.5v alkaline batteries (included) are required for remote control operation.</p>
<p><strong>To install or replace batteries:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Slide the back cover of the control to open the battery compartment.</li>
<li>Insert the batteries. Follow the polarity markings inside the battery compartment.</li>
<li>Replace the battery compartment cover.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>NOTES:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>When replacing batteries, do not use old batteries or a different type of battery. This may cause the remote control to malfunction.</li>
<li> If the remote is not going to be used for several weeks, remove the batteries. Otherwise, battery leakage may damage the remote control.</li>
<li>The average battery life under normal use is about 6 months.</li>
<li>Replace the batteries when there is no audible beep from the indoor unit or if the Transmission Indicator fails to light.</li>
<li>When batteries are removed, the remote control erases all programmed settings. The control must be reprogrammed after the insertion of new batteries.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Remote Control Operation – Quick Start</strong></p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> When transmitting a command from the remote control to the unit, be sure to point the control toward the right side of the unit. The unit confirms receipt of a command by sounding an audible beep.</p>
<ol>
<li>Turn the unit on by pushing ON/OFF.<br />
<strong>NOTE:</strong> If there is a preference for °C rather than °F (default), press and hold the + and – temperature setpoint buttons together for approximately 3 seconds.</li>
<li>Select the desired mode by pushing MODE<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Remote-Control-Operation-Quick-Start.webp" /><strong>Fig. 5 —Modes</strong></li>
<li>Select the temperature setpoint by pointing the control toward the unit and pressing the increase/decrease temperature set point buttons until the desired temperature appears on the screen.</li>
<li>Press FAN to select the desired fan speed.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: If the unit is operating in DRY or AUTO mode, the fan speed will be automatically set.</li>
<li>Set the airflow direction. When the unit is turned on, the Up-Down airflow louvers default to the cooling or heating position. The user can adjust the horizontal Up-Down airflow louver position by pushing DIRECT or have continuous louver movement by pressing SWING.</li>
</ol>
<h4>Manual Operation</h4>
<p>If the remote control is lost, damaged, or the batteries are exhausted, MANUAL can be used to run the unit. When MANUAL is pressed once, the AUTO mode takes effect (heat or cool). When this button is pressed twice, the system enters the TEST mode and runs for 30 minutes in the COOLING mode (it will run in the AUTO mode afterward). When pressed three times, the system turns OFF.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Manual-Operation.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 6 — Manual Button</strong></p>
<p>The set conditions of manual operation are as follows:<br />
• <strong>Preset set point: 76°F (24°C)</strong><br />
<strong>• Fan speed: AUTO</strong><br />
<strong>Discharge air direction</strong>: Pre-set position based on operation in<br />
<strong>COOL</strong> or <strong>HEAT</strong> mode.</p>
<h4>REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS</h4>
<p><strong>Pressing ON/OFF</strong></p>
<p>When the air conditioner is not in operation, the remote control displays the last setpoint and mode.<br />
• <strong>Press ON/OFF to start the unit.</strong><br />
– The unit starts in the last operating mode and set point. The ON/OFF indicator appears.<br />
• <strong>Press ON/OFF to stop the unit.</strong><br />
– All the indicator lights on the unit go out, and the remote control displays the setpoint and mode.<br />
<strong>NOTE</strong>: If ON/OFF is pressed too soon after a stop, the compressor will not start for 3 to 4 minutes due to the inherent protection against frequent compressor cycling. The unit only emits an audible beep when the signals are received correctly.<br />
<strong>Selecting an Operating Mode</strong><br />
Use <strong>OPERATING MODE</strong> to select one of the available modes.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Operating-Modes.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 7 — Operating Modes</strong></p>
<p><strong>Setting the Room Temperature SetPoint</strong></p>
<p>Press the increased temperature set point <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-1-2.webp" /> and decrease<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-2-2.webp" /> buttons to raise or lower the temperature. The unit confirms the signal receipt with a beep and the value of the set temperature appears on the display and changes accordingly. The temperature can be set between 62°F (17°C) and 86°F (30°C) in increments of 1°F or 1°C.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: In the COOLING mode, if the temperature selected is higher than the room temperature, the unit will not start. The same applies for the HEATING mode if the selected temperature is lower than the room temperature.</p>
<p><strong>Selecting the Fan Speed</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Selecting-the-Fan-Speed.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 8 — Fan Speeds</strong></p>
<p>1. Press FAN to select the fan speed.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: When the unit is on, the fan runs continuously in cooling or heating. When in heating, there might be situations where the fan will slow down or shut off to prevent a cold blow.</p>
<p><strong>Select the Up-Down Louver Position</strong><br />
To optimize comfort, the Up-Down louver operates in a preset range.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Select-the-Up-Down-Louver-Position.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 9 — Louver Position</strong></p>
<p>The up-down airflow louver can be adjusted by pressing <strong>DIRECT</strong> on the remote control and can be set to be stationary or moving continuously pressing <strong>SWING</strong>. The up-down louver position is stored in the settings, however, it is deactivated when the <strong>TURBO</strong> or <strong>MANUAL</strong> settings are set, or when a power interruption takes place.</p>
<p><strong>Air Direction</strong><br />
Press <strong>DIRECT</strong> repeatedly to choose one of the up-down louver positions. Every time this button is pushed, the specific louver swings by 6 degrees.</p>
<p>In the <strong>COOLING, DRY</strong>, and <strong>FAN ONLY</strong> modes, the louver swings in the cooling range. In the <strong>HEATING</strong> mode, the louver swings in the heating range.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: Always use the remote control to adjust the up-down louver position, otherwise abnormal operation may occur. If the up-down louver is manually adjusted out of its range, power the unit off and then back on again.</p>
<p><strong>Auto Swing</strong><br />
For automatic up-down louver swing, push SWING.</p>
<p><strong>Select Right-Left Direction of the Louver</strong><br />
The right-left louvers can be adjusted manually to direct the airflow to achieve optimal comfort in the space.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Deflector-Rod.webp" /><strong>Fig. 11 — Deflector Rod</strong></p>
<p><strong>Timer Function</strong></p>
<p><strong>TIMER ON</strong> (to start the unit) and <strong>TIMER OFF</strong> (to stop the unit) can be used separately or together.</p>
<p><strong>Timer ON Only <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-1-1.webp" /></strong></p>
<p>This function allows the unit to start automatically at the set time. The<br />
<strong>TIMER ON</strong> function can be set while the unit is on or off.</p>
<p><strong>UNIT ON <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-2-3.webp" /></strong></p>
<p>1. Press <strong>TIMER ON</strong> <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-1-1-1.webp" /> to initiate the auto-on time sequence. The set time is displayed in the remote control display. Every time <strong>TIMER ON</strong> is pressed, the time increases by 30 minutes, up to 10h. It increases by 60 minutes, afterward, until the time setting reaches 24h. When the <strong>TIMER ON</strong> is set, the <strong>TIMER</strong> light on the unit illuminates. The unit continues to run at the set time. <strong>TIMER ON</strong></p>
<p><strong>UNIT OFF <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-2-3-1.webp" /></strong></p>
<p>1. Set the timer described in the UNIT ON section. The unit starts at the set time.<br />
2. Adjust the TIMER ON settings to 0.0 to cancel this option.</p>
<p><strong>Timer OFF Only <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-3-1.webp" /></strong><br />
This function allows the unit to stop automatically at the set time. The time can be set while the unit is on or while it is off.</p>
<p><strong>UNIT ON <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-2-3-2.webp" /></strong></p>
<p>1. Press <strong>TIMER OFF <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-3-1-1.webp" /></strong> to initiate the auto-off time sequence. The set time appears on the remote control display. Every time <strong>TIMER OFF</strong> is pressed, the time increases by 30 minutes, up to 10h. It increases by 60 minutes, afterward, until the time settings reach 24h. When the <strong>TIMER OFF</strong> is set, the timer light on the unit illuminates and the unit turns off automatically at the set time. <strong>TIMER OFF</strong></p>
<p><strong>UNIT OFF <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-2-3-3.webp" /></strong><br />
1. Set the <strong>TIMER OFF</strong> as described in the <strong>UNIT ON</strong> section. The <strong>TIMER</strong> display on the unit illuminates and the unit remains off. <strong>ON/OFF</strong><br />
2. Adjust the <strong>TIMER ON</strong> settings to 0.0 to cancel this option.</p>
<p><strong>Timer ON and Timer OFF <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-1-1-2.webp" /><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-3-1.webp" /></strong></p>
<p>Use both functions to program the unit to turn on and shut off at specified times.</p>
<p><strong>UNIT ON <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-2-3-4.webp" /></strong></p>
<p>1. Set <strong>TIME OFF</strong> as previously described.<br />
2. Set <strong>TIME ON</strong> as previously described. The unit turns off automatically at the set <strong>TIME OFF</strong> and turns on at the set <strong>TIME ON</strong>.</p>
<p><strong>UNIT OFF <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-2-3-4.webp" /></strong><br />
1. Set <strong>TIMER ON</strong> as previously described.<br />
2. Set <strong>TIMER OFF</strong> as previously described. The unit starts automatically at the set <strong>TIME ON</strong> and turns off at the set <strong>TIME OFF</strong>.</p>
<p><strong>SLEEP Mode <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-11.webp" /></strong></p>
<p><strong>SLEEP</strong> mode is used to conserve energy and can be used when the unit is in the<strong> COOL, HEAT</strong>, or <strong>AUTO</strong> mode only.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-SLEEP-Mode.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 12 — Sleep Mode</strong></p>
<p><strong>COOLING Mode  <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-12.webp" /></strong></p>
<p>1. Push <strong>SLEEP</strong>. After 1 hour the setpoint raises by 1.8°F (1°C). After another hour, the setpoint raises by another 1.8°F (1°C) and the fan runs in a low speed. The unit shuts off 5 hours after setting the <strong>SLEEP</strong> mode. <strong>SLEEP</strong> mode cancels if either <strong>MODE, TEMP, FAN, TIMER</strong>, or <strong>ON/OFF</strong> on the remote control is pressed.</p>
<p><strong>HEATING Mode <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-4-1.webp" /></strong></p>
<p>Same as the <strong>COOLING</strong> mode however the setpoints are lowered by 1.8°F (1°C).</p>
<p><strong>TURBO Mode <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-5-1.webp" /></strong></p>
<p>Use <strong>TURBO</strong> to cool or heat the room rapidly.</p>
<p>1. Press <strong>TURBO.</strong> An audible “beep” is heard if the indoor unit supports this function. The fan runs at super high speed. The <strong>TURBO</strong> mode terminates automatically 20 minutes after selecting <strong>TURBO.</strong><br />
2. To cancel <strong>TURBO</strong>, select <strong>TURBO</strong> mode again. When the <strong>TURBO</strong> mode terminates, the unit reverts to the original setting.</p>
<p><strong>SELF CLEAN Mode <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-6-1.webp" /></strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press CLEAN to activate or deactivate the self-cleaning function. Under this function, the air conditioner automatically cleans and dries the evaporator. The cleaning cycle takes 30 minutes, after which the unit turns off automatically. The unit operates in the following sequence:<br />
•<strong>FAN ONLY</strong> mode at <strong>LOW fan speed</strong><br />
•<strong>HEATING</strong> operation with <strong>LOW fan speed</strong><br />
•<strong>FAN ONLY</strong> operation<br />
•Stop Operation<br />
•Turn off</li>
<li>To cancel the <strong>CLEAN</strong> mode, press <strong>CLEAN</strong>. The operation ends and the unit turns off. This function can be activated only in the <strong>COOL</strong> or <strong>DRY</strong> modes. Before selecting this function, it is recommended to run the air conditioner under <strong>COOLING</strong><br />
1. Set TIMER ON as previously described.<br />
2. Set TIMER OFF as previously described. The unit starts automatically at the set TIME ON and turns off at the set TIME OFF. operation for about half an hour. Once the SELF CLEAN function is activated, all timer settings will cancel. The indoor unit displays SC.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: The <strong>SELF CLEAN</strong> mode is available <strong>ONLY</strong> on the single zone models.</p>
<p><strong>FOLLOW ME Mode <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-7-1.webp" /></strong></p>
<p>Press <strong>FOLLOW</strong> to activate or deactivate this function. Under this setting, the temperature that appears in the remote control is the actual temperature at its location. The remote control sends this signal to the air conditioner every 3 minutes. This function is not available in the DRY and FAN modes. This function can  also be deactivated if:</p>
<ol>
<li>No, <strong>FOLLOW ME</strong> signal is received by the unit for a continuous 7 min</li>
<li>Users adjust the operation mode</li>
<li>Users turn off the unit</li>
<li>Users turn off the <strong>FOLLOW ME</strong> function</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: If <strong>FOLLOW ME</strong> is used with the wireless remote controller, make sure that the remote’s IR sender is within line of sight of the IR receiver of the unit and is within the maximum range of 25 feet of the indoor unit. If <strong>FOLLOW ME</strong> is de-activated by pressing <strong>MODE</strong>, OFF, or <strong>FOLLOW ME</strong> on the remote, the icon on the remote will turn off.</p>
<p><strong>Freeze Protection (FP) Mode <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-8-1.webp" /></strong></p>
<p>Press <strong>FP</strong> for approximately 2 seconds to activate or deactivate the freeze protection mode (heating set back). The indoor unit displays FP.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE: This function is only available in the heating mode.</strong></p>
<p>Under this function, the unit operates at high fan speed and the coil temperature automatically sets to 46°F (8°C). This mode can also be deactivated by pressing <strong>ON/OFF, SLEEP, MODE, FAN</strong>, or either <strong>TEMP</strong>.</p>
<p><strong>SILENCE Mode <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-9-1.webp" /></strong></p>
<p>Press SLC to activate or deactivate the SILENCE Mode. Under this function, the compressor operates at low frequency and the indoor unit produces a faint breeze, which reduces the noise to the lowest level. Due to low the frequency operation of the compressor, it may result in insufficient cooling and heating capacity.</p>
<p><strong>LED Light <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-icon-10-1.webp" /></strong><br />
Press LED to turn the display light on and off.</p>
<p><strong>Resetting the Remote Control</strong></p>
<p>If the batteries in the remote control are removed, the current settings will be canceled and the control returns to the initial settings and enters the STANDBY mode. Push ON/OFF to activate.</p>
<p><strong>Time Delay</strong><br />
If ON/OFF is pressed too soon after a stop, the compressor will not start for 3 to 4 minutes due to the inherent protection against frequent<br />
compressor cycling. The unit only emits an audible beep when the signals are received correctly.</p>
<p><strong>Heating Features</strong><br />
If the unit is in HEATING mode, there is a delay when the fan starts.<br />
The fan starts only after the coil is warmed up to prevent a cold blow.</p>
<p><strong>Auto Defrost Operation</strong><br />
In the HEATING mode, if the outdoor coil is frosted, the indoor fan and outdoor fan turn off while the system removes the frost on the<br />
outdoor coil. The system automatically reverts to normal operation when frost is removed from the outdoor unit.</p>
<p><strong>Auto Start</strong><br />
If the power fails while the unit is operating, the unit stores the operating condition, and it will start operation automatically under those conditions when the power is restored.</p>
<p><strong>Refrigerant Leakage Detection</strong><br />
The indoor unit displays EC and the indication lamps continue flashing when it detects a refrigerant leak.</p>
<h4>CLEANING, MAINTENANCE, AND TROUBLESHOOTING</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Screenshot_8-329.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury or death. Always turn off power to the system before performing any cleaning or maintenance to the system. Turn off the outdoor disconnect switch located near the outdoor unit. Be sure to disconnect the indoor unit if on a separate switch.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Screenshot_8-329.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>EQUIPMENT DAMAGE/OPERATION HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage or improper unit operation.<br />
Operating the system with dirty air filters may damage the indoor unit and could cause reduced cooling performance, intermittent system operation,<br />
frost build-up on indoor coil or blown fuses.</p>
<p><strong>Periodic Maintenance</strong><br />
Periodic maintenance is recommended to ensure the proper operation of the unit. Recommended maintenance intervals may vary depending on<br />
the installation environment, e.g., dusty zones, etc. Refer to Table 1 on page 12.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Screenshot_8-329.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>CUT HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in personal injury. The coil fins are very sharp. Use caution when cleaning.<br />
Always wear safety protection.</p>
<p><strong>Cleaning the Coil</strong><br />
Clean the coil at the beginning of each cooling season, or when necessary. Use a vacuum cleaner or a long-bristle brush to avoid damage to the coil fins.</p>
<p><strong>Cleaning the Air Filters</strong><br />
Remove and clean the air filters once a month. A clogged air conditioner can reduce the cooling efficiency of your unit, and can also be bad for your health.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE</strong>: If air filters show signs of excessive wear or are torn, they must be replaced. Contact your local dealer for replacement filters.</p>
<ol>
<li>Lift the front panel of the indoor unit.|<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Lift-the-front-panel.webp" /><strong>Fig. 13 — Lift the front panel</strong></li>
<li>Press the tab on the end of the filter to loosen the buckle, lift it up, then pull it towards you.</li>
<li>Pull the filter out.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Grab-the-filter.webp" /><strong>Fig. 14 — Grab the filter<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Pull-the-filter-out.webp" />Fig. 15 — Pull the filter out</strong></li>
<li>If your filter has a small air freshening filter, un-clip it from the larger filter. Clean the air freshening filter with a hand-held vacuum.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Air-freshening-filter.webp" /><strong>Fig. 16 — Air freshening filter</strong></li>
<li>Clean the large air filter with warm, soapy water. Be sure to use a mild detergent.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Clean-the-filter.webp" /><strong>Fig. 17 — Clean the filter</strong></li>
<li>Rinse the filter with fresh water, then shake off excess water.</li>
<li>Dry it in a cool, dry place, and refrain from exposing it to direct sunlight.</li>
<li>When dry, re-clip the air freshening filter to the larger filter, then slide it back into the indoor unit.<br />
<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Replace-the-filter.webp" /><strong>Fig. 18 — Replace the filter</strong></li>
<li>Close the front panel of the indoor unit.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Screenshot_8-329.webp" /><strong>CAUTION</strong></p>
<p><strong>EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARD</strong><br />
Failure to follow this caution may result in equipment damage. When cleaning the front panel, do not use water hotter than 105°F (40.6°C) and do not pour water onto the fan coil. Do not use abrasive or petroleum-based cleaners as they may damage the front panel.</p>
<h4><strong>Cleaning the Indoor Unit Front Panel</strong></h4>
<p>To clean the front panel on the indoor unit, wipe the outside with a soft, dry cloth.</p>
<p><strong>Pre-Season Inspection</strong><br />
After long periods of non-use, or before periods of frequent use, perform the following steps:</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Pre-Season-Inspection.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Fig. 19 — Pre-Season Inspection</strong></p>
<p><strong>Preparing for Extended Shutdown Period</strong></p>
<p>Clean the filters and reposition them in the unit. Operate the unit in <strong>FAN ONLY</strong> mode for 12 hours to dry all internal parts. Turn the main power supply off and remove batteries from the remote control.<br />
<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="attachment-post-thumbnail aligncenter ezlazyloaded" src="images/56.webp" sizes="auto, " srcset="" alt="Carrier High Wall Ductless System 40MAQ - Extended Shutdown Period Steps" width="573" height="562" data-ezsrcset="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2021/10/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Extended-Shutdown-Period-Steps.jpg?ezimgfmt=ng:webp/ngcb1 458w,https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2021/10/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Extended-Shutdown-Period-Steps-300x294.jpg?ezimgfmt=ng:webp/ngcb1 300w" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2021/10/Carrier-High-Wall-Ductless-System-40MAQ-Extended-Shutdown-Period-Steps.jpg?ezimgfmt=rs:573x562/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /><strong>Fig. 20 — Extended Shutdown Period Steps</strong></p>
<h4>System Operation Recommendations</h4>
<p>The items outlined in the following list help to assure proper system operation:</p>
<ul>
<li>Replace both remote control batteries at the same time.</li>
<li>Point the remote control toward the unit display panel when transmitting a command.</li>
<li>Keep doors and windows closed while unit is operating.</li>
<li>Contact an authorized service representative if a problem arises that cannot be easily resolved.</li>
<li>Do not perform cleaning or maintenance activities while the unit is on.</li>
<li>Keep the display panel on the unit away from direct sunlight and heat as this may interfere with remote control transmissions.</li>
<li>Do not block air intakes and outlets on the indoor or outdoor units.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Energy Saving Recommendations</strong><br />
The following recommendations will add greater efficiency to the ductless system:</p>
<ul>
<li>Select a comfortable thermostat setting and leave it at chosen setting. Avoid continually raising and lowering the setting.</li>
<li>Keep the filter clean. Frequent cleaning may be necessary depending on indoor air quality.</li>
<li>Use drapes, curtains, or shades to keep direct sunlight from heating the room on very hot days.</li>
<li>Limit the unit’s run time by using the TIMER function.</li>
<li>Do not obstruct the air intake on the front panel.</li>
<li>Turn on the air conditioning unit before the indoor air becomes too uncomfortable.</li>
</ul>
<h4>TROUBLESHOOTING</h4>
<p>Refer to Table 2 before contacting your local dealer.</p>
<p><strong>Table 1 — Periodic Maintenance</strong></p>
<table width="1274">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="661"><strong>INDOOR UNIT</strong></td>
<td width="189"><strong>EVERY MONTH</strong></td>
<td width="190"><strong>EVERY 6MONTHS</strong></td>
<td width="190"><strong>EVERY YEAR</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="661">Clean Air Filter*</td>
<td width="189">•</td>
<td width="190"></td>
<td width="190">•</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="661">Replace Carbon Filter</td>
<td width="189">•</td>
<td width="190">•</td>
<td width="190"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="661">Change Remote Control Batteries</td>
<td width="189"></td>
<td width="190"></td>
<td width="190"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="661"><strong>OUTDOOR UNIT</strong></td>
<td width="189">EVERY MONTH</td>
<td width="190">EVERY 6 MONTHS</td>
<td width="190">EVERY YEAR</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="661">Clean Outdoor Coil from Outside</td>
<td width="189"></td>
<td width="190">•</td>
<td width="190"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="661">Clean Outdoor Coil from Inside</td>
<td width="189"></td>
<td width="190"></td>
<td width="190">•</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="661">Blow Air Over Electric Parts</td>
<td width="189"></td>
<td width="190"></td>
<td width="190">•</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="661">Check Electric Connection Tightening</td>
<td width="189"></td>
<td width="190"></td>
<td width="190">•</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="661">Clean Fan Wheels</td>
<td width="189"></td>
<td width="190"></td>
<td width="190">•</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="661">Check Fan Tightening</td>
<td width="189"></td>
<td width="190"></td>
<td width="190">•</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="661">Clean Drain Pants</td>
<td width="189"></td>
<td width="190"></td>
<td width="190">•</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>* Increase frequency in dusty zones.<br />
† Maintenance to be carried out by qualified service personnel. Refer to the Installation Manual</p>
<p><strong>Table 2 — Troubleshooting</strong></p>
<table width="1253">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="291"><strong>PROBLEM</strong></td>
<td width="435"><strong>POSSIBLE CAUSE</strong></td>
<td width="506"><strong>SOLUTION</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="291">Unit/System Does Not Work</td>
<td width="435">· The circuit breaker has tripped or a fuse has blown.<br />
· Diagnostic lights illuminate.*<br />
· Voltage is too low.</td>
<td width="506">· Reset the circuit breaker or replace the fuse with the specified replacement fuse.<br />
· Call your service representative.<br />
· Call your service representative.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="291">Cooling is Not Working Properly</td>
<td width="435">· The filter is blocked by dust.<br />
· Temperature is not set properly.<br />
· A window or door is open.<br />
· The outdoor unit is obstructed.<br />
·  The fan speed is too low.<br />
· The operation mode is in Fan instead of Cool.</td>
<td width="506">· Clean the air filter.<br />
· Check the temperature and reset if necessary.<br />
· Close the window or door.<br />
· Remove the obstruction.<br />
· Change the fan speed selection.<br />
· Change the operating mode to Cool or reset the unit.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="291">Heating is Not Working Properly</td>
<td width="435">· The filter is blocked with dust.<br />
· Temperature is set too low.<br />
· A window or door is open.<br />
· The outdoor unit is obstructed.</td>
<td width="506">· Check the temperature and reset if necessary.<br />
· Close the window or door.<br />
· Remove the obstruction.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="291">Unit Stops During Operation</td>
<td width="435">·The Off timer is not operating correctly.<br />
·Diagnostic lights illuminate.*</td>
<td width="506">· Restart the operating mode.<br />
· Call your service representative.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>* Diagnostic lights are a combination of lights that will illuminate in the display area on the unit. They are a combination of the lights you see during normal operation.<br />
Copyright 2020 Carrier Corp. D 3300 Riverwood Parkway Atlanta GA, 30339 Edition Date: 08/20<br />
Catalog No. OM-40MAQ-07<br />
Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue or change at any time, specifications, or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.<br />
Replaces: OM-40MAQ-06</p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit">
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Carrier 42TSAA010 Air Conditioner Manual</title>
		<link>https://usemanuals.com/carrier/42tsaa010-air-conditioner/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[ItsManual]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Tue, 11 Jul 2023 09:19:40 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Carrier]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://usemanuals.com/?p=154931</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[OWNER’S MANUAL PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY Read the precautions in this manual carefully before operating the unit. This appliance is filled with R32. ■ Warning indications on the air conditioner unit Warning indication Description CAUTION BURST HAZARD Open the service valves before the operation, otherwise, there might be a burst. CAUTION BURST HAZARD Open the service valves before the operation, otherwise, there might be a burst. Keep this manual where the operator can easily find it. Read the precautions in this manual carefully before operating the unit. This appliance is intended to be used by an expert or trained users in shops, in light industry, on farms, or for commercial use by laypersons. The precautions described herein are classified as DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION. They both contain important information regarding safety. Be sure to observe all precautions without fail. DANGER Do not install, repair, open, or remove the cover. It may expose you to dangerous voltages. Ask the dealer or the specialist to do this. Turning off the power supply will not prevent potential electric shock. The appliance shall be installed in accordance with national wiring regulations. Means for disconnection from the supply having a contact separation of at least 3 mm in all poles must be incorporated into the fixed wiring. The appliance must be stored in a room without continuously operating ignition sources (for example, open flames, an operating gas appliance, or an operating electric heater). In order to avoid fire, explosion or injury, do not operate the unit when harmful gases (e.g. flammable or corrosive) are detected near the unit. WARNING Do not expose your body directly to cool or warm air for a long time. Do not insert your finger or any article into the air inlet/outlet. When an abnormality (burning smell, etc.) occurs, stop the air conditioner and disconnect the power supply or turn off the breaker. This appliance is not intended for use by people (including children) with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge unless they have been given supervision or instruction concerning the use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety.  The air conditioner must be installed, maintained, repaired, and removed by a qualified installer or qualified service person. When any of these jobs is to be done, ask a qualified installer or qualified service person to do them for you Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance. Do not use any refrigerant different from the one specified (R32) for complement or replacement. Otherwise, abnormally high pressure may be generated in the refrigeration cycle, which may result in a failure or explosion of the product or an injury to your body. Do not use means to accelerate the defrosting process or to clean, other than those recommended by the manufacturer. The appliance shall be stored in a room without continuously operating ignition sources (for example open flames, an operating gas appliance, or an operating electric heater). Be aware that refrigerants may not contain an odor. Do not pierce or burn as the appliance is pressurized. Do not expose the appliance to heat, flames, sparks, or other sources of ignition. Else, it may explode and cause injury or death. Appliance and pipe-work shall be installed, operated, and stored in a room with a floor area larger than Amin m 2 . How to get Amin m 2: Amin= (M / (2.5 x  .22759 x h0 ))² 2 M is the refrigerant charge amount in the appliance in kg, h0 is the installation height of the appliance in m: 0.6 m for floor standing/1.8 m for wall  ounted/1.0 m for window mounted/2.2 m for ceiling mounted. (For these units recommend installation height of 2.5 m) CAUTION Do not wash the unit with water. It may cause an electric shock. Do not use this air conditioner for other purposes such as preserving food, breeding animals, etc. Do not step or put anything on the indoor/outdoor unit. It may cause an injury or damage to the unit. Do not touch the aluminum fin because it may cause an injury. Before cleaning the unit, turn off the main switch or the circuit breaker. When the unit won’t be used for a long time, turn off the main switch or the circuit breaker. It is recommended that maintenance be performed by a specialist when the unit has been operated for a long time. The manufacturer shall not assume any liability for the damage caused by not observing the description of this manual. INDOOR UNIT DISPLAY TIMER (White) OPERATION (White) Display brightness can be adjusted, follow the procedure on !. PREPARATION BEFORE USE Preparing Filters Open the air inlet grille and remove the air filters. Attach the filters. (see detail in the Installation Manual). Loading Batteries (when using wireless operation.) Remove the slide cover. Insert 2 new batteries (AAA type) following the (+) and (–) positions. Remote Control Reset Remove the batteries. Press. Insert the batteries. AIRFLOW DIRECTION 1 Press: Move the louver in the desired vertical direction. 2 Press: Swing the air automatically and press again to stop. 3 For horizontal direction, adjust manually. Note: Do not move the louver manually by others. The louver may automate positioning by some operation mode. REMOTE CONTROL Infrared signal emitter Start/Stop button Mode select button () Temperature button () Fan speed button () Swing louver button () Set louver button () Off timer button () High power button () Economy button () Clear button (CLEAR) Check button (CHECK) AUTOMATIC OPERATION To automatically select cooling or fan-only operation Press: Select Auto A. Press : Set the desired temperature. Min. 17°C, Max. 30°C Press : Select AUTO, LOW LOW+ MED MED+ or HIGH. COOLING / FAN ONLY OPERATION Press: Select Cool or Fan only Press : Set the desired temperature. Min. 17°C, Max. 30°C Fan Only: No temperature indication Press : Select AUTO, LOW LOW+ MED MED+ or HIGH. DRY OPERATION For dehumidification, moderate cooling performance is controlled automatically. 1. Press : Select Dry. 2. Press : Set the desired temperature. Min. 17°C, Max. 30°C Note: Dry mode fan speed is set to Auto only. Hi POWER OPERATION To automatically control the room temperature to save energy (except in DRY and FAN ONLY mode) Press: Start and stop the operation. Note: Cooling operation; the set temperature will increase automatically 1 degree/ hour for 2 hours (maximum 2 degrees increase). TIMER OPERATION Set the timer when the air conditioner is operating. Setting the OFF timer 1 Press for entering OFF timer setting. 2 Press for select desired OFF timer. (0.5 – 12 hrs) 3 Pressfor set OFF timer. 4 Press again to cancel the OFF timer. DISPLAY LAMP BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT To decrease the display lamp brightness or turn it off. Press and hold for 3 seconds until brightness level ( or ) is shown on the remote control LCD then release the button. Press Rise or Decrease to adjust brightness in 4 levels Remote control LCD Operation display Brightness The lamp illuminates full brightness. 100% The lamp illuminates at 50% brightness. 50% The lamp illuminates at 50% brightness and the operation lamp is turned off. 50% All lamps are turned off. All turned off In the example of and, the lamp illuminates for 5 seconds before going off. TEMPORARY OPERATION In case of the misplaced or discharged remote control Pressing the RESET button, the unit can start or stop without using the remote control. Operation mode is set on AUTOMATIC  operation, the preset temperature is 24°C and fan operation is automatic speed. AUTO-RESTART FUNCTION SETTING This product is designed so that, after a power failure, it can restart automatically in the same operating mode as before the power failure. Information The product is shipped with the Auto Restart function in the ON position. Turn it OFF if this function is not required. How to turn OFF the Auto Restart Function Press and hold the [OPERATION] button on the indoor unit for 3 seconds (3 beep sounds but the OPERATION lamp does not blink). How to turn ON the Auto Restart Function Press and hold the [OPERATION] button on the indoor unit for 3 seconds (3 beep sounds and OPERATION lamp blink 5 times/sec for 5 seconds). Note: In case of ON timer or OFF timer is set, AUTO RESTART OPERATION does not activate. SELF CLEANING OPERATION (COOL AND DRY OPERATION ONLY) To protect against bad smells caused by the humidity in the indoor unit. 1. If the  button is pressed once during “Cool” or “Dry” mode,  the fan will continue to run for another 30 minutes, then it will turn off automatically. This will reduce the moisture in the indoor unit. 2. To stop the unit immediately, press the more 2 times within 30 seconds. MAINTENANCE Firstly, turn off the circuit breaker. Indoor Unit and Remote Control Clean the indoor unit and the remote control with a wet cloth when needed.  No benzine, thinner, polishing powder, or chemically-treated duster. Air filters Clean every 2 weeks. Open the air inlet grille. Remove the air filters. Vacuum or wash and then dry them. Reinstall the air filters and close the air inlet grille. OPERATION AND PERFORMANCE Three-minute protection feature: To prevent the unit from being activated for 3 minutes when suddenly restarted or switched to ON. Some minor cracking sounds may occur when the unit operating. This is normal because the cracking sound may be caused by the expansion/ contraction of plastic. Air conditioner operating conditions Temp./ Operation Outdoor Temperature Room Temperature Cooling 21°C ~ 43°C 21°C ~ 32°C Dry 19°C ~ 43°C 17°C ~ 32°C TROUBLESHOOTING (CHECKPOINT) The unit does not operate. Cooling or Heating is abnormally low. ● The power main switch is turned off. ● The circuit breaker is activated to cut off the power supply. ● Stoppage of electric current. ● ON timer is set. ● The filters are blocked with dust. ● The temperature has been set improperly. ● The windows or doors are opened. ● The air inlet or outlet of the outdoor unit is blocked. ● The fan speed is too low. ● The operation mode is FAN or DRY. ● POWER SELECTION function is set at 75% or 50% (This function depends on the remote controller). REMOTE CONTROL A-B SELECTION To separate use of remote control for each indoor unit in case of 2 air conditioner is installed nearly. Remote Control B Setup. Press the RESET button on the indoor unit to turn the air conditioner ON. Point the remote control at the indoor unit. Push and hold the button on the Remote Control by the tip of the pencil. “00” will be shown on the display. (Picture 1) Press during pushing.  “B” will show on the display and “00” will disappear and the air conditioner will turn OFF. The Remote Control B is memorized. (Picture 2) Note: Repeat the above step to reset Remote Control to be A. Remote Control A has no “A” display. The default setting of Remote Control from the factory is A. AIR CONDITIONER (SPLIT TYPE) For general public use Indoor unit 42TSAA010, 013, 018, 025 Outdoor unit 38TSAA010, 013, 018, 025 [...]<p><a class="btn btn-secondary understrap-read-more-link" href="https://usemanuals.com/carrier/42tsaa010-air-conditioner/">Read More...</a></p>]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>OWNER’S MANUAL</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner.webp" /></p>
<h4>PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY</h4>
<table width="1372">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="60"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/read-this-guide-2.webp" /></strong></td>
<td width="252">Read the precautions in this<br />
manual carefully before operating<br />
the unit.</td>
<td width="66"><strong><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="attachment-post-thumbnail aligncenter ezlazyloaded" src="images/8.webp" sizes="auto, " srcset="" alt="Flammable Warning Icon" width="64" height="57" data-ezsrcset="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2021/11/03-120.jpg?ezimgfmt=ng:webp/ngcb1 310w,https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2021/11/03-120-300x265.jpg?ezimgfmt=ng:webp/ngcb1 300w" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2021/11/03-120.jpg?ezimgfmt=rs:42x37/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /></strong></td>
<td width="246">This appliance is filled with R32.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>■ Warning indications on the air conditioner unit</p>
<table border="0" width="128" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong>Warning indication</strong></td>
<td width="64"><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-16.webp" />CAUTION</strong><br />
<strong>BURST HAZARD</strong><br />
Open the service valves before the operation, otherwise, there might be a burst.</td>
<td><strong>CAUTION</strong><br />
<strong>BURST HAZARD</strong><br />
Open the service valves before the operation, otherwise, there might be a burst.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<ul>
<li>Keep this manual where the operator can easily find it.</li>
<li>Read the precautions in this manual carefully before operating the unit.</li>
<li>This appliance is intended to be used by an expert or trained users in shops, in light industry, on farms, or for commercial use by laypersons.</li>
<li>The precautions described herein are classified as DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION. They both contain important information regarding safety. Be sure to observe all precautions without fail.</li>
</ul>
<table border="0" width="64" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-16.webp" /></strong>DANGER</p>
<ul>
<li>Do not install, repair, open, or remove the cover. It may expose you to dangerous voltages. Ask the dealer or the specialist to do this.</li>
<li>Turning off the power supply will not prevent potential electric shock.</li>
<li>The appliance shall be installed in accordance with national wiring regulations.</li>
<li>Means for disconnection from the supply having a contact separation of at least 3 mm in all poles must be incorporated into the fixed wiring.</li>
<li>The appliance must be stored in a room without continuously operating ignition sources (for example, open flames, an operating gas appliance, or an operating electric heater).</li>
<li>In order to avoid fire, explosion or injury, do not operate the unit when harmful gases (e.g. flammable or corrosive) are detected near the unit.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-16.webp" />WARNING</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Do not expose your body directly to cool or warm air for a long time.</li>
<li>Do not insert your finger or any article into the air inlet/outlet.</li>
<li>When an abnormality (burning smell, etc.) occurs, stop the air conditioner and disconnect the power supply or turn off the breaker.</li>
<li>This appliance is not intended for use by people (including children) with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge unless they have been given supervision or instruction concerning the use of the appliance by a person responsible for their safety.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table border="0" width="64" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20">
<ul>
<li> The air conditioner must be installed, maintained, repaired, and removed by a qualified installer or qualified service person. When any of these jobs is to be done, ask a qualified installer or qualified service person to do them for you</li>
<li>Children should be supervised to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.</li>
<li>Do not use any refrigerant different from the one specified (R32) for complement or replacement. Otherwise, abnormally high pressure may be generated in the refrigeration cycle, which may result in a failure or explosion of the product or an injury to your body.</li>
<li>Do not use means to accelerate the defrosting process or to clean, other than those recommended by the manufacturer.</li>
<li>The appliance shall be stored in a room without continuously operating ignition sources (for example open flames, an operating gas appliance, or an operating electric heater).</li>
<li>Be aware that refrigerants may not contain an odor.</li>
<li>Do not pierce or burn as the appliance is pressurized. Do not expose the appliance to heat, flames, sparks, or other sources of ignition. Else, it may explode and cause injury or death.</li>
<li>Appliance and pipe-work shall be installed, operated, and stored in a room with a floor area larger than Amin m 2 . How to get Amin m 2: Amin= (M / (2.5 x  .22759 x h0 ))²<br />
2 M is the refrigerant charge amount in the appliance in kg, h0 is the installation height of the appliance in m: 0.6 m for floor standing/1.8 m for wall  ounted/1.0 m for window mounted/2.2 m for ceiling mounted. (For these units recommend installation height of 2.5 m)</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20"><strong><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning-16.webp" /> CAUTION</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Do not wash the unit with water. It may cause an electric shock.</li>
<li>Do not use this air conditioner for other purposes such as preserving food, breeding animals, etc.</li>
<li>Do not step or put anything on the indoor/outdoor unit. It may cause an injury or damage to the unit.</li>
<li>Do not touch the aluminum fin because it may cause an injury.</li>
<li>Before cleaning the unit, turn off the main switch or the circuit breaker.</li>
<li>When the unit won’t be used for a long time, turn off the main switch or the circuit breaker.</li>
<li>It is recommended that maintenance be performed by a specialist when the unit has been operated for a long time.</li>
<li>The manufacturer shall not assume any liability for the damage caused by not observing the description of this manual.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>INDOOR UNIT DISPLAY</h4>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR.webp" /></p>
<ol>
<li>TIMER (White)</li>
<li>OPERATION (White)</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li>Display brightness can be adjusted, follow the procedure on !.</li>
</ul>
<h4>PREPARATION BEFORE USE</h4>
<p><strong>Preparing Filters</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Open the air inlet grille and remove the air filters.</li>
<li>Attach the filters. (see detail in the Installation Manual).</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Loading Batteries (when using wireless operation.)</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Remove the slide cover.</li>
<li>Insert 2 new batteries (AAA type) following the (+) and (–) positions.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-Loading.webp" /></p>
<p><strong>Remote Control Reset</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Remove the batteries.</li>
<li>Press<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-Loading1.webp" />.</li>
<li>Insert the batteries.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-Loading-2.webp" /></p>
<h4>AIRFLOW DIRECTION</h4>
<table width="1357">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="30">1</td>
<td width="174">Press: <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-AIR-FLOW.webp" />Move the louver in the desired vertical direction.</td>
<td width="174"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-AIR-FLOW-1.webp" /></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="30">2</td>
<td width="174">Press: <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-AIR-FLOW-2.webp" /> Swing the air automatically and press again to stop.</td>
<td width="174"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-AIR-FLOW-DIRECTION10.webp" /></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="30">3</td>
<td width="174">For horizontal direction, adjust manually.</td>
<td width="174"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-AIR-FLOW-DIRECTION1.webp" /></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Do not move the louver manually by others.</li>
<li>The louver may automate positioning by some operation mode.</li>
</ul>
<h4>REMOTE CONTROL</h4>
<ol>
<li>Infrared signal emitter</li>
<li>Start/Stop button</li>
<li>Mode select button (<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-REMOTE-CONTROL1.webp" />)</li>
<li>Temperature button (<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-REMOTE-CONTROL2.webp" />)</li>
<li>Fan speed button (<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-REMOTE-CONTROL3.webp" />)</li>
<li>Swing louver button (<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-AIR-FLOW-2-1.webp" />)</li>
<li>Set louver button (<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-REMOTE-CONTROL5.webp" />)</li>
<li>Off timer button (<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-REMOTE-CONTROL6.webp" />)</li>
<li>High power button (<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-REMOTE-CONTROL7.webp" />)</li>
<li>Economy button (<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-REMOTE-CONTROL8.webp" />)</li>
<li>Clear button (CLEAR)</li>
<li>Check button (CHECK)</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-REMOTE-CONTROL.webp" /></p>
<h4>AUTOMATIC OPERATION</h4>
<p>To automatically select cooling or fan-only operation</p>
<ol>
<li>Press<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR1.webp" />: Select Auto A.</li>
<li>Press <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-OFF-timer-1.webp" />: Set the desired temperature. Min. 17°C, Max. 30°C</li>
<li>Press <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR5.webp" />: Select AUTO, LOW<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR7.webp" /> LOW+<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR8.webp" /> MED<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR9.webp" /> MED+<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR6.webp" /> or HIGH<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR-9.webp" />.</li>
</ol>
<h4>COOLING / FAN ONLY OPERATION</h4>
<ol>
<li>Press<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR1.webp" />: Select Cool<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR2.webp" /> or Fan only<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR3.webp" /></li>
<li>Press<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-cooling-2.webp" /> : Set the desired temperature. Min. 17°C, Max. 30°C Fan Only: No temperature indication</li>
<li>Press <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR5.webp" />: Select AUTO, LOW<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR7.webp" /> LOW+<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR8.webp" /> MED<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR9.webp" /> MED+<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR6.webp" /> or HIGH<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR-9.webp" />.</li>
</ol>
<h4>DRY OPERATION</h4>
<p>For dehumidification, moderate cooling performance is controlled automatically.<br />
1. Press <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-medium wp-image-2964713 ezlazyloaded" src="images/39.webp" alt="Carrier 42TSAA010 Air Conditioner - cooling" width="132" height="51" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/05/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-cooling.png?ezimgfmt=rs:132x51/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" />: Select Dry<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-cooling-1.webp" />.<br />
2. Press<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-cooling-2.webp" /> : Set the desired temperature. Min. 17°C, Max. 30°C<br />
<strong>Note:</strong> Dry mode fan speed is set to Auto only.</p>
<h4>Hi POWER OPERATION</h4>
<p>To automatically control the room temperature to save energy (except in DRY and FAN ONLY mode)<br />
Press<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-cooling-3.webp" />: Start and stop the operation.<br />
<strong>Note:</strong> Cooling operation; the set temperature will increase automatically 1 degree/ hour for 2 hours (maximum 2 degrees increase).</p>
<h4>TIMER OPERATION</h4>
<p>Set the timer when the air conditioner is operating.</p>
<table width="942">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" width="204"><strong>Setting the OFF timer</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="30">1</td>
<td width="174">Press<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-OFF-timer.webp" /> for entering OFF timer setting.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="30">2</td>
<td width="174">Press<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR4.webp" /> for select desired OFF timer. (0.5 – 12 hrs)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="30">3</td>
<td width="174">Press<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-OFF-timer-2.webp" />for set OFF timer.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="30">4</td>
<td width="174">Press<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-OFF-timer.webp" /> again to cancel the OFF timer.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>DISPLAY LAMP BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT</h4>
<p>To decrease the display lamp brightness or turn it off.</p>
<ol>
<li>Press and hold <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-INDOOR5.webp" />for 3 seconds until brightness level ( <img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-fig1.webp" /><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-fig.webp" />or ) is shown on the remote control LCD then release the button.</li>
<li>Press<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-DISPLAY-LAMP.webp" /> Rise or Decrease<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-cooling-2-1.webp" /> to adjust brightness in 4 levels<br />
<table width="1274">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="114">Remote control LCD</td>
<td width="390">Operation display</td>
<td width="120">Brightness</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="114"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-DISPLAY-LAMP-1.webp" /></td>
<td width="390">The lamp illuminates full brightness.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-DISPLAY-LAMP-8.webp" /></td>
<td width="120">100%</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="114"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-DISPLAY-LAMP-2.webp" /></td>
<td width="390">The lamp illuminates at 50% brightness.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-DISPLAY-LAMP-7.webp" /></td>
<td width="120">50%</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="114"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-DISPLAY-LAMP-3.webp" /></td>
<td width="390">The lamp illuminates at 50% brightness and the operation lamp is turned off.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-DISPLAY-LAMP-6.webp" /></td>
<td width="120">50%</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td width="114"><img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-DISPLAY-LAMP-4.webp" /></td>
<td width="390">All lamps are turned off.<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-DISPLAY-LAMP-5.webp" /></td>
<td width="120">All turned off</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li>In the example of<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-DISPLAY-LAMP-3-1.webp" /> and<img decoding="async" src="https://usemanuals.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-DISPLAY-LAMP-4-1.webp" />, the lamp illuminates for 5 seconds before going off.</li>
</ul>
<h4>TEMPORARY OPERATION</h4>
<p>In case of the misplaced or discharged remote control</p>
<ul>
<li>Pressing the RESET button, the unit can start or stop without using the remote control.</li>
<li>Operation mode is set on AUTOMATIC  operation, the preset temperature is 24°C and fan operation is automatic speed.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="size-medium wp-image-2964697 aligncenter ezlazyloaded" src="images/59.webp" alt="Carrier 42TSAA010 Air Conditioner - TEMPORARY" width="282" height="234" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/05/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-TEMPORARY.png?ezimgfmt=rs:282x234/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /></p>
<h4>AUTO-RESTART FUNCTION SETTING</h4>
<p>This product is designed so that, after a power failure, it can restart automatically in the same operating mode as before the power failure.<br />
<strong>Information</strong><br />
The product is shipped with the Auto Restart function in the ON position.<br />
Turn it OFF if this function is not required.<br />
<strong>How to turn OFF the Auto Restart Function</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Press and hold the [OPERATION] button on the indoor unit for 3 seconds (3 beep sounds but the OPERATION lamp does not blink).</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>How to turn ON the Auto Restart Function</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Press and hold the [OPERATION] button on the indoor unit for 3 seconds (3 beep sounds and OPERATION lamp blink 5 times/sec for 5 seconds).</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>In case of ON timer or OFF timer is set, AUTO RESTART OPERATION does not activate.</li>
</ul>
<h4>SELF CLEANING OPERATION (COOL AND DRY OPERATION ONLY)</h4>
<p>To protect against bad smells caused by the humidity in the indoor unit.<br />
1. If the  <img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-medium wp-image-2964682 ezlazyloaded" src="images/60.webp" alt="Carrier 42TSAA010 Air Conditioner - Loading1" width="151" height="52" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/05/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-Loading1.png?ezimgfmt=rs:151x52/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" />button is pressed once during “Cool” or “Dry” mode,  the fan will continue to run for another 30 minutes, then it will turn off automatically. This will reduce the moisture in the indoor unit.<br />
2. To stop the unit immediately, press the<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-medium wp-image-2964682 ezlazyloaded" src="images/60.webp" alt="Carrier 42TSAA010 Air Conditioner - Loading1" width="151" height="52" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/05/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-Loading1.png?ezimgfmt=rs:151x52/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /> more 2 times within 30 seconds.</p>
<h4>MAINTENANCE</h4>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="attachment-post-thumbnail ezlazyloaded" src="images/61.webp" alt="warning 2" width="44" height="39" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2021/11/HUMAN-CARE-Hanger-Bar-warning.png?ezimgfmt=rs:44x39/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /> Firstly, turn off the circuit breaker.</p>
<p><strong>Indoor Unit and Remote Control</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Clean the indoor unit and the remote control with a wet cloth when needed.</li>
<li> No benzine, thinner, polishing powder, or chemically-treated duster.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Air filters</strong><br />
Clean every 2 weeks.</p>
<ol>
<li>Open the air inlet grille.</li>
<li>Remove the air filters.</li>
<li>Vacuum or wash and then dry them.</li>
<li>Reinstall the air filters and close the air inlet grille.</li>
</ol>
<h4>OPERATION AND PERFORMANCE</h4>
<ol>
<li>Three-minute protection feature: To prevent the unit from being activated for 3 minutes when suddenly restarted or switched to ON.</li>
<li>Some minor cracking sounds may occur when the unit operating. This is normal because the cracking sound may be caused by the expansion/ contraction of plastic.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Air conditioner operating conditions</strong></p>
<table border="0" width="192" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20">Temp./ Operation</td>
<td width="64">Outdoor Temperature</td>
<td width="64">Room Temperature</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20">Cooling</td>
<td>21°C ~ 43°C</td>
<td>21°C ~ 32°C</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20">Dry</td>
<td>19°C ~ 43°C</td>
<td>17°C ~ 32°C</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>TROUBLESHOOTING (CHECKPOINT)</h4>
<table border="0" width="128" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td width="64" height="20"><strong>The unit does not operate.</strong></td>
<td width="64"><strong>Cooling or Heating is abnormally low.</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td height="20">● The power main switch is turned off.<br />
● The circuit breaker is activated to cut off the power supply.<br />
● Stoppage of electric current.<br />
● ON timer is set.</td>
<td>● The filters are blocked with dust.<br />
● The temperature has been set improperly.<br />
● The windows or doors are opened.<br />
● The air inlet or outlet of the outdoor unit is blocked.<br />
● The fan speed is too low.<br />
● The operation mode is FAN or DRY.<br />
● POWER SELECTION function is set at 75% or 50% <strong>(This function depends on the remote</strong> <strong>controller).</strong></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<h4>REMOTE CONTROL A-B SELECTION</h4>
<p>To separate use of remote control for each indoor unit in case of 2 air conditioner is installed nearly.<br />
<strong>Remote Control B Setup.</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Press the RESET button on the indoor unit to turn the air conditioner ON.</li>
<li>Point the remote control at the indoor unit.</li>
<li>Push and hold<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-medium wp-image-2964698 ezlazyloaded" src="images/62.webp" alt="Carrier 42TSAA010 Air Conditioner - TEMPORARY1" width="58" height="41" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/05/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-TEMPORARY1.png?ezimgfmt=rs:58x41/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /> the button on the Remote Control by the tip of the pencil. “00” will be shown on the display. (Picture 1)</li>
<li>Press<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-medium wp-image-2964713 ezlazyloaded" src="images/39.webp" alt="Carrier 42TSAA010 Air Conditioner - cooling" width="132" height="51" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/05/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-cooling.png?ezimgfmt=rs:132x51/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /> during pushing.<img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="alignnone size-medium wp-image-2964698 ezlazyloaded" src="images/62.webp" alt="Carrier 42TSAA010 Air Conditioner - TEMPORARY1" width="58" height="41" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/05/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-TEMPORARY1.png?ezimgfmt=rs:58x41/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" />  “B” will show on the display and “00” will disappear and the air conditioner will turn OFF. The Remote Control B is memorized. (Picture 2)</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Repeat the above step to reset Remote Control to be A.</li>
<li>Remote Control A has no “A” display.</li>
<li>The default setting of Remote Control from the factory is A.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" class="size-medium wp-image-2964700 aligncenter ezlazyloaded" src="images/63.webp" sizes="auto, " srcset="" alt="Carrier 42TSAA010 Air Conditioner - TEMPORARY3" width="550" height="206" data-ezsrcset="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/05/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-TEMPORARY3-550x206.png?ezimgfmt=ng:webp/ngcb1 550w,https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/05/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-TEMPORARY3.png?ezimgfmt=ng:webp/ngcb1 677w" data-ezsrc="https://manuals.plus/wp-content/uploads/2022/05/Carrier-42TSAA010-Air-Conditioner-TEMPORARY3-550x206.png?ezimgfmt=rs:550x206/rscb1/ng:webp/ngcb1" /></p>
<p><strong>AIR CONDITIONER (SPLIT TYPE)</strong><br />
<strong>For general public use</strong><br />
<strong>Indoor unit</strong><br />
<strong>42TSAA010, 013, 018, 025</strong><br />
<strong>Outdoor unit</strong><br />
<strong>38TSAA010, 013, 018, 025</strong></p>
<form id="commentform" class="comment-form" action="https://manuals.plus/wp-comments-post.php" method="post" novalidate="">
<p class="form-submit">
</form>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
	</channel>
</rss>

<!--
Performance optimized by W3 Total Cache. Learn more: https://www.boldgrid.com/w3-total-cache/

Page Caching using Disk: Enhanced 

Served from: usemanuals.com @ 2026-06-13 01:46:23 by W3 Total Cache
-->